Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Resolution - 2016-R0358 - Contratc - Lee Lewis Construction Inc - New Emergency Ops Center - 10_13_2016 (3)
Resolution No. 2016-RO358 Item No. 6.15 October 13, 2016 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock Contract 12833 for a New Emergency Operations Center, by and between the City of Lubbock and Lee Lewis Construction, Inc., and any related documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council on October 13. 201.6 DANIEL M. P PE, MAYOR ATTEST: Reb cca Garza, City Secre ary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Mark earwo �Assistant ity Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: RES.Contract-Nbr 12833-Lee Lewis Construction Inc 9.8.16 CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 lofl Complete Nos. i - a and 6 if there are interested parties. Complete Nos. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number: 2016-121175 Date Filed: 10/06/2016 Date Acknowledged: 10/07/2016 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place of business. Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Lubbock, TX United States 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is being filed. City of Lubbock 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. 12833 City of Lubbock Emergency Operations Center 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) Nature of interest (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ X 6 AFFIDAVIT I swear, or affirm, under penalty of perjury, that the above disclosure is true and correct. Signature of authorized agent of contracting business entity AFFIX NOTARY STAMP / SEAL ABOVE Sworn to and subscribed before me, by the said this the day of 20 , to certify which, witness my hand and seal of office. Signature of officer administering oath Printed name of officer administering oath Title of officer administering oath Forms provided by Texas Ethics Commission www.ethics.state.tx.us Version V1.0.277 CERTIFICATE OF INTERESTED PARTIES FORM 1295 1 of 1 Complete Nos. 1 - a and 6 if there are interested parties. OFFICE USE ONLY Complete Nos. 1, 2, 3, 5, and 6 if there are no interested parties. CERTIFICATION OF FILING Certificate Number: 2016-121175 1 Name of business entity filing form, and the city, state and country of the business entity's place of business. Lee Lewis Construction, Inc. Lubbock, TX United States Date piled: 10/06/2016 2 Name of governmental entity or state agency that is a party to the contract for which the form is being filed. City of Lubbock Date Acknowledged: 3 Provide the identification number used by the governmental entity or state agency to track or identify the contract, and provide a description of the services, goods, or other property to be provided under the contract. 12833 City of Lubbock Emergency Operations Center 4 Name of Interested Party City, State, Country (place of business) Nature of interest (check applicable) Controlling I Intermediary 5 Check only if there is NO Interested Party. ❑ X 6 AFFIDAVIT I s•,ew. or affirm, under penalty of perjury, that the above disclosure is true and correct. 0._ENE CHAPMAN f , y PubEc, State o1 Tezas 4 atary iDP 12W45.0 Fri ymire of authorized agent of contracting husiness entity AFFIX NOTARY STAMP 1 SEAL ABOVE r J Sworn to and subscribed before me. by the said V, ` �� y�_f< � INS the 217�, to certify which, witness my hand and sea[ of oiiice. clay of //; - — sig to of officer adm nister g oath Printec me of o ficer a ministering oath Title o olficer administering oath corms proviaea oy I exas Ltn[cs conimission wwvr.ethics.state_tx.us Version V1.0.277 CONTRACT AWARD DATE: October 13, 2016 City of Lubbock Specifications for Project Manual NEW EMERGENCY OPERATIONS CENTER RFP-12833-MA CONTRACT 12833 PROJECT NUMBER: 92366.8302.30000 & 92377.8302.30000 2-o1(- 1203S-8 ON UP �H City of bock U TEXAS CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas 1 Page Intentionally Left Blank PROJECT MANUAL FOR LUBBOCK EMERGENCY OPERATIONS Lubbock, Texas ,t�l Owner 4' CITY OF LUBBOCK i 1515 East Ursuline Lubbock, TX 79403 BEN LENS Y•MY•YYMM.tiW..•. 106133 .. ..................... 30NN.�VINCENT... 108939. ;�, TECHNOLOGY 7-15-16 21518 Architect BRINKLEY SARGENT WIGINTON ARCHITECTS 5000 Quorum Drive, Suite 600 Dallas, Texas 75254 V: 972.960.9970 Civil OJD ENGINEERING 328 E. HWY 62, Unit No. 1 ; Wolfforth, TX 79382 V: 806.791.2301 i Structure JQ ENGINEERING 3402 110°i Street, Suite 100 Lubbock, TX 79423 V: 806.392.9180 Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing MD ENGINEERING ;4 500 North Central Expressway, Suite 310 e Plano, Texas 75074 % , j V: 469.467.0200 i Technology — AIV M-E ENGINEERS 10055 West 431 Avenue Wheat Ridge, Colorado 80033 V: 303.421.6655 -71t-31no July 2016 LUBBOCK EMERGENCY OPERATIONS CENTER PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS NO. OF PAGES TitlePage........................................................................................................................................................ I Tableof Contents........................................................................................................................................................ 5 Owner Provided Project Information 0031 10 - Geotech Report ............................................................................................................................24 Refer to General Conditions of the Contract, AIA A201 with Supplements................................................................. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 01 00 - Summary of Work..........................................................................................................................2 01 02 00 - Cash Allowances............................................................................................................................2 01 02 50 - Measurement & Payment..............................................................................................................4 01 03 00 - Alternates.......................................................................................................................................2 01 04 00 - Coordination...................................................................................................................................2 01 04 50 - Cutting & Patching.........................................................................................................................3 01 05 00 - Field Engineering...........................................................................................................................2 01 06 00 - Regulatory Requirements...............................................................................................................1 01 20 00 - Project Meetings.............................................................................................................................3 01 31 00 - Project Management & Coordination.............................................................................................5 01 3200 - Construction Progress Documentation...........................................................................................5 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.....................................................................................................................9 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements....................................................................................................................6 01 42 00 - References...................................................................................................................................... 6 01 5000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls...........................................................................5 01 5401 - Construction Layout....................................................................................................................... I 01 5800 - Project Identification and Signs.....................................................................................................2 01 6000 - Materials and Equipment...............................................................................................................5 01 7000 - Contract Closeout...........................................................................................................................4 0171 00 - Cleaning.........................................................................................................................................2 01 72 00 - Project Record Documents.............................................................................................................2 01 73 00 - Operation and Maintenance Data...................................................................................................4 01 7400 - Warranties and Bonds....................................................................................................................2 01 8200 - Demonstration &Training..............................................................................................................5 DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS Not Used DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete.................................................................................................................19 03 35 43 - Polished Concrete...........................................................................................................................7 03 36 60 - Concrete Floor Sealer and Slip Resistant Coating.........................................................................4 Table of Contents Page 1 i NO. OF PAGES I- " DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 0405 13 - Masonry Mortar.............................................................................................................................4 04 21 00 - Brick Masonry ................................................................................................................................6 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry ..................................................................................................................6 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05 1200 - Structural Steel.............................................................................................................................10 05 01 00 - Miscellaneous Metals.....................................................................................................................4 05 31 00 - Steel Deck......................................................................................................................................4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry ............................................................................................................................4 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry.............................................................................................................................2 06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork................................................................................................................6 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 1950 - Vapor Barrier.................................................................................................................................4 07 20 00 - Insulation........................................................................................................................................4 07 27 20 - Weather Barrier..............................................................................................................................8 0752 16 - Modified Bituminous Roofing.....................................................................................................10 07 60 00 - Flashing & Sheet Metal..................................................................................................................4 07 84 00 - Firestopping...................................................................................................................................6 07 92 00 - Sealants & Caulking.......................................................................................................................5 DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames...................................................................................................7 08 1416 - Wood Doors...................................................................................................................................3 08 29 00 - Access Doors..................................................................................................................................2 08 40 00 - Entrances and Storefronts...............................................................................................................5 08 70 00 - Hardware........................................................................................................................................6 08 80 00 - Glazing...........................................................................................................................................6 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board Systems................................................................................................................. 5 09 30 10 - Tile................................................................................................................................................. 8 09 51 23 - Acoustical Ceiling Systems............................................................................................................4 09 54 50 - Metal Soffit....................................................................................................................................2 09 65 00 - Resilient Flooring...........................................................................................................................3 09 67 23 - Resinous Flooring..........................................................................................................................6 09 68 00 - Carpeting........................................................................................................................................2 09 69 00 - Access Flooring..............................................................................................................................4 09 90 00 - Painting........................................................................................................................................16 09 95 00 - Wallcovering..................................................................................................................................3 Contents - Page 2 NO. OF PAGES 1 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 00 00 - Miscellaneous Specialties..............................................................................................................4 �. 10 1550 - Toilet Compartments......................................................................................................................2 10 22 21 - Operable Partition..........................................................................................................................4 10 42 00 - Plaque.............................................................................................................................................1 10 43 00 - Exterior Signs.................................................................................................................................3 ti 10 44 00 - Interior Signs..................................................................................................................................3 1050.00 - Lockers...........................................................................................................................................2 10 80 00 - Toilet & Bath Accessories..............................................................................................................4 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 45 00 - Equipment......................................................................................................................................2 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not used DIVISION 20 - MEP REQUIREMENTS — GENERAL 20 00 00 - General Provisions.......................................................................................................................21 20 01 00 - Basic Materials and Methods.......................................................................................................14 20 07 00 - Insulation......................................................................................................................................12 DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - Fire Protection System...................................................................................................................7 DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing.............................................................................................16 22 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.......................................................................................4 22 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.............................................................6 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment..........................................................................4 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulaiton..........................................4 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution...............................................................................................................4 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewage...................................................................................................................4 22 34 36 - Water Heater.....................................................................................................................................2 22 42 00 - Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment....................................................................................................4 DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING [HVAC] 1.1 Contents - Page 3 (I 1.1 NO. OF PAGES 23 05 00 2305 13 23 05 29 23 05 48 23 05 53 23 05 93 23 07 00 23 09 93 23 23 00 2331 13 23 34 00 _ 23 37 00 23 8149 - Common Work Results for HVAC.................................................................................................16 - Common Mototr Requirements For HVAC Equipment...................................................................4 Pipe Hangers And Equipment Supports............................................................................................4 - Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Siesmic Control.........................................................................4 - Identification For HVAC Piping and Equipment..............................................................................4 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing...................................................................................................6 - HVAC Insulation..............................................................................................................................6 - Sequence of Operations...................................................................................................................2 - Refrigerant Piping.............................................................................................................................4 - Metal Ducts.......................................................................................................................................4 - Fans..................................................................................................................................................4 - Air Outlets and Inlets.......................................................................................................................4 - Variable Refrigerant Air Conditioning Systems.............................................................................12 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.......................................................................................12 260503 - Fire Stopping..................................................................................................................................6 260505 - Site Electrical.................................................................................................................................4 2605 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables..................................................................4 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.............................................................................4 26 05 29 - Hanger and Supports for Electrical Systems..................................................................................4 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.......................................................................................................4 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems..........................................................................................................4 260539 - In Floor Walkerduct.......................................................................................................................4 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems..............................................................................................6 26 0573.16 - Coordination Study........................................................................................................................4 260593 - Electrical Testing.........................................................................................................................10 260620 - Disconnect Switches......................................................................................................................2 260923 - Occupancy Sensors........................................................................................................................4 262116 - Low Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance................................................................2 26 24 13 - Switchboard...................................................................................................................................6 26 24 16 - Panelboards.................................................................................................................................... 4 262422 - Motor Starters................................................................................................................................4 262716 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures................................................................................................2 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices...............................................................................................................................4 26 32 13 - Packaged Engine Generator Set...................................................................................................10 263353 - Uninteruptable Power Supply......................................................................................................14 263623 - Automatic Transfer Switch............................................................................................................2 263633 - Quick Disconnect Switch...............................................................................................................4 26 41 00 - Facility Lightning Protection.........................................................................................................4 26 43 00 - Surge Protective Devices (SPDs)...................................................................................................8 26 50 00 - Lighting..........................................................................................................................................4 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 27 05 26 27 05 33 27 05 36 27 05 43 27 11 00 27 13 13 _Y 27 1323 27 15 00 27 41 00 - Common Work Results for Communications..............................................................................15 - Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding...............................................................................9 - Telecommunications Raceways and Boxes..................................................................................10 - Cable Trays....................................................................................................................................8 - Underground Ducts, Raceways and Manholes...............................................................................7 - Communications Equipment Room Fit-Out...................................................................................8 - Communications Copper Backbone Cabling.................................................................................8 - Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling...................................................................... I I - Communications Horizontal Cabling........................................................................................... I I - Audio Video Systems...................................................................................................................28 Contents - Page 4 NO. OF PAGES 2751 16 - Public Address Systems...............................................................................................................21 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY 28 00 00 - Security Systems —General..........................................................................................................25 28 1300 - Access Controls............................................................................................................................18 28 23 00 - IP Video Surveillance System......................................................................................................21 2831 10 - Fire Detection and Alarm System................................................................................................19 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 1000 - Demolition.....................................................................................................................................2 31 23 00 - Excavaton & Embankment.............................................................................................................4 31 31 16 - Termite Control..............................................................................................................................2 .. 31 63 29 - Drilled Concrete Piers....................................................................................................................5 .a DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVMENTS 32 1500 - Portland Cement Concrete.............................................................................................................7 32 1723 - Pavement Markings........................................................................................................................1 3231 16 - Chain Link Fencing 2 i DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 10 00 - Utility...........................................................................................................................................14 Contents - Page 5 DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTIOINO10100 - PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Related Work SUMMARY OF WORK A. Additional requirements of all parties of this Contract, whether bound in the Project Manual or included by reference, are listed in the Table of Contents under "Conditions of the Contract". Particular attention is directed to the following: 1. Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 1.02 Work Covered by Contract Documents A. The work of this Contract comprises construction of a new emergency operations center, and associated site work. 1.03 Contracts A. Perform work under single fixed -price Contract as designated in Owner -Construction Manager Agreement. 1.04 Contractor's Use of Premises A. Contractor shall have conditional use of premises for construction operations,during construction period. 1. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. Items such as telecommunications equipment and audio visual equipment are anticipated- others may need to be accommodated. B. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract stored on site. 1.05 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Designate delivery date for each product in the Construction Schedule. B. Review shop drawings, product data and samples. 1. Submit to Architect notification of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use of the product. C. Coordination. The documents issued by the Architect an it's consultants were prepared to express design intent. They are not a completed pattern from which it is intended to directly build from. Submittals and shop drawings will need to developed to convey how it is intended to combinge all of these pieces. Coordination is required with the actual systems selected, from the options provided; and for supports and working around other appurtences in the project. Things like duct and pipe hangers are not shown. Not every bend in pipe and ducts are shown, especially vertical up/ down conditions. These need to be coordinated between the various components that make up the Work. 1.06 Work by Others A. The Owner reserves the right to execute separate contracts for other work on the project which may be executed concurrent with work of this contract, and which is excluded from this Contract. P SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 01 00-1 i B. Consult and cooperate with Owner and separate contractors to the full extent provided for in the Contract Documents. 1.07 Use of these Contract Drawings A. The project manual, drawings and supplemental addenda, etc., were prepared for the exclusive use for this building and are protected by copyright. ©Brinkley Sargent Wiginton Architects 2016. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF THE WORK 01 01 00-2 SECTION O1 02 00 CASH ALLOWANCES PART GENERAL o 1.01 Requirements Included A. Include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated herein. B. Designate in the construction progress schedule the delivery dates for the Products specified under each allowance. C. Designate in the Schedule of Values the quantities of materials required under each unit cost allowance. 1.02 Allowances for Products A. The amount of each allowance includes: 1. The cost of the Product to the Contractor or Subcontractor, less any applicable trade discounts. 2. Delivery to the site. 3. Labor required under the allowance, only when labor is specified to be included in the allowance. j 4. Applicable taxes. B. In addition to the amount of each allowance, include in the Contract Sum the Contractor's cost for: 1. Handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating and storage. 2. Protection from the elements and from damage. 3. Labor for installation and finishing, except where labor is specified to be a part of the allowance. 4. Other expenses required to complete the installation. 5. All Contractor's and Subcontractor's overhead and profit; general conditions and bond costs. The below amounts are the line item amounts. C. Include in the Contract Sum the following allowances: 1. Owner Contingency- Provide an allowance of $225,000. 1.03 Selection of Products Under Allowances A. Architect's Duties 1. Consult with the Contractor in consideration of Products supplier or installers. 2. Make selection in consultation with the Owner. Obtain Owner's written decision, designating: a. Product, model and finish. b. Accessories and attachments. C. Supplier and installer as applicable. d. Cost to Contractor, delivered to the site or installed, as applicable. e. Manufacturer's warranties. 3. Transmit Owner's decision to the Contractor. 4. Prepare Change Orders. B. Contractor's Duties 1. Assist Architect and Owner in determining qualified supplier or installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers when requested by Architect. 3. Make appropriate recommendations for consideration of the Architect. 4. Notify Architect promptly of any effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by selections under consideration. 1.04 Contractor Responsibility for Purchase, Delivery and Installation CASH ALLOWANCES 01 02 00-1 Ll A. On notification of selection, execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. B. Arrange for and process Shop Drawings, Product Date and Samples as required. C. Make all arrangements for delivery. D. Upon delivery, promptly inspect products for damage or defects. E. Submit claims for transportation damage. F. Install and finish products in compliance with requirements of referenced specification sections. 1.05 Adjustment of Costs A. Should the net cost be different than the specified amount of the allowance, the Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. 1. The amount of the Change Order will recognize any changes in handling costs at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance. 2. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the quantity listed in the Schedule of Values. 3. For products specified under a unit cost allowance, the unit cost shall apply to the quantities actually used with a nominal allowance for waste, as determined by receipted invoices or by field measurement. B. Submit any claims for anticipated additional costs caused by the selection under the allowance well in l- advance of execution of the work. C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs caused by the selection under the allowance within 60 days after completion of the work. D. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs. E. At contract closeout, reflect all approved changes in contract amounts in the final statement of accounting. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION CASH ALLOWANCES 01 02 00-2 r SECTION O1 02 50 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Schedule of Values A. General: 1. Submit Schedule of Values to Owner and Architect at least 20 days prior to submitting first Application of Payment. 2. Upon request of Architect, furnish additional data to support values given that will substantiate their correctness. 3. Approved Schedule of Values will be used as basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. B. Form and Content: ' 1. Submit typewritten Schedule on AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheet of Application and Certification for Payment. a. Use Table of Contents of Project Manual as basis of format for listing costs of Work. b. List installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to serve as basis for computing values for progress payments. 2. Each item shall include a directly proportionate amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. 3. For items on which payment will be requested for stored materials, break down value into: a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with any applicable taxes paid. b. Total installed value. 4. Labor costs: Include estimated installation costs including labor, applicable taxes, insurance, fringe benefits, erection equipment and tools. 5. Material costs: Include estimated material and manufactured equipment costs including delivery, taxes and insurance. 6. For each line item which has an installed value of more than $15,000.00 break down costs to list major products or operations under each item. Show separate cost for material and labor. If both new construction and renovation work are involved provide a separate schedule for each. 7. Sum of all costs listed in Schedule shall equal Contract Sum. C. Review and Resubmittal: I . After initial review by Owner and Architect, revise and resubmit if required. 2. Revise and resubmit along with next Application for Payment when a Change Order is issued. List each Change Order as a new line item, with separate details for each item in Change Order. 1.02 Applications for Payment A. On or before the last day of each month, submit to Owner and Architect a notarized Application for Payment for Work completed during the previous month, signed by duly authorized agent of Contractor. B. Submit four copies on AIA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, along with AIA Document G703, Continuation Sheets as required. C. Applications for Payment serve as certification by Contractor of status of Project. D. Base Applications for Payment on the current percentage of the of value of Work acceptably installed, L J and materials and equipment suitably stored at site. Materials and equipment suitably stored off site in an insured or bonded warehouse may be included only if approved in advance in written form by Owner. Submit invoices for any requestes related to stored materials. Payment will only be for material costs- costs associated with handling, overhead and profit will not be paid/ billed for until the materials are incorporated into the Work. l MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 02 50-1 E. Provide an attachment letter indicatingan potential delays that occurred that month and identify the Y p Y fY j precise days and the cause. t _ 1. Contractor shall anticipate the following number of calendar days for precipitation type weather related delays. 7 days for January; 7 days for February; 7 days for March; 8 days for April; 9 days for May; 7 days for June; 5 days for July; 5 days for August; 7 days for September; 6 days for October; 6 days for November; and 6 days for December. a. Actual days the Work is delayed by weather shall be identified in a letter attached to the monthly progress payment application. Identify all weather related delays; subtract the normally anticipated days, to arrive at the number of days, if any, that the contract modification request will total. F. Retainage for this project is 5%. 1.03 Progress Payments A. Owner will endeavor to make progress payments within 30 days after receipt of Certificate for Payment from Architect, but will not pay interest or late fees on any payment. B. Payment for Stored Materials: 1. Where the Schedule of Values separates items into labor amounts and material amounts, payment will be made for materials delivered in good condition and suitably stored on site. 2. Where the Schedule of Values does not separate items into labor amounts and material amounts, payment will be made for materials upon acceptable installation. 3. Materials stored off site location which are eligible for inclusion on progress payments are defined as finished goods made specifically for this Project. Agreement to this arrangement shall be made prior to requesting payment. Raw materials, work in progress at fabrication plants, and commodity items readily available for purchase are not eligible. 4. Payment will be made under following provisions: a. Items are listed separately on Application for Payment b. Include with Application for Payment: (1) Paid receipts showing that Contractor is unconditional owner. (2) Fully executed Transfer of Title on photocopy of form provided herein. (3) Location where materials are stored if off site, and method used to store. (4) Identify items in off site storage as property of Owner and furnish description of identification method. (5) Inventory of items and methods used to verify inventory, including Contractor's certification that quantities have been received in good order. (6) Proof of insurance for materials stored off site, in Owner's name. (7) Proof of transportation arranged for delivery of materials stored off site. C. Owner reserves right to verify storage by physical inspection at any time. d. Payment does not relieve Contractor's obligations to protect, transport and install materials. e. Title of materials upon which partial payments are made transfer to Owner. Partial payment does not constitute acceptance by Owner nor a waiver of any right or claim by Owner. s C. The monthly applications for payment shall be accompanied with a completely executed and signed copy of AIA Document G706A "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" and AIA Document G706 "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" indicating to the Owner that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by that Application for Payment, whether incorporated into the project or not, will pass to the Owner upon receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances; and that no work, materials or equipment covered by an Application for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor, or by any other person performing the work at the site or furnishing materials and equipment for the project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or such other person. Subcontractors shall sign similar documents if they have received greater than $5,000.00 on preceding month's applications. 0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 02 50-2 D. When the Owner or the Architect requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit suitable information with a cover letter identifying. 1.04 Preparation of Application for Final Payment' A. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments. " B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.05 Submittal Procedure A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect at the times stipulated in the Agreement. Submit an electronic draft for review prior to submitting the actual application. B. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for payment to Owner, and copy the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01 02 50-3 [ I TRANSFER OF TITLE DATE: PROJECT: OWNER: KNOW ALL MEN BY THE PRESENTS, THAT (Contractor) in consideration of paid by Owner, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, does hereby grant, sell, transfer and deliver unto the said Owner the following goods and chattels, namely: (Insert description of materials) being manufactured especially for this Project. TO HAVE AND TO HOLD all and singular the said goods and chattels to the said Owner, its successors and assigns to their use forever. AND we hereby covenant that we are the lawful owner of said goods and chattels, that they are free from any encumbrances, security agreements, mortgages, or other liens; that we have good right to transfer same as aforesaid; and that we will warrant and defend same against claims and demands of all persons. WE ALSO AGREE that Owner shall have access to said goods at any time and that goods are covered by Certificate of Insurance attached hereto. IN WITNESS hereof we, the said in the (General Contractor) year two thousand and Signed in the presence of: (Firm name) (Firm name) (Contractor) (Subcontractor or Supplier) END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT O1 02 50-4 S_ SECTION 0104 00 COORDINATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Related Requirements A. Section 01 30 00: Submittals. B. Section 0l 50 00: Temporary Facilities. C. Section 01 60 00: Material and Equipment. 1.02 Description A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. B. Ensure that trades examine Drawings and Specifications covering his work and work of other trades which may affect performance of his work. Ensure that all trades verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication of components and inspect substrate prior to installation. C. Coordinate sequence of work to accommodate any potential phasing; refer also to Section 01 01 00. D. Coordinate sequence of the Work to accommodate other contractor's working at the site on other portions of the same project. E. Throughout the construction process make sure that all recommended installation, maintenance, protectoion and cleaning measures are strictly followed. 1.03 Meetings A. Hold coordination meetings and pre -installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of Work. 1.04 Coordination of Submittals A. Schedule and coordinate submittals as specified in Section 01 30 00. B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to and placing in service equipment. [--I C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements and effect on work of other sections. 1.05 Coordination of Space A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of plumbing, fire protection, mechanical and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs. B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. COORDINATION 01 04 00-1 �_i 1.06 Coordination Questions A. Utilize a form similar to the AIA or CSI type format for Requests for Information; and include a paragraph for suggested/ recommended/ potential solutions to the issue at hand. 1. Successively number these requests. Keep a log and provide a copy of the log each progress meeting. 2. Provide a realistic date for when the issue needs to be addressed and identify variables influencing issues that need immediate or prompt action. Assume it will take ten days to receive a response. 1.07 Coordination of Contract Closeout A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Owner partial occupancy designated in Section 01 01 00 and for substantial completion. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various trades for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION COORDINATION 01 04 00-2 1-. SECTION 01 04 50 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART GENERAL 1.01 Requirements Included A. Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Remove and replace defective work. 5. Interface new and existing construction. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit. 7. Uncover work which requires Architect's observation prior to covering. 1.02 Submittals A. Submit a written request to Architect well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Work of the Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather -exposed or moisture- resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. B. Request shall include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. 3. Description of affected work. The for necessity cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. Effect on work of Owner or any separate contractor, or on structural or weatherproof integrity of Project. 5. Description of proposed work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration or excavation. b. Trades who will execute the work. C. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. i 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. .. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. 9. The date and time the work will be uncovered. C. If conditions of work or schedule necessitate a change of material from that originally installed, submit written request in accordance with Section 01 60 00. t PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 EXECUTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 04 50-1 ; t 3.01 Inspection A. Inspect existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or performance of work. C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions. 3.02 Preparation A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work. Maintain excavations free from water. 3.03 Performance A. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs and new work. B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ original Installer or Fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: 1. Weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 2. Sight -exposed finished surfaces. D. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. E. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. G. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit. H. Cutting Structural Members: 1. Do not cut or remove structural members or supports for structural members without prior written approval of Owner and Architect. 2. Provide reinforcing, additional supports, and other items required by Architect. 3. Pilot drill holes in concrete prior to cutting. 4. Openings in metal decks with structural, lightweight or insulating concrete fill: a. Circular openings and sleeves up to 6 inches in diameter, and square and rectangular openings having side dimensions less than 6 inches: No additional reinforcing is required. b. Openings with any dimension greater than 6 inches: Reinforce as directed by Architect. 5. Openings in metal decks without concrete fill: a. Circular openings and sleeves up to 6 inches in diameter, and square and rectangular openings having side dimensions less than 6 inches: No additional reinforcing is required. CUTTING AND PATCHING O1 04 50-2 f l _r b. Openings with any dimension greater than 6 inches but less than 12 inches: Reinforce with 20 gauge flat steel sheet 12 inches larger than opening. Fusion weld to top surface of deck at each corner and on each side midway between corners. C. Openings with any dimension greater than 12 inches: Reinforce as directed by Architect. I. Power grout abandoned pilot and anchor holes in all areas. Fill other openings, new and existing, with grout or other approved material. J. Installation: - 1. Provide backing, blocking, reinforcing, or other means required to install new construction. 2. Install new construction neat, plumb, level and secure, free from movement and vibration. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 04 50-3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 04 50-4 t_ i SECTION O1 05 00 FIELD ENGINEERING a PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Requirements Included A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for Project. 1. Survey work required in execution of Project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified, or required to execute Contractor's construction methods. 1.02 Qualifications of Surveyor or Engineer A. Qualified engineer and/or registered land surveyor licensed in the State of Texas, acceptable by the Contractor and Owner. 1.03 Submittals A. Submit name and address of Surveyor and/or Professional Engineer to Architect. B. Submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work upon Architect's request. C. Submit certificate signed by Surveyor certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance, or non- conformance, with Contract Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Survey Reference Points A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Projects are those designated on Drawings. B. Locate, verify and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve all permanent reference points during construction. 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Architect. 2. Report to Architect when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require surveyor to replace Project control points which may be lost or destroyed. 4. Establish replacements based on original survey control. C. Within the first three weeks of starting the Work obtain elevations of existing construction finish floor at all locations where new floors will meet existing. Promptly identify if there are any areas that are not flat. 3.02 Project Survey Requirements L I A. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to data by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and layout, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: FIELD ENGINEERING O1 05 00-1 t 1. Site improvements. a. Stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement. b. Utility slopes and invert elevations. 2. Batter boards for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations and floor levels. 4. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. C. Promptly notify Architect of any errors or discrepancies encountered; await interpretation prior to proceeding with work. D. Periodically verify layouts by same methods as the work progresses. E. Submit certificate signed by Surveyor certifying that elevations, slopes and grades at all interior and " exterior accessible ramp and parking locations are within compliance of TAS/ ADDAG requirements prior to and after pours. Also verify cross -slopes of sidewalks and entrances are compliant. Submit within 30 days after concrete is poured. 3.03 Records A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. B. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction. 3.04 Underground Obstructions A. Pipe lines, existing underground installation and underground structures in vicinity of work are shown on Drawings according to best information available. Accuracy of information is not warranted. B. Verify location of underground pipe lines, conduits and structures by contacting Owners of underground utilities and by prospecting in advance of excavation. C. Secure written permission from proper authority before initiating new construction over existing utilities. File copy of this written permission with Owner before commencing work. Furnish release from proper authority before final acceptance of work. D. Repair cuts to existing utilities made during construction process as part of project work to satisfaction of Utility Owner. END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING 01 05 00-2 4 SECTION 0106 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS H PART GENERAL 1.01 Related Requirements A. Section 01 01 00: Summary of Work. _d 1.02 Codes A. Perform work in compliance with local governmental authorities: 1. Refer to the Cover Sheet of the Drawings for a list of some of the applicable codes. B. Perform work in compliance with the requirements of Texas Accessiblility Standards established by the Texas Commission on Licensing and Regulation, Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes with regard to accessibility to the handicapped; and with the ADAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines), as set forth by the U.S. Department of Justice. C. Where references are made on Drawings or in Specifications to codes, they shall be considered an integral part of Contract Documents as minimum standards. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be so construed as to be in conflict with any law, by-law or regulation of the municipal, state, federal or other authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 Fire Ratings A. Where material, component or assembly is required to be fire rated, fire rating shall be determined or listed by one of the following testing agencies or authorities. 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 2. Factory Mutual Laboratories. 3. The National Board of Fire Underwriters. B. Where reference is made to only one testing authority, equivalent fire rating as determined or listed by another of above testing authorities is acceptable if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 06 00-1 � J REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 06 00-2 ri SECTION 0132 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. Any float contained in the schedules shall belong to the Project and in no event shall the contractor make claim for any alleged delay, acceleration, or early completion so long as the project is completed within the Contract Time. E. Fragment: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1 L 'I 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit four opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit initial schedule large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit copies of each of the following computer - generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit copies if requested; and as project record documents. F. Field Condition Reports: Submit copies at time of discovery of differing conditions, and incrementally, as appropriate, until the issue is resolved. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. q CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 2 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL ri A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each building or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 60 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 3 days for startup and testing at each building. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. Review requirements to complete this phase and coordinate to make sure the submittals and tasks are completed at the appropriate times. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. - 1. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 2. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 3. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with ongoing construction by other contractor(s). b. Limitations due to lack of infrastructure connections or access to Work. C. Use Use of premises restrictions. U d. Seasonal variations. e. Environmental control. 4. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. 5. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Dry- In, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis showing the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 20 days of date established for Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time -scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 3 1 I a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. .' Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start -total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 4 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Equipment at Project site. 3. Material deliveries. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. 7. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Services connected and disconnected. j 9. Equipment or system tests and startups. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule electronically just prior to each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule LJ responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 5 r a CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 6 SECTION 0133 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. The rest of the project manual for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's or Engineer's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's, Engineer's or Owner's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies portions of the Drawings may conditionally be provided by Architect, and its consultants, for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide subcontractors with the available versions. These will likely be in CAD, software and conversion will be the responsibility of the Contractor. Base plans will be provided of some sheets; but not the entire information, as the submittals requested should be a construction tool demonstrating understanding of the design intent, and taking it further into a document to be utilized for actual construction. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 t g, a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow a minimum of 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow a minimum of 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow a minimum of 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow a minimum of 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. These documents would include those prepared for structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical components. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name, contact information including telephone and fax numbers, and address of subcontractor. f. Name, contact information including telephone and fax numbers, and address of supplier. g. Name, contact information including telephone and fax numbers, of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dasht and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 10 00-104) based on when it was submitted. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 1. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. .. , 1. Submit to the Architect and appropriate consultants. 2. Copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 t 'I H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). 3 e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. _ j. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. k. Remarks. 1. Number of copies of items being transmitted. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions Taken, or Make Corrections Noted." Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken, or Make Corrections Noted." taken by Architect/ Engineer. 2. Distribution to the Architect/ Engineer. Distribute copies to the Architect, and as appropriate to the Engineer. The design team will review and return all comments to the Architect; who will then return them to the Contractor. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S/ CONSULTANTS ELECTRONIC MEDIA A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's electronic media [as available] will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Files will not be provided for all drawings. Base floor plans may be provided; details will not be provided. Refer also to specific information in specification sections. 2. A release will need to be signed prior to documents being transferred. The release (s) will be to the General Contractor/ CMAR; who will be soley responsible for obtaining releases from all of the users that are provided access to this information. These documents shall not be posted on internet sites accessible by others not directly associated with the production of the Work. 3. Version and type of software utilized to create the contract documents will be provided; no assurance of compatibility with contractor's software is provided. 4. It will be the contractor's responsibility to keep their information current. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 3 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. ( B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. 1. Testing by recognized testing agency. in. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. ` o. Contact information for the manufacturer, including address, telephone and fax numbers as a minimum, and potentially web sites and email contacts. 4. Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples. 5. If the Basis of Design is not being utilized the product data submittal will need to be submitted concurrently with shop drawings and samples. 6. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDS or other safety related material; and will return them for resubmittal. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. _ g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. in. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed ( wiring. t ( SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 4 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1000 nun). 3. Number of Copies: it is assumed that submittals shall be done electronically; unless specific instructions are required in the individual sections of the project manual. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and �T actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer, including address, telephone and fax numbers of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality -control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual 1 Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work are the property of Architect or Owner. c. Submit to Architect only those samples required, with a minimum of two samples to be retained by the Architect. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit at least one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal comments with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O1 33 00 - 5 Ll t r- 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Markup and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." Subcontract and Supplier List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, email, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Provide as a Project Record Document. 5. Update as appropriate as the project progresses if there are modifications to subcontractors. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 2. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. These types of submittals will be received- no action will be taken. B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O1 33 00 - 6 4 H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product ri complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer } complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by t manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. s L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. - 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's 1 recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include }( name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 7 1. Preparation of substrates. ' 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. V. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): If required by the Owner, submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a minimum of three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. € SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 8 iv. i, B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. �h 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. 1. Submittals that contain safety related information will be returned, without review, for resubmittal without that information [which is solely the contractor's responsibility]. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will either attach at submittal comment form or stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. No Exceptions Taken [Fabrication/ installation may be undertaken]. 2. Make Corrections Noted [Approval does not authorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time]. 3. Revise and Resubmit [Fabrication/ installation May Not be undertaken]. 4. Rejected [When resubmitting, limit corrections only to items marked]. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will recweive each submittal and will not return it. If it is reviewed, it may be returned it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O1 33 00 - 9 1 i_ .i SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 10 t E_t SECTION O1 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality -assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect or Construction Manager. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on -site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on -site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 'i QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1 : L Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade -specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Main wind -force -resisting system or a wind -resisting component listed in the wind -force -resisting system quality -assurance plan prepared by Architect. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 1.5 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and promptly submit [via email in .pdf form] certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re -inspecting. fl B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. n C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity j to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. Coordinate requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. Ll QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3 4( f H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. Coordinate the review to occur on a date of a regularly scheduled bi- weekly progress meeting. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow a minimum of seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup. Masonry mortar and concrete must be allowed to dry, and the mockup shall be covered to protect from environmental moisture. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and re -inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 3. The Owner will be paying for testing related for Work specifically being done for this project; things like proposed mix designs for concrete or mortar are not included. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality -control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Coordinate with lab on scheduling timing. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4 D. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and re -inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect, Construction Manager/ Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in -situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site or online. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours. 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 5 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 73 00 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 0140 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 6 SECTION O1 42 00 REFERENCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 1 r DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED -STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) 1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale Research's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute/ACI International ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AFPA American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association Al Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated ANSI American National Standards Institute APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA Architectural Precast Association ( REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 2 AR1 Air -Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute } ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association a ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers ' ASME ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering f ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI AWCIInternational (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) f AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA AWS American Wood -Preservers' Association American ( Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association --i BIA Brick Industry Association (The) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute - CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) DHI Door and Hardware Institute (' EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee —) EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) [ LJ GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA - Flat Glass Marketing Association) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) rk �s HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 3 ;t i ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association c. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA NFPA International (National Fire Protection Association International) NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NTMA National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. - NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting and Decorating Contractors of America RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RTI Roof Tile Institute (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers ' Association) SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (See IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI SPRI t (Single Ply Roofing Institute) SSINA g , (�gtl Specialty Steel Industry of North America REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 4 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings✓ SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.I WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WWPA Western Wood Products Association C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. BOCA BOCA International, Inc. CABO Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) t>, ICBO International Conference of Building Officials ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. ICC International Code Council, Inc. (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials)_ SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce EPA Environmental Protection Agency ,. FAA Federal Aviation Administration FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development - NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) j USDA Department of Agriculture jj(( USPS Postal Service ! j REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 5 E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract x Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Products Laboratory PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION REFERENCES 01 42 00 - 6 �W . {, t S SECTION O1 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Arrange for and provide temporary facilities and controls as specified herein and as required for the proper and expeditious prosecution of the Work. Pay all costs including fuel, power and water used until final acceptance of the Work unless the Owner makes arrangements for the use of completed portions of the Work after Substantial Completion in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. B. Make all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to the Owner, Architect and local authorities having jurisdiction thereof, furnish all necessary labor and materials, and make all installations in a manner subject to the acceptance of such authorities and the Architect; maintain such connections; remove the temporary installation and connections when no longer required; restore the services and sources of supply to proper operating condition. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code. B. Comply with Federal, State and Local codes and regulations and with utility company requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials may be new or used, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. B. Utilities: Comply with Divisions 22, 23, 26, and 33. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Arrange with utility company, provide service required for power and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used. B. Install circuit and branch wiring with area distribution boxes and located so that power and lighting is available throughout the construction by the use of construction type power cords. C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public. 2.3 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Provide temporary heat, ventilation an air conditioning as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. Where existing systems are available, contractor shall utilize these systems. B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to disperse humidity and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 C. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls. Gas type heaters shall not be utilized unless written approval is obtained. D. Pay all costs of installation, maintenance, operation and removal, and for fuel consumed. 2.4 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT A. Arrange for voice communication with the Contractor's personnel: 1. Min. of one voice [mobile acceptable]; and one data line with internet access in Field Office. 2. One speaker phone for teleconferences. 3. Email capabilities; including a digital camera to document issues and for RFI use. 4. Other instruments at the option of the Contractor, or as required by regulations. B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance, use and removal. 2.5 TEMPORARY WATER A. Contractor shall arrange with the local water utility for service and pay for hookups, water used and removal of temporary services at the end of the Work. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. C. Do not use permanent facilities installed during the construction for temporary services. 2.7 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. During construction, provide temporary fire protection in accordance with local Fire Protection Code and governing authorities. B. Take necessary precautions in welding or cutting operations to keep work area free of combustible material. Do not use welding equipment around flammable liquids or vapors. C. Keep welding and cutting equipment outdoors wherever possible. Remove welding and cutting equipment, wherever practical, from building daily. D. At completion of work operations, inspect work and adjacent area for hazards. When work operation is near building opening, inspect areas above, below or adjacent to work area for hazards. Protect against such hazards. 2.8 TEMPORARY INTERCOMMUNICATION FACILITIES A. Establish intercommunication and control or hoisting facilities to all levels. 2.9 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weathertight enclosures of exterior walls for successive areas of buildings as work progresses as necessary to maintain acceptable working conditions. B. Provide weather protection for interior materials; allow for effective temporary heating and preventing entry of unauthorized persons. C. Provide temporary exterior doors with hardware and padlocks. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS O1 50 00-2 s 2.10 PARKING A. Locate temporary roads, drives and parking facilities to provide uninterrupted access to construction offices, mobilization, work, storage areas and other areas required for execution of Contract. 2.11 STAGING AREA A. Confine materials, products, equipment and temporary facilities within site limits. 2.12 DEBRIS CONTROL A. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris. B. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site, storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes. 1. Provide containers for deposit of debris. 2. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillages on access and haul routes. a. Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements. C. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris. 1. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the periodic schedule is inadequate to prevent objectionable accumulation. D. Deposit all concrete spoils in a location designated by Contractor. Remove and properly dispose of concrete spoils when all concrete work has been completed. 2.13 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of solid, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B. Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillages and to remove contaminated solids or liquids. C. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters. 1. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals or other such substances adjacent to streams, or in sanitary or storm sewers. D. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. 1. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. 2. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 2.14 EROSION AND WATER CONTROL A. Plan and execute earth work and construction to control surface drainage and to prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum. 2. Provide temporary control measures such as berms, dikes and drains. 3. Control grading, fill and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels and other construction areas, and to direct drainage to proper runoff. B. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays which will erode. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS O1 50 00-3 ,z F C. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion or other damage to any portion of the site or to adjoining areas. D. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect any evidence of erosion; apply corrective measures as required. 2.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. No signs or advertisements will be allowed to be displayed on the premises without the acceptance of the Owner. 2.16 FIELD OFFICE: Provide temporary field office during construction. A. Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. B. Adequate electrical power, lighting and HVAC to maintain human comfort. C. Minimum 10 foot by 16 foot meeting room; and office space with layout table, desk and chair, plan racks, facilities for safe storage of Project Record Documents, and sufficient tables and chairs for project meetings. D. Have level and transit available at all times during construction. E. Provide telephone for communications with Architect and/or Owner. Provide a speaker phone for pre - work and other teleconferences. F. Provide a computer system with email and internet capabilities for processing requests for information and other electronic communications at the site. Have a digital camera for transmitting photos. 2.17 CONSTRUCTION AIDS: A. Furnish and maintain temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, hoists, chutes, runways, and other such items as required for completion of work; comply with applicable Federal, State and local safety and labor laws. B. Protect finished construction as required. 2.18 SECURITY: provide a project security program to: A. Protect Work, stored products and construction equipment from theft and vandalism. B. Protect premises from entry by unauthorized persons. Protect the Owner's existing facilities from entry by unauthorized persons. C. Protect Owner's operations at site from theft, vandalism or damage from Contractor's work, employees and visitors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and construction facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of work. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1 i i.._; CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS O1 50 00-4 4 3.3 3.4 3.5 A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in the project manual.Y B. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. ; C. Install facilities of neat and reasonably uniform appearance, structurally adequate for required purposes. Maintain during entire construction period. REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment, barricades and service when construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction and at completion of Project or as directed by Owner. ADJUSTING A. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified condition. B. Use air conditioning filters if units are operated during construction; maintain filters as necessary and replace filters upon completion of job. Minimize the use of permanent equipment. C. Replace lamps used in permanent fixtures during construction with new lamps. r CLEANING A. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities. B. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids. C. Grade areas of site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00-5 i - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS O1 50 00-6 SECTION 02011 - CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Construction layout is the responsibility of the contractor. B. Construction layout control is the responsibility of the contractor. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Layout for the construction of site demolition and clearing. B. Layout for the construction and placement of rough earthwork and subgrade. C. Layout for the construction and placement of site concrete. D. Layout for the construction and placement of caliche base course. E. Layout for the construction and placement of dense -graded hot -mix aspahlt. F. Layout for the construction and placement of on -site & off -site utilities. G. Layout for the construction & layout of any buildings or structure related to the project. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR A. Provide and pay for any construction layout required during the duration of the project. r' SECTION O1 58 00 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS PART GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain project identification sign. B. Provide temporary on -site informational signs to identify key elements of construction facilities. C. Allow no other signs to be displayed. 1.2 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. One V-shaped painted sign, located on property in accordance with current applicable sign ordinances, not less than 32 sq. ft. area on each side. Painted graphic content to include: 1. Title of Project. 2. Name of Owner. 3. Name of Architect. 4. Name of the Construction Manager. 5. Graphic representation of the project. B. Graphic design, style of lettering and colors: As approved by Architect. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Painted signs with painted lettering or standard products. 1. Size of signs and lettering: As required by regulatory agencies, or as appropriate to usage. 2. Colors: As required by regulatory agencies, otherwise of uniform colors throughout Project. B. Erect at appropriate locations to provide required information. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Painter: Professional experience in type of work required. B. Finishes, Painting: Adequate to resist weathering and fading for scheduled construction period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: May be new or used, wood or metal, in sound condition, structurally adequate to withstand 30# sq. ft. wind load and suitable for specified finish. B. Sign Surfaces: Exterior grade structural wood panels with medium density overlay, standard large sizes to minimize joints. 1. Thickness: As required by standards to span framing members, to provide even, smooth surface without waves or buckles. Minimum''/2". C. Rough Hardware: Galvanized. D. Paint: Exterior quality, purpose made for signage and graphics. 1. Use Bulletin colors for graphics. PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 01 58 00-1 2. Colors for structure, framing, sign surfaces and graphics: As approved by Architect. E. Trim: Provide 1 by 2 painted wood at all exposed edges. r_ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN A. Paint exposed surfaces of supports, framing and surface material; one coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint. B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes and colors as approved. 3.2 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Paint exposed surfaces: One coat of primer and one coat of exterior paint. B. Paint graphics in styles, sizes and colors as approved. C. Install at a height for optimum visibility, on ground -mounted poles or attached to temporary structural surfaces. 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition; repair damages to structure, framing or sign. B. Relocate informational signs as required by progress of the Work. 3.4 REMOVAL A. Remove signs, framing, supports and foundations at completion of project. END OF SECTION PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS 01 58 00-2 j ?I SECTION O1 60 00 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable. C. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or specified. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Conditions of the Contract. B. Section 01 02 50: Measurement and Payment. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Architect. B. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. D. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules; coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00-1 r C. Final Completion: I . When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: a. Contract Documents have been reviewed. b. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. C. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and is ready for final inspection. 2. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 3. Should Architect consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: a. Architect will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. b. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a second written certification to Architect that the Work is complete. C. Architect will reinspect the Work. 4. When the Architect finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. T' 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. For Substantial Completion: 2. Written notice of request for Substantial Completion inspection. 1. List of items remaining to be completed or corrected along with estimated completion date. 3. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: a. Certificates of occupancy. b. Certificates of final inspection: (1) Plumbing. (2) Mechanical. (3) Fire protection. (4) Electrical. C. Others as required by governing authorities. 4. Operation and Maintenance Data: To requirements of Section 01 73 00. 5. Keys and Keying Schedule: To requirements of Section 08 70 00. B. For Final Completion: 1. Written request for Final completion inspection. 2. Certification that: a. Work is complete. b. Contract Documents have been reviewed. C. Systems and equipment have been tested and are operational. 3. Copy of list of items completed or corrected from Substantial Completion with each item initialed and showing date completed. 4. Project Record Documents: To requirements of Section 01 72 00. 5. Warranties: To requirements of Section 01 74 00. 6. Extra Stock and Maintenance Materials: a. Assemble as required in individual specification sections. b. Package in clean packaging identified with: (1) Manufacturer's name, trade name, stock number, size, color, etc., as applicable. (2) Location where item is used in building or with what it is to be used. (3) Name, address and telephone number of local supplier. 7. Fully executed copies of following, in triplicate: a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment for Debts and Claims: AIA Document G706. b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A. C. Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA Document G707. d. Separate original, unconditional releases or waiver of liens from subcontractors, suppliers and others with lien rights against Owner, along with list of such parties. 8. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 9. Final Application for Payment. c: �i CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 2 t t , 1.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final Application for Payment reflecting all adjustments to Contract Sum, including: 1. Original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Deductions for uncorrected Work. C. Unit Prices. d. Penalties and Bonuses, if applicable. e. Deductions for reinspection payments. f. Other adjustments. 3. Retainage withheld from previous payments. 4. Total Contract sum, as adjusted. 5. Previous payments. + 6. Sum remaining due. B. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. C. Final payment constituting entire unpaid balance of Contract Sum will be made within 30 days after final Certificate of Payment has been approved. ' D. Contractor's final waiver of liens may be made conditional on receipt of final payment. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION [after attachment] CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 3 l _. i$ Contract Closeout Summary Submittals pf i.. J Project General Contractor Date of Substantial Completion Date Submittal Time of Submittal Referred To Comments Certificate of Occupancy Prior to Notice of Substantial Completion Notice of Substantial Completion Operation & Maintenance Data 10 Days Prior to Substantial Completion a. Architectural a. b. Plumbing b. c. Fire Suppression C. d. HVAC d. e. Electrical e. f. Special Systems or Equipment f. Owner's Acknowledgment of Prior to Substantial Completion System Demonstration and Instruction Keying Schedule and Keys Prior to Substantial Completion Project Record Documents 10 Days After Substantial Completion a. Architectural a. b. Plumbing b. c. Fire Suppression C. d. HVAC d. e. Electrical e. f Special Systems or Equipment f. g Special Warranties: Submit within 10 Days After Substantial Completion a. Waterproofing a. b. Roofing System b. c. Insulated glass C. d. Equipment (list) e. Receipts for Extra Parts Submit within 10 days after Substantial Completion Receipts for Maintenance Stock Submit within 10 days after Substantial Completion Final Change Order Prior to Notice of Final Completion (adjustment of accounts) Notice of Final Completion Final Payment Request and Attachments: Submit with Notice of Final Completion Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Affidavit of Waiver of Lien Lien Waivers from Subs and Suppliers Lien Bonds (for exceptions) Consent of Surety to Reduction of Retainage Consent of Surety to Final Payment CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 4 1.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final Application for Payment reflecting all adjustments to Contract Sum, including: 1. Original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Deductions for uncorrected Work. C. Unit Prices. d. Penalties and Bonuses, if applicable. e. Deductions for reinspection payments. f. Other adjustments. 3. Retainage withheld from previous payments. 4. Total Contract sum, as adjusted. 5. Previous payments. � r 6. Sum remaining due. B. Architect will prepare final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. C. Final payment constituting entire unpaid balance of Contract Sum will be made within 30 days after final Certificate of Payment has been approved. D. Contractor's final waiver of liens may be made conditional on receipt of final payment. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION [after attachment] CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 3 1 i__. Contract Closeout Summary Submittals Project General Contractor Date of Substantial Completion Date Submittal Time of Submittal Referred To Comments Certificate of Occupancy Prior to Notice of Substantial Completion Notice of Substantial Completion Operation & Maintenance Data 10 Days Prior to Substantial Completion a. Architectural a. b. Plumbing b. c. Fire Suppression c. d. HVAC d. e. Electrical e. ddd JJJ f. Special Systems or Equipment f. Owner's Acknowledgment of Prior to Substantial Completion System Demonstration and Instruction Keying Schedule and Keys Prior to Substantial Completion Project Record Documents 10 Days After Substantial Completion a. Architectural a. b. Plumbing b. c. Fire Suppression C. d. HVAC d. e. Electrical e. f. Special Systems or Equipment f. Special Warranties: Submit within 10 Days After Substantial Completion a. Waterproofing a. b. Roofing System b. c. Insulated glass C. d. Equipment (list) e. Receipts for Extra Parts Submit within 10 days after Substantial Completion Receipts for Maintenance Stock Submit within 10 days after Substantial Completion Final Change Order Prior to Notice of Final Completion (adjustment of accounts) Notice of Final Completion Final Payment Request and Attachments: Submit with Notice of Final Completion Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Affidavit of Waiver of Lien Lien Waivers from Subs and Suppliers Lien Bonds (for exceptions) Consent of Surety to Reduction of Retainage Consent of Surety to Final Payment [J CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 4 ( I i r SECTION O1 7100 CLEANING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Execute cleaning, during progress of the Work, and at completion of the Work. B. Related Requirements 1. Each Specification Section: Cleaning for Specific Products or Work. 1.2 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti- pollution laws. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned. B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. C. Provide proper containers for storing and transporting waste. D. Provide proper equipment for specific cleaning functions. l . PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the Work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations. B. Provide on -site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site. D. Do not drop or throw materials from heights. E. Take care that personnel and material movement do not cause soil, dust or clutter to affect adjacent areas. If adjacent areas are affected, take prompt remedial action to restore to a clean and tidy - condition. 1. Through out the construction process make sure that all recommended installation, maintenance and cleaning measures are strictly followed. 3.2 DUST CONTROL A. Provide temporary enclosures and devices, or time work, to insure that adjacent areas will not be affected by construction operations. CLEANING 01 71 00-1 c_ B. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as -needed basis until painting is finished. C. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. D. Continue cleaning operations on as -needed basis until area is ready for substantial completion or occupancy. 3.3 FINAL CLEANING A. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight -exposed interior and exterior surfaces. -% B. Wash and polish glazing and mirrors. C. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. D. Clean resilient flooring, stone flooring, ceramic tile and other hard- surface flooring. E. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces. Steam clean carpet if dusty or dirty operations have occurred after it was placed. F. Clean surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. G. Clean plumbing fixtures, food service equipment and similar equipment to sanitary condition. H. Ventilating systems: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. I. Clean light fixtures and lamps. J. Remove waste, debris and surplus materials from site. Clean grounds; remove stains, spills and foreign substances from paved areas and sweep clean. Rake clean other exterior surfaces. K. Repair, patch and touch up marred surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. Replace broken or scratched glass. L. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. M. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. N. Clean all interior and exterior glass just prior to turn- over. END OF SECTION CLEANING 01 71 00-2 � i i SECTION O1 72 00 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Maintain record copies of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Architect's Supplemental Instructions and written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 7. Field Test Records. 8. Requests for Information. 9. Any modifications as directed by Authorities having Jurisdiction. 10. Other modifications made. B. Timing of Entries: Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information. C. Record Documents to be delivered to Architect for Owner at completion of the Work. Utilize skilled draftsman to transfer notations to Record Documents. 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by Architect and Owner's Representative. E. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. Record Documents should not have the Architect's, or its consultant's, seals visible. F. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. 1.3 DRAWINGS A. Utilize electronic media to edit, notate, and otherwise incorporate additional drawings, etc. as appropriate to provide .pdf format documents Documents shall follow the format of the construction documents as it relates to order of information- sheets,etc.; the construction documents shall be the basis of the record documents and shall be a basis for, and be a part of the record documentation set. B. Legibly mark to record actual construction: 1. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 3. Changes made by Change Order or other modification. 4. Details not on contract drawings. 5. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish basement floor datum. - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 72 00-1 6. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL, including addena A. Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each Product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Addenda, Change Order or Supplemental Instruction. 3. Installation procedures different than those listed in the project manual. 1.5 STATUS REVIEW A. Owner and Architect will periodically review working record set. If documents are not being maintained current with construction progress, Owner may withhold progress payments until documents are brought current. 1.6 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract closeout, deliver Record Documents to Architect. 1. 4 DVD's each of all record drawings and project manual modifications. 2. Two half size sets of drawings, bound with clear mylar protection sheet on front and back. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 72 00-2 SECTION O1 73 00 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. B. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. C. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled to communicate essential data. B. Instruction shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Do not perform instruction until systems and equipment have been inspected and approved. B. Contractor shall be responsible to operate and maintain all equipment and systems until data and training has been submitted and accepted. 1. Owner's use of space or systems does not preclude this requirement. C. Complete all instruction prior to Substantial Completion. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in form of a miniumum of two paper instructional manuals and 4 DVD copies. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1I2" x 11". 2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: Provide reinforced punched binder tab; bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION", Project Title and name of Contractor. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA O1 73 00-1 C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. r , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. List with each product the name, physical and email address and telephone number of: 1. Subcontractor or installer. 2. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 3. Identify area of responsibility of each. 4. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 5. Product manufacturer. B. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 1. Identify model numbers, colors, mixes, etc. that will be need to maintain and replace components. C. Product Data: Include only those sheets pertinent to specific product. Clearly identify pertinent data; line out inapplicable text. D. Drawing: Supplement product data with drawings as necessary. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. E. Miscellaneous Data: Furnish copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. Furnish proper procedures in the event of failure and instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. F. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation. G. Content for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. 2. Operating and maintenance procedures. 3. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 4. Description of sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 5. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams. 6. As -installed color coded piping diagrams. 7. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve. 8. Maintenance materials to be used. 9. Trouble shooting data. 10. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer, installer and local supplier. 11. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. H. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards: Electrical service, controls and communications. 3. As -installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating and maintenance procedures. 5. List of original manufacturer's spare parts. 6. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer, installer and local supplier. 7. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 73 00-2 i I. Content, for each finish material, as appropriate: 1. Instructions and recommendations for care and cleaning. 2. Precautions. 3. Maintenance materials and tools. 4. Repair and replacement instructions. 5. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer, installer and local supplier. 3.2 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance j personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. 1. Demonstrate or explain preventive maintenace measures outlined in preventive maintanance manual. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. C. Return at first change of season for changeover from air conditioning to heating or heating to air conditioning. D. Explain operating sequences: 1. Show location and operation of switches, valves and other such devices used to start, stop, and adjust system. 2. Explain use of flow diagrams, operating sequence diagrams and other such devices. 3. Demonstrate operation through complete cycles and full range of operation through all modes, including testing and adjusting relevant to operation. E. Explain use of control equipment, including temperature settings, switch modes, available adjustments, reading of gauges, and functions that must be serviced by factory authorized representatives. F. Explain troubleshooting procedures: 1. Demonstrate commonly occurring problems. 2. Note procedures which must be performed by factory authorized personnel. G. Explain maintenance procedures and requirements: 1. Items requiring periodic maintenance. ' 2. Demonstrate preventative maintenance procedures and recommended maintenance intervals. 3. Demonstrate other commonly occurring maintenance procedures not part of periodic maintenance program. 4. Identify maintenance materials to be used. 3.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents. B. Architect/Engineer will review draft and return any comments. C. Submit two copies of approved data in final form along with Record Documents. D. Submit a copy to the Owner at least 10 days prior to any training. 3.4 RECOMMENDED PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. For each section and product where the manufacturer or installer know of suggested preventative maintenance provide a program to implement these recommendations. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA O1 73 00-3 L_ PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 73 00-4 V, SECTION O1 74 00 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Requirements Included A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit to architect for review and transmittal to Owner. E. Emergency Repairs: Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs to keep equipment in operation without voiding Contractor's warranty or bond, or relieving Contractor of his responsibilities during contract, warranty or warranty periods. 1.02 Related Requirements A. General Warranty of Construction: Conditions of the Contract. B. Section 01 70 00: Contract Closeout. C. Individual specification sections. 1.03 Submittal Requirements A. Assemble warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: Two each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence. D. Provide complete information for each item: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning and duration of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect validity of warranty or bond. E. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 1.04 Form of Submittals A. Prepare and submit in duplicate binders 2 paper versions and 4 DVD copies. B. Format: 1. Size: 8-1/2" x I I" in punch sheets for three-ring binder; fold sheets to fit into binders. a 2. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS". List: a. Title of Project. - b. Name of Contractor. - WARRANTIES AND BONDS O1 74 00-1 t C. Binders: Commercial quality, three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers. D. Do not submit warranties which require Owner signature. Utilize a different product if the manufacture will not prepare forms without a requirement for the Owner's signature to meet the requirements specified. 1.05 Time of Submittals A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction: Submit documents within 10 days after inspection and acceptance. B. Otherwise, make submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of the warranty period. 1.06 Submittals Required A. Submit warranties, bonds, service contracts and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. PART PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS O1 74 00-2 F, SECTION O1 82 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training videotapes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit three copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names = for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit two complete training manuals for Owner's use. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance -based test. D. Demonstration and Training Video: Submit four DVD copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy, provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager e. Name of Subcontractor and Supplier of System. f. Date video was recorded. g. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 2. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (2] 5-by-280-mm) paper, punched and bound in heavy- duty, 3-ring, vinyl -covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video/ DVD. Include name of Project and date of video on each page. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING O1 82 00 - 1 B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory -authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Photographer Qualifications: A competent photographer who is experienced photographing construction projects. D. Pre- instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Motorized doors, including overhead coiling and sectional doors; automatic entrance doors; smoke evacuation system activated doors. 2. Equipment, including laboratory fume hoods and other laboratory equipment. 3. Fire -protection systems, including fire alarm, fire pumps and pre -action fire -extinguishing systems. 4. Card Access Control, vehicular access control and Intrusion detection systems. 5. Conveying systems, including elevators. 6. Heat generation, including boilers feedwater equipment, pumps and water distribution piping. 7. Refrigeration systems, including chillers, condensers, pumps and distribution piping. 8. HVAC systems, including air -handling equipment and terminal equipment and devices. 9. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 10. Electrical service and distribution, including switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. 11. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches. 12. Lighting equipment and controls. 13. Communication systems, including intercommunication and video surveillance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 82 00 - 2 11 B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance criteria. C. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. C. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. _ f Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. h. Equipment Sequence of Operation. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. C. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. .__ d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. C. Routine and normal operating instructions. t _ d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. - f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. in. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. C. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. C. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. ( DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING O1 82 00 - 3 f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. 1 C. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Provide qualified instructors to prepare instruction programs and training modules and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Instructors shall instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. I. Owner will furnish personnel to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, with at least seven days' advance notice. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written or demonstration performance -based test. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to proper working condition at the completion of instruction. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO A. General: Engage a qualified photographer to record demonstration and training video. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. B. Video Format: Provide high -quality color DVD. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING O1 82 00 - 4 D. Narration: Describe scenes on videotape by audio narration by microphone while videotape is recorded or by dubbing audio narration off -site after. Include description of items being viewed. Describe vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. E. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration where appropriate. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING O1 82 00 - 5 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 82 00 - 6 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 02 82 20 - CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES PART GENERAL 1.1 Description of Work A. Extent of chain link fences and gates is indicated on drawings. 1.2 Quality Assurance A. Provide chain link fences and gates as complete units controlled by a single source including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.3 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for metal fencing, fabric, gates and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Show elevations and standard details. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 General A. Dimensions indicated on form pipe, roll -formed, and H- sections are outside dimensions, exclusive of coatings. B. Available manufacturers: Submit, in compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work. Include the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Fencing and Fabric a. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation b. American Fence Corporation C. Anchor Fence, Inc. 2.2 Steel Fabric A. Fabric: No. 9 ga. (0.148" + 0.005") size steel wires, 2" mesh, with top selvages knuckled for fabric 60" high and under, and both top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed for fabric over 60" high. 1. Furnish one-piece fabric widths. 2. Fabric Finish: Galvanized, ASTM A392, Class I, with not less than 1.2 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of surface. 2.3 Framing and Accessories A. Steel Framework 1. General: Galvanized steel, ASTM A53, with not less than 1.8 oz. per sq. ft. of surface. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Galvanized, ASTM A153, with zinc weights per Table I. B. End, Corner and Pull Posts 1. Minimum sizes and weights: 6' fabric height, 2.375" OD steel pipe, 3.65 lbs. per lin. ft., or 3.5" x 3.5" roll -formed sections, 4.85 lbs. per lin. ft. C. Line Posts f... (._ CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES 02 82 20-1 1] f 1. Space 10' o.c. maximum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum sizes and weights: 6' fabric height, 1.90" OD steel pipe, 2.70 lbs. per lin. ft. or 1.875" x 1.625" C-sections, 2.28 lbs. per lin. ft. D. Gate Posts 1. Furnish posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate installation. 2. Nominal gate widths: Leaf Width Gate Post lbs./lin. ft. Up to 6' 3.5" x 3.5" roll -formed section 4.85 or 2.875" OD pipe 5.79 E. Top Rail 1. Manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion type couplings, approximately 6" long, for each joint. 2. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull and end post. 3. 1.66" OD pipe, 2.27 lbs. per ft. or 1.625" x 1.25" roll -formed sections, 1.35 lbs. per ft. F. Wire Ties: 11 ga. galvanized steel to match fabric core material. G. Post Brace Assembly 1. Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid- height of fabric. 2. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375" diameter rod and adjustable tightener. H. Post Tops 1. Provide weathertight closure cap with loop to receive tension wire or toprail. 2. One cap for each post. Stretcher Bars 1. One-piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross- section of 3/16" x 3/4". 2. Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post, except where fabric is integrally woven into post. J. Stretcher Bar Bands 1. Space not over 15" o.c. to secure stretcher bars to end, corner, pull, and gate posts. 2.4 Gates A. Fabrication: 1. Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from metal and finish to match fence framework. 2. Assemble gate frames with special fittings and rivets for rigid connections, providing security against removal or breakage connections. 3. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories. 4. Space frame members maximum of 8' apart unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide same fabric as for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges and at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars to gate frame at not more than 15" o.c. 6. Install diagonal cross -bracing consisting of 3/8" diameter adjustable length truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. B. Swing Gates: Fabricate perimeter frames of minimum 1.90" OD pipe. CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES 02 82 20-2 tx, C. Gate Hardware: Provide hardware and accessories for each gate, galvanized per ASTM A153, and in [J i accordance with the following: 1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non -lift-off type, offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6' nominal height. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock. . eye as integral part of latch. 3. Double Gates: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eyes as integral part of latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with single padlock. 4. Locking Gate Latch: D&D Technologies `Lokk-Latch pro' keyed both sides with 6 pin cylinders - keyed to match building; latch & external locking [www.ddtechusa.com]. D. Concrete 1. Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement, ASTM C150, aggregates, ASTM C33, and clean water. 2. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi using at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1" maximum size aggregate, maximum 3" slump, and 2% to 4% entrained air. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. Do not begin installation and erection before final grading is completed, unless otherwise permitted. B. Excavation: Drill or hand excavate (using post hole digger) holes for posts to diameters and spacings shown in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. C. Setting Posts 1. Center and align posts in holes 3" above bottom of excavation. 2. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, extend concrete footings 2" above grade and trowel to a crown to shed water. D. Top and Bottom Rails 1. Run rail continuously through post caps, bending to radius for curved runs. 2. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by fencing manufacturer. 3. At locations where kennels or transformers/ generators occur provide a bottom bar; and at any interior locations. E. Center Rails 1. Provide center rails where indicated. 2. Install in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. F. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. G. Fabric 1. Leave approximately 2" between finish grade and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. 3. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. I J CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES 02 82 20-3 I.w1 H. Stretcher Bars: Thread through or clamp to fabric 4" o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15" o.c. I. Gates 1. Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. 2. Install ground -set items in concrete for anchorage. 3. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary. J. Tie Wires 1. Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. ' 2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12" o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24" o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24" o.c. t K. Fasteners 1. Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. 2. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. END OF SECTION CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES 02 82 20-4 f DIVISION 3 CONCRETE The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. ISECTION 03 30 00 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs -on -grade. 4. Suspended slabs. 5. Building members. B. WORK INCLUDED 1. Design, fabrication, erection, and stripping of formwork for cast -in -place concrete including shoring, reshoring, falsework, bracing, proprietary forming systems, prefabricated forms, s, permanent metal forms, bulkheads, keys, blockouts, sleeves, pockets, and accessories. Erection shall include installation in formwork of items furnished by other trades. 2. Furnish all labor and materials required to fabricate, deliver and install reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies for cast -in -place concrete, including steel bars, welded steel wire fabric, ties and supports. 3. Furnish all labor and materials required to perform the following: a,. Cast -in -place concrete b. Concrete mix designs C. Grouting structural steel baseplates C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash subject to compliance with requirements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture submit proposed mix designs in accordance with ACI 318, chapter 5. Each proposed mix design shall be accompanied by a record of past performance. 1. Submit mix pp designs on forms supplied at the end of this Section. g CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1 2. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 3. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. B. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1. Do not reproduce the structural drawings for use as shop drawings. 2. Embedded metal assemblies: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement. Use standard AWS welding symbols. C. Welding certificates. D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates. E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials 2. Admixtures 3. Curing compounds 4. Bonding agents 5. Adhesives 6. Vapor retarders 7. Repair materials F. Submit manufacturer's certification of maximum chloride ion content in admixtures. G. Fly ash: Submit certification attesting to carbon content and compliance with ASTM C618. H. Construction Joint Layout: Submit a diagram of proposed construction joint locations for horizontal framing that exceed the limits of a single placement as stated in the structural notes, other than those indicated on the Drawings. I. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 2 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, t Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA, "Structural Welding Code --Reinforcing Steel." F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." G. Concrete Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in -place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. C. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Specialty concrete finish subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor -retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. B. Store all proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 3 11 3 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High -density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. C. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 3. Steel Forms B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. V1 Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form -facing materials. D. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless -steel bar supports. U CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 1. I f__. 2. For slabs on grade and slabs on void forms, provide sand plates, horizontal runners, or precast concrete blocks on bottom where base material will not support chair legs or where vapor barrier has been specified. 2.4 DOWEL BAR ANCHORS A. Provide dowel bar anchors and threaded dowels designed to develop, in tension and compression, 125 percent of the minimum ASTM specified yield strength of the dowel bars. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors shall be furnished with ACI standard 90 degree hooks. Dowels shall be furnished by the anchor supplier. The following dowel splicing systems are acceptable: 1. Richmond Screw Anchor "Dowel Bar Splicer" 2. Erico "Lepton Form Saver" 3. Dayton Barsplice "Grip -Twist" 2.5 EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36 B. Headed Studs: Heads welded by full -fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division. C. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full fusion process, as furnished by TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division. D. Reinforcing Bars to be Welded: ASTM A706. 2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.7 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 5 1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. F11 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. C. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A. 1. Membrane shall have the following properties: a. Minimum 15 mils thickness. b. Permeance Rating: ASTM E96, 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft' * hr *- in Hg)] or lower as tested after mandatory conditioning (ASTM E 154 sections 8, 11, 12, 13) C. Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Products: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc.: Blackline 400. b. Epro; Ecoshield-E 15 mil. C. Inteplast Group; Barrier Bac VBC-350 Composite Vapor Retarder d. Reef Industries; Vaporguard. e. Stego Wrap 15 mil, by Stego. f. W.R. Meadows, Inc.: Premolded Membrane with Plasmatic Core (PMPC). 3. Accessories a. Perimeter/seam sealing tape for use with membranes that are not self -adhering to the underside of concrete slabs on void forms: 1) Crete Claw detail tape by Stego Industries, LLC, for adhering vapor retarder membrane to the underside of concrete surface at slabs on carton void forms, 3-inch and 6-inch widths as noted in Part 3. 2) StegoTack double -sided adhesive tape by Stego Industries, LLC, for adhering membrane to concrete at gradebeams. b. Manufacturer's recommended standard adhesive or pressure sensitive tape for general use. 2.8 CURING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. 1. Products: a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. BASF Construction Chemicals — Building Systems; Kure 200. C. ChemMasters; Safe -Cure Clear. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure Q-11-W). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX; TAMMSCURE WB 30C. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. i. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure -Clear. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 6 I j. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. 1. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E. in. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear. p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB. q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.9 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Sleeves and Blockouts: Formed with galvanized metal, galvanized pipe, polyvinyl chloride pipe, fiber tubes, or wood. D. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Mortar — Hand -Applied: Pre -packaged, cement -based, two -component, polymer -modified, trowel - grade mortar, enhanced with penetrating corrosion inhibitor. 1. Compressive Strength: 1200 psi minimum at 1 day; 6000 psi minimum at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 2. Bond Strength: 1800 psi minimum at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 882 (Modified). 3. Product / Manufacturer: SikaTop 122 Plus or SikaTop 123 Plus, Sika Corporation, or approved equal. B. Repair Mortar — Form and Pour or Pump: Pre -packaged, cement -based, single -component, polymer -modified, silica -fume -enhanced, cementitious mortar. 1. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi minimum at 1 day; 6500 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 2. Bond Strength: 2200 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 882 (modified). 3. Product / Manufacturer: Sika MonoTop 611, Sika Corporation, or approved equal. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 2. The required average strength above specified strength shall be based on the procedure given in the "MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM" appended to the end of this Specification. Required average strength above specified strength: CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 7 a. Based on a record of past performance: Determination of required average strength above specified strength shall be based on the standard deviation record of the results of at least 30 consecutive strength tests in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5.3 by the larger amount defined by formulas 5-1 and 5-2. b. Based on laboratory trial mixtures: Proportions shall be selected on the basis of laboratory trial batches prepared in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5.3.3.2 to produce an average strength greater than the specified strength fc by the amount defined in table 5.3.2.2. (" 1) Proportions of ingredients for concrete mixes shall be determined by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. 2) For each proposed mixture, at least three compressive test cylinders shall be made and tested for strength at the specified age. Additional cylinders may be made for testing for information at earlier ages. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated and tested in accepted mixes. 2. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 3. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 4. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy -use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as indicated on drawings. 2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.14 FABRICATION OF EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate metal assemblies in the shop. Holes shall be made by drilling or punching. Holes shall not be made by or enlarged by burning. Welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. B. Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be done by full fusion process equal to that of TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division. A minimum of two headed studs shall be tested at the start of each production period for proper quality control. The studs shall be capable of being bent 45 degrees without failure. C. Welding of reinforcement shall be done in accordance with AWS DIA, using the recommended preheat temperature and electrode for the type of reinforcement being welded. Bars larger than no. 9 shall not be welded. Welding shall be subject to the observance and testing of the Testing Laboratory. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 8 D. Metal assemblies exposed to earth, weather or moisture shall be hot dip galvanized. All other metal assemblies shall be either hot dip galvanized or painted with an epoxy paint. Repair galvanizing after welding with a Cold Galvanizing compound installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Repair painted assemblies after welding with same type of paint. 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 95 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 95 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 1. Vertical alignment: a. Lines, surfaces and arises less than 100 feet in height - 1 inch. 2. Lateral alignment: a. Members - 1 inch. b. Centerline of openings 12 inches or smaller and edge location of larger openings in slabs - 1/2 inch. 3. Level alignment: a. Elevation of slabs -on -grade - 3/4 inch. 4. Cross -sectional dimensions: Overall dimensions of beams, joists, and columns and thickness of walls and slabs. a. 12 inch dimension or less - plus 3/8 inch to minus 1/4 inch. b. Greater than 12 inch to 3 foot dimension - plus 1/2 inch to minus 3/8 inch. C. Greater than 3 foot dimension - plus 1 inch to minus 3/4 inch. 5. Relative alignment: a. All other conditions - 3/8 inch in 10 feet. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 9 1 } D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. G. Construct formwork to cambers shown or specified on the Drawings to allow for structural deflection of the hardened concrete. Provide additional elevation or camber in formwork as required for anticipated formwork deflections due to weight and pressures of concrete and construction loads. H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form -release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement, anchoring devices, and embedded items. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive subsequent finishes which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." a. Spacing within a bolt group: 1/8" b. Location of bolt group (center): 1/2" C. Rotation of bolt group: 5 degrees d. Angle off vertical: 5 degrees C. Bolt projection: f 3/8" CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 10 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after _ placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form -removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength. 2. Provide adequate methods of curing and thermal protection of exposed concrete if forms are removed prior to completion of specified curing time. 3. Areas required to support construction loads in excess of 20 psf shall be reshored to properly distribute construction loading. Construction loads up to the rated live load capacity may be placed on unshored construction provided the concrete has attained the specified 28 day compressive strength. 4. Obtaining concrete compressive strength tests for the purposes of form removal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 5. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper shoring and reshoring. B. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. 3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with tape as noted below. 1. Vapor retarder membrane seal at slabs on void forms for use with membranes that are not self - adhering to the underside of concrete slabs: Seal vapor retarder membrane to underside of slab using perimeter/seam seal tape applied continuously to perimeter of vapor retarder membrane at grade beams (3in. tape) and at the seams at interior conditions (6in. tape). a. Apply double -sided adhesive tape top surface of grade beam and adhere membrane to tape. Refer to the drawings for detail. b. Remove any dirt or debris from membrane prior to application of sealing tape. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 11 i 2. General sealing and at slabs on grade: Use manufacturer's standard adhesive or pressure sensitive tape for sealing membrane at seams, pipe penetrations, tears, etc. 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS DIA, where indicated. Only steel conforming to ASTM A706 may be welded. D. Installation tolerances: Top and bottom bars in slabs, girders, beams and joists: a. Members 8" deep or less: f3/8" b. Members more than 8" deep: f1/2" 2. Concrete Cover to Formed or Finished Surfaces: f3/8" for members 8" deep or less; f1/2" for members over 8" deep, except that tolerance for cover shall not exceed 1/3 of the specified cover. E. Concrete Cover: Refer to the Structural Notes. F. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping and tying ends. Comply with ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars where not specified on the documents. No. 14 and 18 bars shall not be lap spliced. G. Field Welding of Embedded Metal Assemblies: All paint and galvanizing shall be removed in areas to receive field welds. All areas where paint or galvanizing has been removed shall be field repaired with the specified paint or cold galvanizing compound, respectively. H. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. H B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 12 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. r"` 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. I. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. Water may be added to the concrete at the project site only if specifically withheld at the time of batching and specifically noted on the batch ticket. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water maybe added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301, and only if specifically noted as withheld on the batch ticket. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. Water content shall not exceed the maximum specified water/cement ratio for the mix. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 13 embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 4. Do not permit concrete to drop freely any distance greater than 20'-0" for concrete containing a high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) or 5'-0" for other concrete. Provide chute or tremie to place concrete where longer drops are necessary. Do not place concrete into excavations 1- with standing water. If place of deposit cannot be pumped dry, pour concrete through a tremie with its outlet near the bottom of the place of deposit. 5. Pump priming grout shall be discarded and not used in the structure. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. F. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. G. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305.1 and as follows: Maintain concrete temperature below 95 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 14 B. Do not apply when surface or air temperatures are below 40 degrees F. C. Do not apply materials in wet weather. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Prepare surface and apply concrete floor stain after other interior finish work is completed and before baseboards are installed. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS of FLOOR SEALER, subject to the requirements stated herein. A. The Euclid Chemical Company. B. L&M Scoffield. 2.02 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER A. Concrete Floor Sealer. Euco Diamond Hard 1. Description: Product to produce a wear- resistant, dust- free; water- repellant, very low maintenance surface. 2.03 BURNISHER A. Concrete Floor Burnisher. 1. Non -yellowing. 2. Matt to Semi -gloss finish. 3. VOC compliant. 4. Resistentto blush. 5. Quick drying. 6. Densifier/ sealer. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS of SLIP RESISTANT COATING, subject to the requirements stated herein. B. Slip Tech . http://wv,,,kv.sliptech.com/ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive concrete floor treatment. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect walls and surrounding surfaces. 2. Do not allow product to come in contact with wood or metal surfaces. 3. Protect and/or divert foot and auto traffic. B. Prepare concrete surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-2 1__, C. Concrete shall be as specified in section 03300. Ensure concrete is a minimum of 28 days old. 4` D. Ensure concrete is clean, dry, structurally sound, and free from dirt, dust, oil, grease, solvents, paint, wax, asphalt, concrete curing compounds, sealing compounds, surface hardeners, bond breakers, adhesive residue, and other surface contaminants. E. Do not acid wash or use heavy alkali cleaners. 3.03 APPLICATION OF FLOOR SEALER A. Apply concrete floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Thoroughly clean the concrete, removing all old films, dirt, oil and laitance with manufacturer's recommended stripper or cleaner. Flush and inspect the surface. A further cleaning may be necessary to open the pores. Do not use raw acid to clean concrete. Rinse cleaned surface thoroughly with fresh high-pressure water. 2. Neutralize any acidic residue on the surface by applying a solution of clean water and baking soda. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. A properly prepared surface, when dry, will immediately absorb clean water without any surface beading effects. 3. Apply a solution of sealer per the manufacturer's recommendations to the surface with low- pressure spray or applicator at 200-300 sq.ft./gal (5.0-7.5 m2/L) depending on porosity. 4. After the material penetrates totally into the concrete, reapply with spray. Keep applying light spray coats until material no longer absorbs into the concrete. 5. Broom out puddles until they soak in. If material starts to gel on the surface, spray with clean water and broom out. 6. Let surface dry 45-60 minutes. Flush the entire surface thoroughly with water, or squeegee off the excess. 7. If a white film starts to form, flush immediately. All of the absorption and initial reaction is complete. 8. The surface shall be burnished with a high-speed burnisher for high gloss 4-5 hours after the last application. The surface shall be protected and no traffic allowed until it is totally dry. 9. Coverage varies based on texture and porosity; always test. 10. Dry buff after the sealer has cured for 24 hours or glossier appearance. 3.04 APPLICATION OF SLIP RESISTANT COATING A. Apply concrete floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. The floor shall be cleaned. This shll involve a mild de -greasing solution and thorough rinse. Complete drying is not necessary, but no puddles, just damp wet. 2. This next step is crucial - getting the right strength for your particular job. To one gallon of water add anywhere from 6-12 ounces of Slip Tech. Determine the strength by how often the floor gets wet, how glossy the flooring surface is, use of the space- is it anticipated that people will be barefoot, are young children involved (running), is it interior or exterior, etc... 3. Confer with the manufacturer- Slip Tech is crucial. Provide details upfront and have a prework conference prior to starting any work. The more more knowledge they impart the better the final result. 4. Application of the product shall be with an old fashion string mop [no exceptions]. Cover a large area in a short period of time. The instant you start moping, the product should be working on the surface. NEVER use a small brush or sponge mop. Keep the timing on the application equal for all areas. 5. Once you mop it on evenly and liberally the next step is VERY IMPORTANT. Using a regular push broom you want to brush it on in all directions (repeatedly). If you don't brush well, there is a chance you will see mop marks or drip marks that will be permanently on the surface and won't go away. 6. After brushing (5-10 minutes) it is time to rinse well. Using another string mop, apply water liberally going over and over the floor. This will stop the reaction. If the job is outside, hose off CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-3 i f; i well and you're done. Pre -rinse grass and plants before you start. On interior jobs use a wet vac to suck up all the liquid. 7. You should feel the grip as you rinse. If the grab isn't achieving the desired results, apply a second time for 3-5 minutes (repeat steps 4-6). The manufacturer claims on tile, a second step is rare, but your feet will tell you. Cleaning the floor regularly with a damp mop will keep the floor looking new for many years. One quart of Slip Tech commercial strength should treat 1,000 to 1,500 s/f. of tile. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect stained concrete floor from damage during construction. B. Protect surfaces from foot traffic until fully dry; for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Avoid washing concrete surfaces for a minimum of 48 hours. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-4 s DIVISION 4 MASONRY The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. ., Section 1.6. Locations of core tests shall be approved by the Architect. Core sampling and testing shall be at Contractors expense. b. If the results of the core tests indicate that the strength of the structure is inadequate, any replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered by the Architect shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. - D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 19 SECTION 03 35 43 - BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Products and procedures for coloring and bonded abrasive polishing concrete floors using multi -step wet/dry mechanical process, and accessories indicated, specified, or required to complete polishing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined by CPAA. B. Polished Concrete: The act of changing a concrete floor surface, with or without aggregate exposure, to achieve a specified level of gloss. C. Bonded Abrasive Polished Concrete: The multi -step operation of mechanically grinding, honing, polishing of a concrete floor surface with bonded abrasives to cut a concrete floor surface and to refine each cut to the maximum potential to achieve a specified level of finished gloss as defined by the CPAA. This yields the most durable finish and requires the least amount of maintenance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product indicated, specified, or required. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations. B. Installer Qualifications: Data for company, principal personnel, experience, and training specified in PART 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. C. Field Quality Control — Dynamic Coefficient of Friction Test Reports: Reports of testing specified in PART 3 "Field Quality Control" Article. D. Field Quality Control — Static Coefficient of friction test reports: report of testing specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" article. E. Maintenance Data: For inclusion in maintenance manual required by Division 01. 1. Include instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. 2. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Polisher Qualifications: 1. Experience: Company experienced in performing specified work similar in design, products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce specified work. BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 - 1 { ' 2. Supervision: Maintain competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified work is in progress, and is currently certified as Craftsman - Level I or higher by CPAA. 3. Manufacturer Qualification: Approved by manufacturer to apply liquid applied products. B. Walkway Auditor: Certified by CPAA or NFSI to test bonded abrasive polished concrete floors for dynamic and static coefficient of friction according to ANSI 13101.1 and 13101.3. C. Coefficient of Friction: Achieve following coefficient of friction by field quality control testing in accordance to the following standards: 1. ANSI B101.1 Static Coefficient of Friction - Achieve a minimum of .42 for level floor surfaces. 2. ANSI 13101.3 Dynamic Coefficient of Friction - Achieve a minimum of .35 for level floor surfaces. D. Field Mock-up: Before performing work of this Section, provide following field mock-up to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of polishing. Approval does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents, unless Architect specifically approves deviations in writing. 1. Form, reinforce, and cast concrete slab for 10 foot square field mock-up. 2. Concrete shall be same mix design as scheduled for Project. 3. Placement and finishing work shall be performed by same personnel as will place and finish concrete for Project. 4. Mock-up shall be representative of work to be expected. 5. Perform grinding, honing, and polishing work as scheduled for Project using same personnel as will perform work for Project. 6. Approval is for following aesthetic qualities: a. Compliance with approved submittals. b. Compliance with specified aggregate exposure. C. Compliance with specified finished gloss level. d. Compliance with specified color. 7. Obtain Architect's approval before starting work on Project. 8. Protect and maintain approved field mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work. E. Pre -Installation of Concrete Conference: Prior to placing concrete for areas scheduled for polishing, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. 1. Required Attendees: a. Owner. b. Architect. C. Contractor, including supervisor. d. Concrete producer. e. Concrete finisher, including supervisor. f. Concrete polisher, including supervisor. g. Technical representative of liquid applied product manufacturers. h. Walkway auditor. 2. Minimum Agenda: Polisher shall demonstrate understanding of work required by reviewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following: a. Tour field mock-up and representative areas of required work, discuss and evaluate for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of procedures, and other preparatory work performed by other installers. b. Review Contract Document requirements. C. Review approved submittals and field mock-up. d. Review procedures, including, but not limited to applicable Division 03 Section on cast -in - place concrete 1) Specific mix design. 2) Specified curing methods/procedures. BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 -2 3) Projected 3, 10, and 28 day compression strength test related to specified aggregates exposure for finished floor and project phasing. 4) Protection of concrete substrate during construction and prior to polishing process 5) Project phasing and scheduling for each step of grinding, honing and polishing operations including, but not limited to: i. Quality of qualified personnel committed to project. ii. Quality and size of grinders committed to project. iii. Proper disposal of concrete slurry and/or concrete dust. e. Details of each step of grinding, honing, and polishing operations. 1) Application of color. 2) Application of liquid applied products. 3) Protecting polished concrete floors after polishing work is complete. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. ry 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Damage and Stain Prevention: Take precautions to prevent damage and staining of concrete surfaces to be polished. 1. Prohibit use of markers, spray paint, and soapstone. 2. Prohibit improper application of liquid membrane film forming curing compounds. 3. Prohibit vehicle parking over concrete surfaces. 4. Prohibit pipe -cutting operations over concrete surfaces. 5. Prohibit storage of any items over concrete surfaces for not less than 28 days after concrete placement. 6. Prohibit ferrous metals storage over concrete surfaces. 7. Protect from petroleum, oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment working over concrete surfaces. 8. Protect from acids and acidic detergents contacting concrete surfaces. 9. Protect from painting activities over concrete surfaces. B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting liquid applied product application. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIQUID APPLIED PRODUCTS A. Liquid Densifier: An Aqueous solution of Silicon Dioxide dissolved in one of the following Hydroxides that penetrates into the concrete surface and reacts with the Calcium Hydroxide to provide a permanent chemical reaction that hardens and densifies the wear surface of the cementitious portion of the concrete. All of the following have the same chemistry varying only by the alkali used for solubility of the Silicon Dioxide. 1. Sodium Silicate 2. Potassium Silicate 3. Lithium Silicate 4. Alkalis solution of Colloidal Silicates or Silica B. Pigmented Micro Stains: Fine pigment particles (<3.9 x 10-4 inches) suspended in Water -based silicate I solution that penetrates concrete and reacts with calcium hydroxide to lock in color particles. BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 -3 t C. Sealer - Impregnating Stain Protection: Non film forming stain and food resistant penetrating sealer designed to be applied to densified and polished concrete which meets the requirements of OSHA for slip resistance as tested by ASTM D 2047 and stain resistance of ASTM D 1308. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Repair Material: A product that is designed to repair cracks and surface imperfections. The specified material must have sufficient bonding capabilities to adhere after the polishing to the concrete surface and provide abrasion resistance equal to or greater than the surrounding concrete substrate. B. Grout Material: A thin mortar used for filling spaces. Acceptable products shall be: 1. Epoxy, urethane, poluyrea, or polyaspartic resins. 2. Latex or acrylic binders mixed with cement dust from previous grinding steps. 3. Silicate binders mixed with cement dust from previous grinding steps. C. Protective Cover: Non -woven, puncture and tear resistant, polypropylene fibers laminated with a multi- ply, textured membrane, not less than 18 mils in thickness. 2.3 POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment: 1. A multiple head, counter rotating, walk behind or ride on machine, of various size and weights, with diamond tooling affixed to the head for the purpose of grinding concrete. Excludes janitorial maintenance equipment. 2. If dry grinding, honing, or polishing, use dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated, with squeegee attachments. 3. If wet grinding, honing, or polishing, use slurry extraction equipment suitable for slurry removal and containment prior to proper disposal. B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-held or walk -behind machines which produces same results, without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment. C. Burnishing Equipment: High speed walk -behind or ride -on machines capable of generating 1000 to 2000 revolutions per minute and with sufficient head pressure of not less than 20 pounds to raise floor temperature by 20 degrees F. D. Diamond Tooling: Abrasive tools that contain industrial grade diamonds within a bonded matrix (such as metallic, resinous, ceramic, etc) that are attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. 1. Bonded Abrasive: Abrasive medium that is held within a bonding that erodes away to expose new abrasive medium as it is used. 2. Metal Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds with a metallic bonded matrix that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. These tools are available in levels of soft, medium, and hard metallic matrices that are matched with contrasting concrete substrates (i.e. hard matrix/soft concrete, medium matrix/medium concrete, soft matrix/hard concrete) and are typically used in the grinding and early honing stages of the polishing process. 3. Resin Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds within a resinous bonded matrix (poly -phenolic, ester -phenolic, thermoplastic -phenolic) that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. Resin bond tooling does not have the soft/medium/hard characteristics of metal bond tooling and are typically used for the later honing and polishing stages of the polishing process. 4. Hybrid Tooling: Diamond tooling that combines metal bond and resin bond that has the characteristics of both types of tooling. These types of tools are typically used as either BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 - 4 transitional tooling from metal bond tools to resin bond tools or as a first cut tool on smooth concrete surfaces. 5. Transitional Tooling: Diamond tooling that is used to refine the scratch pattern of metal bond tooling prior to the application of resin bond tooling in an effort to extend the life of resin bond tooling and to create a better foundation for the polishing process. 6. Abrasive Pad: An abrasive pad, resembling a typical floor maintenance burnishing pad, that has the capability of refining the concrete surface on a microscopic level that may or may not contain industrial grade diamonds. These pads are typically used for the maintenance and/or restoration of previously installed polished concrete flooring. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: 1. Examine substrates to be polished for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. a. Concrete Finished Floor Flatness according to applicable Division 03 Section on cast -in - place concrete. b. Concrete curing methods according to applicable Division 03 Section on cast -in -place concrete. C. Concrete Compression strength per according to applicable Division 03 Section on cast -in - place concrete. B. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. C. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cleaning New Concrete Surfaces: 1. Prepare and clean concrete surfaces. 2. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form - release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, paint splatter, and other contaminants incompatible with liquid applied products and polishing. 3.3 VAPOR TESTING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Alkalinity: 1. Test Method: Measure pH according to method indicated in ASTM F 710. 2. Acceptable Results: pH between 8 and 10. B. Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate: 1. Test Method: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. 2. Acceptable Results: Not more than 5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. C. Relative Humidity: 1. Test Method: Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. 2. Acceptable Results: Not more than 75 percent. BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 -5 ii } 3.4 COLORING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Pigmented Micro Stain Application: 1. Apply solution by methods and techniques required by manufacturer to produce finish matching approved field mock-ups. 2. Maintain wet edge, working newly applied solution into edges of adjacent wet edges of previously treated surfaces. 3. Maintain consistent saturation throughout application. 4. Avoid splashing, dripping, or puddling of solution on adjacent substrates. 5. When color matches approved mock-ups, neutralize as required by manufacturer. 3.5 POLISHING CONCRETE FLOORS A. Perform all polishing procedures to ensure a consistent appearance from wall to wall. B. Initial Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment with metal or semi -metal bonded tooling. 2. Begin grinding in one direction using sufficient size equipment and diamond tooling to meet specified aggregate exposure class. 3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tool with each pass, up to 100 grit metal bonded tooling. 4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tools. 5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust. 6. Continue grinding until aggregate exposure matches approved field mock-ups. C. Treating Surface Imperfections: 1. Mix patching compound or grout material with dust created by grinding operations, manufacturer's tint, or sand to match color of adjacent concrete surfaces. 2. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes, pop -outs, and voids with grout to eliminate micro pitting in finished work. 3. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections are not reasonably noticeable when viewed from 10 feet away under lighting conditions that will be present after construction. D. Liquid Densifier Application: Apply undiluted to point of rejection, remove excess liquid, and allow curing according to manufacturer's instructions. E. Grout Grinding: 1. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit and bond diamond tooling. 2. Apply grout, forced into the pore structure of the concrete substrate, to fill surface imperfections. 3. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust. F. Honing: 1. Use grinding equipment with hybrid or resin bonded tooling. 2. Hone concrete in one direction starting with a 100 grit tooling and make as many sequential passes as required to remove scratches, each pass perpendicular to previous pass, up to 400 grit tooling reaching maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tooling. 3. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust. BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 - 6 G. Polishing: 1. Use polishing equipment with resin -bonded tooling. 2. Begin polishing in one direction starting with 800 grit tooling. , 3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tooling with each pass until the specified level of gloss has been achieved. - - 4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads. 5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust. 6. Stain Protection: Uniformly apply and remove excessive liquid according to manufacturer's instructions. Final film thickness should be less than .05 mils after cure. 7. Final Polish: Using burnishing equipment and finest grit abrasive pads, burnish to uniform = reflective sheen matching approved field mock-up. H. Final Polished Concrete Floor Finish: 1. Aggregate Exposure Class C — Medium Aggregate Finish: Remove not more than 1/8 inch of concrete surface by grinding and polishing resulting in majority of exposure displaying medium aggregate with no, or small amount of, large aggregate at random locations. 2. Finished Gloss Level 3 — High Gloss Appearance: a. Procedure: Recommended not less than 4 steps with full refinement of each diamond tool with one application of densifier. b. Gloss Measurement: Determine the specular gloss by incorporating the following: 1) Reflective Clarity Reading: Not less than 65 according to ASTM D5767 prior to the application of sealers. 2) Reflective Sheen Reading: Not less than 35 according to ASTM D523 prior to the application of sealers. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: Engage a qualified walkway auditor to perform field testing to determine if polished concrete floor finish complies with specified coefficient of friction; 1. ANSI B 10 1. 1 for static coefficient of friction 2. ANSI B 101.3 for dynamic coefficient of friction B. Seal all control joints and cracks with MM 80 epoxy sealant and tool level with floor surface. 3.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Maintenance Training: CPAA Craftsman shall train Owner's designated personnel in proper procedures for maintaining polished concrete floor. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Covering: After completion of polishing, protect polished floors from subsequent construction activities with protective covering. END OF SECTION 03 35 43 BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 35 43 - 7 BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS 03 3543 - 8 • SECTION 03 36 60 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER AND SLIP RESISTANT COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Perform all work required to complete the concrete floor sealer and slip resistant coating indicated by the contract documents and furnish all supplementary items necessary for its proper execution. Coordinate concrete finishing prior to application of this system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Section 03 35 43 — Polished Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 3000 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets on all products to be used for the work, including surface preparation, application, maintenance and final cleaning. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Concrete floor sealer materials shall be products of a single manufacturer. B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Experienced in the application of the specified or similar products. 2. Employ persons trained for the application of the specified or similar products. C. Pre -Application Meeting: Convene a pre -application meeting at least one week before the start of application of concrete floor sealing. Coordinate meeting to occur at same date/time as a regularly scheduled progress meeting. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, and applicator. Review environmental regulations, protection of surrounding areas and surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, and coordination with other work. Contractor to have a finished room as a mockup for review and comment for this meeting. If range in coverage is a concern provide and example of that range. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING U A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, manufacturer, and concrete floor color. , B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry, well ventilated place, out of the sun. Store away from all other chemicals and potential sources of contamination. Keep lights, fire, sparks, and heat away from containers. Do not drop containers or slide across sharp objects. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. Do not allow to freeze. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations. H CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-1 sB. Do not apply when surface or air temperatures are below 40 degrees F. C. Do not apply materials in wet weather. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Prepare surface and apply concrete floor stain after other interior finish work is completed and before baseboards are installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS of FLOOR SEALER, subject to the requirements stated herein. A. The Euclid Chemical Company. B. L&M Scoffield. 2.02 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER A. Concrete Floor Sealer. Euco Diamond Hard 1. Description: Product to produce a wear- resistant, dust- free; water- repellant, very low maintenance surface. 2.03 BURNISHER A. Concrete Floor Burnisher. 1. Non -yellowing. 2. Matt to Semi -gloss finish. 3. VOC compliant. 4. Resistent to blush. 5. Quick drying. 6. Densifier/ sealer. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS of SLIP RESISTANT COATING, subject to the requirements stated herein. B. Slip Tech. http://www.sliptech.com/ PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive concrete floor treatment. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Protect walls and surrounding surfaces. 2. Do not allow product to come in contact with wood or metal surfaces. 3. Protect and/or divert foot and auto traffic. B. Prepare concrete surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. t CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-2 t_ C. Concrete shall be as specified in section 03300. Ensure concrete is a minimum of 28 days old. { J D. Ensure concrete is clean, dry, structurally sound, and free from dirt, dust, oil, grease, solvents, paint, wax, asphalt, concrete curing compounds, sealing compounds, surface hardeners, bond breakers, adhesive residue, and other surface contaminants. i E. Do not acid wash or use heavy alkali cleaners. 3.03 APPLICATION OF FLOOR SEALER A. Apply concrete floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Thoroughly clean the concrete, removing all old films, dirt, oil and laitance with manufacturer's recommended stripper or cleaner. Flush and inspect the surface. A further cleaning may be necessary to open the pores. Do not use raw acid to clean concrete. Rinse cleaned surface thoroughly with fresh high-pressure water. 2. Neutralize any acidic residue on the surface by applying a solution of clean water and baking soda. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. A properly prepared surface, when dry, will immediately - absorb clean water without any surface beading effects. 3. Apply a solution of sealer per the manufacturer's recommendations to the surface with low- pressure spray or applicator at 200-300 sq.ft./gal (5.0-7.5 m2/L) depending on porosity. 4. After the material penetrates totally into the concrete, reapply with spray. Keep applying light spray coats until material no longer absorbs into the concrete. 5. Broom out puddles until they soak in. If material starts to gel on the surface, spray with clean water and broom out. 6. Let surface dry 45-60 minutes. Flush the entire surface thoroughly with water, or squeegee off the excess. 7. If a white film starts to form, flush immediately. All of the absorption and initial reaction is complete. 8. The surface shall be burnished with a high-speed burnisher for high gloss 4-5 hours after the last application. The surface shall be protected and no traffic allowed until it is totally dry. 9. Coverage varies based on texture and porosity; always test. 10. Dry buff after the sealer has cured for 24 hours or glossier appearance. 3.04 APPLICATION OF SLIP RESISTANT COATING A. Apply concrete floor sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. The floor shall be cleaned. This shll involve a mild de -greasing solution and thorough rinse.' Complete drying is not necessary, but no puddles, just damp wet. 2. This next step is crucial - getting the right strength for your particular job. To one gallon of water add anywhere from 6-12 ounces of Slip Tech. Determine the strength by how often the floor gets wet, how glossy the flooring surface is, use of the space- is it anticipated that people will be barefoot, are young children involved (running), is it interior or exterior, etc... ¢ 3. Confer with the manufacturer- Slip Tech is crucial. Provide details upfront and have a prework 6u{ conference prior to starting any work. The more more knowledge they impart the better the final result. 4. Application of the product shall be with an old fashion string mop [no exceptions]. Cover a large area in a short period of time. The instant you start moping, the product should be working on the surface. NEVER use a small brush or sponge mop. Keep the timing on the application equal for all areas. 5. Once you mop it on evenly and liberally the next step is VERY IMPORTANT. Using a regular push broom you want to brush it on in all directions (repeatedly). If you don't brush well, there is a chance you will see mop marks or drip marks that will be permanently on the surface and won't go away. 6. After brushing (5-10 minutes) it is time to rinse well. Using another string mop, apply water liberally going over and over the floor. This will stop the reaction. If the job is outside, hose off U CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-3 � I well and you're done. Pre -rinse grass and plants before you start. On interior jobs use a wet vac to suck up all the liquid. 7. You should feel the grip as you rinse. If the grab isn't achieving the desired results, apply a second time for 3-5 minutes (repeat steps 4-6). The manufacturer claims on tile, a second step is rare, but your feet will tell you. Cleaning the floor regularly with a damp mop will keep the floor looking new for many years. One quart of Slip Tech commercial strength should treat 1,000 to 1,500 s/f. of tile. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect stained concrete floor from damage during construction. t_ B. Protect surfaces from foot traffic until fully dry; for a minimum of 24 hours. C. Avoid washing concrete surfaces for a minimum of 48 hours. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER and SLIP RESISTANT COATING 03 36 60-4 ri DIVISION 4 MASONRY The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 04 05 13 MASONRY MORTAR PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Pre -blended mortar mixes. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section: Masonry. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C91 Standard Specification for Masonry Cement. 2. ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 6. ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. 7. ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 8. ASTM C780 Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry. 9. ASTM C926 Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster. 10. ASTM C979 Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 11. ASTM C1329 Standard Specification for Mortar Cement. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 530.1 Masonry Structures (ACI530.1-88/ASCE 6-88). C. International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council (IMIAC): 1. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 2. Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design and Performance Requirements: Provide mortar mixes which have been selected, manufactured, mixed and installed to comply with the following: 1. ASTM C780. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. B. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of mortar. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. MASONRY MORTAR 0405 13-1 t 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. B. Field Samples: Refer to Quality Control requirements Section. C. Pre- installation Meetings: Immediately before or after a regularly scheduled progress meeting have a meeting to review masonry requirements, procedures and materials. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Store materials in a dry location, covered with a tarp or other suitable covering. 1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not build or apply mortar products on frozen substrates. 2. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. 3. Take special care when constructing in extremely hot or cold weather. Comply with the following standards: a. IMIAC Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. b. IMIAC Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREBLENDED MORTAR MIXES AND COLORED MORTAR MIXES A. Manufacturers, subject to the requirements stated herein: 1. AMERI MIX, Inc.; Bonsai America www.amerimix.com B. Proprietary Products/Systems. Pre -blended mortar mixes, including the following: 1. AMERI MIX Pre -Blended Mortar Mix [Basis of Design]: a. Material: Pre -blended factory mix of Portland cement, hydrated lime and sand aggregate. b. Mortar Type: Type M at or below grade; Type S at walls with reinforcing, Type N at other locations. C. Aggregate Type: Fine. d. Material Standard for Aggregate: Comply with ASTM C 144. e. Material Standard for Portland Cement: Comply with ASTM C150. f. Material Standard for Hydrated Lime: Comply with ASTM C207. , g. Material Standard for Masonry Cement: Comply with ASTM C91. h. Material Standard for Mortar: Comply with ASTM C270. i MASONRY MORTAR 0405 13-2 [i i. Material Standard for Masonry Grout: Comply with ASTM C476. j. Material Standard for Blended Hydraulic Cements: Comply with ASTM C595. k. Material Standard for Mortar Cement: Comply with ASTM C1329. 2. Water Retention Additive: Utilize Grace Construction Products, 'Dry Block' at manufacturers recommended rate at exterior locations of masonry other than brick that will not be painted. g— 3. Mortar Colors: Grey, unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER.S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the mortar manufacturer. 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for use of mortar mixes. 2. Do not proceed with use of mortar mixes until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Mix mortar using a mechanical mortar mixer to ensure homogeneity and workability. Hand mixing of the mortar is permitted only with written approval of the Architect who will outline hand -mixing procedures. 1. Observe mixing times of 4 - 5 minutes, consistent from batch to batch. B. Use clean, potable water, add the maximum amount consistent with optimum workability. 1. Maintain a uniform water/cement ratio. C. Rinse out mixer following each batch. 1. At the end of the day, thoroughly rinse the mixer to avoid contamination of future mortar batches. D. Re -temper mortar by adding additional mixing water only to replace water lost due to evaporation. 1. Do not re -temper colored mortars. E. Discard mortar 2.5 hours after initial mixing. F. Tool mortar joints when surface is thumbprint hard. 1. Keep tooling time consistent. 2. Do not strike joint too early or too late in order to maintain color consistency. G. Cure mortar a minimum of 28 days. H. For masonry core fill grout applications, comply with the requirements of ASTM C476. I. For Portland cement -based plaster applications, comply with the requirements of ASTM C926. MASONRY MORTAR 0405 13-3 i 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleaning Method: 1. Clean mortar only with potable water or dry brush. 2. Clean masonry with the least aggressive cleaning solution and technique possible. 3. Comply with cleaning procedure and recommendations of the manufacturers of both the cleaning solution and the unit masonry. 4. Utilize the same cleaning procedure on the sample panel at selection and during construction. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. END OF SECTION MASONRY MORTAR 0405 13-4 SECTION 04 2100 BRICK VENEER MASONRY PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Non -load bearing face brick for cavity wall construction, complete with required reinforcing, anchorage to structural back-up, through wall flashings. 2. Built-in loose steel angle lintels and shelf angles. 3. Form control joints. 4. Built-in items supplied by other trades. B. Related Sections 1. Section 0143 00: 2. Section 03 30 00: 3. Section 04 05 13: 4. Section 04 22 00: 5. Section 05 01 00: 6. Section 07 60 00: 7. Section 07 92 00: 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Mock- up Procedures. Cast in Place Concrete. Mortar. Concrete Unit Masonry. Miscellaneous Metals. Flashing and Sheet Metal. Sealants and Caulking. A. Perform brick masonry work in accordance with requirements of International Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 1. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, latest edition. 2. Manual of Standard Practice, MSP 1-01. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, latest edition. 3. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee, latest edition. 4. Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement, ASTM A 951-00. ASTM International, Inc., latest edition0. 5. Standard Specification for Zinc (1987) Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, ASTM A 153-01a. ASTM International, Inc., latest edition. B. When requested by Architect, provide evidence and test data confirming that brick masonry units conform to standard stated herein. C. Mock- up Panel:. ' 1. Masonry color ands texture range- to demonstrate a match to the existing Fire Administration building. 2. Mortar color range and finish. 3. Bonding. 4. Overall workmanship and quality. 5. Typical reinforcement and ties. 6. Erect panels for Architect's review at least 90 days prior to beginning masonry work. Cover panels after they are erected. Erect and clean panels at least one week prior to a scheduled project meeting to allow the mortar to cure. 7. Do not order the masonry material until the panel has been accepted; remove and reconstruct if necessary until approval is obtained. Allow time for curing [one week covered] prior to review. Scheudle for a minimum of at least one rework. 8. Erect a miminum 3'-4" wide by 4'-8" high brick panel; unless shown otherwise. 1.3 SUBMITTALS c BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-1 _; A. Samples ri 1. Minimum 6 individual brick samples for each type brick required, showing the extreme variations in color and texture range. 2. One of each type anchor, tie, reinforcement, joint filler and other accessories. B. Certificates: Prior to delivery, submit certificates attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for grades, types or classes. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C-216 -Facing Brick or ASTM .0 652 B. IBC - Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F. to protect masonry work completed or in progress. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar. C. During erection, cover top of wall with strong waterproof membrane at the end of each day or shutdown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements herein; A. Face Brick: ASTM C216 or ASTM C 652 [FBS or HBSJ: 2 '/4" x 3 5/8" x 7 5/8" modular, smooth velour, uno. Provide corbels, headers, bonding, solid brick and other special conditions where shown on the Drawings and where required. Basis- of -Design as follows: 1. As selected to match existing Fire Administration building. 2. Or approved equal. 2.2 MASONRY, REINFORCEMENT ANDANCHORAGE A. Anchors and Ties: 1. Finishes: Minimun ASTM Al53, Class B2, hot dipped galvanized. 2. Brick veneer walls attached to stud walls: ASTM Al53 double leg pintle type anchors; Hohmann & Barnard HB-200-X anchor, 14 gauge plate with 3/16" ties. Attach with corrosion resistant screws. Allow 1" minimum mortar cover of ends or legs. Coordinate with depth of rigid insulation sheathing to transfer wind load directly to the steel studs. Ties depth shall extend to at least the midpoint of the brick. Utilize HB-200 at concrete conditions. 3. Lintel reinforcing: Dur-O-Wal Hook -Rite wire lintel system including soldier or stretcher D/A hooks at 8" o.c. connected to an appropriate sized truss reinforcing. Ladder truss to be installed min. 3 courses directly above the lintel extending past edge of opening min. two feet. 4. Rake anchors: 12 gauge galvanized steel x 1 1/" hot dipped galvanized. At block backup provide from the interior face of the block to within 3/4" — 1" from the face of the brick; at stud veneer BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-2 applications provide a 1 ''/2" leg with a hole for bolting securely to the studs. Provide at 16" on center horizontally at a plan extending 2' above the plane of the sloped intersecting roof. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Thm-wall Flashing: ASTM A167 Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, cold drawn and annealed, 26 gauge [.45mm], 8 foot lengths, drip edge hemmed approximately 3/16'; 2B to 2D finish; lap joints 3 inches minimum and lock seam. B. Control Joints: Preformed neoprene material, ASTM D1056 Class RE41; of size(s) and profile(s) indicated on drawings; Dur-O-Wall 2010 and 2015 or HB #NS. C. Weep and Vent Filler: Mortar Net `Weep Vent' or H & B #343W - Wilko Weep Hole, color to match mortar. 1. Hold face of weep filler back from face of wall 3/8". D. Drainage Mat: H&B 'Mortar Net' 1. Fill the thickness of the cavity. E. Water Repellent Coating: 1. Clear liquid penetrating water repellent, non -yellowing, non -staining, producing no perceptible change in color or sheen to substrate, 40% solids, silane. 2. One or two coat system 3. Acceptable Products a. "Sil-Act ", Advanced Chemical Technologies Company. b. "Enviroseal 20 at precast and concrete, Double 7 at masonry", Hydrozo, Incorporated. C. "Chem-trete BSM-20". d. "Klere-Seal", Pecora Corporation. F. Below Grade Sealer: Hydrozo 30, clear. G. Cleaning: '/2 cup dry measure of trisodium phosphate (Calgon) and '/2 cup dry measure of laundry detergent, dissolved in one gallon of clean water; or Vanatrol by ProSoCo. No other cleaners acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. B. Establish lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. C. Adequately protect adjacent surfaces from damage and staining during masonry construction. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP AND INSTALLATION A. Place brick veneer masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on drawings. B. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. C. Buttering corners of joints, deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted. D. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-3 I s �I E. Perform job site cutting to provide straight and true, unchipped edges. F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. Lay in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. G. Lay brick veneer masonry in running bond. 1. Utilize solid brick at locations where holes in the brick are close to the surface of the wall [and at any location beyond 3/4" from the face of the adjacent brick]. H. Mortar joints to be 3/8 inch. Tool exposed wall joints slightly concave, unless shown otherwise. I. Install weep holes at 36" o.c. at head joints, 24" o.c. at sill joints in exterior masonry walls where thm wall flashing occurs. Form weep holes by eliminating the head joint mortar and installing the weep vent material with an open passage to the mortar net location. 1. Weep holes and through -wall flashing are intended to occur above the exterior grade. If these occur above finished floor verify that a properly installed waterproofing system has been installed prior to the installation of the masonry. Follow BIA recommendations. Provide vents at the top of the wall, equally spaced at twice the distance of the lower weeps. J. Fill cavity as brick is being laid at all weep locations with drainage mat for a height of at least 8" above grade. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32 inch. B. Maximum variation from vertical and horizontal building lines is '/4 inch 1 ft. C. Maintain flush face on exposed brick veneer surfaces. 3.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Place masonry reinforcing and anchorages as follows: 1. Brick veneer walls tied to studs: 24" on center vertically and 16" on center horizontally. Provide additional ties and anchors at openings, not less than 12" from opening 3.5 FLASHINGS A. Place through wall flashings in accordance with Brick Institute of America Technical Notes 7 and 28 recommendations. Provide factory formed corners. Create end dams at all horizontal terminations. B. Extend flashings through brick veneer, turn up minimum 8 inches and seal into sheathing over stud framed back-up; at masonry extend into substrate joint minimum l inch, provide 1/4" hookdam; at concrete substrate saw in a 3/4 inch reglet and wedge hookdam flashing in place. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and provide loose lock folded edge joints. Maximum length 16 ft.; maximum 8 ft. from corner. 3.6 CONTROL JOINTS A. Provide control joints where indicated on drawings. Do not continue horizontal masonry reinforcing across joints. 3.7 BUILT-IN WORK BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-4 L] A. As work progresses, build -in steel angle lintels, anchor bolts, plates and other items supplied by other trades. B. Build in items plumb and true to lines and levels. C. Do not build -in organic materials subject to decomposition or deterioration. 3.8 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of brick veneer masonry work. 3.9 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work. B. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces using non -acidic solution of type recommended by masonry manufacturer, which will not harm masonry or adjacent construction. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-5 BRICK VENEER MASONRY 04 21 00-6 t� SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Includes I . Concrete unit masonry walls, complete with reinforcement and anchorages. 2. Formed control joints. B Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00: Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 13: Mortar. 3. Section 04 21 00: Brick. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM C-150 -Portland Cement. B. ASTM C-90 - Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. C. ASTM C-129 -Hollow Nonload Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. D. International Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 1. Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures, ACI 530-02/ASCE 5-02/TMS 402-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee. 2. Manual of Standard Practice, MSP 1-01. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, 2001. 3. Specification for Masonry Structures, ACI 530.1-02/ASCE 6-02/TMS 602-02. Reported by the Masonry Standards Joint Committee. 4. Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A 615/A 615M-01b. ASTM International, Inc. 5. Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A 706/A 706M-01. ASTM International, Inc., 6. Standard Specification for Masonry Joint Reinforcement, ASTM A 951-00. ASTM International, Inc. 7. Standard Specification for Zinc (1987) Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, ASTM A 153-0Ia. ASTM International, Inc. 8. Structural Role of Joint Reinforcement in Concrete Masonry, TEK 12-2A, National Concrete Masonry Association. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with requirements of the International Building Code, 2012 edition, unless indicated otherwise. B. When requested by Architect, provide evidence and test data confirming that concrete masonry units conform to standards stated herein. C. Fire Resistance Rated Masonry: UL listed or certificated to be in compliance with requirements for materials and installation established by governing authorities for construction and fire- resistance rating indicated. IBC Table 720.3.2. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-1 D. Field Quality Control I. Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations shall be performed during construction for each 5000 sq. 8. of wall area or portion thereof. 2. Prism Test Method: For each type of wall construction indicated test masonry prisms per ASTM E 447, Method B and prepare one set of prisms for testing at 7 days and one set for testing at 28 days. 3. Evaluation of Quality Control Tests: In the absence of other indications of noncompliance with the requirements stated herein masonry shall be considered satisfactory if the results from these construction quality control tests comply with the minimum requirements indicated. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Masonry Units I. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under stacked units. 2. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use. 3. Handle units on pallets or flat bed barrows. 4. Do not permit free discharge from conveyor units or transporting in mortar trays. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F. (100 degrees C.) prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. During freezing or near freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees F. (10 degrees C.) and to protect masonry work completed or in progress. Conform to other requirements stated in Division 1. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. B. Keep expansion joint voids clear of mortar until the mortar has cured. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. Coordinate with structural requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete Block: ASTM C-90 Hollow Core and C-129 Hollow Core Nonload Bearing, Grade N Type I; modular sizes complete with corners, bases, bond beams, lintels and fillers to match and compliment block units, normal weight. 1. Fire Rated Block: ASTM C-90, Grade N Type I, normal weight; American Insurance Association (NBFU) Fire Resistance Rating for classification indicated. 2. Nominal 8" x 8" x 16" units to match the appearance of that utilized on the existing adjacent building. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 2. Dur-O-Wall, Inc. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-2 1. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. B. Reinforcing Rods: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. C. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing 1. Manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM A 82. 2. Consisting of deformed longitudinal side rods welded at 16" intervals to cross rods forming ladder design; 9 gauge for side rods and cross rods. 3. Hot dipped galvanized finish. 4. Acceptable Products a. CMU Wall: "#120 Ladder Mesh", Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. b. CavityWall: "Ladder Box Mesh #160", Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. c. Corner and Tee Fittings: same type as wall reinforcing. D. Anchors 1. Dovetail Anchor Slots: 22 gauge galvanized steel equivalent to 303 Dovetail Slot, Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 2. Dovetail Anchors: Galvanized steel, triangular anchors equivalent to #315-BT Flexible Dovetail, Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 3. Channel slots for anchorage of masonry to steel framing: Galvanized steel equivalent to #359P or #359 Ties, Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. 4. Partition Anchor: Hohmann& Barnard #344, hot dip galvanized; 3/16" bar stock with 2" bends. E. Control Joint Spacer: #NS, closed cell neoprene sponge, Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. G. Vertical Bar Positioner: Dur-O-Wal DA816. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Cleaning: 'h cup dry measure of trisodium phosphate (Calgon) and '/2 cup dry measure of laundry detergent, dissolved in one gallon of clean water; or Vanatrol by ProSoCo. No other cleaners acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect foundation to assure surfaces to support masonry are to proper grade and elevation and free from dirt or other deleterious matter. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Lay only dry units, free of paint, oil, efflorescence or foreign matter. Remove laitance, loose aggregate or anything that prevents bonding to foundation. B. Use masonry saws to cut and fit masonry units. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES -° A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces on columns, walls, and arrises, do not exceed '/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor 3/8 inch in 20 feet (10 mm in 6 m), nor'/2 inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed %4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor'/2 inch 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For vertical alignment of head joints, do not exceed plus or minus '/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), nor''/2 inch (12 mm) maximum. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-3 4 B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed '/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), nor ''/z inch in 40 feet (12 mm in 12 m) or more. For top surface of bearing walls, do not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m), nor 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of columns, walls, and partitions, do not exceed''/z inch in 20 feet (12 nun in 6 m), nor 3/4 inch in 40 feet (19 mm in 12 m) or more. D. Variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thichness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 14 inch (6 mm) nor plus ''/z inch (12 mm). E. Variation in Mortar -Joint Thickness: Do not vary from bed joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to'/z inch (12 mm). Do not vary bed joint thickness from bed joint thickness of adjacent course by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary haed joint thickness from head joint thickness by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from collar joint thickness indicated by more than minus '/4 inch (6 mm) or plus 3/8 inch (10 mm). 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Bond: Running bond with vertical joints located at center line of masonry units in alternate courses except at scored/ burnished and 8 x 8 block use stack bond. B. General 1. Do not install cracked, broken or chipped masonry units exceeding ASTM allowables; do not install chipped or broken block. 2. Set units plumb, true to line and with level courses accurately spaced. 3. Use concrete block for fill-in material. 4. Adjust masonry unit for final position while mortar is soft and plastic. 5. If units are displaced after mortar has stiffened, remove; clean joints and units of mortar; and relay with fresh mortar. 6. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry construction, clean exposed surface of set masonry and remove loose mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 7. If necessary to stop off horizontal run of masonry, rack back one-half block length in each course. 8. Do not use toothing to join new masonry to set or partially set masonry. 9. Comply with ACI 315 "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement" as it relates to reinforcing steel; for stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of masonry reinforcement. 10. Grind the corner of exposed block at doorways and outside corners of walls; approx. 1" radius. C. Mortar Beds 1. Lay with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Provide full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells and webs where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. D. Horizontal and Vertical Face Joints 1. Construct uniform joints, 3/8" nominal thickness. 2. Shove vertical joints tight. 3. Tool joints in exposed surfaces when thumb -print hard with round jointer. 4. Remove mortar protruding into cells of cavities to be reinforced or filled. E. Bond Beams and Lintels (_ 1. Provide bond beams at top of walls and other locations where indicated; provide lintels above door openings where indicated. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-4 I3. r_ t_ 2. Reinforce bond beams and lintels with minimum of two No. 5 bars and fill solid with grout. 3. Discontinue bond beams at control joints. F. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing 1. All walls reinforced with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. 2. Fully embed joint truss type reinforcement in each alternate bed joint, 16" o.c., unless noted otherwise. 3. Extend joint reinforcement entire length of bed joint. 4. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at ends. 5. Bend or weld at offsets or special conditions. 6. Provide additional joint reinforcement extending three feet beyond jambs in the two courses above and below openings. G. Ties and Anchors: Space maximum 16" o.c. vetically starting with first course and ending with last masonry course. 1. Provide partition anchors at all intersecting walls at the 1st course of reinf. AFF and at 32" vertical on center. H. Control Joints 1. Install where indicated and at following locations: a. Changes in thickness, height and direction. b. Within 4'-0" of corners or offsets. C. 30'-0" o.c. maximum run of uninterrupted wall. d. At control or expansion joints in structure. 2. Provide continuous vertical control joints through bond beams except at lintels above openings. 3. Offset control joints to ends of lintels. 4. After the block has set for fourteen days point all control joints with backer rod and a minimum of 1 '/2" thick mortar. I. Vertical Reinforcing: Lap vertical steel bars as noted on drawings, min. 2' if not noted; place steel through vertical bar positioners top and bottom of lap. ( J. Built -In Work 1. Install bolts, anchors, control joints, inserts, frames, flashings and other built-in items as masonry g work progresses. 2. Avoid cutting and patching. 3. Solidly grout spaces around built-in items. K. Pointing and Cleaning 1. At completion of conventional masonry unit work, fill holes in joints and tool. 2. Cut out and repoint defective joints. 3. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set, at end of each day's work and after final pointing. Replace any exposed to view block where mortar or grout has been allowed to fill in the texture of the face of the block. L. Temporary Formwork and Shores: 1. Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 2. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforce masonry. 3. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. M. Grouting 1. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to i resist grout construction. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-5 2. Do not exceed the following pour heights for fine grout: a. For minimum widths of grout spaces of % inch or for minimum grout space of hollow unit ) cells of 1-1/2 by 2 inches, pour height of 12 inches. b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. C. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit �- cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 24 feet. 3. Do not exceed the following pour heights for coarse grout: a. For a minimum widths of grout spaces of 1-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 1-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 inches. } b. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 2-1/2 by 3 inches, pour height of 60 inches. C. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 2-1/2 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 3 inches, pour height of 12 feet. d. For minimum widths of grout spaces of 3 inches or for minimum grout space of hollow unit cells of 3 by 4 inches, pour height of 24 feet. 4. Provide cleanout holes at least 3 inches in least dimension for grout pours over 60 inches in height. a. Provide cleanout holes at each vertical reinforcing bar. b. At solid grouted masonry, provide cleanout holes at not more than 32 inches o.c. 5. Maximum grout lift shall not exceed 6 feet in vertical height. 6. Consolidate grout during placement with mechanical vibration prior to plasticity loss to fill grout space. Reconsolidate grout to minimize voids due to water loss. 3.5 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Cooperate fully with other sections of work_ to ensure correct size, shape and location. B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 3.6 FLASHINGS A. Place stainless steel through wall flashings in accordance with Brick Institute of America Technical Notes 7 and 28 recommendations. Form end dams at all horizontal terminations. Utilize soldered or premanufacturerdcorners, transitions and end dams. B. Extend stainless steel flashings through masonry veneer, turn up minimum 4" and seal into sheathing over stud framed back-up; at masonry extend into substrate joint minimum 1 ", provide 1/4" hookdam; at concrete substrate saw in a 3/4" reglet and wedge hookdam flashing in place. Lap end joints minimum 1" and provide a strip of membrane flashing over that joint extending 3" in either direction from the joint. Membrane flashing to occur on vertical and horizontal legs only; not exposed on drip edge. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work- daily. B. Point or replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non -acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. END OF SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00-6 I DIVISION 5 METALS The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 05 0100 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART GENERAL 1.01 Related Work A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. B. Section 08 40 00: Entrances and Storefronts. C. Section 09 90 00: Painting. 1.02 Reference Standards A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM A 36, Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 123, Zinc (Hot Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip. 3. ASTM A 153, Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4. ASTM A 307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 5. ASTM A 386, Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. B. American Welding Society 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS DI A, Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. C. American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI A 14.3, Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders. 1.03 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details and installation instructions of prefabricated items. B. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations and details. 3. Include welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols; indicate net weld lengths. 1.04 Product Handling A. Deliver items to be set in concrete or masonry including sleeves, anchor bolts or inserts, in sufficient time to be set and checked before concrete is placed. B. Store products clear of ground and cover to avoid damage by elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Materials A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Pipe 1. Interior: ASTM A 53, Grade A, black finish schedule 40 standard weight. MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05 01 00-1 3 1_ i 1 2. Exterior: ASTM A 53, Grade A, hot dipped galvanized. C. Fasteners 1. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, regular hexagon head. 2. Lag Bolts: FS FF-F-561, square head type. 3. Machine Screws: FS FF-S-02, cadmium plated steel. 4. Wood Screws: FS FF-S-111, flat head carbon steel. 5. Plain Washers: FS FF-W-92, round, general assembly grade carbon steel. 6. Lock Washers: FS FF-W-84, helical spring type carbon steel. 7. Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. 8. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. D. Galvanizing 1. Iron and Steel Hardware: ASTM A 153. 2. Rolled, Pressed and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip 18 Ga. Thick and Heavier: ASTM A 123. 3. Assembled Steel Products: ASTM A 386. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint 1. High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel. 2. Comply with MIL-P-21035 (Ships), "Galvalloy" galvanizing compound, or "ZRC" by Sealtube Company. F. Shop Primer: Tnemec "10-99". G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 or D1.4, type required for materials being welded. H. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as required for fabrication, clear anodized, uno. 2.02 Fabricated Components A. Miscellaneous Steel Trim, Framing and Supports 1. Provide miscellaneous steel shapes to sizes profiles indicated to receive adjacent work or as required to complete work. 2. Fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars. 3. Continuously weld joints and grind smooth exposed edges. 4. Provide framing and supports with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete; miter joints for field connections. 5. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. B. Accessories: Furnish anchors, anchor slots, sleeves, bolts, brackets, clips, inserts, angles, bar stock, plates, grating, break metal and other miscellaneous metal necessary to cast in concrete or complete required work. C. Bar Grate: McNichols [800.237.3820 www.mcnichols.com ] Series GHB grating, galvanized steel; '/4" welded bars, with center to center bar spacings of 1 3/16" and 4". 36"w x 20' long. Provide attachment hardware to support/ address min. 250 mph wind load. D. Bollards: Galvanized steel pipe, sizes and heights as indicated on drawings, equipped with 3/4" diameter by 12" long steel bar for anchorage into concrete. E. Welded Wire Mesh: McNichols Co. 1/8" wire diameter, uno; 2" x 2" x .159"; hot dipped galvanized. F. Stainless Steel Fabrications: Formed countertops with rolled edges, splashes and closure pieces of 14 gauge type 316 stainless steel with a brushed finish, unless noted otherwise. Stainless steel 1- " continuously welded into monolith with exposed welds ground smooth. Provide support beneath MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05 01 00-2 counters with either a substrate at interior applications or angle support [of same material as top] to prevent sagging. Finish to be "jitterbug" to match Architect's sample. G. Hardware for bar grates mechanical area gates/ louvers: Hinges- Brookfield 8510 full surface type, zinc plated. Provide 2 near the top and one near the bottom of each gate leaf. Provide cane bolts of 3/4" rod with a 2' long fully welded '/z pipe sleeve anchor to each leaf, with 4" deep holes at open and closed positions. 2.03 Fabrication A. Field Measurements 1. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. 2. Do not delay job progress. 3. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. General 1. Form materials to shapes with straight lines, sharp angles and smooth curves. 2. Shop fabricate work in assembly as large as practicable; minimize field splicing and assembly. 3. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling; clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 4. Weld permanent shop connections; comply with ASW D1.1. 5. Continuously weld and grind smooth exposed weld. 6. Use concealed fastening where practicable. 7. Punch or drill for temporary field connections and attachment of work by other trades. 8. Comply with AISI "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". 9. At exposed to view areas: a. No visible weld through. b. Grind all butt and plug welds smooth; grind fillet welds to a radius. C. Power tool, minimum, any steel prior to painting. C. Galvanizing 1. Galvanize clip angles, shelf angles and anchor bolts embedded or in contact with concrete or masonry. 2. Galvanize, after fabrication, in sections as large as possible. 3. Where field welding of galvanized material is necessary, wire brush welds clean and immediately apply galvanizing repair. 4. Galvanize all exterior metal or that within a cavity that is outside the weather barrier. G 90 uno. D. Shop Painting (Ferrous Metal Not Galvanized) 1. Clean ferrous metal of scale, rust, oil, moisture and dirt. SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning. 2. Apply one shop coat primer to ferrous metals after fabrication. 2.01 mil thickness minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Set metal work level, true to line and plumb. B. Shim bearing plates with metal and grout solid. C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. D. Comply with AISI "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings". MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05 01 00-3 E. Fasteners 1. Provide zinc -coated fasteners, with galvanizing complying with ASTM A 153, for exterior use of where built into exterior walls. } 2. Select fasteners for type, grade and class required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. 3. Conceal fastenings where practicable. { 4. Provide separation material to seperate different metals at connections- like at aluminum to steel. F. Secure metal to wood with lag screws, of adequate size, with appropriate washers. G. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. 1 H. Retouch, in field, scraped, abraded and unpainted surfaces which will not receive finish painting; use ` shop coat primer. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METALS 05 01 00-4 SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel framing members and connections. 2. Deck support angles. 3. Shop prime painting and touch up painting in the field. 4. Fabrication and erection inspection and testing. 5. Grouting under base plates and bearing plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for administrative requirements for the submission of shop drawings and other submittals. 3. Division 5 Section "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 4. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels or shelf angles not attached to structural - steel frame, miscellaneous steel fabrications, and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand ASD-service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's " Steel Construction Manual, edition as referenced in the Building Code. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural -steel connections. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1 r 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 Section "Submittals". B. Submittals for Review 1. Provide complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop assembly of members, erection 4 plans, details, procedures, and diagrams showing sequence of erection of structural steel components. a. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. b. Include embedment drawings. C. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. d. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high -strength bolted connections. 2. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall not be made by using reproductions of Contract Drawings. Structural steel members for which shop drawings have not been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Engineer's review shall cover general locations, spacings, and details of design. Omission from shop drawings of any materials required by the Contract Documents shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though such shop drawings may have been reviewed and returned. C. Submittals for Information: 1. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Connection Calculations: Contractor shall design all connections not specifically detailed on the Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. Submit design calculations for the connections designed by the contractor, prior to or with the steel shop drawings. Shop drawings containing connections for which calculations have not been received shall be returned unchecked as an incomplete submittal. Calculations shall be retained for the Engineer's file and will not be approved or returned. a. Connections shall be designed in accordance with the requirements specified in the Structural Drawings and Specifications. b. Beam connections: Submit a complete calculation for each different beam connection used and detailed on the shop drawings. Conditions which are similar may be grouped together so as to utilize a single connection design. C. Submit complete connection calculations for wind brace connections, truss connections, moment connections and other connections where specified on the Contract Drawings. Each calculation shall identify the location or locations for which the connection applies, the member mark(s) from the Contract Documents, the piece mark(s) from the shop drawings, the member size, the design loading(s), member size, and the end of the member to which the connection applies. 3. Welding certificates. 4. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Erector Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience. T� C. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in a nationally accepted inspections program acceptable to the registered design professional in responsible charge. t D. Fabricator Qualifications: The special inspector shall verify that the fabricator maintains detailed fabrication and quality control of the workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved construction documents and referenced standards. The special inspector shall review the procedures for completeness and adequacy relative to the code requirements for the fabricators scope of work 1. Exception: Special inspections shall not be required where the work is done on the premises of a fabricator that is enrolled in a nationally accepted inspections program acceptable to the registered design professional in responsible charge. At completion of fabrication, the approved fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance to building official upon request and to the registered design professional in responsible charge stating that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents. E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." F. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the referenced standard, the Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code, the more stringent shall govern. G. All materials, fabrication procedures and field erection are subject to verification inspection and testing by the Owner's testing laboratory in both the shop and field. Such inspections and tests will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified requirements. H. Qualifications for Welding Work: Contractor shall be responsible for qualifying welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure." Provide certification to Owner's testing laboratory that welders to be employed in the work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests. Recertification of welders shall be Contractor's responsibility. I. Qualification of Welding Procedures: Contractor shall provide the testing laboratory with welding procedures which are to be used. Welding procedures shall be qualified prior to use in accordance with AWS D1.1, Part B. J. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" 2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 3. ASTM A6 "Specifications for General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using High Strength Bolts." 6. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code" STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to < members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION n ` A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992. B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. F. Welding electrodes: AWS DLL, E70. Welding electrodes used in full penetration welds shall have a minimum Charpy V-Notch toughness of 20 ft.-lbs at -20 degrees Fahrenheit when tested in accordance with ASTM A6. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. a. Finish: Plain. B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 4 1 4. Finish: Plain. t D. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Adhesive anchor rods: As noted on the drawings. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges", AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", and as indicated on accepted shop drawings. 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Mill tolerances shall conform to ASTM A6. Identify high -strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 4. Plates shall be free of gross discontinuities such as ruptures and delaminations. Plates shall comply with ASTM A578, Level 1. 5. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. Members in compression joints which depend on contact bearing shall have the bearing surfaces milled to a common plane. Members to be milled shall be completely assembled before milling. E. Base Plates: Oversize anchor bolt holes in base plates to facilitate erection as specified in Table 14-2 in AISC 360-05. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." G. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. t�. _ f STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 5 H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base -Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. Provide washers over all slotted holes in an outer ply. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds designed to develop the full strength of the member. A combination of welds and bolts shall not be used to transmit stress at the same face of any connections. Clean completed welds prior to inspection. Slag shall be removed from all completed welds. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high -strength bolted with slip -critical connections. 4. Top surfaces of beams which support composite metal floor deck. 5. Headed shear studs, although overspray is acceptable. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. ._ D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One -Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 6 t 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Galvanizing: The following steel shall be hot -dip galvanized (including any associated fasteners): Lintels and shelf angles attached to structural -steel frame and located in exterior walls. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Shop -welded connections will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Design of temporary bracing and supports shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design" unless closer tolerances are required for proper fitting of adjoining or enclosing materials, in which case the more stringent shall apply. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. _.. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 7 I 1_ ., 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. 1^' 5. Grout under baseplates in accordance with Section 03300. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," Unless adjoining materials dictate a tighter tolerance. D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. Any member having a splice not shown and detailed on the accepted shop drawings shall be rejected. F. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect/Engineer. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Architect/Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. G. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in the field to correct fabrication errors in structural framing. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. I. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 2. High -strength bolts which are not specifically designated to be "snug -tight" shall be tightened to provide at least the minimum tension shown in Table 4 of the "Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts." Tightening shall be done by the turn -of -the -nut method, with direct tension indicators, or by properly calibrated wrenches. 3. Bolts tightened with a calibrated wrench or by torque control shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or bolt head) turned in tightening. 4. Hardened washers shall be placed over slotted holes in an outer ply. Hardened beveled washers shall be used where the outer face of the bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to the bolt axis. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 8 __: B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds designed to develop the full strength of the member. A combination of welds and bolts shall not be used to transmit stress at the same face of any connections. Clean completed welds prior to inspection. Slag shall be removed from all completed welds. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high -strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D 1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than- continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 9 { END OF SECTION 05 12 00 ff STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 10 P. SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. 2. Composite floor deck. B. Work Included 1. Furnish all labor and materials required to fabricate, deliver and install steel roof deck and accessories including formed steel cant strips, eave strips, valley strips, sump pans, edge closures, pour stops, reinforcing plates and related accessories. 2. Furnish all labor and materials required to fabricate, deliver and install steel floor deck and accessories including formed steel end closures, edge forms, flashings, and reinforcing plates, headed shear studs, and related accessories. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for concrete fill. 2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel' for shop- and field -welded shear connectors. 3. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 2. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. Provide deck dimensions, sectional properties, uplift resistance and diaphragm capacity for specified fastener layout and support spacing, and finishes. B. Submittals for Information: 1. Welding certificates: For each welder employed on the Work. 2. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. STEEL DECK 0531 00 - 1 B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. fittings, header ducts, and trench header ducts, from same manufacturer. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents. t--, 1. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." 2. SDI (Steel Deck Institute) - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks, Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory -installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: As indicated. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK ' A. Composite Steel Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G30 zinc coating. i 2. Profile Depth: As indicated. L 3. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: As indicated. 4. Span Condition: As indicated. STEEL DECK 05 31 00 - 2 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements rr indicated. t B. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. C. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. E. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication No. 30 for overhang and slab depth. F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. STEEL DECK 05 31 00 - 3 ! 3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: As indicated. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. D. Architectural finishes and mechanical, electrical, and plumbing equipment shall not be hung directly from the metal deck. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field welds will be subject to inspection. B. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. C. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05 3100 STEEL DECK 05 31 00 - 4 a - DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. �T SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Wood furring. 4. Plywood backing panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-nnv actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (138-nmm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. € 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below -grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 nun) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS r1i A. General: Where fire -retardant -treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire -test -response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire -Retardant -Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln -dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Plywood backing panels at electric rooms. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods; No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA. 3. Northern species; No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 4. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA. 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1„ fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 112-inch (I3-min)nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. L l L ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2 l.� 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. Use screws unless specifically instructed otherwise [no nails]. C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M. Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by the manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z 180) coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. C. Hot -Dip, Heavy -Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high -strength low - alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high -strength low -alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G 185 (Z_550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 min) thick. 1. Use for wood -preservative -treated lumber and where indicated. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high -density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Install fire -retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. C. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. D. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. E. Where wood -preservative -treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible t s flashing separator between wood and metal decking. �y ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3 i F. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICUs International Building Code. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4 SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment as required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the finish carpentry work as described herein and/or as shown on the drawings. 2. Finish carpentry items, other than shop fabricated cabinet work, including filling and installing doors and hardware. i B. Related Sections 1. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 08 11 00: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08 21 00: Wood Doors. 4. Section 08 70 00: Hardware. !! 5. Section 09 90 00: Painting. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform finish carpentry work in accordance with recommendations of the Millwork Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI). 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of the Section before, during, and after installation, and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 4 PART PRODUCTS 1 - 2.1 FASTENERS A. Provide fasteners properly selected for the material to be fastened and the substrate to which the material will be fixed, designed to develop proper and adequate strength commensurate with the use. 2.2 LUMBER PRODUCTS A. Hardwood lumber: AWI PS 58; kiln dried 19% max. B. Softwood lumber: AWI PS 20; kiln dried 19% max. 1. At exterior locations provide pressure -treated materials: Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary (wood preservative); conform to AWPA Standards C2 and C9. 2.3 SHEET MATERIALS A. Interior plywood: APA PS 1 Douglas fir or southern pine, unless noted otherwise. B. Exterior plywood: APA Exterior Type, or where not installed at permanently exposed locations APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, with 40/20 span rating; 19/32" minimum thickness. _a FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS A. Initial inspection of doors: Prior to start of installation of each door, carefully inspect the door and verify: 1. That the door furnished is the proper door for the opening, as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings. 2. That the door is in sound condition, unblemished, without warp, twist, bow, or other attributes causing it to be rejected upon installation. B. Handling: Carry wood doors; do not drag them. Use extreme care in handling to prevent damage. C. Fitting: Trim all wood doors as necessary to provide a uniform clearance of between 1/8" and 3/16" at jambs and head, and a uniform clearance at the threshold or floor to properly clear the floor covering described on the Finish Schedule in the Drawings. D. Installing: For each door, verify the hardware type as described on the Door Schedule in the Drawings and verify that hardware actually supplied is the hardware specified. Use only the specified hinges or butts, and the proper equipment for the purpose. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OTHER FINISH HARDWARE A. Locations: Using only the specified finish hardware, and the proper equipment for the purpose, install all other finish hardware included in the Hardware Schedule. Install and adjust in strict accordance with the templates and printed instructions supplied by the manufacturer of the devices. B. Anchoring: Anchor all components firmly into position for long life under hard use. Use only the anchoring devices furnished with the hardware item, unless otherwise specifically directed. END OF SECTION FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00-2 i z ! F y SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 8 , PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Description A. Work included: Provide all architectural woodwork shown on the Drawings, complete in place, as specified herein, including casework and millwork. 1.02 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications of manufacturer: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the Architect. B. Qualifications of installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. C. Comply with architectural woodwork standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute, latest edition. 1.03 Submittals A. Product data: Within 90 calendar days after Notice to Proceed, submit: 1. Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this section. 2. Sufficient other data to demonstrate compliance with the specified requirements. 3. Shop Drawings showing each of the items to be provided under this Section, complete detailing joinery and other construction, including anchorage. 4. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures: The manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, as approved by the Architect, together with the approved samples, will become the basis for inspecting and accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. Prepare shop drawings in order of architectural drawings and/ or provide a cross- reference index at beginning of submittal. Provide one complete submittal package. 1.04 Product Handling A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Section before, during, and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Plastic Laminate and Wood Clad Cabinets A. Plastic Laminate: Shall comply with NEMA LD-3 for type, thickness, color, pattern and finish indicated for each application, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard products. B. All cabinet doors shall be covered on the front face and all four edges with 0.028" thick plastic laminate, as selected at dark colored laminates; PVC edges at all doors and edges of panels with light ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-1 (} F colored laminates. All drawer fronts shall be covered on the front face and all four edges with 0.028" thick plastic laminate, as selected at dark colored laminates; PVC edges at all doors and edges of panels with light colored laminates. Case ends, bottoms, tops at high cases, partitions, shelves, and backs shall be fabricated with 3/4" thickness medium density particleboard (minimum 45 psi) ANSI 208.2; backs F1 to be ''/a" thick. Paint tops of all cabinetry semi -gloss white. All interior surfaces of cases, with doors, except as specified otherwise shall be faced with white plastic laminate liner. All interior surfaces of cases without doors shall be finished with 0.028" thick plastic laminate and all edges shall be banded with 0.050" thick plastic laminate to match adjacent surface conditions. Color shall be as indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by Architect. C. All exposed edges shall be banded with 0.050" thick plastic laminate. D. Drawer fronts and cabinet doors shall be flush overlay type; fronts shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick. Plastic laminate faces 0.030" thick and plastic laminate backing sheets 0.030" thick, shall be simultaneously laminated. Exposed edges shall be thermo bonded with the same material used on faces of doors and drawers at wood clad and at dark colored laminates; PVC edges at all doors and edges of panels with light colored laminates. E. Adhesives shall be non-flammable contact, semi -rigid or polyvinyl cement. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. F. All solid stock lumber used throughout cabinetwork shall be "Custom" grade hardwood to conform to requirements of A.W.I., latest edition. G. Filler strips between cabinets and walls shall be plastic laminate covered 3/4" medium density fiberboard, color and pattern of plastic as selected by Architect. H. Drawers: Interiors of all drawers, except drawer face, shall receive white melamine. 2.02 Solid Surface Countertops _I A. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, furnish and solid surface tops of all casework indicated on the Drawings. Backsplash work, including end returns, shall be made with solid surface. Solid surface shall be provided as noted later within this section. . 1. Countertop base and splash for all sink tops shall be 3/4" thick, Medex exterior quality, industrial purpose MDF, by Medite Corp., Medford, Oregon. _. 2. Adhesives used to secure plastic laminate to fiberboard backing shall be non-flammable contact, semi -rigid or polyvinyl cement. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Back cut all joints to 89.75 degrees to insure flush fit at junction to top where plastic sheets meet joints. Joints shall be secured whether by a series of 1/8" x 3/4" cold rolled steel straps 3" o.c. through entire joint or by wedge type fasteners. No joints shall be made through sink openings or other openings where water is to be used. Where no splash occurs, scribe back or edge of countertop to wall. 4. At locations wider than 5' provide workstation brackets for intermediate support to preclude countertop sagging when loaded; utilize size as appropriate for installation 18"h x 24"v for typical 24" deep countertop; Rakks .http://rakks.coin/products/counter-support-brackets.ph]2 800-828- 6006; EH-1824 or size as appropriate. B. Openings shall be accurately cut in countertops to receive sinks installed under Plumbing Section. C. Seal exposed core around sink cut-outs and along front and back edges near cut-outs with Formica No. 102 cement or approved equal. In addition, all edges of plywood core which are not plastic veneered shall be coated with mastic equal to 3M Co. E-C 1012 or Miracle Adhesives Corp., Type H. 2.03 Plastic Laminate and Wood Clad Shelves ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-2 A. Unless indicated otherwise, furnish and install plastic laminate on all edges of shelving. Plastic laminate shall be as scheduled and be a minimum of 0.050" thick. 1. All shelving shall be 3/4" thick, 45-pound medium density particleboard. 2. Adhesives to be non-flammable contact, semi -rigid or polyvinyl cement. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 2.04 Hardware as herein specified shall be furnished in brushed chrome US26, unless noted otherwise. Verify finish with Architect prior to delivery. A. Hinged Doors 1. Doors shall have concealed, self -closing, European type hinges; Grass 1006 or Blum 95M5550, nickel plated, 110 degree opening angle. Doors more than 48" shall be at least 3 hinges per door. Doors shall show a maximum of 3/32" clearance between adjacent doors or drawers and between door and end panel when hinge is installed. 2. Pulls shall be Colonial Bronze Co. 753 or EPCO MC-4024BL (810-767-2050), 4" c-c, matte black. On doors over 14 inches high install pulls vertically 3 1/2 inches up/down and 1 1/2 inch over from intersecting corner. Center pulls vertically in drawers less than 9 inches high, 4 inches from top in taller drawers; center horizontally. 3. Locks shall be National Lock C8834 drawer lock with C8850 core (Hafele210.04.606 lock core; 210.04.062 rosette; 235.08.303 or .358 as appropriate to application). Key by Department, as directed by Architect. Provide catch for opposite door when used with pairs of doors. B. Drawers: All drawers to operate on Accuride Box Drawer Slide; Series AC3832, 100 lb. capacity. Provide Pendaflex inserts at all file drawers. C. Adjustable Shelving 1. Shelves in cabinets with doors shall be supported on metal brackets in flush mounted metal standards, adjustable 1/2" o.c. Shelves over 48" long shall be fitted with an additional support of full width metal brackets in metal standard attached to cabinet back. Where indicated, provide K & V No 187 x 10" brackets with No. 87 standards for 1" adjustment. Brushed chrome finish on both brackets and standards. 2. Shelving in cabinets without doors shall be supported on Hafele 282.04.711 shelf supports. 2.05 Finishing A. No finishing required on color -sealed hardboard surfaces. No finish, except cleaning, required on plastic laminate surfaces. Wood surfaces shall receive AWI 1500 TR4 conversion varnish finish system, stained to match sample in Architect's office, unless noted otherwise. Factory prefinish all paneling and wood clad millwork; finish all wood prior to installing. 2.06 Manufacturer of plastic laminate A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Plastic Laminate: As scheduled on drawings. 2.07 Wire Access Grommets A. Provide wire access grommets as manufactured by Doug Mockett & Company, Manhattan Beach, California, standard grommet "TG", black, in locations as directed in field by Architect. 2.08 Sealant A. Provide colored sealant at joints between architectural woodwork/millwork and adjacent surfaces. Color of sealant to match millwork; install sample for Architect's approval before proceeding with this work. �- ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-3 i, 2.09 Closet Rods A. Rod: Stainless steel clad tubing, 1 1/16" outside diameter x length as required, Knape and Vogt "660" rod with "734" flanges. 2.10 Standing and Running Trim A. Custom grade; transparent finish, AWI 1500 TR4 conversion varnish. 1. Red Oak. 2. Finish: Transparent stain to match samples in Architects office. 2.11 Hardwood Paneling A. Plain sliced; custom grade HPVA 'A' on medium density fiberboard substrate, end matched; transparent finish, AWI 1500 TR4 conversion varnish. 1. Plain Sliced Red Oak. Stained to match the selected door finish. 2. At locations with panels utilize custom grade HPVA `A' and 'AA' on medium density fiberboard substrate, book and end matched between leaves, center and balanced matched within face; veneer all edges with same specie and cut; transparent finish, AWI 1500 TR4 conversion varnish, 40 satin finish sheen, partially filled pores. 3. Book and end match. 2.12 Pegboard A. Masonite Corp. Flame Test pegboard panels, with lx2 white pine painted wood trim. 2.13 Plexiglas A. Black plexiglas; thickness as shown on drawings, 1/8" minimum. 2.14 Solid Surface Material A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product, subject to the requirements stated herein: 1. Du Pont Corian 2. Formica Surrel B. Submittals 1. Submit color samples approximately 2 inches square. 2. Submit manufacturer's repair and cleaning instructions. C. Material: Cast, filled, polyester meeting relevant sections of ANSI Z124 and ANSI/NEMA LD3-1995 specifications; '/2" thickness; 1. Joints shall be adhesively joined with no exposed seams. Edge details as shown on drawings. 2. Integral lavatory bowls: Formica Model VTA2; outside dimensions 13" x 17'/s", inside dimensions 10 ''/a" x 15" x 5 3/a"; comply with ADAG guidelines. 3. Adhesive: as recommended by manufacturer. A. Make field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Rout, sand and finish to provide inconspicuous joints in finished work. Adhere '/2" thick backsplashes and endsplaches with color matched silicone sealant. B. Integral bowl sinks of same material as counter at restrooms. 2.16 Work of Other Trades Includes ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-4 it A. Under Plumbing Section, furnishing and installation in cabinet work of all sinks, faucets, trim, strainers, traps, stops and any and all other items therein specified for installation of cabinet work. B. Under Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Section, furnishing and installation of all items specified therein for installation in cabinetwork which may be related to Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. C. Under Electrical Section, furnishing, installation, and making all connections of all materials and items herein specified for installation in cabinet work which may be related to electrical work. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Fabrication A. Fabricate cabinetwork in shop with experienced journeymen personnel under supervision of a thoroughly experienced foreman who will be totally responsible for work. Each cabinet shall be complete, self-supporting unit with a solid top or a supporting web as cabinet condition may require. B. Bottoms, tops, fixed shelves, partitions, and webs shall be tendoned the full width of each part, glued and blind nailed into end panels, partitions, tops and bottoms in a continuous blind rabbet. Use reinforcing screw cleats and glue blocks as indicated on Drawings or specified herein. C. Backs of fixed wall cabinets shall be housed into end panels and fastened at maximum 4" o.c. with 1- 1/8" diverging, resin -coated staples. D. Fixed wall cabinets 60" or more in height shall have three 1/2" x 3" anchor strips at backs for reinforcement and securing of cabinet to wall. Counter height fixed cabinets (wall) shall have two of the same anchor strips. E. Full overlay type drawers shall be of dovetail construction at front and back. Drawer bottoms shall be housed into sides; backs and fronts shall be reinforced with glue blocks. F. All cabinets shall be completed in shop, including finishing and shall be delivered to site as a single unit. No assembly work will be permitted at site, except by written authorization of Architect. G. All required hardware, as specified above, shall be furnished and installed after all finish work has been completed. Drill holes to accept hardware prior to finishing. Inspect all drilling operations for surface splinters and delaminations. Any piece bearing such imperfections will be rejected. 3.02 Installation A. Inspection: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. All fixed cabinets shall be leveled with shims and fastened securely to walls and/or floor with proper fastening device. Verify location of all in -wall backing supports for cabinet work. All sized cabinets shall be fastened directly to studs or in -wall supports through wall finishes. Use No. 10 cadmium plated flat head wood screws of appropriate length to penetrate backing at least 1- 1/2". Use expansion shields at masonry walls. Countersink screws and provide laminate plugs at all exposed fasteners. C. All casework shall be anchored to the building in conformance with requirements of the Architect. Casework shall be anchored to walls to withstand a horizontal load in any direction equal to 50% of the ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-5 r. weight of the casework and contents (a minimum of 50 pounds per square foot of horizontal projection per shelf). D. Furnish and properly install prefinishing molding and/or panels required to close openings between cabinets and walls or other surfaces. Moldings and/or panels to match adjacent cabinets in materials and finish. E. Install sealant at junction of plastic laminate to wall at all areas exposed to view. F. Cleaning and adjustment: Upon completion of the installation, visually inspect each installed item, thoroughly clean all surfaces by using the cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the finish being cleaned, and carefully adjust all operating components for optimum operation. 3.03 Plastic Laminate Colors j _1 A. Colors as scheduled on drawings; if not scheduled, as selected by Architect. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 00-6 t DIVISION 7 THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 07 19 50 VAPOR BARRIER [- I PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the installation of under -slab vapor barriers described herein and/or as shown on the drawings. 1. If the specifications of different sections conflict, the contractor shall perform to the most restrictive provision. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 03 30 00: Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Division 22: Plumbing. C. Division 26: Electrical. D. Division 31: Earthwork 1.03 Job Conditions A. Subbase: Smooth and level, free from damaging protrusions that would puncture vapor barrier. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1745-97 (2004) Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs 2. ASTM E 154-88 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs 3. ASTM E 96-95 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 4. ASTM F 1249-06 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor 5. ASTM E 1643-09 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Vapor barrier component (plastic membrane) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers printed product literature and description, including tests and standards that have been performed on the vapor barrier material. C. Samples: Submit two, 8 1/2 x 11 inch in size, illustrating the vapor barrier and two (2) 8-1/2-in long sample strips of the joint tape. D. One each of all accessories that will be used in the installation. E. Verification by Independent testing labs indicating that materials comply with specified requirements. VAPOR BARRIER 07 19 50-1 1 I F. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements; list test results per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745.Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with ASTM E 1745 Class A, a permeance less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] before and after the mandatory conditioning tests ASTM E 154 Sections 8,11,12, and 13. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate complete installation instructions. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Stego Industries, L.L.C., Mercer Island, WA, 877.223.4333. www.stegoindustries.com B. W R Meadows, Inc., 2555 NE 331d St., Fort Worth, TX., 817.834.1969. C. Reef Industries, 9209 Almeda Genoa, Houston, TX, 713.507.4200. § D. Polyguard Products, wwwpolyguardproducts.com E. Strata Systems Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Comply with ASTM E1745, Class A, minimum 15 mils thick with less than 0.01 Perms [grains/ ft2* hr*in Hg] before and after conditioning testing per ASTM 154. 1. At locations with slab- on- grade provide one of the following: a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15 mil) by Stego Industries LLC. (877) 464-7834. b. Griffolyn Type 105 by Reef Industries. C. Perminator (15 mil) by W.R. Meadows. d. Viper Vaporcheck II 2. Vapor Barrier membrane must have the following properties. a. Permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] per ASTM F 1249 or ASTM E 96 b. Maintain permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft2 *hr * in.Hg)] after mandatory conditioning tests per ASTM E 154 Sections 8,11,12, and 13. C. ASTM E 1745 Class A 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape 1. High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4". Tape must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower 2. Seam Tape a. Stego Tape by Stego Industries B. Vapor Proofing Mastic 1. Mastic must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 0.3 perms or lower 2. Mastic a. Stego Mastic by Stego Industries C. Pipe Boots VAPOR BARRIER 07 19 50-2 1. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and/or mastic per manufacturer's instructions. D. Spray Adhesive 1. Adhere vapor barrier to grade beams and concrete walls with the manufacturers recommended material; Stego recommends 3MTM Blue 72 Spray Adhesive. E. Sealant and Termination Bars 1. Provide as recommended by the manufactuer. If not recommended, utilize Firestone W56RAC3061 termination bar and Dow 795 sealant. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Reference Standards: 1. Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs: Exceeds Class B according to ASTM E 1745. 2. Water Vapor Transmission Rates: 0.006 gr./ft2 / hr. according to ASTM E 96.. 3. Permeance Rating Result: 0.01 gr./ft2 / hr. according to ASTM E96. 4. Puncture Resistance Result: 204.0-lbs/sq. ft. according to GRI-GS-1-86. 5. Puncture Resistance Result: 1972.5 grams according to ASTM D 1709. 6. Tensile Strength Result: 82 lbs./ MD and 55.5 lbs./ CMD according to ASTM D 638 7. Low Temperature Brittleness: Pass according to ASTM D 1790. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are acceptable for the placement of the vapor barrier. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Vapor barrier shall be installed continuous across the entire substrate to form a continuous vapor shield. Consideration to plumbing and other systems shall be taken into consideration with an acceptable method to achieve the continuous vapor barrier. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor barrier per manufacturer's instructions, illustrations and ASTM E 1643-09. 1. Level and tamp or roll granular base. 2. Place vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. 3. Lap vapor barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. Seal all penetrations. 4. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with the recommended pressure sensitive tape. 5. Seal pipe penetrations with pipe boot made from Vapor Barrier and tape. If multiple pipes are grouped utilize and appropriate sealant [Basis of Design] Polyguard® TERMTM Penetration Barrier. 6. Protect vapor barrier from damage during installation of reinforcing steel and utilities. 7. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with pressure sensitive tape. 8. At crawl space locations adhere the vapor barrier to the wall and allow for at least 9" of movement while still performing properly. Lap, fold, etc. as required to accommodate this movement. Install 2-2 ''/z" of granualar fill on top of the vapor barrier or protection board. B. Inspect installed vapor barrier system to assure that a continuous vapor barrier system has been installed. 1 Correct or replace any questionable locations prior to placing concrete. 1. Provide photo documentation of plumbing and electrical penetrations; and at any grade beams. 't VAPOR BARRIER 07 19 50-3 3; 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Coordinate with work of all other trades related that penetrates or affects the performance of this system.. END OF SECTION VAPOR BARRIER 07 19 50-4 SECTION 07 20 00 INSULATION "E PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the complete installation of sound attenuating, thermal and fire safing insulation described herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00: Cast- In- Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board Systems. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete product data. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging, complete with identifying labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in protected, dry area; protect from damage until used. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation until building is substantially water and weather tight. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. United States Gypsum. B. Owens-Corning Fiberglas. C. Manville Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: JM Formaldehyde -Free Unfaced Batts; ASTM C665, Type I; with maximum flame - spread and smoke -developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties: 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value): R13 at studs up to and including 4" thickness; R19 for larger cavities and for 6" studs [unless additional insulation is shown/noted]. 2. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E136. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: ASTM E970, greater than 0.11 Btu/sq ft s (0.12 W/cm sq). 4. Water Vapor Sorption: ASTM C1104, 5 percent or less. 5. Odor Emission: Passes ASTM C1304. 6. Corrosiveness: Passes ASTM C665. 7. Fungi Resistance: Passes ASTM C1338. INSULATION 07 20 00-1 i i I : B. Acoustical Insulation 1. Fiberglass or mineral fiber complying with ASTM C665, Type I; containing no formaldehyde. 2. Size: 2'/z inch thickness; unless indicated otherwise. Locate in walls and ceilings of toilet, electrical and mechanical rooms and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Acceptable Manufacturerst: Owens Corning Fiberglas; Manville; or USG. C. Fire Safing Insulation 1. Mineral fiber complying with ASTM C665, Type I. 2. 4 lbs./cu. ft. density. 3. Fire Hazard Classification per ASTM E84. a. Flame Spread: 25. b. Smoke Developed: 50. 4. Semi -rigid mineral fiber felt or fiber glass. 5. Size: 4 inches thick. 6. Acceptable Products: "Thermafiber Safing Insulation", USG. D. Rigid Foam Plastic Insulation 1. Closed cell polyisocynurate insulation board with plain factory applied finish foil both sides, square edges, complying with ASTM C1289, Type 1 Class 1 & 2. Aged thermal resistance, R = 5.5 per 1" nominal thickness at 140 degrees F. mean temperature aged 90 days per ASTM C177, C236, and C518. 2. Size: 48 in. x 96 in.; thickness as noted on drawings; minimum 2 in. thickness. 3. Acceptable Product: a. "Thermax Insulation Board", Dow /Celotex Corp. b. "Energy Shield Board", Atlas Roofing Corporation C. "Hunter Xci Foil", Hunter d. "Johns Manville AP Foil -Faced Board", Johns Manville e. "Thermasheath-3", Rmax 4. Adhesive: SCM Glidden -Durkee LN 601 Liquid Nails, B.F. Goodrich PL200, or H.B. Fuller Max Bond. 5. Tape: Celotex Thermax Tape, 2" wide. E. Insulation Adhesive: Type as recommended by insulation manufacturer. F. Rubber Deck Closure 1. Closure, Inc., Houston, Texas; EPDM closed all rubber; configuration to match deck. G. Impaling Pins 1. Galvanized sheet metal with impaling pins and retainer washers. 2. Size and type to suit application and insulation thickness. 3. Approved by manufacturer of insulation for intended use. H. Pin Adhesive: High strength, resilient adhesive, having a drying time of 0 to 30 minutes (rapid initial set), and 24 hours final set. 1. Compatible with insulation adhesive, insulation and substrate. 2. Non -corrosive to galvanized steel. Curtainwall Insulation 1. Mineral fiber complying with ASTM C665, Type I. 2. Size: 1'/z" minimum thickness, min. R 6.5. 3. FSP scrim -poly reinforced foil facing vapor retarder. 4. Acceptable Products: Thermafiber mineral fiber curtainwall insulation, CW90, USG. PART 3 EXECUTION - INSULATION 07 20 00-2 3.1 INSPECTION A. Check surfaces to receive rigid foam plastic insulation to assure that they are in uniform plane; and free of mortar chips, debris, grease, oil or other items. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water -Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. E. Install insulation after plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical services are in place. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical services within plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids. F. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces. Use batts free of ripped backs or edges. G. Cut insulation oversize to ensure tight butt joints when installed. Cut insulation to fit around protrusions and irregularly shaped projections. H. Insulation within metal stud systems installed full height and width in such manner that voids or openings do not occur. Insulation required for full width between studs, including cavity of each stud. I. Install fire safing insulation of proper size on safing clips or wire hangers spaced as needed, leaving no voids. J. Install fire safing insulation between concrete structure or structural deck and fire rated partitions extending full height to underside of structure. Pack each void tightly for full thickness of wall. Also install at full height partitions, or cut drywall in profile of the deck and provide acoustical sealant at any voids. K. Install rubber deck closure between deck at perimeter walls to provide airtight enclosure. L. Install acoustical and thermal insulation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. The following guidelines represent minimum standards: - 1. Friction fit two -side supported fiberglass batts up to 8'-0" tall; above that height, provide supplemental support with impaling pins adhered to one side of drywall. 2. At one -side supported applications, do either of the following: a. Flanged FS-25 facing product screwed to studs with drywall screws at T-0" o.c. b. Batts up to 24" wide: Apply impaling pins to substrate with impaling pin adhesive. Space impaling pins 4" from each corner and one at each edge at mid -span. INSULATION 07 20 00-3 m.F C. Blankets up to 48" wide: Apply impaling pins to substrate with impaling pin adhesive. Space impaling pins 4" from each corner, one at each edge at mid -span, and at quarter points vertically in center of span. 3. Apply insulation, pressing insulation boards firmly into adhesive through impaling pins without bending them. Butt insulation boards tightly. Install retainers to pins. 4. Place foil facing exposed to view. Tape joints of foil faced insulation or staple flanges together to seal joint. M Provide acoustical insulation above all restroom ceilings. N. Install rigid foam insulation with either Z-type studs or with adhesive directly to substrate. Apply adhesive to both insulation board and substrate following manufacturer's recommendations. Tape all joints in insulation to provide air -tight barrier. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent boards and [ protrusions. END OF SECTION INSULATION 07 20 00-4 L.. SECTION 07 27 20 FLUID -APPLIED MEMBRANE WEATHER BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Materials and installation methods for fluid applied, vapor permeable weather barrier mem- brane system located in the non -accessible part of the wall. 2. Materials and installation methods to bridge and seal air leakage pathways in roof and founda- tion junctions, window and door openings, control and expansion joints, masonry ties, piping and other penetrations through the wall assembly. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 03 30 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete 2. Section 04 8100 — Unit Masonry Assemblies 3. Section 07 54 00 — TPO Membrane Roofing 4. Section 07 60 00 — Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 5. Section 07 92 00 — Joint Sealants 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier Assembly: The collection of weather barrier materials and auxiliary materials ap- plied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air move- ment through the wall and preventing water movement through the wall. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor -permeable air barrier and as a liquid -water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at pe- rimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. B. The building envelope shall be designed and constructed with a continuous air barrier to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space. An air barrier shall also be provided for interior parti- tions between conditioned space and space designed to maintain temperature or humidity levels which differ from those in the conditioned space by more than 50% of the difference between the conditioned space and design ambient conditions. The air barrier shall have the following character- istics: 1. It must be continuous, with all joints made airtight. Joints must be of a permanent type con- [ struction. 2. It shall have an air permeability not to exceed 0.004 cfin/sq. ft. under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water. (1.57 psf.) (equal to 0.02L/sq. in @ 75 Pa.). 3. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack l pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load. 4. It shall be durable or maintainable. 5. The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent systems, allowing for the relative movement of systems due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: a. Foundation and walls. j b. Walls and windows or doors. C. Different wall systems. d. Wall and roof. P WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 1 i � I e. Wall and roof over unconditioned space. f. Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. g. Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 6. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made airtight. 7. It must be self- gasketing at fasteners. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The following standards and publications are applicable to the extent referenced in the text. The most recent version of these standards is implied unless otherwise stated. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. C920 Specifications for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. C 1193 Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. D412 Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension 4. D570 Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics 5. D1004 Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting 6. D1876 Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives 7. D1938 Test Method for Tear Propagation Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting 8. D1970 Standard Specification for Self -Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection 9. D4258 Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating 10. D4263 Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method 11. E96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 12. E154 Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover 13. E162 Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Source 14. El 186 Practice for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems 15. E2178-01 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 16. E2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Asemblies 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups. C. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. Fluid applied membrane 2. Transition Membrane 3. Through- Wall Flashing 4. Termination Metal Flashing at Openings. D. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Applicator. WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 2 F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for air barriers, submit certified test report showing compliance with requirements specified for ASTM E2178. G. Warranty: Submit a sample warranty identifying the terms and conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Air barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of waterproofing and air barriers. Manufacturers proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air -barrier material and through wall flashing through one source from a single manufacturer. Should project require a vapor permeable and a vapor impermea- ble air barrier on same project, obtain vapor -permeable and vapor impermeable air barrier and through wall flashing from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, provide air barrier work for exterior wall as- sembly mockups, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, window, door frame and sill, insulation, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane. 1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection before external insulation and clad- ding is installed. 2. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved. E. Pre -Installation Conference: A pre -installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Pre- installation conference shall include the Contractor, installer, Architect, and system manufacturer's field representative. Agenda for meeting shall in- clude but not be limited to the following: 1. Review of submittals. 2. Review of surface preparation, minimum curing period and installation procedures. 3. Review of special details and flashings. 4. Sequence of construction, responsibilities and schedule for subsequent operations. 5. Review of mock-up requirements. 6. Review of inspection, testing, protection and repair procedures. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Remove damaged ma- terial from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations. B. Do not double -stack pallets of fluid applied membrane components on the job site. Provide cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. C. Protect fluid -applied membrane components from freezing and extreme heat. WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 3 i D. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on -site storage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate tempera- tures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace fluid - applied air barrier membrane materials that fail within specified warranty period when installed and used in strict conformance with written manufacturer's instructions. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to maintain air permeance rating not to exceed .004 cfm/sq. ft (0.02 Us/sq. m.) when tested per ASTM E2178, within specified warranty period. b. Failure to maintain a vapor permeance rating greater than 10 perms when tested in ac- cordance with ATM E96, Method B. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein: A. Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA. B. Henry [Airbloc 31 ] C. DuPont Tyvek D. BASF 2.2 FLUID -APPLIED, VAPOR PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER A. Fluid -Applied, Fully -Adhered, Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier. 1. Single Component Acrylic Membrane: Perm -A -Barrier VP, as manufactured by Grace Con- struction Products, Cambridge, MA. [Basis of Design]. B. Physical and Performance Properties: Provide products with the following minimum properties: 1. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.0004 cfin/sq. ft. of surface area (at specified thickness) at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference (0.002 Us x sq. in of surface area at 75-Pa) when applied to CMU wall; when tested per ASTM E2178. 2. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not less than 11.2 perms (649.6 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); when tested per ASTM E96. 3. Assembly Performance: Provide a continuous air barrier assembly that has an air leakage not to exceed 0.0008 cf n/sq. ft. of surface area under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57 pounds per square foot) (0.004 Us x sq. in of surface area at 75-Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2357. 4. UV Exposure Limit: Not more than 180 calendar days; per ASTM D412 and ASTM E96- Method B. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 4 A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and com- patible with air barrier membrane. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Liquid Membrane for Details and Terminations: Provide Bituthene Liquid Membrane as manufac- tured by. C. Wall Primer (for Use with Throughwall Flashing and Tapes Applied to Substrate): Liquid water- borne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material. 1. Flash Point: No flash to boiling point 2. Solvent Type: Water 3. VOC Content: Not to exceed 10 g/1 4. Application Temperature: -4°C (25°F) and above 5. Freezing point (as packaged): -7°C (21 °F) 6. Product: Perm -A -Barrier WB Primer manufactured by Grace Construction Products. D. Flexible Membrane Wall Flashing: 0.8 mm (32 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.2 mm (8 mil) of cross -laminated, high -density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 mm (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed, conforming with the following: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 2. Water Absorption: ASTM D570: max. 0.1 % by weight 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154: 356 N (80 lbs.) min. 4. Tear Resistance a. Initiation ASTM D1004: min. 58 N (13.0 lbs.) M.D. b. Propagation ASTM D1938: min. 40 N (9.0 lbs.) M.D. 5. Lap Adhesion at -4°C (25°F): ASTM D 1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 6. Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -43°C (-45°F) 7. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 5.5 MPa (800 psi) 8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200%. 9. Product: Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing manufactured by Grace Construction Products. E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's approved tape. F. Transition Membrane: 0.8 min (32 mils) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.2 mm (8 mil) of cross -laminated, high -density polyethylene film to provide a min. 1.0 min (40 mil) thick membrane. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone -coated release paper until installed, conforming with the following: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96, Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa (0.05 perms) max. 2. Water Absorption: ASTM D570: max. 0.1 % by weight 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E154: 356 N (80 lbs.) min. 4. Tear Resistance a. Initiation ASTM D1004: min. 58 N (13.0 lbs.) M.D. b. Propagation ASTM D1938: min. 40 N (9.0 lbs.) M.D. 5. Lap Adhesion at -4°C (250F): ASTM D 1876: 880 N/m (5.0 lbs./in.) of width 6. Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D1970: Unaffected to -43°C (-45°F) 7. Tensile Strength: ASTM D412, Die C Modified: min. 5.5 MPa (800 psi) 8. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt: ASTM D412, Die C: min. 200%. 9. Product: Perm -A -Barrier Wall Flashing manufactured by Grace Construction Products. G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel -grade substrate filler. 1. Product: Bituthene Liquid Membrane, manufactured by Grace Construction Products. H. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed -in -place, polyurethane foam seal- ant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft (24 to 32 kg/cu. m) density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 5 i ASTM E162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manu- facturer. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, single -component, neutral -curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low - modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Wall Flashing at Terminations: A 90 galvanized steel; 20 gage: in profiles as shown, and as required for conditions. 22 gage stainless steel is an acceptable alternative. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contami- nants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are struck flush and completely filled with mortar. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Refer to manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods that are acceptable to manufacturer of the fluid -applied air barrier sys- tem. B. Exterior sheathing panels: Ensure that the boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws. Pre -treat all board joints with 50 - 75mm (2-3 in.) wide, manufac- turer's recommended self-adhesive tape. Gaps greater than 6mm (1/4 in.) should be filled with mas- tic or caulk, allowing sufficient time to fully cure before application of the tape and fluid applied air barrier system. C. Masonry Substrates: Apply air and vapor barrier over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel - cut mortar joints, struck full and flush. Fill all voids and holes, particularly in the mortar joints, with a lean mortar mix, non -shrinking grout or parge coat. D. Related Materials: Treat construction joints and install flashing as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. F. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. G. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 6 i H. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate patching membrane. I. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. J. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or Bituthene Liquid Membrane at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. K. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless -steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. 3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C1193 and air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate as required. B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with sealant according to ASTM C1193 and with air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply tape to joint prior to installing fluid air barrier membrane. 3.4 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufactur- er's written instructions. B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. C. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thick- ness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor -Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: 90-mil (2.4-mm) wet film thickness, 45-mil (1.2- mm) dry film thickness. D. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair sub- strates and reapply air barrier components. 3.5 TRANSITION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install strips, transition membrane, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flash- ing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over both substrates. 3. Install all flashings only after application of air barrier. 4. Install wall flashing to substrate with fasteners as recommended by substrate manufacturer. Coordinate profile to provide the depth and shape required so a sealant joint is created between the wall system and the window [or other] system. Joint shall be installed where replacement is accommodated. Apply air barrier membrane over all joints and at transition between flashing and substrate with overlap as manufacturer recommends. B. Apply primer to substrates to receive transition membrane at required rate and allow to dry. Limit { priming to areas that will be covered by transition tape in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. I�. WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 7 j 1. Prime glass -fiber -surfaced gypsum sheathing not covered with air membrane material with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roofing membrane air barrier, concrete below -grade structures, floor -to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain -wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials. D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic. E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended appli- cation temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these tem- perature ranges. F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact. 1. Transition Membrane: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscel- laneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant. H. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, ac- cording to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufac- turer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 120 days. C. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work us- ing cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. D. Remove masking materials after installation. END OF SECTION WEATHER BARRIER 07 27 20 - 8 SECTION 07 52 16 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Installation of vapor retarder / temporary roof, high thermal insulation and cover board to a structural concrete roof deck. Insulation and cover boards set in hot asphalt, 2. New two ply white mineral surfaced SBS modified bitumen membrane system, including flashing. 3. Applicator is solely responsible for accuracy of all measurements and estimates of material, quantities, and sizes. B. Related Sections 1. Wood Nailers: Section 06 10 00 2. Sheet Metal: Section 07 60 00 3. Roof Drains: Section 22 54 50 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C-1289 Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyisocyanurate Foam Faced with Asphalt/Glass Mat, or Polymer Glass Mat on Both Sides of Foam. 2. ASTM C-1278 Gypsum & Cellulose Fiber Roof Board 3. ASTM D-312 Type IV (4) - Asphalt used for insulation adhesive and roof membrane installation. 4. ASTM D-6163 Type I, Fiber glass reinforced SBS modified bitumen roofing membrane. Grade S for base sheet and Grade G for cap sheet. 5. ASTM D-4586 Asphalt Cement - asbestos free. 6. ASTM D-41 Asphalt Primer 7. ASTM D-5147 Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material B. Underwriters Laboratories - U.L. Class A Fire Rating for entire roof system. System shall be listed in the current U.L. Building Materials Directory. C. Factory Mutual Engineering Corp.: 1A-360 Approval, as determined in accordance with FMRC Standard 4470. RoofNav Assembly No. 388130-48637-0. 1. All components shall be tested and approved by Factory Mutual in accordance with their Standard 4450 / 4470 and listed in a FM RoofNav Assembly Report. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Currently approved, in writing, by manufacturer of roofing system prior to award of roofing contract. B. Manufacturer: Shall have manufactured the modified bitumen roofing products specified here in the United States for a minimum of ten years. Manufacturer and it parent or holding company shall not be in bankruptcy. Manufacturer and its parent or holding company must be headquartered based in the United States. 1.5 PRE -ROOFING CONFERENCE A. Hold roofing pre -construction conference at the project site not more than one week prior to beginning roofing. B. Attendance is mandatory for: roofing sub -contractor, roofing foreman, contractor's superintendent, roofing manufacturer's representative and Architect's representative, Owner's representative, mechanical subcontractor, sheet metal subcontractor, and anyone else responsible for items penetrating or in contact with roof. C. Agenda 1. Review in detail Architect's specifications, roof plans and all roof and flashing details. 2. If a manufacturer's specification is used, review, and resolve all deviations or differences from the Architect's specifications. 3. Review and understand Factory Mutual and Underwriters Laboratories requirements and resolve all conflicts between FM or UL specifications and the Architect's/manufacturer's specifications. 4. Review roof plans; for slope, deck type, drainage, membrane attachment, expansion joints, flashing and details. Resolve all conflicts between what is considered good roofing practice and the specifications. 5. Review proposed roofing system and recommended work practices for its installation. 6. Study all plans to determine whether different roof areas have different requirements. 7. Designate which areas on site will be available for use as storage and working areas. 8. Review procedures to be followed to provide proper protection of roof system during and after construction of roof. 9. Review Torching Safety: a. Always have fire extinguishers readily available near the application area. b. Make sure the torching equipment is in good working order, including the proper setting for the regulator. C. All torches must have a support stand that allows the flame to be directed away form the roof when the torch is not being used. d. Watch the gas hoses. Don't wheel equipment over them, kick them or allow the flame from torches to come in contact with them. e. Don't play with torches. Clothing easily ignites. f. Wear proper clothing. g. Do not allow flame to come into contact with combustible materials. Make sure a nailed base ply is installed first. Let primed areas thoroughly dry before application of the heat welded membrane. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 0752 16 - 2 h. Use good hoisting techniques when hoisting gas tanks to the roof. Don't put a rope or cable around the valve area of the cylinder. i. At all times follow the safety guidelines ❑Do's and Don'ts" as published by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) as well as their "A Guide to Safety Torch on Modified Bitumen" video. j. Do not begin application procedure until all mechanics have read/reviewed and understand these safety procedures and installation practices. k. It is the Contractor's responsibility to observe all fire prevention and safety policies and practices during the installation of the roof system as well as providing training to their personnel for proper roofing safety practices on the job site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and data to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. B. Manufacturer's written confirmation that the specified system is eligible for the specified manufacturer's guarantee when installed by the roofing contractor. C. Provide Factory Mutual RoofNav Assembly report to verify that roof system meets or exceeds specified wind uplift resistance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Store materials in a cool, dry place. B. Store roll material on end on clean, dry, raised surface. C. Place insulation on raised surface and protect with waterproof tarpaulins, with sufficient air circulation to prevent condensation. D. Do not install wet insulation. E. Store solvents, emulsions, and coatings in a cool, dry area between 45 and 100 degrees F. F. Handle roll materials to prevent damaged ends. G. Allow no unlabeled materials on site. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not start roofing if rain is imminent, or ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. B. If rain occurs during roof membrane application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, penetrations and membrane from water damage and intrusion. C. Remove and replace all material that has been subject to moisture. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 3 D. Protect finished surfaces of building from damage by installation of roofing system. E. Protect completed roofing and flashings from damage by subsequent roofing installation and construction traffic. F. In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements required by Architect. G. Comply with all applicable code, fire and safety regulations. H. Flame -heated Equipment 1. Locate and use flame -heated equipment so as not to endanger the structure or other materials on the site or adjacent property. 2. Do not place flame heating equipment on roof. 3. Provide and maintain fire extinguisher. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. When a particular make or trade name is specified, it shall indicate the standard required. Bidders proposing substitutes shall submit following ten (10) days prior to bid date to Architect. 1. Written request with explanation of why it should be considered. 2. Manufacturer's literature and samples of requested substitutions. 3. Three (3) job references available for inspections within fifty (50) miles of Architect where substitutes were used under similar conditions. B. Only substitutes approved in writing by Owner/Architect prior to scheduled bid date will be considered. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit Guarantee includes materials and workmanship to maintain roof in a watertight condition. 1 ' B. Provide single source, single responsibility guarantee which covers membrane, insulation, bituminous flashing, walkway pads and roof penetrations completed with manufacturer's liquid flashing system. C. Provide manufacturer's Guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Twenty (20) Year No Dollar Limit Peak Advantage® Roofing System Guarantee. Guarantee to run from date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements herein, A. Base Membrane Roofing System: 1. Johns Manville 2FID HW (Alt) [Basis of Design] _: MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 4 2.2 MATERIALS A. Concrete Deck Primer: Asphalt Primer, ASTM D-41, Johns Manville Concrete Primer B. Vapor Retarder / Temporary Roof: ASTM D6163, Type I, Grade S. Torchable smooth modified bitumen base sheet. Designed for torch application to substrate, but with sanded top surface to receive hot asphalt -applied roof insulation. C. Base Layer Insulation 1. Factory Mutual Class I, Polyisocyanurate Foam Faced with Asphalt/Glass Mat, or Polymer Glass Mat on Both Sides of Foam and complying with ASTM C-1289. Thermal Resistance to be determined by Long Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR). . Johns Manville ENRGY 3. 2. 2 layers of 2.6" Polyiso insulation for a total R-value of 30.0. 3. Maximum board dimension is 4' x 4' D. Insulation Securement : 1. Roofing asphalt, Type IV, ASTM D-312. E. Top Layer of Insulation: 1. Gypsum and Cellulose Fiber Cover Board, ASTM C1278. Integral water-resistant core that scores a maximum "10" for mold resistance when tested per ASTM D 3273. 1/2" thickness, 4 x 4 board dimension, maximum. a. JM SecuRock Gypsum Fiber Board. F. Membrane Roofing: 1. Cover areas shingle -fashion with a 2-ply composition modified bitumen roof system, consisting of Type IV asphalt applied modified bitumen fiber glass reinforced base sheet and covered with a torch applied U.L. Class A SBS modified bitumen membrane with factory applied white granule surface. 2. Modified Base Ply: ASTM D-6163, Type I, Grade S. A SBS modified bitumen membrane with a fiber glass reinforcement. Thickness shall be 90 mils (2.5 mm) minimum. Weight shall be 55 lbs. per 100 sf. nominal. Designed for hot asphalt application, Johns Manville DynaBase. 3. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet: ASTM D-6163, Type I, Grade G. Fiber glass reinforced, fire rated, SBS modified bitumen sheet with white granule surface. Nominal thickness shall be 165 mils. Designed for torch application. Nominal weight shall be 106 lbs. per 1 sq. roll. Johns Manville DynaWeld Cap FR. 4. Interply mopping for base ply: Asphalt shall be Type IV, ASTM D-312, as supplied by a source acceptable to the primary roofing manufacturer and eligible for inclusion under the coverage of the specified guarantee. G. Base Flashing 1. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet: ASTM D-6163, Type I, Grade G. Fiber glass reinforced, fire rated, SBS modified bitumen sheet with white granule surface. Nominal thickness shall be 165 mils. Designed for torch application. Nominal weight shall be 106 lbs. per 1 sq. roll. Johns Manville DynaWeld Cap FR. 2. Flashing Cement: Modified Bitumen flashing cement as recommended by roofing manufacturer. Johns Manville MBR Utility Cement, as required. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 5 H. Composition Stripping at Gravel Stops and Metal Flanges 1. Asphalt: ASTM-D-312, Type IV 2. Set primed metal flange in bed of MBR Utility Cement and secure to nailer per primary roofing manufacturers published details. 3. Cover this primed flange with a strip -in using the SBS modified bitumen base ply membrane set in hot asphalt prior to full sheet width application of the cap sheet. I. Roof Walk: 1. Preformed, skid -resistant boards consisting of modified asphalt, reinforcements and fillers with a ceramic granule surface on both sides. Dimension shall be 32" x 32" x 5/16-inch. Johns Manville DynaTred Roof Walkway. J. Cant Strip: 1. Perlite, 5-5/8 inch face (4 x 4 inches), nominal dimension. Johns Manville FesCant Plus. K. Roof Penetration Flashings: Pitch pans are not allowed on the project. Go with primary manufacturers liquid flashing system that can be included in the roofing system guarantee. JM PermaFlash system w/ a two -component elastomeric sealant and polyester reinforcement. Pitch pans now allowed. L. All other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation of roofing, shall be selected by approved manufacturer and subject to approval of Architect/Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. Inspect structural concrete deck for smoothness. Perform manufacturer's dryness test to ensure that deck is ready to receive insulation applied in hot asphalt. 2. Ensure that wood blocking has been installed as detailed in the plans and specifications. 3. Make sure that all counterflashing receivers, curbs, etc., are constructed in such a manner as to provide a minimum 8-inch base flashing height measured from the finished roofs surface to the top of the base flashing membrane. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 6 3.3 VAPOR RETARDER / TEMPORARY ROOF INSTALLATION A. To the primed surface, torch apply the SBS MB base sheet. Using a propane torch, apply the flame to the surface of the coiled portion of the roll until the surface reaches the proper application temperature. The flame should be moved from side to side and the membrane slowly unrolled while pressing onto the underlying surface. Do not overheat roll. B. Torch across the full width of the roll, then along the 4" lap area of previously installed roll making an L- shape. All laps shall be checked and where necessary re -sealed and buttered using a rounded trowel. Focus heat on the modified bitumen roll and not the insulation board. C. Dry edges of any depth will not be tolerated and must be corrected prior to installation of the modified bitumen cap sheet to avoid creating dry voids within the membrane assembly. 3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Base Layers (2) of Insulation and Taper: B. Starting at the low edge of the roof, solidly adhere the tapered insulation system using full 33 lb. per square applications of hot asphalt applied at EVT temperature. Board dimensions shall not exceed 4' X 4' top ensure proper adhesion. Install with edges butted tightly, long joints continuous, short joints staggered. Step in each board to ensure maximum adhesion. C. Subsequent Layers of Insulation: Offsetting all vertical joints by a minimum of 6-inches, solidly adhere subsequent layers using a 33 lb. per square application of hot asphalt applied at it's EVT temperature. Step in each board to ensure maximum adhesion. Joints should be butted tightly. Open joints of 1/4-inch or wider must be filled with scrap insulation D. Form crickets and saddles by solidly adhering tapered insulation panels over top layer of insulation using full 33 lb. per square moppings of hot asphalt as necessary to provide positive drainage at all portions of the roof area. Board edges shall be butted tightly with no gaps of a 1/4-inch or larger between them. Gaps of such size must be filled to top surface level with scrap insulation. E. Form minimum 4 foot square drain sumps using tapered insulation to form a smooth transition. F. If it is found after membrane installation that additional crickets or tapered are required, cut out the underlying membrane and prime the surface of the perlite insulation prior to installation of the new crickets. G. Cover Board Installation: Offsetting all vertical joints by a minimum of 6-inches, solidly adhere cover board using a 33 lb. per square application of hot asphalt applied at its EVT temperature, but not more than 455o F. Step in each board to ensure maximum adhesion. Joints should be butted loosely. Allow board to cool before installing base ply over it. H. Apply no more insulation than can be completely covered with the base ply membrane on same day. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 7 3.5 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Starting at the low edge of the roof, using SBS MB base sheet, start with a 18" width. Following 36-inch wide felts are to be applied full width, overlapping the preceding felts by 3" (sidelaps and endlaps) so that at least 1 ply of felt covers the substrate at all locations. Install each felt so that it is firmly and uniformly set, without voids, into the hot asphalt. Asphalt temperatures should be 400oF, or at Equiviscous Temperature (EVT), whichever is higher (but not more than 455o F). Asphalt should be applied just in front of the roll of felt at a nominal rate of 23 lbs. per square over the entire surface. Asphalt must bleed out from the sidelaps at all locations. Lightly broom base sheet to ensure proper adhesion. 1. Dry edges of any depth will not be tolerated and must be corrected prior to installation of the modified bitumen cap sheet to avoid creating dry voids within the membrane assembly. B. Modified Bitumen Cap Sheet -- Chalk lines to ensure a consistent and straight application of the cap sheet. Set the roll in the course to be followed and unroll completely. Then re -roll both ends to the middle of the roll. Using the propane torch, apply the flame to the surface of the coiled portion of the roll until the surface reaches the proper application temperature. The flame should be moved from side to side and the membrane slowly unrolled while pressing onto the underlying surface. Do not overheat roll. Minimum 4-inch side laps and endlaps 1. Torch across the full width of the roll, then along the 4" lap area of previously installed roll making an L-shape. All laps shall be checked and where necessary re -sealed and buttered using a rounded trowel. Focus heat on the modified bitumen roll and not the insulation board. 2. Modified asphalt must bleed out past the edge of the sheet by approximately 1/4-inch. Before the asphalt has an opportunity to cool, drop loose white granules into the fluid bitumen. C. Johns Manville's 2FID-HW (Alt) Modified Bitumen Specifications are an integral part of this specification. D. Steep -Sloped Areas (1/2-inch per foot or greater, if applicable): 1. Install nailers per manufacturer's published recommendations to act as insulation blocks and for backnailing roofing plies. Nailers should be installed in a direction perpendicular to the direction of slope and insulation boards must be cut to fit tightly between the nailers. 2. All plies of the roofing membrane must run in a direction parallel to the direction of slope. Endlaps at the upper end of each roll must terminate at and be nailed to the wood nailer a max. 8-inches on center using 1-inch tin -capped nails. 3. All manufacturer's published back -nailing recommendations must be followed. E. Cold Weather (below 50oF.) Application of Modified Bitumen: An asphalt must be used which has an EVT which can accommodate a minimum mop temperature of 425o. NEVER lay modified rolls on their side. Before starting each day, unroll several rolls of the MB sheets completely and turn over so that the black underside is exposed to the sun. This will warm the MB membrane and allow it to relax. 1. In cold weather, a close mopping technique is mandatory. Limit mop lead to a maximum of 4 feet in front of the roll and immediately unroll the sheet into the hot asphalt. Edges should be 'scuffed in' immediately after rolling the sheet in the asphalt. It is critical that "x MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 16 - 8 the laps be firmly adhered in the hot asphalt. Asphalt should always extrude from the entire lap. 3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Inspect walls, curb heights, counterflashings, etc., and check for conformance with minimum base flashing height of eight (8) -inches. Bring non -conforming areas to the attention of the Owner's Representative for correction. B. Primer: Prime all masonry, metal, or concrete surfaces from the top of the roof membrane to the termination of the flashing level with asphalt primer at the rate of 3/4 gallon per 100 square feet or as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow the primer to dry thoroughly. C. Install one ply each of the field base and cap ply at all intersections formed by vertical surfaces, and wherever curbed roof openings, wall, parapets, or other structure joint or penetrate roof. 1. All wall and curb flashings shall be nailed at their top edge in strict accordance with Johns Manville Flashing Specifications 6-inches on center, maximum, using 1-inch tin - capped nails immediately after flashing membrane installation. D. Install flashing in accordance with roofing manufacturer's specification. E. Membrane Flashings at Metal Flanges (gravel stops, vents, etc): All flange type flashings (except lead flanges at drains) such as gravel stops and vents shall be primed, set in mastic at approximately 1/8-inch thick, and securely stagger nailed 3 inches on center. 1. The flange shall then be stripped in with a ply of the SBS modified bitumen base sheet, extending a minimum 4-inches from the flange in all directions, prior to application of the full width cap sheet. F. All lead flange type flashings (at drains and lead stacks) shall be primed and set in mastic at approximately 1/8" thick. The flange shall be flashed as described in the preceding paragraph. G. Roofwalk: Install in locations indicated with a 6 inch gap between planks, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. H. No pitch pans allowed. Install manufacturer's liquid applied flashing system that is fully warrantable for the roof system guarantee's term in accordance with manufacturer's published details and instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY A. Protective Coverings: 1. Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist and kettles prior to starting work. 2. Lap protective coverings at least 6 inches, secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on covered surfaces. 3. Keep protective coverings in place for duration of roofing work. B. Special Protection: MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 0752 16 - 9 1. Provide approved special protection and avoid heavy traffic on completed work. C. Drippage of Bitumen: 1. Seal joints in and at edges of deck as necessary to prevent drippage of bitumen into building or down exterior walls. D. Damaged Work and Materials: 1. Restore work and materials damaged during handling of bitumen and installation of roofing materials to original condition or replace with new materials. 3.8 INSPECTION: A. Have an authorized representative of manufacturer supplying roofing system perform two in - progress inspections and provide written confirmations. B. Also, one Final Inspection after job completion shall be made by principal manufacturer's representative in the company of the Owner's representative. END OF SECTION 07 52 16 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 0752 16 - 10 SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Parapet cap flashing. 2. Counter flashings over base flashings. 3. Roof, sill and cant strip protection. 4. Counter flashings for roof mounted equipment, screens and hatches. B. Related Sections 1. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 04 21 00: Brick Masonry. 3. Section 04 20 00: Concrete Block Masonry. 4. Section 07 54 23: Fully Adherred TPO Roofing. 5. Section 07 92 00: Sealants and Caulking. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM A 526 - Steel sheet, zinc -coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, commercial quality. B. ASTM A 527 - Steel sheet, zinc -coated (galvanized) by the hot dip process, lock forming quality. C. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum alloy sheet and plate. D. FS TT S 00120C Sealing compound: Elastomeric type, single component. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00. B. Clearly detail shaping, jointing, length of sections, fastening, and installation details, thickness and type of metal, expansion joints and methods of anchoring to adjacent work. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide Owner with a warranty stating that metal flashings will properly shed water for a minimum period of two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion of the Work, as certified by Architect, and that damage resulting from failure to provide above stated performances will be repaired to satisfaction of Owner at no additional cost. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-1 i F l A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526, minimum 24 gauge thick, extra smooth, minimum spangle, tenision leveled, hot dipped galy. steel with coil coated 70% Kynar 5001 Hylar 5000 resin based fluoropolymer coating finish of 1.0 mil DFT with wash coat of .35 mil DFT on reverse side; 20 year warranty. 1. Color as selected from manufacturer's list. B. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 526, minimum 24 gauge thick, hot dipped galvanized steel G-90, Commercial quality, paint grip type. Utilize at areas not visible to public view. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Fasteners: Concealed hook strip or clip type, of same material as flashings, sized to suit application. B. Sealant: One component polysulphide, conforming to FD TT S 00230; nonstaining, nonbleeding, nonsagging, of color selected by Architect. C. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used. D. Nails, Rivets and Screws: Furnish in metal type compatible with sheet metal. E. Cleats: .06 inch thick aluminum, mill finish. 2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Formed Copings 1. Coil coated Kynar based resin system 24 gauge galvanized steel. Formed in 10-foot sections; lock exterior edges over continuous cleats to secure to substrate. 2. Extend sheet roofing over the top of wall and down the face until it overlaps the weather barrier - to provide a continuous weather/ air barrier. At locations without sheet roofing utilize peel and stick type `ice and water shield' 3. Cross Joints: Provide an `under' type splice joint of 8" wide coping metal centered under 1/4" wide joint. 4. Coping Corners: Mitered, seamed and permanently sealed; extend T-0" back from corner in each direction. 5. Bottom edges of the aprons on the copings, both front and back side, shall be hemmed and locked over with minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel cleats- at extensions over extending over the gap and masonry utilize min. 20 gauge material. All underside support framing/ cleats are intended to run continuous- with splices occurring staggered to coping splice joints.. The cleats shall be secured to parapet with screws at 12" o.c. the backside of the coping shall be securely attached to the wall system at 12" o.c. B. Metal Counter and Through -Wall Flashing 1. 26 gauge galvanized (coil coated if visible to view) steel formed in 8 foot sections; lap end joints 3 inches; do not solder joints; make continuous angles; overlap base flashing minimum of 3 inches. Extend thru-wall flashing at counterflashing through entire veneer thickness and provide water resistant connection to substrate. 2. Fabricate two- piece type for ease in re- roofing. 3. Provide L-shaped inside and outside corner pieces extending 4 inches each way from the corner. C. Umbrella Shields 1. 24 gauge galvanized steel, formed from one piece sheet metal; joint lapped 1/2 inch, pop -riveted and soldered; shield held in place with screwdriver adjusted pipe clamp. 2. Provide continuous bead of sealant at top edge for watertight condition. D. Conductor Heads: Configuration as shown; with overflow where required. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-2 E. Downspouts: Configuration as noted on drawings; provide braces at 2'-0" from each end; elbox 90 i degrees at bottom; hidden fastener straps. Provide covers at the bottom where these tie to civil drainage systems. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Workmanship: Conform to specifications and recommended practices of the Sheet Metal and Air - Conditioning National Association Architectural Manual, latest edition, for forming, soldering, anchoring, cleaning and provisions for thermal expansion and contraction. B. When work is required to be executed in conjunction with non-metallic type roofing and flashing products, coordinate sheet metal work in conjunction therewith and execute in such a manner as to permit required roofing bonds to be obtained. C. Provide all accessories or other items essential to completeness of sheet metal installation, even though not specifically shown or specified. All such items, unless otherwise shown or specified shall be of same kind of material as item to which applied. Nails, screws and bolts shall be of types best suited for purpose intended and of a composition that is compatible with metal to which it will contact. D. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. E. Form sections in maximum practical lengths. Make allowances for expansion at joints. F. Sheet metal work shall be formed, fabricated and installed to adequately provide for expansion and contraction in the completed work, and shall finish water and weathertight throughout. Lock seam work shall be made flat and true to line and sweated full of solder. Flat lock seams, and lap seams where soldered, shall be at least 1/2" wide. Lap seams, not soldered, shall lap according to pitch but in no case less than 3". Seams shall be made in direction of flow. G. Wipe, wash and clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering. H. Sheet metal work exposed to the weather shall be permanently watertight and weathertight, with suitable provision made for free expansion and contraction without causing leaks. I. Separate dissimilar metals from each other by painting each metal surface in the area of contact with a heavy application of bituminous coating, or by other permanent separation as recommended by the manufacturers of the dissimilar metals. Any defective work shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify dimensions and take measurements necessary at site before fabrication of items to insure proper fit. Carefully examine areas to receive sheet metal and report defects and deficiencies. Do not start installation until conditions are corrected. B. Furnish to appropriate trades flashing and other sheet metal items requiring installation by others, and coordinate with other trades when joining with their work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install flashing and sheet metal as indicated and in accordance with SMACNA Manual. y FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-3 �. 6 B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide soldered flat -lock seams, with metal folded back to form hem on r concealed side of exposed metal. C. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction in sheet metal items exceeding 15'-0" in running length. Place expansion joints at 10'-0" o.c. maximum and 2'-0" from corners and intersections. D. Secure flashings in place using specified type fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as flashings. E. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate. F. All flashings having the top edge exposed shall be counterflashed with metal in strips not over 10 feet in length, shaped to lie flat against the flashing and overlapping the same not less than 4". Exposed edges shall be doubled under hemmed 1/2" to straight lines. End joints shall lap 3", and at corners the metal shall be bent around the angle or locked and soldered. G. Joints shall be blind soldered where possible and all excess removed. H. Surfaces to be covered with sheet metal shall be smooth and free from defects of every description. All such surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, rubbish and other foreign materials before the sheet metal work is started. All projecting nails shall be driven flush with the roof boarding. I. Formed coping splice pieces shall be installed with double sealant tape parrallel to and at either side of the joint. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00-4 SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the following Sections and Divisions to properly execute the work in order to maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and floors where firestopping and smoke -seals are applied. 1. Division 4: Masonry Work 2. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealers 3. Section 09 29 00 Drywall 4. Divisions 22, 23, 26, 27: Mechanical Plumbing, Electrical, and Low Voltage Systems Work. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing firestopping for fire -rated construction. This includes: 1. All openings in fire -rated floor and wall assemblies, both blank (empty) and those accommodating penetrating items such as cable conduits, pipes, ducts, etc. 2. Gaps (openings) between exterior curtain walls and the outer perimeter edge of structural floor. 3. Openings at each floor level in shafts or stairwells. 4. Joints in rated walls and floors between similar and dissimilar construction materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- stopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by local Building code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 fire tests, ASTM E-1966 or UL 2079 for construction joints. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating, when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on the penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. B. Fire- stopping material shall be free of asbestos, PCBs, ethylene glycol, and lead. C. Do not use any product containing solvents or that requires hazardous waste disposal. D. Fire- stopping shall be performed by a contractor trained or approved by firestop manufacturer. E. Equipment used shall be in accordance with firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions. F. Fire- stopping shall be inspected by a third party independent inspection service and a report furnished to the architect or owners representative during all phases of construction where it is possible to cover up areas requiring to be firestopped. Service provided by Owner. Coordination shall be the responsibility if the General Contractor. Should defects be discovered, subsequent inspections will be at the cost of the installing contractor. G. Single Source Responsibility: Provide firestop systems for all conditions from a single manufacturer. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of firestop material to be installed. Literature shall indicate product characteristics, typical uses, performance and limitation criteria, and test data. FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-1 B. Shop drawings: Show typical installation details for methods of installation. Indicate which firestop materials will be used where. C. Submit manufacturer's installation procedures for each type of product. D. Submit manufacturer's Warranty. If Manufacturer's states that the Owner or user shall determine the suitability of the product for it's intended use, or Warranty states that that the Owner or user shall test application for specific use, then the Contractor shall have independently monitored tests performed on the construction configurations identical to the proposed construction on this project, and Contractors shall submit copies of Test Reports covering same, for review by the Architect. E. Owner may decide to provide the services of an independent and qualified inspection agency. Contractor shall provide access, notify inspection agency, and receive approval prior to concealment. Contractor shall replace any applications damaged by inspection and applications deemed unacceptable. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with manufacturers name, product identification, lot numbers, UL-labels, and mixing and installation instructions, as applicable. B. Store materials in the original, unopened containers or packages, and under conditions recommended by manufacturers. C. All Firestop materials shall be installed prior to expiration of shelf life. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conform to Manufacturer's printed instructions for installation and when applicable, curing in accordance with temperature and humidity. Conform to ventilation and safety requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Firestop Contractor shall warrant that firestopping systems used meet firestopping requirements as herein specified. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate this work as required with work of other trades. B. Firestopping shall precede gypsum board finishing. 1.9 PROTECTION A. Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain exposed in the completed work, provide protection as necessary to prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect as necessary against damage from other construction activities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Firestopping shall meet the specified requirements. FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-2 SECTION 07 92 00 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Clean and prepare joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. 3. Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00: Concrete. 2. Section 04 21 00: Brick. 3. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. 4. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Section 08 40 00: Entrances and Storefronts. 6. Section 08 80 00: Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C-790 - Recommended practices for use of latex sealing components. 2. ASTM C-920 - Elastomer Joint Sealants. B. Federal Specifications 1. FS TT-S-00230C (2), Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures). 2. FS TT-S-00227E (3), Sealing compound, Elastomeric Type, Multi -component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum two years experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Arrange for technical representative to be on Project site to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation. C. Job Mock-up 1. Prepare sample application in location directed by Architect. 2. Mock-up to constitute standard of acceptance for remaining work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for sealant, backing and related materials. B. Samples 1. Submit color charts for selection. 1.5 WARRANTY SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00-1 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Installation of Firestops shall be performed by either a specialty contractor specializing in Firestop application (FM 4991 Approved Contractor), or general or sub -contractors with experience in similar applications and projects with installers qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 2. Apply Firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Coordinate with plumbing, mechanical, electrical and other trades to assure that all pipe, conduit,cable, and other items which penetrate fire rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of Firestops, schedule and sequence the work to assure that partitions and other construction, which would conceal penetrations, is not erected prior to the installation of Firestops. B. Dam Construction 1. Install dams when required to properly contain Firestopping materials within openings and as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Incombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the Firestop system. C. Field Quality Control 1. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 2. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. 3. Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the completed Work to a uniform and level condition. 4. All areas of Work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code authorities. 5. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excesses materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished Work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent Surfaces. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00-6 SECTION 07 92 00 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Clean and prepare joint surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing materials. 3. Provide joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00: Concrete. 2. Section 04 21 00: Brick. 3. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. 4. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal. 5. Section 08 40 00: Entrances and Storefronts. 6. Section 08 80 00: Glazing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM C-790 - Recommended practices for use of latex sealing components. 2. ASTM C-920 - Elastomer Joint Sealants. B. Federal Specifications 1. FS TT-S-00230C (2), Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures). 2. FS TT-S-00227E (3), Sealing compound, Elastomeric Type, Multi -component (for caulking, sealing and glazing in buildings and other structures). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Minimum two years experience in applying sealants and approved by manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Representative: Arrange for technical representative to be on Project site to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for use of materials and to check installation. C. Job Mock-up 1. Prepare sample application in location directed by Architect. 2. Mock-up to constitute standard of acceptance for remaining work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for sealant, backing and related materials. B. Samples 1. Submit color charts for selection. 1.5 WARRANTY SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00-1 A. Warranty materials and workmanship against air and water leakage for five-year period from date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Polysulfide (Type 1) 1. Two part conforming to FS TT-D-0027E, Class A, Type 1 (self -leveling) or Type II (non sag) as recommended by manufacturer for application. 2. Acceptable Products a. Synthacalk GD-5, Pecora Corporation. b. 350, PRC C. Sonolastic, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. B. Modified Polyurethane (Type 2) 1. Two part conforming to FS TT-S-00227E, Class A, Type II. 2. Acceptable Products a. Dynatrol II, Pecora. b. NP2, Sonneborri-Contech, Inc. C. Dymeric 240 FC, Tremco Inc. C. Polyurethane (Type 3) 1. One part conforming to FS TT-S-000230C, Class A, Type II. 2. Acceptable Products a. Dynatrol I, Pecora. b. NP1, Sonneborn-Contech, Inc. C. Dymonic FC, Tremco. d. Sikaflex la, Sika Corporation. D. Polyurethane (Type 4) 1. Two part conforming to FS TT-S-00027E, Class A, Type I. 2. Acceptable Products a. NR-300, Pecora. T b. No. 200, PRC. `- C. SL-2, Sonneborn-Contech. d. THC-900/901, Tremco. E. Acrylic, Solvent Cure (Type 5) 1. One part, FS TT-S-230. 2. Acceptable Products a. Unicrylic, Pecora. b. Permacryl, Schnee -Moorehead Chemicals, Inc. C. Mono, Tremco Manufacturing Company. F. Nondrying, Nonskinning (Type 6) 1. One part sealing compound. 2. Acceptable Products a. GC-55, Noncung, Goal Chemical. b. BR-96, Pecora. C. Curtain Wall Sealant, Tremco. G. Acrylic Latex (Type 7) 1. One part, non -sag, ASTM C 834-76. 2. Acceptable Products SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00-2 a. AC-20, Pecora. b. Tremflex 834, Tremco Inc. C. Sonolac, Sonneborn. H. Acoustical Sealant (Type 8) 1. One part, non -sag, acrylic latex. 2. Acceptable Products a. AC-20 Acoustical Sealant, Pecora. b. Acoustical Sealant, Tremco. C. Acoustical Sealant, USG. I. Paving Control Joints (Type 9) 1. One part, self -leveling. 2. Acceptable Product a. Pecora NR-201. b. Tremco Vulken 45 SSL, Vulkem 45 J. Paving Expansion Joints (Type 10) 1. One part, self -leveling. 2. Acceptable Product a. Pecora NR-200. C. Tremco Vulken 45 SSL, Vulkem 45 K. Silicone (Type 11) 1. One part single component elastomeric sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 2. Acceptable Product a. Dow Corning 756 or GE Silpruf 2000 or Tremco Spectrem 2. L. Backer Rod: Closed cell expanded polyurethane or polyethylene "Denver" foam, compatible with sealant; sized and shaped to control depth of sealant; and to maintain 20% to 50% compression of material. M. Joint Cleaners and Primers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. N. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene or Teflon tape, 11 mil thickness, colored; as recommended by sealant manufacturer. O. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. P. Sealant Tape 1. Compressible adhesive -cohesive tape of cross -linked butyl polyisobutylene rubber that accommodates variations and movement, sized as necessary to allow for joint movement of + or - 25%. 2. Acceptable Product: PTI 606, Protective Treatments, Inc. Q. Expansion Joint Filler 1. Closed cell polyethylene compatible with sealant. 2. Acceptable Product: Sonoflex F., Sonneborn or H. Majeske Co. of Aston, Pa. 2.2 COLORS A. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00-3 I 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine joints to be sealed for construction defects which would adversely affect execution of work. B. Ensure that masonry and concrete have cured 28 days minimum. C. Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean joint surfaces, using joint cleaner as necessary, free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust, lacquers, laitance, release agents, liquid water repellent, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion or performance of sealing materials. B. Mask areas adjacent to joints to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces. Remove masking promptly after joint has been completed. C. If recommended by manufacturer of sealant materials, prime joints to prevent staining or to assist bond. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Install sealant materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to minimally meet the requirements of ASTM Guide C1193. B. Ensure ambient and surface temperatures and joint conditions are suitable for materials to be installed. C. Install backing material in joints using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing. Do not twist rod stock while installing. D. Install joint back-up materials to provide optimum joint profile and in manner to provide not less than 1/4" depth of sealant when tooled. E. Do not exceed shelf life or pot life of materials and installation times as stated by manufacturers. F. Mix sealants thoroughly with a mechanical mixer without mixing air into materials. Continue mixing until material is uniform color and free from streaks of unmixed material. G. Before sealant is commenced, test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion to precast work. H. Furnish gun grade sealant to suit joint condition. Use gun nozzles of proper sizes to suit joints and sealant material. I. Install sealant with pressure operated devices. J. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints full. Sealants shall bond to both sides of joint. Sealant shall not adhere to back-up materials; provide bond -breaker where necessary. K. Ensure that correct sealant depth is maintained. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for proper width to depth ratio and maximum joint width. L. Tool joints to required configuration within ten minutes of sealant application. M. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling. 3.4 CLEANING SEALANTS AND CAULKING 07 92 00-4 �.y DIVISION 8 DOORS & WINDOWS The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow -metal work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details. C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. D. Documentation that the door and frame are compliant with FEMA 361 Guidelines and the ICC 500. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product test reports. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Republic Doors and Frames. 5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Storm Rated Tornado Resistant Door and Frame: Door and frame shall meet the requirement listed in and be compliant with FEMA 361 Guidelines and the ICC 500. 1. Designed to endure tornado force winds and flying debris. Developed to resist missile penetration to protect occupants from injury. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1 B. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 1 OC. 1. Smoke- and Draft -Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. C. Fire -Rated, Borrowed -Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. 2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). C. Face: Metallic -coated, cold -rolled steel sheet, 16 gage. At doors with detention locks provide 12 gage doors. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush and Model 3, Stile and Rail. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard at interior locations. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, 16 gage. At doors with detention locks provide 12 gage frames. b. Construction: Full profile welded. C. Borrowed lights shall have a 2" total dimension- not rabbits or stops protruding beyond that dimension. 4. Exposed Finish: Primed. At the jail provide A60 throughout. 2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW -METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Tornado Resistant Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. p 1. Physical Performance: FEMA 361 and ICC 500, and min. Level A according to SDI A250.4. [Basis of Design] Ceco StonnPro 361. 2. Doors: a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). C. Face: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm)- 16 gage. At storm proof doors provide 12 gage door faces. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush and Model 3, Stile and Rail. e. Core: Polystyrene. f. Dual weatherstrip. , 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm)- 16 gage typical; at storm proof doors provide 14 gage frames. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Galvanizing: A60 at interior and G90 coating at exterior and at all storm doors. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime. 6. Provide thermal breaks, fill and debridge with polyurethane and foam insulation in frames; or weather-stripped kerf frames. �? HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 0811 13 - 2 2.5 TORNADO RESISTANT SHUTTERS A. Tornado Resistant Extra -Heavy -Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3. 1. Physical Performance: FEMA 361 and ICC 500, and min. Level A according to SDI A250.4. [Basis of Design] Ceco StormPro Shutter. httn:///,,vww.eecodoorxom/Other/Ceco/Documents/StormPro; Shutter/Expanded%20StonnPro%20Shutter%20 Product%20Bul letin.pdf 2. Shutters: a. Type: 4 sided frame and heavy duty door. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). C. Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm)- 14 gage. d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush and Model 3, Stile and Rail. e. Door Core: Polystyrene and liner. f. Dual weatherstrip. g. Undercut '/4" max. 3. Frames: a. Materials: Metallic -coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 14 gage. b. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Galvanizing: A60. 5. Exposed Finish: Prime. B. Hardware shall be Corbin Russwin FE6700 Series concealed multi -point lock with McKinney StormPro hinges. 2.6 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick. 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable -type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 1 E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Power -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion -resistant materials. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. H. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing). I. Glazing: Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow -metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors and interior wet location doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. Provide a steel cap; tack welded with seams filled flush. C. Hollow -Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match coursing, and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high. 5) At storm doors at a minimum install per the above requirements, but not less than every other course vertically, and at 16" o.c. at head. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. C. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 4 1, d. Post installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 min) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double -Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow -metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; 1 include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow -metal work for hardware; and with the FEMA 361 and ICC 500 requirements. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow -metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow -metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers: Provide sight -proof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111 C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold -rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame. B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. At Door 101A provide removable mullion. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 min) thick. D. Guard Boxes: At locations where access control devices are wired to the frame or through the frame to the door, provide closed metal boxes, min. 26 ga. same coating as door. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hollow -Metal Frames: Install hollow -metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. C. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post -installed expansion anchors. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral -fiber insulation. 6. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In -Place Metal or Wood -Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow -metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. C. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. 9. Coordinate frame width with removable mullion at storm doors. B. Hollow -Metal Doors: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Steel Doors: a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). C. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 5/8" max. at storm doors. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke -Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow -metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 6 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow -metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow -metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 8 SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer and plastic -laminate faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. C. Samples: For plastic -laminate door faces and factory -finished doors. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. ManL1 act«1_et_s:, Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: l . A1__gun-a Hardwoods. Inc_ 2. Eggers Industries. 3. Marshfield DoorSvstems, inc. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Classrooms, multiple user toilets, assembly spaces, corridors and exits, break rooms. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416-1 C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL IOC. 1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 3. Pairs: Provide fire -retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed -steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. D. Smoke- and Draft -Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784. E. Particleboard -Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through - bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with structural -composite -lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. F. Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N). b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 1bf (1780 N ). G. Mineral -Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire -protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding capability approved for use in doors of fire -protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved screw - holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2.3 VENEER -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces at rooms with wood paneled walls; Premium, with Grade A faces elsewhere. 2. Species: Red oak. 3. Cut: Rotary cut Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center -balance at rooms with wood paneled walls; Balance match elsewhere. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by mullions. 7. Core: Particleboard typical; structural composite lumber at doors with exit devices. 8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces shall be bonded to core using a hot press. 2.4 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 Js_ i 2. Plastic -Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As scheduled, or if not scheduled, than as selected to match wood grain doors/ appearance. 4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Hardwood edges for staining to match faces. 5. Core: Particleboard or structural composite lumber. 6. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before faces are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS A. Wood -Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire -Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood -veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire - protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire -protection rating indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 2.7 FACTORY FINISHING 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane System 10, UV curable, water based or System 11, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Open -grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For coordination and installation, see Section 08 70 00 "Door Hardware." FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft -control doors according to NFPA 105. 3. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. C. Install to operate freely, but not loosely, free from hinge bound conditions, sticking, or binding. Do not install in frames which would hinder operation of doors. Hang free from rattling when in a latched condition. Remove and replace doors which are warped, twisted, or which are not in true planes. D. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. Replace doors damaged during installation. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 SECTION 08 29 00 ACCESS DOORS PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Access doors for block, drywall, and ceramic tile. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00: Poured- In- Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 09 20 00: Lath and Plaster. 3. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board Systems. 4. Section 09 30 00: Tile. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturing Qualifications: Provide access doors as complete units, produced by single acceptable manufacturers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein, A. Milcor Division of Inryco, Inc., Milwaukee, Wisconsin. 2.2 ACCESS DOORS A. Gypsum Drywall Walls 1. Milcor Style DW; size and location as indicated on Drawings. B. Gypsum Drywall Ceilings 1. Milcor Style ATR; size and location as indicated on Drawings. C. Ceramic Tile/Masonry 1. Milcor Style M - Standard; size and location as indicated on Drawings. 2. Stainless steel. 3. Keyed at openings greater than 16" square D. Fire -Rated 1. Milcor fire -rated; size and location as indicated on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install access doors in improperly prepared wall openings. B. Install in accordance with approved manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install with face of door panel flush with adjacent finished surface. ACCESS DOORS 08 29 00-1 END OF SECTION Fi ACCESS DOORS 08 29 00-2 SECTION 08 40 00 - ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to aluminum doors and frames as described herein and/or as shown on the drawings. B. Related Sections 3. Section 08 70 00: Hardware. 4. Section 08 80 00: Glazing. 5. Division 26: Electrical. 6. Division 28: Access Control. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B-221 - Aluminum -alloy extruded bars, rods, wire, shapes and tubes. B. AA-M12C22 A41 and 44 - Caustic etch and anodic oxide treatment for exposed members. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 0130 00. B. Show plans, elevations and details, including thickness of metal and glass, methods of glazing, anchoring, fastening and joining, hardware, weather-stripping, caulking, trim and accessories, and other pertinent data and information. 1. Include/ coordinate junction box sizes and dimensional locations; and related conduit and power requirements. C. Indicate details at large scale, not less than 3" = 1'-011 . 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate work of this section with requirements of related sections listed above to provide complete installation of system, including but not limited to framing system, hardware, glazing, caulking, trim, and accessories. B. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years experience in fabrication and installation of systems of similar nature as required herein. C. Design Criteria 1. Wind Load: Design system to comply with the International Building Code; and to withstand a minimum wind load of 25 psf with maximum deflection of any framing member not to exceed 1/175 of its span. No permanent deformation or damage shall result when wind load is removed. D. Thermal Expansion and Contraction: Design system, including anchors and attachments, to withstand temperature differential of 100 degrees F. without damage or deformation. 1.5 DELIVERY OF MATERIALS A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-1 [ 1.6 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS A. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards established by the Texas Commission on Licensing and Regulation, Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes with regard to accessibility to the handicapped; and with the ADAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines), and ANSI A117.1. If the product(s) specified does not meet these requirements, it shall be modified to comply. Modifications shall be noted on the hardware schedule. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Furnish warranty agreeing to replace entrance doors and glass which fail in breakage, materials or workmanship within three years of date of acceptance. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, subject to requirements herein, A. U. S. Aluminum B. Kawneer C. Vistawall D. EFCO 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Extrusions and Sheet 1. Aluminum: 6063-T5 or other suitable alloy, temper and thickness recommended by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish and control of color. B. Fasteners 1. Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other non -corrosive metal fasteners guaranteed by manufacturer to be compatible with doors, frames, storefronts and other items being fastened. 2. For exposed fasteners, provide Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. 3. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. C. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel units of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Provide 2.0 oz. hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A123, applied after fabrication. D. Inserts: For required anchorage into concrete, furnish inserts of cast iron, malleable iron or 12 gauge steel hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead -shield or toothed -steel, drilled -in, expansion bolt anchors. F. Bituminous Coatings: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat. G. Weatherstripping 1. Provide manufacturer's standard replaceable dual stripping of wool or nylon wool pile with nylon fabric and aluminum strip backing. 2. Weather-stripping includes stripping at jamb rails, head and bottom rails. 3. Provide door sweeps at all exterior and vestibule doors. Provide additional door sweeps at the interior side of exterior doors that don't have a tight seal. 4. Comply with AAMA 701.2. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-2 t H. Sealants and Gaskets: Provide sealants and gaskets in fabrication, assembly and installation of work which are recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non -shrinking, non -migrating and weathertight. 2.3 STILE AND RAIL SWINGING DOORS A. Swinging Doors: Wide stile Kawneer 500 Heavy Wall IR Series; u.n.o. 1. Single acting; u.n.o. 2. Glazing to be 1" insulated, laminated. 3. Provide 7'/z" top rails, 6" intermediated rails and 12" tall bottom rails. B. Hardware: 1. Coordinate and install hardware at some doors that have hardware provided by Section 08 70 00. Thresholds, weatherstripping, pivots, etc. to be provided by this section. 2. Continuous Hinge: Pemko FM with power transfer SER module at doors with electric function. Provide at all doors, UNO. 3. Exit Device: Von Duprin XP 98L, with E [electric function and related power transfer, transformer, integral RTX, etc for complete operation] at locations noted. Electric locks to have integral request to exit. 4. Power Transfer: Von Duprin EPT-218. Provide at all doors with electric function locksets and exit devices. 5. Closer: LCN 4040 series. Provide heavy duty arm, typical a. Door opening force shall be 8.5 lb. max. at exterior doors; 5 lb. max. at interior doors. 6. Door Stops: Provide one stop for each door leaf. a. Wall Stop: Glynn Johnson WB I IX. b. Floor Stop: Glynn Johnson FB18D. 7. Threshold: Pemko 170A. Provide at all exterior doors, interior vestibule doors, and where noted. 8. Removable astragal at pairs: Von Duprin 9. Door Contacts: Locknetics 679-05; concealed in head type contacts. a. Provide at all exterior and vestibule doors, at all doors with electric function, and where noted; concealed wiring in frame to the access control system. 2.4 EXTERIOR FRAMING A. Kawneer, or US Aluminum `IR 500' storm wall framing and doors; small and large missile; 2'V2" x 5"; 12 psf water infiltraton resistant; design 65 psf/ structural =/- 97.5 psf. 2.5 INTERIOR FRAMING A. Wall wrap type framing system- Frameworks Manufacturing, Houston, Tx. Type 1 typical. 2.6 FINISH: A. Clear anodic coating AA-M12-C22-A41. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Coordination of Fabrication 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand all loads which will be applied when system is in place. 3. Coordinate door and frames with hardware for reinforcing, door profiles, preparation. 4. Provide break metal at exposed adjacent construction that should not be left exposed. ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-3 B. Prefabrication 1. Provide each unit of framework continuous. 2. Disassemble only to extent necessary for shipment and installation. 3. Comply with requirements of Section 08800 for glazing work. 4. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 5. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support to structure. 6. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing bituminous paint or preformed separators which will prevent contact and corrosion. C. Aluminum Framing 1. Provide thermal isolation between exterior and interior aluminum extrusions. 2. Fabricate frame assemblies with mitered or coped joints. pi 3. Reinforce to develop full strength and maximum rigidity in framework. 4. Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated; provide sill flashing at all exterior locations whether shown or not. ri 5. Reinforce internally with steel shapes as required to support loads. 6. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of contacting members. 7. Seal horizontals to lead moisture accumulation to exterior. 8. Fabricate framing for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without being detrimental to appearance or performance. D. Hardware 1. Coordinate with Section 08 70 00 of these Specifications. If there is a conflict between the hardware scheduled herein and that section allow for the more expensive hardware. If no hardware is scheduled allow for mortise exit devices, closers and pivots for bidding purposes. 2. Refer to frame, door and hardware schedules and details for hardware items furnished to .. manufacturer for installation. 3. Receive hardware supplied in accordance with Section 08 70 00 and coordinate with requirements of this Section. 4. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware. 5. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. 6. Install hardware, except surface -mounted hardware, at fabrication plant. 7. Remove as required for final finishing operations and for delivery and installation of work at Project site. 8. Mount centerline of door pull grip or push/ pull bar at 42" A.F.F. unless that conflicts with hardware; 38" to centerline of lever at locksets and panic devices, (max. 48 in. A.F.F.); comply with Americans with Disabilities Act guidelines in regards to mounting heights, opening force, etc. Modify hardware, at no cost to Owner to comply if product specified does not comply; inform architect of modifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Limit Variations from Plumb and Level 1. 1/8" in 10' vertically. 2. 1/8" in 20' horizontally. B. Limit Variations from Theoretical Location: 3/8" for any member at any location. C. Limit Offsets in Theoretical End -to -End and Edge -to -Edge Alignment 1. 1/16" from flush surfaces not more than 2" apart and including surfaces not more than 1/4" out -of - flush. 2. 1/8" for surfaces more than 2" apart or out -of -flush by more than 1/4". ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-4 f� t 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames. C. Anchor securely in place allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. D. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum from concrete at contact points. P E. Set sill members and other members in bed of compound or with joint fillers or gaskets to provide weathertight construction. 1. Provide brake metal at locations noted, of sufficient thickness to perform properly at location utilized. To prevent oil canning use minimum 0.090" at 4" dimensions and 0.125" thickness at locations up to 8" of infill. F. Refer to Section 07 92 00 for elastomeric sealants and joint fillers to be installed as part of this Section after installation of frame assemblies. G. Refer to Section 08 80 00 for installation of glass to be "glazed" into frames as part of this Section. H. Provide weathertight closure strips between storefront system and adjacent construction on interior and exterior surfaces. I. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage. J. Provide protective treatment and other precautions required through remainder of construction period. K. Ensure entrance and storefront system will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance. 3.3 DOOR ERECTION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Set frames in exact locations, level, plumb and in alignment with each other. C. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Replace cracked, scratched, broken or otherwise damaged glass. B. Remove adhered matter and excess sealant glazing materials. C. Wash glass on interior and exterior to remove paint, soil, prints and foreign matter. Clean glass only with mild detergent and water recommended by glass manufacturer. Do not use abrasive materials. END OF SECTION ( ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-5 ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 40 00-6 SECTION 08 70 00 HARDWARE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Included 1. Finish hardware for all doors as indicated and required by actual conditions at the building. Furnish all necessary screws, special screws, bolts, expansion shields and all other devices for the proper application of the hardware. 2. Coordinate with and provide locksets and closers for aluminum doors with sixty series hardware numbers. B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 11 00: Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Section 08 40 00: Entrances and Storefronts. 3. Section 08 21 00: Wood Doors. 5. Division 26: Electrical. 6. Division 28: Access Control. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide proper hardware, bearing U.L. label for labeled doors as shown on the Drawings. B. Hardware as scheduled is intended as a guideline for type, quality and function. Hardware schedule is assumed to be complete, however, Contractor shall be responsible for checking accuracy and extent of schedule. Omission of any door and/or hardware item shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility from furnishing all hardware required for proper door function and operation. C. Additional hardware required, and/or hardware which requires a change from that specified due to actual job conditions, shall conform to general type, quality and function as set forth herein. D. Manufacturer's Representative: Furnish services of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to prepare hardware schedule, keying, coordination with other trades, consultation with Architect and Owner, and on -site inspection. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. ANSI Al 15.2 - Door and frame preparation for bored or cylindrical locks for 1-3/4 inch doors. 2. ANSI Al 15.9 - Door and frame preparation for closer, offset hung, single acting. 3. ANSI A156.1 - Butts and hinges. 4. ANSI A156.2 - Locks and lock trim. 5. ANSI A156.4 - Door controls (closers). 6. ANSI A156.6 - Architectural door trim. 7. ANSI A156.7 - Template hinges. B. BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01300. Follow Architect's hardware schedule numbering system or provide a cross-referencing index. Provide two complete sets of catalog cut sheets, or product data sheets. HARDWARE 08 70 00-1 f. B. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. C. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturers to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut-outs for the hardware. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Furnish materials at time requested, tagged or labeled for intended units. B. Pack each item of hardware separately, complete with necessary screws, instructions and installation templates. Mark each container with item number corresponding to number on hardware schedule. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide one set of extra materials for the Owner's use for each of the following: 1. Provide 3 floor stops and 2 wall stops. 2. Provide 4 lock cores. 1.7 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS A. All hardware shall meet the requirements of 2012 Texas Accessibility Standards established by the Texas Commission on Licensing and Regulation, Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statutes with regard to accessibility to the handicapped; and with the ADAAG (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidelines). If the product specified does not meet these requirements, it shall be modified to comply. Modifications shall be noted on the hardware schedule. 1.8 TORNADO RESISTANT REQUIREMENTS A. Storm Rated Tornado Resistant Door and Frame Assembly: Door, frame and all hardware shall be coordinated to meet the requirements to be compliant with FEMA 361 Guidelines and the ICC 500; to endure tornado force winds and flying debris. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Storm Rated Doors [basis of design Assa Abloy/ Ceco StormPro 361 ] 1. Any substitution shall be provided with assembly test information to demonstrate full assembly compliance. 2. Butt Hinges: McKinney SP3784 hinges. 3. Exit Device: 3 point latching surface mounted Sargent M8700 series; or Corbin Russwin F400 S series or Yale 7180F series. 4. Closer: Sargent 281 series; Norton 7500 series; Corbin Russwin DC8000 series; Yale 4400 series. B. Butt Hinges 1. Manufacturer: Stanley Hardware or McKinney Manufacturing. 2. Type: Full mortise templates hinges, 3 knuckle type, plain -bearing, except doors with closers or doors over 40 inches wide shall receive concealed ball -bearing type; Stanley 1900 and CB 1900.Utilize bronze hinges at areas of high moisture- locker rooms, multi- water closet toilet rooms, exterior doors, etc. 3. Hinge Size: 4%" x 4'/z" at interior and exterior doors. 4. Furnish quantity of hinges per door as follows: a. Doors up to 85" high or up to 38" wide: three butts. b. Doors over 85" high or over 38" wide, and storm doors: four butts. HARDWARE 08 70 00-2 �i 5. Security studs and extra heavy weight at exterior doors; security studs at outswinging corridor and storm doors. 6. Utilize continuous hinges at aluminum doors: Pemko CFM 83 HD I, SER, unless noted otherwise. Electric function at electric locksets. C. Locksets and Latchsets 1. Manufacturer: Yale or Sargent. 2. Design and Type: a. Heavy duty mortise, ANSIBHMA A156.3 Series 1000 mortise locks, Grade 1; Yale 8700 Series Pebble Beach PBR. b. Removable core. C. Function as scheduled. d. Backsets and strike plates as required by conditions. 3. Electric Mortise Lockset: Same lock model, style, etc. as typical lockset, Sargent 8270 Series with continuous duty selenoid, or similar by Yale 8791FL [key side unlocked by key or electrically, room side free exit w/ integral RTE feature, UNO; fail secure]. Provide a SPDT switch that monitors the full extension of the main latch- extend wiring to adjacent to the other access control feed, and label. 4. Provide lockguards at outward swinging locked doors. 5. Coordinate and provide cylinders and cores for locked aluminum doors. D. Deadbolts: Cylinder deadlocks, same manufacturer as locksets; cylinder keyed one side; Lori 4147 thumbturn, unless noted otherwise. Keyed both sides at k/k. E. Surface -mounted Closers 1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. LCN Closers b. Dorma C. Rixon d. Sargent 2. Type: LCN "Smoothee" 4040 Series at exterior, 4041 at interior; Sargent 1430 at exterior; 1431 at interior; Rixon 2020 Series at exterior, handicap 2020 at interior; Dorma 8900 series. Adjustable sizes; to meet handicap requirements, 5 lb at interior doors, 8 lb at exterior doors. Fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action, with back check; min. ANSI Grade 1. 3. Heavy-duty closer: LCN "Smoothee" 4100, at corridor to main use type rooms, and exterior doors. 4. Mount closers away from public view; not on corridor side. 5. Door opening force shall be 8.5 lb. max. at exterior doors; 5 lb. max. at interior doors. F. Door Stops: Provide one stop for each door leaf. 1. Wall Stop: Trimco 1278CX. 2. Floor Stop: Trimco 1211 wrought dome type door bumper. 3. Exterior Floor Stop: Glynn Johsnson FB18S. G. Overhead Stop 1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Glynn Johnson; Rixon. 2. Type:Glynn Johnson GJ 90MA-7 H. Push Plates 1. Manufacturer: Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2. Type: No. 84; .050" US32D bio-stainless steel; 10" x 20". (interior doors). 3. Mount with bottom of plate to match bottom of pull plate; wide side of plate at top. I" HARDWARE 08 70 00-3 I. Pulls 1. Manufacturer: Rockwood Manufacturing Company. 2. Type: 110 x 70C; .050" US32D bio stainless steel. 3. Mount with centerline of pull at 48" above finished floor. J. Silencers: Trimco 1229B or Baldwin 4035. Provide three silencers minimum per single door; two per door at pairs of doors. K. Door Bottom 1. Manufacturer: Pemko. 2. Type: 315DN (surface) (C clear anodized L. Door Contacts: Locknetics 679-05 WD or HM; concealed in jamb type contacts. 1. Wire to above ceiling minimum; provide label on wires including voltage. 2. Provide at all electric mortise locksets; wire to the device that operates the lock. M. Weatherstripping 1. Jambs and Head: PemkoS88. 2. Threshold: Pemko 170A. 3. Door Bottom: Pemko 234 DV at HM, 313CN at wood; pick appropriate type. 4. Astragal: Pemko 355CS (hollow metal). N. Threshold: Pemko 170A. O. Astragal: Pemko 357D, P. Flush Bolts: Ives 358 and 458; provide dustproof strikes at floors. Provide extensions as required so the reach for the top flush bolts is 6'-0". 1. At fire- rated doors and doors on hold- opens provide Auto Flush Bolts: Ives 556. 2. At fire- rated doors and doors on hold- opens provide a Coordinator: Ives 948 with 903 filler strips; prime coated. Q. Exit device 1. Provide Von Duprin 98 series surface mounted 3 point latching type vertical rod type devices at all exterior doors. At interior pairs of doors 2 point latching, rim type at single leaf locations, clear anodized; 98NL x 9847-NL- CD typical trim. 2. Cylinder(s) to be keyed to building. 3. Utilize #03 lever design. 4. At locations with electric feature provide transformer, electric power transfer and integral request to exit. R. Key cabinet: Aladin, Key Control or Lund. Provide surface mounted cold- rolled, welded steel construction with piano hinge and pin tumbler lock; size to contain and index keys plus 100% expansion. S. Rain Drip: Pemko 346D. Mount at head of door frame. T. Kick Plates: Rockwood Manufacturing Company .050" thickness satin stainless steel, 10" high kickplates, width 2" less than door, countersunk screw attachment. Armor plates 48" high with 310BS edge guards at strike side of door. U. Removable Mullion at Storm Rated Doors: Yale M200FWS removable mullion. V. Finishes: BHMA 630, US 32D, satin stainless steel with bio option at levers and push/ pulls, U.N.O. 2.2 KEYING HARDWARE 08 70 00-4 A. Key to be part of master key and grand master key system. 1. Contractor shall attend a meeting with the Owner to establish the Owner's keying requirements. B. Provide core and coordinate cylinders for all doors- including cabinets, aluminum doors, and 8 padlocks [core and padlock]. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware at operating openings in accordance with approved schedule and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Mount hardware at heights recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute and with the requirements of the American with Disabilities Act, unless directed otherwise by Architect. C. Coordinate hardware installation with other work. 1. Coordinate and provide power to electrically operated hardware. D. Mount door closers away from public view; not on corridor side. E. Storm- Rated doors shall be installed in a manner to be in full compliance with the required assemblies. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Remove or properly prepare hardware until painting is completed and for duration of project. 3.3 Adjust and Clean A. Before project close-out, properly adjust hardware, thoroughly clean and polish and leave in perfect condition. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate electrical, security and fire alarm tie-ins and required transformers. 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. The following is furnished as a guide for the installation and preparation for finish hardware: 1. The A and B in the sections are options on stops- example 2 is wall stop; 2A is OH stop [in lieu of - no wall stop]; 2B is with floor stop [no wall stop]. 2. For any doors not scheduled assume electric mortise concealed vertical rod exit device, closer, kickplate, weatherseal, wall stop, door contacts. 1. Office Lockset F04 3. Privacy Lockset F19 Wall Stop Soundseal Wall Stop 2. Office Lockset F04 Closer 4. Push/Pull Wall Stop Closer Kickplate Overhead Stop Sound seal HARDWARE 08 70 00-5 5. Electric exit device- storeroom function; 3 point latching Closer Heavy Duty Floor Stop Weatherstripping Threshold 6. Electric mortise lockset-tied to access control system; storeroom/ free function, unless noted otherwise Closer Wall Stop Kickplate Door contacts A. [where scheduled] Overhead Stop 7. Exit device, electric classroom function, uno Closer Wall stop Door contacts Kick plate 8. Storm Door Rated 2 Electric mortise locksets-tied to access control system; storeroom/ free function, unless noted otherwise 2 Closers 2 Wall Stops 2 Kickplates 2 Door contacts END OF SECTION 9. Exit Device- 3 point latching, surface mounted Closer at each leaf (not at SIM.) Kickplate at each leaf (not at SIM.) Door contacts at each leaf (not at SIM.) Heavy duty floor stop at each leaf (not at SIM.) 10. Storeroom Lockset F07 Wall Stop A. Overhead Stop 11. Passage latchset FO1 Closer Wall Stop A. Overhead stop B. Floor Stop 12. Classroom lockset Wall Stop 13. Electric mortise locksets-tied to access control system; storeroom/ free function, unless noted otherwise 2 Closers 2 Wall Stops 2 Kickplates 2 Door contacts Astragal Top and bottom flush bolts HARDWARE 08 70 00-6 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 -SUMMARY -- A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: t- 1. Curtainwall framing. 2. Storefront framing. 3. Interior borrowed lites. 4. Doors. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-I, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Provide ceramic frit on all tempered glass. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass or for Coated -Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which the manufacturer agrees to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Insulated- Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Coated- Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat -treated float glass, or Kind FT heat -treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat -strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat -treated float glass or Kind FT heat -treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat -treated float glass that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. Permanently mark all safety glazing. 1. Meet the requirements of cyclic wind load; design pressures in excess of 100 psf. 2. Interlayer shall provide for low deflection. There shall be a high adhesion between the glass and the interlayer. 3. Comply with TAS 201, TAS 202, TAS 203, ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E1996. C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic or enhanced -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996, as requiredto comply with project's code requirements, when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Small and Large -Missile Test: For all glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. U-Factors: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. in x K). 2. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 3. Visible Reflectance: Center -of -glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. C. Exterior Insulated Glass; Low E sputter coated on # 2 surface, clear at interior lite: 1. Basis of Design- Clear with Solarban 70 XL (2) 2. Visible Light Transmittance: 64 percent minimum. 3. Exterior Reflectance: 12% maximum. 4. Shading Coefficient: 0.32. 5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.27. 6. U Value EN 673: 1.5. 7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.26 8. LSG: 2.37 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 2.3 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating -Glass Units: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2.4 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from the following: 1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral -skinned EPDM gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure -glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral -curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 2.6 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; non- staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type Adurometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 r D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open -cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.8 MONOLITHIC -GLASS TYPES A. Heat -strengthened float glass, and fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm, UNO. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling. 3. All glazing inside the building(s) to be tempered. 4. Clear and etched. Etched to have highest level of opacity. 2.9 INSULATING -GLASS TYPES A. Clear insulating glass and clear with etched on #3 surface (at locations noted). 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 1/8 inch (25 mm). 2. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Clear with low a coating on # 2 surface — strength as required by location. 4. 90 mil interlayer 5. Composite layer of clear glass, tempered: 6.0 mm thickness 6. Interspace Content: Air. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear strength as required by location; 5 mm thickness. 8. Provide safety glazing labeling. 9. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface (exterior locations only). 10. Provide laminated exterior light at all exterior window and door locations. DuPont Sentry Glass Plus interlayer, www.senjaglas.com; exterior light 6 mm with low a coating; interior lite shall be 5 mm, 0.090 interlayer, all clear, all heat strengthened or tempered. 11. Provide safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 i E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 1 F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. At laminated glass ensure that the proper/ compatible materials are utilized. J. At laminated glass ensure that the required `bite' on the glass is maintained- to achieve the specified results. 3.2 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where indicated. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 D. Installation with Pressure -Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure -glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and - clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. - C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 .i s GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 - 4 i i DIVISION 9 FINISHES The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, service and equipment as required in conjunction with or properly incidental to installation of gypsum board systems as described herein and/or as shown on the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein, A. Framing and Trim Manufacturers 1. Members of the Steel Stud Manufacturing Assoication. 2. Clark Dietrich Industries. 3. Marino Ware. B. Gypsum Board and Shaftwall Manufacturers 1. Georgia-Pacific Corporation, Gypsum Division. 2. National Gypsum, Gold Bond Building Products. 3. United States Gypsum Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Studs and Runners 1. Roll -formed channel type, nonload-bearing, sheet steel complying with ASTM C 645, sizes and gauges as indicated on Drawings. 2. Hot -dip galvanize in accordance with ASTM A 446 or A 525. 3. Minimum Flange: 1-1/4"width. 4. Minimum Gauge: 25 gauge [equivalent]; 20 gauge [equivalent] at entrances. B. Cold -Rolled Channels 1. 1-1/2: 16 gauge [equivalent] cold rolled hot -dip galvanized steel, 475 lbs./1,000 lineal ft. 2. 3/4" channels: 300 lbs./1,000 lineal ft., hot -dip galvanized. OR 3. Chicago Metallic G Grid system; ASTM C 635 heavy duty ceiling grid system composed of main grid, wall moulding and furring channels; all with hot dipped galvanized body and knurled face. C. Furring Channels: 1. 25 gauge [equivalent] hat -shaped hot -dip galvanized, 7/8" x 2-9/16". 2. Z-channels, 24 gauge hot -dipped galvanized, 1-1/2". D. Backing/Reinforcement Plates: Galvanized steel, 20 gauge minimum. E. Hanger Wire: 9 gauge galvanized, annealed. F. Tie Wire: 16 gauge galvanized, annealed. G. Deflection Track: 1. Mario Ware FAS Track 1000 with intumescent strips. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-1 it 2. Dietrich Metal Framing 'Slotted Deflection Track' SLP-TRK at fire rated walls or at other full - height walls. H. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396, Type X, UL rated; ends square cut; tapered edges; 5/8" thick except where indicated otherwise. 1. Utilize fiberglass faced material at locations that have the potential to be subjected to moisture; like at any locations installed prior to the roof or building being fully weather tight. ASTM C1658, G-P Dens Armor Plus, with high solids paint primer. Utilize at all elevator and HVAC shafts. Or use the fiberglass product behind the base, or up the wall a minimum of 3'/2" and a mold and mildew resistant board meeting C 1658 with a 10 score on ASTM D3273. I. Tile Backer Board: Georgia Pacific Dens -Shield Tile Backer Board, fire rated; 5/8" and thickness. Install per manufacturer recommendations; utilize the 2" lOx 10 glass mesh tape over all joints embedded with latex Portland cement mortar. J. Acoustical Insulation 1. Glass or mineral fiber complying with FS HH-I-521, Type 1. 2. Size: 2 inch thickness; unless indicated otherwise. Locate in walls and ceilings of toilet, electrical and mechanical rooms and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Acceptable Product: "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blanket", USG. K. Reveals 1. Reveals as manufactured by Pittcon Industries, Riverdale, Maryland, Softform "SWR and STR" Series, in configurations and sizes shown on drawings. 2. Provide at all locations where drywall that does not have a tile finish abuts concrete block. L. Fasteners 1. Inserts, clips, bolts, nails or other screws as recommended by system manufacturer. 2. Self -drilling, self -tapping, bugle head screws, for use with power drive tool. 3. Metal framing to structure: Power driven screw fasteners to withstand 190 lb. single shear resistance and 200 lb. bearing force when driven through structural head or base and without exceeding allowable design stress in runner, fastener or structural support. 4. Metal to Metal: 3/8", Type S or S-12, pan head screws. 5. Gypsum Board to Sheet Metal: Type S screws. 6. Gypsum Board to Gypsum Board: Type G screws. M. Corner Beads 1. Hot -dipped galvanized steel, 1-1/4" x 1-1/4". 2. Acceptable Product: Dur-a-Bead No. 103. 3. At curved applications: Trim -Tex, Lincolnwood, Ill., Archway corner Bead. N. Casing Beads 1. Hot -dipped galvanized steel designed for embedment in joint compound. 2. Acceptable Product: 200 Series. O. Control Joints 1. Hot dipped galvanized steel. 2. Acceptable Product: No. 093, USG. P. Water Resistant Sealant: USG Sheetrock Brand W/R Sealant. Q. Acoustical Sealant 1. Type No. 1: Acrylic Latex, skinning type; ASTM C 919 and ASTM C 834 - Highly elastic, non - bleeding and staining, waterbased sealant to provide permanent flexibility and lasting seal. a. Acceptable Product (1) AC-20 Acrylic Latex, Pecora. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-2 (2) Acoustical Sealant, Tremco. (3) Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant, USG. 2. Type No. 2: Silicone foam a. 3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam, Dow Corning Corporation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces against damage and stains. 3.2 METAL FRAMING ERECTION A. Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C 754. B. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness of finished assembly with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction. C. Metal Studs 1. Space 16" on center. 2. Place studs full height to underside of structure, except where indicated otherwise. 3. Prevent structural loading of stud system. 4. Provide minimum 20 gauge studs at lead lined walls. 5. At rated partitions and partitions to deck at locations where the roof or floor above has not already been fully loaded provide a deflection track at the deck connection. D. Corners: Three stud conventional method. Locate studs to provide sufficient surfaces for attachment of gypsum board. E. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install runner at frame head height between jamb studs and secure to studs. Space studs above frame head at same spacing in adjacent partition. F. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking. electrical and mechanical work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing to allow such items to be installed after framing is complete. G. Steel Frames and Access Panels; Install secure in place. H. Wall Furring 1. Erect wall furring directly attached to substrate, shiming as required. 2. Erect furring channels vertically or horizontally. 3. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24" o.c. 4. Space furring channels maximum 16" o.c. for 1/2" gypsum board and 24" o.c. for 5/8" gypsum board. Locate not more than 4" from floor and ceiling lines or abutting walls. I. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings. J. Provide adequate backing/reinforcing plates for framing systems to receive wall mounted counters, toilet partitions, handrails, guard rails, wall stop (hardware) and other similar wall mounted items. K. Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings 1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work. 2. Space hangers not over 48" centers along main runners and within 6" of ends of runners. All hangers hung vertically. GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-3 4_ 3. Where duct work occurs, making it impossible to maintain spacing of hangers, provide additional hangers and framing members to support larger runners necessary for longer spans. Punching of ducts and extending hangers through ducts will not be permitted. 4. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns and above ceiling work. 5. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" o.c., not more than 6" from perimeter walls. Lap splices not more than 6" from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice. 6. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at 24" o.c. maximum for 5/8" board and 16" o.c. maximum for 1/2" board, not more than 2" from perimeter walls. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 1" from each end of splice. Securely saddle tie to each carrying channel. 7. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspensions system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24" past each end of openings. 8. Where sprinkler heads, diffusers and speakers are arranged in alignment, variation from exact alignment shall not vary more than 1/2" either side of centerline through various elements. 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION A. Wallboard Application 1. Comply with GA-216; ASTM C 840, GA 201, and GA 600. 2. Use boards of maximum length to minimize end joints. 3. Stagger end joints when they occur; locate end joints as far as possible from center of wall or ceiling. 4. Abutt boards without forcing; neatly fit ends and edges of board and do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 5. Support ends and edges of boards on framing or furring members except for face layer of double layer. 6. Apply wallboard vertically; stagger end joints to occur at different framing members on opposite sides of partition. Stagger joints at midpoint when applying multiple layers. 7. Apply gypsum board to ceilings with long dimension at right angles to framing; back block ends and edges of gypsum board if required. 8. Provide control joints at the hinge side of each door frame [and sidelight where appropriate] and borrowed light or window openings — extend control joint from frame to ceiling; and at 30' intervals at locations with uninterrupted gypsum board [either wall or ceilings]; where a ceiling or soffit abuts a structural member- present plan to architect with proposed locations. Control joints in ceiling shall be located to intersect column penetrations, light fixtures and air diffusers that can impose stresses on the ceiling membrane. B. Fasteners 1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring or framing. 2. Minimum edge clearance from fasteners: 3/8". 3. Stagger fasteners opposite each other on adjacent ends or edges. 4. Space fasteners as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer as required to achieve fire rated construction. 5. Drive screws with positive clutch electric screw -driver. 6. Lightly dimple gypsum board with screwhead; do not rupture paper. C. Tile Backer Board: Treat cut edges and holes with water resistant sealant; use behind all ceramic tiled areas. D. Fire Rated Partitions 1. Use fire rated gypsum board for fire rated partitions. 2. Seal all penetrations in fire rated partitions with same construction and make airtight with sealant. 3.4 ACOUSTICAL (SOUND WALL) INSULATION INSTALLATION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-4 A. Ensure joints occur over framing members. B. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around 6electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions and tight to items passing through partitions. C. Place acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions which receive acoustical insulation, continuous bead entire perimeter. Seal perimeter of openings and penetrations with acoustical sealant. Close -off sound flanking paths around or through partitions. 3.5 TRIM A. Install casing and corner beads flush and full height, using largest practical length; miter corners and intersections. B. Mechanically fasten corner beads at external angles of gypsum board work. C. Place casing beads where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials or where edge would otherwise be unfinished. D. Install back-to-back casing beads at all control joints where indicated on Drawings and additionally in accordance with the following: 1. Locate at joints of maximum stress and/or points of natural weak planes, such as at openings, juncture of dissimilar materials, and at re-entrant corners. Coordinate placement and locations with Architect prior to commencement of work. E. Install metallic preformed reveal at locations where reveals are required or noted; generally between gypsum board and other building materials. 3.6 CLEANUP A. During installation keep all wall cavities free from debris. Prior to closing up a wall vacuum clean the cavity; maintain the cavity in it's clean condition. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-5 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09 29 00-6 SECTION 09 5123 - ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical tiles and suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified: provide one for architect and one for the contractor. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS, required only if not using the Basis of Design material: A. Product test reports. B. Evaluation reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Fumish extra acoustical tile materials equal to 3% of each type of tile utilized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined of required by the International Building Code. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 09 51 23 - 1 B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. [Basis -of -Design] Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong Fine Fissured; white; Class A. Armstrong 1728 and 1729. 1. LR: 0.85. 2. NRC: 0.55, Type E-400 mounting according to ASTM E 795. 3. CAC: 35 4. Edge/Joint Detail: square. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch 6. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. United States Gypsum Company. 3. Chicago Metallic. Grid Color to be selected from premium or custom colors. B. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. C. Access: Upward. D. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations complying with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension -system runners. E. Color: To match ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. F. Provide aluminum grid at locker rooms and areas subject to high humidity. G. At ceilings that do not abut walls utilize Armstrong `Axiom Perimeter Trim' system; color to match grid. 6" height, unless noted otherwise. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is furnished, dust generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed, inspected and tested. Permit any wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation. Humidity: 20% to 40% prior to, during and after installation of tiles susceptible to moisture absorbsion. B. Install acoustical tile ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Fixture Support ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 09 51 23 - 2 a. Do not support fixtures from main runners or cross runners if weight of fixture causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. b. In such cases, support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6" of each corner, or support fixtures independently. C. Do not install fixtures so that main runners and cross runners will be eccentrically loaded. d. Provide stabilizer bars when fixture installation would produce rotation of runners. 2. Trim a. Install standard or reveal edge moldings as required at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, or when panel edge would be exposed. b. Use maximum lengths, straight, true to line and level. C. Miter corners. d. Install edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes. 3. Acoustic Lay -In Units a. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. b. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. C. Provide hold down clips for acoustic tile in mechanical rooms and spring clips at perimeter edge. d. Lay directional pattern tiles one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis, unless noted otherwise. e. Install units level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents. f. Install hold- down clips at tile near exterior doors. 4. Adjust sags or twists that develop in ceiling systems and replace any part which is damaged or faulty. C. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. D. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical tiles as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. END OF SECTION 09 51 23 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 09 51 23 - 3 i t SECTION 09 52 00 ACOUSTICAL PANELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the installation of acoustical panels as described herein and/or as shown on the drawings. 1.02 Related Sections A. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry. B. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board Systems. 1.03 Quality Assurance i A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire hazard classifications Class A per ASTM E84 25/0/50. 1.04 References A. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ASTM E 84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.05 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive data and maintenance instructions; include recommended cleaning materials, application methods and precautions in use of cleaning materials which may be detrimental to surface if improperly applied. B. Samples: Furnish minimum 8" square samples of selected acoustical panels. 1.06 Product Handling A. Take care to prevent damage during delivery and handling. B. Deliver to job in sealed packages with testing laboratory certification of fire hazard classification on each package. C. Store in undamaged condition as packaged by manufacturer, with seals and labels intact. D. Store materials in clean, dry storage area. E. Maintain storage area temperature above 40 degrees F. with normal humidity. 1.07 Environmental Conditions A. Install when normal temperature and humidity conditions approximate same conditions that will exist when building is occupied. B. Area to receive acoustical panels shall have minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. PART 2 PRODUCTS ACOUSTICAL PANELS 09 52 00-1 2.01 Manufacturers; subject to the requirements stated herein. A. Fabric Wrapped Panels 1. "Rebound A200WP" by Wall Technology, or approved equal. 2. Size(s): Refer to Drawings for shapes. 2" thick (nominal). 3. Edges: Square edge, chemically hardened. 4. Finishes: Non -woven fabric, refer to Finish Schedule and Drawings. 5. Mounting: Mechanical clip. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Inspection A. Inspect surface to receive work under this section. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of surface. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANELS 09 52 00-2 SECTION 09 54 50 METAL SOFFIT PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnish and install a plank type security metal soffit/ ceiling system with concealed fasteners designed to provide high wind resistance. B. Related Sections 1. Division 5: Structural steel and deck 2. Division 21: Fire suppression and sprinklers 3. Division 26: Electrical, including rough for lighting and electronic security devices. 4. Division 28: Security Electronics. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. E84 - Test method for surface burning characteristics of building materials. B. CISCA—Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data sheets listing dimensions, style, edge detail, perforation pattern and finish. 1.5 PERFORMANCE A. Materials and installation must comply with International Building Code and Regulations PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein: A. Plank Security Metal Ceiling System- Steel Ceilings Inc., www.steelceiliii.gs.com [Basis of Design] B. Gordon—http:;!www..ordon-inc.com/con-ections/. C. Accurate Perforating www.accurateperforatiniz.com D. Habersham Metal Products Aww.habershammetal,coin E. Kane Manufacturing Corporation www.kanesterling.coni F. Trussbilt Metal Security Ceiling Systems, Huron, SD 2.2 MATERIALS A. Suspension System 1. Primary support system shall be the wall molding. The secondary support system will be the midspan supports. Both shall be in steel two gauges heavier than the plank material in similar material and finish to the security planks. METAL SOFFIT 09 54 50 - 1 2. Compression struts shall be''/z" galvanized steel channel fixed to the midspan at a minimum of 4 ft. on center and secured back to the building structure with drilled anchors as approved by the architect, and fastened securely to the suspension wire. 3. Wall molding shall be formed from 12 gauge steel in C shape with 2" face designed to accept security metal planks. Wall molding to be secured to all vertical surfaces with drilled in anchors at a minimum of 16" on center. 4. Hold down clips shall be formed from same materials as the molding or in gauge same as the plank, but unpainted or finished. 11" hold downs for cells and 17" hold downs for Corridors. 5. Fasteners and hardware shall be galvanized steel or other non -corrosive materials compatible with the system. Security planks to be securely fastened to adjacent security planks with self -tapping screws. Exit Planks shall be securely fastened to the perimeter with special Security tamper proof fasteners 6" on center. B. Security Planks 1. Metal pans shall be formed from12 gauge galvanized steel 2. Plank width shall have a module of 12" or 24". 3. Panels shall not be perforated. 4. Panels shall be post painted to seal all perforations with polyester powder coat- global white. 5. Exit planks shall be made of the same material as standard planks; clearly identify on the submittal. C. Finishes: 1. All materials utilized shall be galvanized or fully powder coat painted to provide a long service in an exterior environment. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Installer must inspect the area that is to receive the metal ceiling system for conditions that may affect the installation and notify, in writing, any conditions that must be rectified before commencing. B. All work above the ceiling shall be completed before proceeding with this installation. C. All work above this soffit shall be completed before proceeding with this installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal ceiling components shall be delivered in unopened cartons and shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name. B. Material shall be stored in dry and protected areas. C. Install the soffit system in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the approved shop drawings. System shall be installed to resist severe attach from the occupant side. D. Panels shall be free from defects; damaged panels shall be removed and replaced. END OF SECTION METAL SOFFIT 09 54 50 - 2 i= SESCTION 09 68 00 - CARPETING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 Summary A. Section includes preparing surfaces to receive carpeting. 1. Apply carpeting on floor surfaces where indicated, complete with required accessories. 2. Install edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes. B. Related Sections 1. Section 09 65 00: Resilient Flooring. 1.2 Reference Standards A. ASTM E-84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Burning Materials. B. FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and rugs, wool, nylon, acrylic, modacrylic, polyester, polypropylene. 1.3 Quality Assurance A. Regulatory Requirements: Fire hazard classification for carpet shall not exceed flame spread of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.4 Submittals A. Samples: Submit 24 in. x 36 in. samples of each color and pattern selected. B. Product Data: Submit installation instructions, including allowable temperature range; maintenance and cleaning instructions, type of adhesive to be used and method of integrating edge strips with carpet. C. Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's test data indicating fire hazard classification and static control. 1.5 Job Environment A. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved and completed. B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F. (15 degrees C.) for at least 24 hours prior to installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained. 1.6 Maintenace Materials A. Provide an amount equal to 3% of all carpet tiles; and 20' x wide of roll at roll goods. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 Carpet A. Refer to Room Finish Legend. 2.2 Accessories A. Carpet to ceramic tile or floor tile transition strip: Schlutter transistion strips PART 3 EXECUTION CARPETING 09 68 00-1 C_.. 3.1 Preparation of Surfaces A. Clean floors of dust, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances which would be detrimental to the proper performance of adhesive and carpet. Allow floors to thoroughly dry. a B. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet non -cumulative. C. Provide floor filler material where carpet meets other materials; feather from 18" away from transition for a smooth transition. �� } D. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality relative to acidity and alkalinity. E. Use an approved cementitious filler to patch cracks, small holes and for leveling. At carpet to tile provide sloped substrate and fold carpet on top of itself to provide a smooth wearing transition surface. F. Vacuum substrate clean. 9 } 3.2 Installation of Carpet A. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible variation between dye lots. B. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern match. Ensure cuts are straight, true and unfrayed. C. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic. D. Join seams in recommended manner and so as not to detract from the appearance of the carpet installation and increase its life expectancy. Ensure seams are straight, not overlapped or peaked and free of gaps. E. Glue carpet to floors with run of the pile in the same direction of anticipated traffic. F. Do not change run of pile from one room to the next, if directly connected. G. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other vertical surfaces. Where wall bases are scheduled, cut carpet 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from walls to allow for possible restretching. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surface where no base is scheduled, leaving no gaps. H. Entire carpet installation shall be laid tight and flat to subfloor, securely fastened at edges and present a uniform pleasing appearance. Ensure monolothic color, pattern and texture match within any one area. I. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. Use full length pieces only. Butt tight to vertical surfaces. 3.3 Protection and Cleaning. A. Throughout the construction process make sure that all recommended installation, maintenance and cleaning measures are strictly followed. 3.4 Schedule A. Reference Room Finish Legend. END OF SECTION CARPETING 09 68 00-2 { I SECTION 09 69 00 ACCESS FLOORIING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The access floor system shall consist of interchangeable panels, understructure, and all labor, material, equipment, and installation as called for in the specifications and/or shown on the Drawings. B. Related Sections: 1. Concrete work and concrete floor sealer is specified in Section 03 30 00. a) Concrete sealer and pedestal adhesive must be chemically compatible with each other. 2. Carpet and carpet tile work as specified in Section 09 00 00. 3. Electrical and data penetrations and grounding. 1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR STORAGE AND INSTALLATION A. Provide a dry accessible area to receive and unload material with a free path to elevators, hoists, and/or the area receiving the access floor. B. Prior to and during installation, a secure and dry storage space that is enclosed from the weather must be made available for the access floor materials, with recommended environment at 40" F to 90' F and approximately 35% to 70% relative humidity, 24 hours a day during and after installation. C. The subfloor surface must be free of moisture, dust, dirt and other debris. Once installed, the access floor must be maintained in the same manner. 1.3 DESIGN PERFORMANCE AND CERTIFICATION OF PRODUCT A. Provide access flooring system consisting of moveable assemblies composed of modular floor panels supported on pedestals forming accessible under floor cavities to accommodate electrical, mechanical, and HVAC services and complying with performance requirements specified. Raised Floor panels must be interchangeable with each other except where cut for special conditions. B. Where applicable load testing shall be performed according to "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Flooring" as established by the Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA). These procedures shall be used as a guideline when presenting load performance product information. C. Product test shall be witnessed and certified by an accredited independent engineering and testing laboratory based in the U.S.A. with a minimum of five (5) years experience testing access floor components in accordance with CISCA test methods. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit a sample of the floor panel and each understructure component. t- A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit drawings showing raised floor panel layout including starting point of installation. 2. Include details of component panels and pedestals. Show edge details of ramps, steps, handrails and anchoring of pedestal bases to subfloor. Show details at HVAC plenum f , separation walls, and at full height walls. ACCESS FLOORIING 09 69 00 - 1 C. Certificates: 1. Submit independent testing organization certificates indicating compliance with specified design criteria when tested and reported according to CISCA "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors." 2. Submit seismic calculations if required in accordance with local and state building codes as specified. Calculations shall be performed using a current seismic program and approved by a local structural engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. The structural engineer shall sign and seal these calculations confirming that these calculations meet all local and state codes for seismic pedestal assemblies. A signed copy of these calculations shall be given to the architect and local building department as required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A company with minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of access floor systems of comparable size and complexity. B. Tolerances: 1. Manufacturing tolerance: a. Nominal panel size f 0.015" (Amm) or less. b. Panel flatness f 0.020" (.5mm) or less. c. Panel squareness f 0.015" (Amm) or less. d. Panel interchangeability —all panels, except those modified to meet special conditions, shall be interchangeable. 2. Installation Tolerance: a. Finished installation shall be level within f 0.060" (2mm) in 10 feet (3m) and f 0.100" (3mm) for the entire floor. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Complete overhead construction work before installing access floor to avoid damage to panels and finishes. B. Coordinate with the contractor to provide timely layout of access flooring grid so electrical, plumbing or HVAC piping and conduit and any other items scheduled to be installed in the access floor plenum space can be installed prior to the access flooring system being installed. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 4 tiles of each type; 4 pedestals and 8 cross arms [if included in system]. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein: A. Haworth, Inc., Grand Rapids, MI 49512 [Basis of Design]. B. Substitutions will be considered, providing design criteria is met or exceeded, refer to bidding documents for timing. Information and samples shall be the responsibility of the submitter. C. Accepted Substitution: ASM Modular Systems, Kingspan FS 200 Enviro panel with corner locks. 2.2 MATERIALS ACCESS FLOORIING 09 69 00 - 2 A. Floor Panels: Haworth TecCrete 2500 Panels, with integrated steel pan construction with exposed top surface of laminate over lightweight concrete fill. Floor Panels are bare corner - lock. 1. Panels shall be nominal 24" (610mm) square x 1-1/8" (29mm) deep, manufactured with hot -dip galvanized steel pan having shear tabs that integrally bond to the lightweight, high - strength concrete fill. Panel corners shall be manufactured to receive the pedestal head positioning dome and containing a corner-lock/grounding insert. Each panel shall accept a flush -fit metal fastener which securely fastens each panel corner to the pedestal head. 2. Panel Finish: Floor panel surface shall be factory standard laminate over bare concrete. (Laminate selection to be from manufacturer's standard selection of High Pressure Laminates). Panels shall have a maximum electrical resistance of 10 ohms or less from the top edge of the panel, less surface covering, to the understructure. 3. Concentrated Load: A minimum of 1,250 lb. on one square inch (25mm) at any location with a top surface deflection not to exceed 0.10" (3mm), and a permanent set not to exceed .010" (3mm). 4. Uniform Load: 600 lb. per square foot with a maximum top surface deflection not to exceed .040" (10mm), and a permanent set not to exceed .010" (3mm). 5. Ultimate Load: 1800 lb. per square inch minimum at weakest point. 6. Rolling Load: Panels shall withstand a rolling load of 1,200 lbs. applied through a 3" (76mm) dia. x 1-13/16" (46mm) wide caster for 10 cycles over the same path with a maximum of .020" (.5mm) top surface permanent set. Panels shall withstand a rolling load of 800 lb. applied through a hard rubber -surfaced wheel 6" (152mm) dia. x 2" (51mm) wide for 10,000 cycles over the same path with a maximum of .040" (1 nun) top surface permanent set. 7. Impact Load: A 150 lb. load dropped from 36"(914mm) onto a one inch square indenter shall not cause a system failure. 8. Heat Transmission: Bottom surface temperature exposure to 1,600°F for 15 minutes shall not increase the top surface temperature more than 150 degrees above the ambient temperature. 9. ASTM E-84: Class 1: Flame spread of 5 or less and smoke developed of 10 or less per NFPA. B. Understructure: 1. Pedestal assemblies shall be of hot -dip galvanized steel. 2. The base shall be a minimum of 16 square inches and shall be stamped and/or embossed on its underside and shall be adhered to the sub floor with an adhesive recommended by the access flooring manufacturer. 3. Where mechanical anchors are required for seismic zones, provide same as required by project specific seismic calculations. 4. The threaded stud shall be min. 3/4" (19mm) diameter steel. 5. The head assembly shall be designed so that the panels will be held in place with or without corner -lock fasteners. 6. Pedestal assembly shall provide an adjustment range of+/- 1" (25mm), adjustable at 1/64" (Anim) increments. 7. The assembly shall provide a mechanical means to lock the floor in a level plane and adjustments shall be capable of being made without special tools. 8. For corner -lock system, the head of the all -steel assembly shall be designed to accept a metal fastener to mechanically lock the panels in place. 9. Pedestal assembly shall support not less than 6,000 lb. axial load and shall resist an average 1,000 inch -pound overturning moment when bonded to a clean concrete slab. C. Accessories: 1. Furnish lateral bracing, fascia, cutouts and miscellaneous items where indicated. 2. Allow for 30 penetrations with edging- coordinate sizes on shop drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION ACCESS FLOORIING 09 69 00 - 3 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the subfloor which is to receive access flooring for dryness, cleanliness, unevenness, or any irregularities that will affect the quality of the access flooring. 1. Verify that material storage and installation areas are at recommended temperature and relative humidity before, during, and after installation. 2. Verify that substrate is level to within 1/8" (3mm) in 10 feet (3m). B. Do not commence installation of access flooring until subfloor is clean and dry, temperature controlled, and protected from the weather. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pedestal locations shall be established from approved shop drawings so that mechanical and electrical work can be installed without interfering with pedestal locations. B. Installer shall coordinate with other trades to maintain the integrity of the installed access flooring. All traffic on access floor shall be controlled by the installer only. No traffic other than the access floor installation crew shall be permitted on any floor area for 48 hours to allow the pedestal adhesive to set. Access floor panels shall not be removed by other trades for 72 hours after their installation. C. Floor system and accessories shall be installed by an authorized factory trained installation company with a minimum of five (5) years experience. D. No dust or debris producing operations by other trades shall be allowed in areas where access floor is being installed to ensure proper bonding of pedestals to subfloor. E. Installer shall keep the subfloor broom clean as installation progresses. F. Install floor diffusers, if required, as indicated on Mechanical Plans. Install electrical and AV/ data floor boxes as shown on the drawings. G. Finished installation shall be level within +/- 0.060" (2mm) in 10 feet (3m) and +/- 0.100" (3mm) for the entire floor area and shall not have a hollow sound or squeak from normal foot traffic. H. Replace damaged materials prior to the application of field applied surfaces. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Take random panel from shipment received at construction site and test panel for compliance with stated load criteria if directed by architect/owner. 3.4 ACCEPTANCE A. Contractor shall accept completed access floor in whole or in part, prior to allowing other trades to perform work which affects the installed access floor. B. Contractor shall suitably protect the accepted access floor and accessories from damage, contamination or overloading. END OF SECTION ACCESS FLOORIING 09 69 00 - 4 SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation for gypsum board. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this section. 1. Eggshell refers to a low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 2. Satin refers to a low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 3. Full gloss refers to a high -sheen finish with a gloss range higher than 65 when measured with a 60-degree meter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and coating material proposed for use. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish -coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator that has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING gl, PAINTING 09900 - 1 1. _, A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application. 1.6 REFERENCES A. "Standard Type V as defined by the Painting and Decoration Contractors of America's "Modern Guide to Paint Specifications". B. Gypsum Association 1. GA 216, Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 2. GA-214-96, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. C. American Society for Testing and Materials 1. ATSM C 840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F (10 and 32 degrees C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F (7.2 and 35 degrees Q. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide one gallon unopened cans of each paint color/ type utilized on the project. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. 09 90 00 -2 B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturer is referred to in the paint schedule by use if shortened versions of the name, which is shown below. 1. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG Industries, Inc. 2. Sherwin-Williams 3. Other acceptable manufacturers include: ICI, Benjamin Moore. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoaters, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality "professional" paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color matches indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Masonry Unit Block Fillers: Factory formulated high-performance latex block fillers 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-7 SPEEDHIDE® Interior/ Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler (28 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 mils. 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-15 SPEEDHIDE® Int./Ext. Acrylic Masonry Block Filler (47.50 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B42W46 Heavy Duty Block Filler (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0-18.0 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B25W25 PrepRite Block Filler (50< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils. 2.4 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory -formulated alkali -resistant acrylic -latex primer fi for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (110 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; A24W8300 Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer (49g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2-2.1 mils. B. Exterior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamels: Factory -formulated alkyd or latex wood primer for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 17-21 SEAL GRIP® Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Stain Blocking Primer (96 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Sherwin-Williams; B51-450 series Multi -Purpose Primer/Sealer (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. C. Exterior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 09 90 00 -3 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-715 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. D. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-715 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150<g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. E. Exterior Aluminum Primer under Acrylic Finishes: Factory -formulated acrylic -based metal primer for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-715 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66W 1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 2.4 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory -formulated alkali -resistant acrylic -latex interior primer for interior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (110 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-2 Pure Performance® Interior Latex Primer Sealer (0 g/L VOC). Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; A24W8300 Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer (49g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2-2.1 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B28W2600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer (0 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory -formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 4-603 PERMA-CRETE® Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (110 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-2 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.00 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; A24W8300 Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer (49g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2-2.1 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B28W2600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer (0 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. C. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic -Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd -Enamel Finishes: Factory - formulated acrylic -latex -based interior wood primer. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 17-21 SEAL GRIP® Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Stain Blocking Primer (96 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-2 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.00 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B51-450 series Multi -Purpose Primer/Sealer (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 09 90 00 -4 r i 4. Sherwin-Williams; B28W2600 ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer (0 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. D. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-715 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC Compliant due to anti -corrosive properties): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. E. Interior Zinc -Coated Metal Primer: Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-715 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC Compliant due to anti -corrosive properties): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry Film thickness of not lett than 2.5 mils. 2.5 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated flat acrylic -emulsion latex paint for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House Paint Flat Latex (85.2 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; C1 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Flat (<50 g/L VOQ Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3mi1s B. Exterior Low -Luster Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic -latex paint for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House & Trim Satin --Acrylic Latex (128 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-474 Series Pitt -Tech® One Pack High Performance Waterborne Satin DTM Industrial Enamels (227 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils 3. Sherwin-Williams; C7 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Satin (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5mils 4. Sherwin-Williams; B66-660 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Eg-Shel (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-900 Series SpeedHide® Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint (133 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; C14 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7mils D. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: Factory -formulated full - gloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-374 Series Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (191 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66-600 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils 09 90 00 -5 E. Exterior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: Factory -formulated full -gloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-374 Series Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels (191 g/L VOC corrosion protection product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B66-600 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated flat acrylic -emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-70 Line SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint (30.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-110 Series Pure Performance® Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B30-4600 series ProMar 400 Flat Zero VOC (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B30-2600 series ProMar 200 Flat Zero VOC (Og/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. B. Interior Flat Latex -Emulsion Size: Factory -formulated flat latex -based interior paint. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-70 Line SpeedHide® Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint (30.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-110 Series Pure Performance® Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B30-4600 series ProMar 400 Flat. Zero VOC (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B30-2600 series ProMar 200 Flat Zero VOC (Og/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. C. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel (70.80 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-411 Series Pure Performance® Interior Eggshell Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B20-4600 series ProMar 400 Eg-Shel Zero VOC (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.53mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B20-2600 series ProMar 200 Eg-Shel Zero (Og/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. D. Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated satin acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Satin Acrylic Latex Enamel (82.49 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils 2. Sherwin-Williams; B24-4600 series ProMar 400 Low Sheen Eg-Shel Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. E. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -Gloss Latex (97.9 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 9-510 Series Pure Performance® Interior Semigloss Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 09 90 00 -6 i� 3. Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B31-2600 series ProMar 200 Semi -Gloss Zero (Og/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. F. Interior Full -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated full -gloss acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-8534 SpeedHide® Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels (120 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil 2. Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-374 Pitt -Tech® One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel (199.0 g/L VOC. Compliant as an anti- corrosive product): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 3. Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 4. Sherwin-Williams; B31-2600 series ProMar 200 Semi -Gloss Zero (Og/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. G. Glass Paint by Glass Primer http://www. lasspaint.com! 2.7 TAPE AND BED MATERIALS A. Putty, Fillers, Spackling and Other Surface Preparation Materials: First line quality, product of reputable manufacturer, specifically formulated for particular applications. B. Joint Tape: ASTM C 475 or FS SS-J-570, Type II, perforated tape. C. Joint Compound 1. ASTM C475 or FS SS-J-570, Type I. 2. Acceptable Product a. Taping Compound: Durabond Joint Compound -Taping, USG. b. Topping: Joint Compound -All Purpose, USG. D. Texture 1. Primer or Sealer: As recommended by manufacturer of texture coating. 2. Texture: U.S. Gypsum unaggregated texture, light orange peel finish. E. Trim Accessories 1. ASTM C 1047 - Rust resistant steel reinforcing components with strong paper tape factory laminated to its surface to provide superior adhesion of joint compound, textures and paints while reducing edge cracking, chipping and rusting of drywall trim edges and corners. Provide "nose coating" on paper tape to resist scuffing and fuzzing from knives and sanding. 2. Products: SHEETROCK Paper Faced Metal Drywall Bead & Trim by USG. a. Outside Corner Bead: B1W, BLXW or BLXW EL b. Offset Outside Corner: Bl OS c. Inside Corner Bead: B2 d. Offset Inside Corner: B2 OS e. L-Bead: B4 (3/8", 1/2" or 5/8") f. Reveal: SL (1 /2" or 5/8") g. Bullnose Outside Corner Bead: SLOC h. Bullnose Offset Outside Corner Bead: SLOC OS i. Cove Inside Corner: SLIC PART 3 — EXECUTION 09 90 00 -7 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate for application of coatings specified B. Immediately prior to coating application, ensure that surfaces to receive coatings are dry. C. Ensure that moisture -retaining substrates to receive coatings have moisture content within tolerances allowed by coating manufacturer, using moisture measurement techniques recommended by coating manufacturer. D. Immediately prior to coating application, examine surfaces to receive coatings for surface imperfections and for contaminants which could impair performance or appearance of coatings, including but not limited to, loose primer, rust, scale, oil grease, mildew, algae, or fungus, stains or marks, cracks, indentations, or abrasions. E. Correct the above conditions and any other conditions which could impair performance or appearance of coatings in accordance with specified surface preparation procedures before proceeding with coating application. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Do not start work until surfaces to be finished are in proper condition to produce finished surfaces of uniform, satisfactory appearance. B. Stains and Marks: Remove completely, if possible, using materials and methods recommended by coating manufacturer; seal with shellac or other coating acceptable to paint manufacturer stains and marks that might bleed through paint finishes which cannot be completely removed. C. Remove or protect hardware, electrical plates, mechanical grilles and louvers, lighting fixture trim, and other items not indicated to receive coatings which are adjacent to surfaces to receive coatings. D. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow substrate to thoroughly dry. E. For specific substrate preparation, see individual specifications. 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT APPLICATION A. Prefill 1. Fill "V" grooves formed by abutting rounded edges of board with prefill joint compound. 2. Fill "V" joint flush. 3. Remove excess compound beyond groove and leave clear depression to receive tape. B. Taping or Embedding Joints 1. Apply compound in thin uniform layer to joints and angles and immediately apply reinforcing tape centered over joint and seat tape into compound. 2. Leave 1/64" to 1/32" compound under tape to provide bond and skim coat. 3. Fold tape and embed in angles to provide true angles. C. Filling 1. Apply joint compound over embedding coat and flush with surface. 2. Feather out fill coat beyond tape and previous joint compound line. 3. Do not apply fill coat on interior angles. D. Finishing 09 90 00 -8 4 ji ; 1. Spread joint compound evenly over and beyond fill coat on joints and feather to smooth uniform finish. 2. Apply finish coat to taped angles to cover tape and taping compound. 3. Sand final application of compound to provide surface ready to decoration. E. Filling and Finishing Depressions 1. First Fill Coat: Apply joint compound to bead and trim and feather out from ground to plane of surface. 2. Second Fill Coat: Apply joint compound over dry surface in same manner as first fill coat extending beyond first coat onto face of board. 3. Finish Coat a. Apply joint compound over dry fill coat to bead and trim extending beyond second fill coat. b. Feather finish coat from ground to provide flat surface ready for decoration. F. Ridging 1. Do not repair ridging until condition has fully developed. 2. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting through tape. 3. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound. 4. After fill is dry, blend in topping compound over repaired areas. G Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush. H. At locations above wall- to wall ceilings fire taping [tape and one bed coat] is acceptable. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General 1. Clean and dry surface before painting. Remove dirt and dust by brushing with stiff bristle brush. Remove oil or grease by solvent cleaning, using solvent such as mineral spirits and wiping with clean rags. Apply rinse of clean solvent. 2. If area to be coated has been subjected to chemical contamination, thoroughly rinse with water. 3. Apply primer or first coat immediately after surface preparation to prevent contamination of surface. B. Wood 1. Clean knots, pitch streaks or visible sap spots free of residue and treat with Knot Sealer. Apply second coat of sealer no less than two hours after application of first coat. 2. Fill nail holes and other indentations with wood filler after first coat of paint or stain, matching color of stain or paint. Finish flush with adjacent surfaces. Apply sanding sealer and allow to dry overnight. 3. Sand surfaces smooth with succession of grits, each one removing sanding marks left by previous one; finish with 6/0 grit on exposed surfaces. Sand with grain in all instances. Sand wood surfaces smooth with No. 00 sand paper. 4. Back -Priming: Back -prime wood installed against steel concrete, plaster and masonry and one coat primer. C. Gypsum Board 1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound. 2. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes. 3. Dampen with clear water. 4. Fill plaster with thin layers of patching plaster. 5. Fill gypsum board with thin layers of drywall joint compound. 09 90 00 -9 6. Allow to dry. 7. Sand smooth; do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. D. Zinc Alloy or Galvanized Metal Work: Clean with mineral spirits and wash with acetic acid. E. Shop -Coated Metal Work: Remove foreign matter and clean thoroughly. Spot prime abraded areas with proper primer. Verify compatibility of coating with primer prior to application. F. Ferrous Metal Work: Clean metal surfaces not provided with prime coat or rust, mill scale, grease and foreign matter. Aggregate blast or wire brush rusted areas to base metal. G. Concrete and Concrete Block 1. Cure: Concrete must be cured prior to coating application. "Cured" is defined as concrete poured and aged at a material temperature of at least 75 degrees F. for at least 30 days. 2. Moisture: Concrete must be free from moisture as much as possible. Check the moisture content in concrete by taping an asphalt tile on the surface, sealing all edges. After 48 hours remove and examine the backside for moisture condensation and inspect the concrete surface for darkened areas. The source of the moisture, if present, must be located, and the cause corrected prior to coating. 3. Temperature: Air, surface, and material temperatures must be at least 55 degrees F. for 24 hours prior to, during and after coating application. 4. Contamination: Remove all grease, dirt, paint, oil, tar, glaze, laitance, efflorescence, loose mortar and cement by power or hand tool cleaning, or by solvent cleaning. Vacuum or blow down and remove dust and loose particles from surface. 5. Surface Condition: Hollow areas, bug holes, honeycombs, voids, fins, form marks, and all protrusions or rough edges are to be ground or stoned to provide a smooth continuous surface of suitable texture for proper adhesion of the coating. Imperfections may require filling with Masonry Patch and Filler. 6. Concrete Treatment: Verify that coatings are compatible with hardeners, sealers, form release agents, curing compounds and other concrete treatments before beginning work. 3.5 APPLICATION A. Do not mix open containers until required for use. Thoroughly mix paint before application to maintain pigment in suspension. B. Do not thin paint in excess of printed directions of manufacturer. Do not allow caking or setting of pigment into hard mass. C. Apply paint uniformly without visible labs, sags, curtains, holidays or objectionable brushmarks. Exercise area so that paint does not splatter on surfaces not to be painted. Mask and cut in between different colors. D. Insure that primer and intermediate coats of paint are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each coat. Allow sufficient time between coats to ensure proper drying. E. Sand between coats on wood and metal surfaces prior to application of succeeding coats. F. Spray all doors and door frames. G. Remove doors for painting tops and bottoms. Finish top and bottom edges of doors same as faces, after fitting. Paint edges of doors same as faces, after fitting. Paint edges of doors occurring between rooms or spaces having different finishes same as room or space from which they are visible when door is in partly opened position. 09 90 00 -10 H. Mechanical and Electrical Items 1. Paint exposed items, including pipes, conduits, panels, boxes, grilles, registers, diffusers and rooftop items, unless factory prefinished. 2. Paint items same color as adjoining surface, unless otherwise directed. Use color as directed where adjacent surfaces do not require painting. 3. Do not paint nameplates, tags or other identifying devices which will be needed for future equipment identification. 4. Paint surfaces inside ducts, diffusers and other mechanical openings flat black to at least 12" back from opening. Match final coat of paint in color, tint and hue with color samples approved by Architect. Architect reserves the right to make revisions within standard color range of each type paint prior to final coat being applied. J. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not apply coatings to surfaces that are not dry. K. Apply each coat to uniform thickness and finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with each coat slightly darker than preceding coat. Allow each coat to dry thoroughly before applying next coat. L. Remove dust and other foreign materials from substrate immediately prior to applying each coat. M. Textured Finish 1. Prepare and prime or seal surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply one light coat of textured finish on following gypsum board surfaces: a. Ceilings b. Walls scheduled to receive painted finish. 3. Do not apply texture to surfaces scheduled to receive vinyl wallcovering, ceramic tile or surfaces to receive final finishes other than paint. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. When painting is to be started, manufacturer whose materials have been approved for use shall furnish competent technical assistance to ensure that materials are being applied properly. Manufacturer's assistance shall be available at all times until completion of work. B. Each coat must be inspected and approved before application of succeeding specified coat. C. Clean application equipment at least daily and more frequently if conditions warrant. 3.7 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP A. Make detailed inspection of paint work and touch-up abraded, stained or otherwise disfigured surfaces or refinish as required. B. Carefully remove splatterings, spots and blemishes caused by painting from surfaces throughout project. C. Remove extra material from jobsite and leave building and grounds in neat, clean finished condition. 09 90 00 -11 3.8 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete, stucco, and brick masonry substrates: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali Resistant Primer (110 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex (85.2 g/L VOC); 1.5 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-610 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Flat Acrylic Latex (85.2 g/L VOC); 1.5 Dry Mils. 2. Flat Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; A24W8300 Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer (49g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2- 2.1 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; C1 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Flat (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3mils c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; Cl Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Flat (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3mils B. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over exterior concrete unit masonry: 1. Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block Filler Latex (28 g/L VOC); 4.8 to 14 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex (128 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-2045 Series SpeedHide® Exterior Satin Acrylic Latex (128 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. 2. Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B42W46 Heavy Duty Block Filler (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0-18.0 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; C7 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Satin (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5mils c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; C7 Series DuraCraft Exterior Latex Satin (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5mils C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-712 Pitt -Tech® Int/Ext Primer/ Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (250 g/L VOC compliant as anti -corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: PPG Pitt -Tech Plus Intl Ext Semi -Gloss DTM industrial Enamel 90- 1210 Series 90gL VOC); 2.0 to 4.0 Dry Mils c. Finish Coat: PPG Pitt -Tech Plus Int/ Ext Semi -Gloss DTM industrial Enamel 90- 1210 Series 90gL VOC); 2.0 to 4.0 Dry Mils. 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 09 90 00 -12 b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B66-650 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi - Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B66-650 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi - Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils D. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc -coated metal surfaces: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B66W1 DTM Primer/Finish (150< g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B66-650 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi - Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B66-650 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi - Gloss (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils 3.9 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry substrates: 1. Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 4-603 Perma-Crete® Int/ Ext Alkali Resistant Primer (110 g/L VOC); 1.2 to 1.5 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.5 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-411 Series SpeedHide® Interior Enamel Eggshell Latex (74.4 g/L VOC); 1.5 Dry Mils. 2. Low -Luster Acrylic Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; A24W8300 Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer (49g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.2-2.1 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B20-4600 series ProMar 400 Eg-Shel Zero VOC J (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.53mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B20-4600 series ProMar 400 Eg-Shel Zero VOC (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.53mils. B. Concrete Masonry Unit: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-7 SpeedHide® Int/Ext Masonry Block Filler Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 7.1 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. 2. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B42W46 Heavy Duty Block Filler (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0-18.0 mils. 099000-13 i b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish: a. Primer: PPG Speedhide Interior High Build Latex Primer Sealer 6-4 (<50 g/L VOC); 1.0 to 1.4 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Interior Satin Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.3 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-3511 Series SpeedHide® Interior Satin 1 Acrylic Latex (82.49 g/L VOC); 1.3 Dry Mils. 2. a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams B28W8601 High Build Primer/Surfacer, (74 g/L VOC); 4.4 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B24-4600 series ProMar 400 Low Sheen Eg- Shel Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B24-4600 series ProMar 400 Low Sheen Eg- Shel Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. D. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 17-921 Seal Grip® Ind Ext Acrylic Latex Stain Blocking Primer (84 g/L VOC); 1.6 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B51-450 series Multi -Purpose Primer/Sealer (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. E. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-712 Pitt -Tech® Int/Ext Primer/ Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti -corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. c. Finish Coat: Pittsburgh Paints®; 6-500 Series SpeedHide® Interior Semi -gloss Acrylic Latex (<50 g/L VOC); 1.4 Dry Mils. 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 09 90 00 -14 a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams; B66-310 Series ProCryl Universal Primer (98 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickiness of not less than 2.0 mils. b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams; B31-4600 series ProMar 400 Semi-Glossl Zero VOC series (50< g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. F. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc -coated metal surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Pittsburgh Paints®; 90-712 Pitt -Tech® Int/Ext Primer/ Finish DTM Industrial Enamel (123 g/L VOC compliant as anti -corrosive product); 2.0 to 3.0 Dry Mils. b. Intermediate: PPG Pitt -Tech Plus Int/ Ext Semi -Gloss DTM industrial Enamel 90- 1210 Series 90gL VOC); 2.0 to 4.0 Dry Mils c. Finish Coat: PPG Pitt -Tech Plus Int/ Ext Semi -Gloss DTM industrial Enamel 90- 1210 Series 90gL VOC); 2.0 to 4.0 Dry Mils. 2. Semigloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: a. Primer: Sherwin-Williams B66-310 Series ProCryl Universal Primer (98 g/L VOC) Applied at a dry film thickiness of not less than 2.0 - 4.0 mils DFT b. Intermediate: Sherwin-Williams B66-660 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Eg-Shel (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils. c. Finish Coat: Sherwin-Williams B66-660 Series Pro Industrial Acrylic Eg-Shel (<50 g/L VOC): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5mils. G. Colors 1. Reference Room Finish Schedule; color as selected. END OF SECTION 09 90 00 -15 09 90 00 -16 I DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 10 00 00 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART IGENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Provide items as outlined below. Scope of Work includes blocking as specified in Section 06 10 00. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate number of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the requirements and the methods needed for proper installation of the work of this Section. 1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the Owner furnished items before, during and after installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meeting ASTM-E84 Class I rating. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNERGUARDS: Full height with closure caps where appropriate, Start at top of base. A. Surface -mounted: Inpro Corporation, 160 Series. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS: J.L. Industries, Larsen, or Potter Roemer. Extinguisher to be 10 pound ABC, UL-4A-60BC, Larsen MP 10; wall bracket B2 at locations noted "FE' ; cabinet at "FEC" to be Larsen's Vertical Duo with clear tempered glass, 2409-R2. Mount cabinet so extinguisher is not taller than 48" AFF, with a projecting sign (Larson PTD-182 or equal) above. Provide at locations shown on drawings and min. at all electric rooms and elevator equipment rooms. If not shown on drawings provide min. 1 for each 3000 square feet of gross building space. At Data Room(s) provide a Type FE-36 extinguisher and wall bracket. Verify fire extinguisher complies with NFPA 10. 2.3 EQ-127: SECURE PACKAGE PASS-THRU — C. R. Laurence Protection Level 3, brushed stainless steel Package Pass-Thru. Interlocking door mechanism to allow only one door to be opened at a time, exterior door bar latch accessed from interior side. Unit to have prime painted housing with stainless steel doors. Model #SPR3, 15-7/8"W x 14-7/8"D x 13-1/4H. [www.crlaurence.com] 2.4 EQ-103: MARKER BOARDS: Claridge Series 8, LCS, factory framed, extruded aluminum with clear satin anodized finish. Provide full width chalk tray with ends filed smooth; display rail with cork inserts, end stops and two (2) hook/clips per board; one set of 4 pens and eraser for each. Provide trim as shown at jambs. At top and bottom edges provide #507-2 mounting angle clips @ 24" o.c. (or at studs) and #16A spotting adhesives behind all boards. Approved equal: Newline Products. 2.5 EQ-104: TACKBOARD - Claridge Series 8, with fabric over cork and aluminum frames. At top and bottom edges provide #507-2 mounting angle clips @ 24" o.c. (or at studs) and #16A spotting adhesives behind all boards. Size as noted on drawings. [ph 807-743-2200; www.claridgeproducts.com; info@claridg_enroducts.com.] MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00-1 2.6 ROLLER SHADES: MechoShade, manually operated, UNO; slimline bracket; ThermoVeil fabric, 1% weave; pockets or valance. Other acceptable manufacturers: Draper ,Vimco or Lutron. Shades to cover full extent of glass. 2.7 EQ-100 — AED CABINET: AED's Today brushed Stainless Steel, recessed Defibrillator cabinet. Model #1435F12-SS. 17-1/2"W x 6-1/2"D x 17-1/2"H. [www.aedstoday.com] Defibrillator units to be provided by owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. B. All applications to be true and plumb. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 10 00 00-2 SECTION 10 15 50 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes phenolic -core units as follows: 1. Toilet Enclosures: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall hung. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated and a sample. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Coordinate required miscellaneous steel supports. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of Contract Documents, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into work include, but are not limited to, those listed alphabetically below. 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Capitol Partitions, Inc. 5. Global Steel Products Corp. 6. Hadrian, Inc. 7. Metpar Corp. 2.2 PRIMARY MATERIALS A. Metal: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel sheet leveled to stretcher leveled flatness with No. 4 non - directional finish. B. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. C. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc -alloy die castings with chrome plating. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION 1 j A. Door, Panel, Pilaster, and Screen Panels: 1. Facing sheets free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 2. Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edge closures. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 15 50 - 1 1 I 3. Corners sealed by welding with welds ground smooth. 4. Concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. B. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves: Manufacturer's standard two-piece collars, 3 inches high. C. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of chrome -plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome -plated zamac or stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Floor Mounted Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to project conditions. B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-nnn-) wide in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-iuch- (914-uun-) wide out -swinging doors with a minimum 32-itich- (813- nun-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self -closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. Do not use on outward swinging doors; provide a coat hook at the interior pilaster and a separate stop/ bumper. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. i- TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 15 50 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1 r"2 inch (13 mni). b. Panels and Walls: I inch (25 mm). 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to 5 degree from closed position. END OF SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10 15 50 - 3 SECTION 10 22 21 OPERABLE PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated: 1. Sound -Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for laboratory sound -transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated. 2. Acoustical Performance Requirements: Installed operable panel partition assembly, identical to partition tested for STC, tested for NIC according to ASTM E 336, determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for 10 dB less than STC value indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Indicate storage and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel. C. Samples: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated. D. Setting Drawings: For embedded items and cutouts required in other work, including support -beam, mounting -hole template. E. Product certificates. F. Product test reports. G. Field quality -control reports. H. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 21- 1 1.5 WARRANTY 1 A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness. B. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension -leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness. C. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use. D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 [, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde]. E. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Operable acoustical panel partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, fabric faces, and accessories. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Advanced Equipment Corporation. b. FolDoor; Holcomb & Hoke Mfg. Co., Inc. C. Hufcor. d. KWIK-WALL Company. e. Modernfold, Inc. f. Panelfold Inc. B. Panel Operation Manually operated, paired panels. C. Panel Construction: Provide top reinforcement as required to support panel from suspension components and provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in -place partition is rigid; level; plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist, deformation, and surface and finish irregularities. D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements. E. STC: Not less than 54; NIC not less than 42. F. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard. OPERABLE PARTITIONS I0 22 21- 2 G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish. Provide any end pieces as required to accommodate this specific installation and maintain the acoustical performance of the door. 2.3 SEALS A. General: Provide types of seals indicated that produce operable panel partitions complying with acoustical performance requirements and the following: 1. Manufacturer's standard seals. 2. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage. 3. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed. B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: PVC -faced, mechanical, retractable, constant -force -contact seal exerting uniform constant pressure on floor when extended, ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel movement. I. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1'/z inches (38 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish. 2.4 FINISH FACING A. General: Provide finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire -test -response characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate backing, using mildew -resistant non -staining adhesive as recommended by facing manufacturer's written instructions. I . Color/Pattern: Match Architect's samples. B. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard fabric, from same dye lot, treated to resist stains. C. Paint: Manufacturer's standard factory -painted finish. D. Cap -Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter -edge trim with tight hairline joints concealing edges of panel and finish facing. E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel -to -panel joints. 2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Suspension Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for type of operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system, operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more than 0.10 inch (2.54 mm) between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage. B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball -bearing wheels. OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 21- 3 C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for type of operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum. 1. Multidirectional Switches: Adjustable switch configuring track into L, T, or X intersections and allowing panels to be moved in all pass -through, 90-degree change, and cross -over travel direction s combinations. D. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, decorative finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory -applied, corrosion -resistant, protective coating unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. C. Install panels from marked packages in numbered sequence indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable. E. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operable panel partitions to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Light -Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical joints and top and bottom seals for voids; adjust partitions for acceptable fit. B. Repair or replace operable panel partitions that do not comply with requirements. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions. END OF SECTION OPERABLE PARTITIONS 10 22 21- 4 SECTION 10 42 00 PLAQUE PART GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Cast Bronze Plaques. M > 1.02 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive data on textures, sizes, finishes and letter styles. B. Shop Drawings: Contractor will furnish Architect with full size precise replica of actual pattern for f approval prior to casting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. A.R.K. Ramos. B. Matthews. C. The Southwell Company. 2.02 Materials A. Bronze Tablet: Cast of virgin ingots (85-5-5-5 Standard U.S. Bronze Alloy). Casting free of pits and gas holes. B. Letters: Sharp and hand tooled. Border and faces of raised letters are to be satin finish and background leatherette texture; letter style to be selected by Architect. C. Tablet Background: Background oxidized and plaque chemically cleaned and sprayed with two coats of clear acrylic lacquer. D. Sizes. 1. Building Plaque: 18" wide by 24" high. E. Mounting: Concealed fastening method. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Installation A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION 10420 -1 10420 -2 SECTION 10 43 00 - EXTERIOR SIGNS PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Post -mounted signs complete with all components. B. Related Sections 1. Section 00 33 00: Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequencing and Scheduling: Coordinate installation with adjacent finish materials in manner not to destroy adjacent surfaces. B. Coordinate with other sections for cast -in or built-in anchors and mounting hardware required in Work accomplished in other sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 HANDICAP ONLY PARKING SIGNS A. Type: stamped metal sign on galvanized steel post. B. Size: 12"x 12". C. Mount on post, securely anchored in concrete. Bottom of sign to be mounted at a min. of 5 feet above ground. D. Message: "Reserved" under handicap symbol; meet State requirements. "Van Accessible under handicap symbol at locations noted; meet State requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive sign modules; verify for proper location of cast -in anchors. ` B. Notify Architect in writing of unacceptable substrate or improper location of anchors. Beginning Work indicates acceptance of substrate. Subsequent modifications to substrate or modules becomes this section's complete responsibility. 3.2 INSTALLATION j A. Install signs in locations indicated on drawings. Square, plumb, and level units as required. B. Bore required holes for post mounted sign modules; set and align posts; fill and compact space around post with concrete. C. In addition to letters shown on Drawings, allow for I set of 8" metal letters for address number, to be field located as directed by fire marshal. EXTERIOR SIGNS 10 43 00-1 END OF SECTION EXTERIOR SIGNS 10 43 00-2 i Ij t: SECTION 10 44 00 INTERIOR SIGNS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide interior signage and accessories for complete installation of interior and painted signs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit complete shop drawings indicating all materials, sizes, configurations, applicable substrate mounting details, required location of connections and blocking. 2. Submit color samples on actual substrate. 1.3 ACCESSABILITY REQUIREMENTS A. All signage shall meet the requirements of Texas State Purchasing and General Services Commission, Article 9102, Texas Revised Civil Statutes with regard to accessibility to the handicapped; the ADAG, 2004 (Americans with Disabilities Act Guidlines). If the product specified does not meet these requirements, it shall be modified to comply. Modifications shall be noted on the submittal. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE A. Room Signs: ASI Sign Systems InTac precision machined panel; colors as selected with with grade 2 Braille and 1/32" raised letters and graphics and updatable window insert spaces. Manufacturer to verify compliance with ADA requirements. 1. Size: 8"w x 6"h (minimum) U.N.O., and larger as required to accommodate scheduled copy and/or symbols. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Message: As determined. On the submittal provide the room number as listed on the drawings; the Owner will then review to see if modifications are desired. 4. Adhesive apply. Provide matching back plate at locations where sign is applied to clear glass. 5. Provide for 30 standard size signs; 3 exit signs. 2.2 VINYL LETTER SIGNAGE A. Properties, unless noted otherwise: 1. Color: white UV -stabilized materials. 2. Letter style: Helvetica Regular. 3. Size: as listed. 4. Mounting: Surface apply on opaque surfaces; Interior (reverse out) on glass, uno. 5. Allow for twenty-six letters 1"; and fourty- eight 3/8" high letters. Also provide 3/8" high numbers at the top of the strike side of each door and cased opening frame- above door at frame at strike face of door. 2.3 ACRYLIC PLAQUE A. Provide for Owner selected acrylic plaque with Owner provided artwork and graphics 1. 3'-4" dia. 2. Raised artwork and letters 3. Message as provided by Owner L..K INTERIOR SIGNS 10 44 00-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Installation r1i A. General 1. Locate sign units and accessories as directed by Architect, using mounting methods of type described and in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install sign units level, plumb and at height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects of appearance. 3.2 Cleaning and Protection A. At completion of installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 Mounting A. Typically mount signs on wall within 8 inches of door frame on latchset side of door; centerline of sign at 5'-0" above floor. Also as scheduled or directed in field. 3.4 Schedule for Photopolymer signs A. Men's Toilet Rooms: 3 inch male symbol and International Symbol of Accessibility, raised 1/32"; "Men" in 5/8" tactile raised 1/32" lettering; and at bottom center Grade 2 Braille message. 1. Provide at all toilet locations identified as a men's toilet on the room finish schedule. B. Women's Toilet Rooms: 3 inch female symbol and International Symbol of Accessibility, raised 1/32"; "Women" in 5/8" tactile raised 1/32" lettering; and at bottom center Grade 2 Braille message. 1. Provide at all toilet locations identified as a women's toilet on the room finish schedule. C. Unisex Toilet Rooms: 3 inch male, female, and International Symbol of Accessibility, raised 1/32"; "Unisex" in 5/8" tactile raised 1/32" lettering; and at bottom center Grade 2 Braille message. 1. Provide at all toilet locations scheduled as a unisex toilet. D. Exit Signs: Provide raised letters and Braille, complying with ICC A 117.1. 3" x 6" uno; mount on latch side of the door at 4'-6" AFF. Provide at all doors with exit lights [or adjacent door]. END OF SECTION INTERIOR SIGNS 10 44 00-2 H SECTION 10 50 00 LOCKERS PART GENERAL 1.01 Section Includes A. Furnish all labor, materials, services and equipment required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the installation of lockers, benches and storage cubicles as described herein. 1.02 Submittals A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for locker units. B. Samples: Submit color samples on squares of same substrate and finish materials to be used for fabrication of lockers. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for lockers, verifying dimensions affecting locker installations. Show lockers in detail, method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. D. Warranty: Executed copies of manufacturers standard warranties. 1. Phenolic lockers: Minimum 10 year material, 2 year workmanship/labor. 1.03 Job Conditions A. Do not deliver lockers until building is enclosed and temperature and humidity controlled. B. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Phenolic 1. Summit 2. Columbia 3. ASI 2.2 Materials at Z Style Solid Phenolic Lockers A. Phenolic Composite Components 1. Decorative papers impregnated with melamine resin on faces and integrally compression molded with a core consisting of solid phenolic impregnated kraft paers utilizing a proprietary process. 2. UV -stabilized finish (specification basis is Trespa Meteon material). 3. Colors and patterns as selected from manufacturers full line of colors. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 or 316 C. Locker Body and Doors: Locker side panels of 3/8" [10mm] thick solid phenolic composite panels with rough matte finish. All shelves, tops and bottoms made of ''/2" thick solid phenolic, and have dual ventilation slots. Backs of min. 3/8" thick solid phenolic. Doors shall be min. ''/z" thick. Lockers designed to be water resistand and rustproof inside and out. 1. Provide a secure, but well ventilated door face for maximum air flow. 2. Venting shall occur at door face only; not between lockers; designed to take advantage of natural air convection. Provide maximum ventilation possible within manufacturer's full line of options. LOCKERS 10 50 00-1 3. List Industries, Inc., Deerfield Beach, FL f 4. Aluminum body lockers with phenolic door fronts ("Kwik-Locker") as manufactured by Peter ._ Cahill Engineering are also acceptable, subject to all other applicable requirements of this specification. Local contact: John McQuirk (214-876-6141). 2.2 Materials at Solid Phenolic Lockers A. Phenolic Composite Components 1. Decorative papers impregnated with melamine resin on faces and integrally compression molded with a core consisting of solid phenolic impregnated kraft paers utilizing a proprietary process. 2. UV -stabilized finish (specification basis is Trespa Meteon material). 3. Colors and patterns as selected from manufacturers full line of colors. B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167, Type 304 or 316 C. Locker Body and Doors: Locker side panels of 3/8" [10mm] thick solid phenolic composite panels with rough matte finish. All shelves, tops and bottoms made of '/2" thick solid phenolic, and have dual ventilation slots. Backs of min. '/4" thick solid phenolic. Lockers designed to be water resistand and rustproof inside and out. 1. Provide a secure, but well ventilated door face for maximum air now. 2. Venting shall occur at door face only; not between lockers; designed to take advantage of natural air convection. Provide maximum ventilation possible within manufacturer's full line of options. D. Locking System: Hasp prepared for padlock. E. Accessories: top hook and two side wall hooks. Provide end and filler panels [including exposed backs] of '/z" solid phenolic with the same construction as the locker body. F. Height: 71 3/4" . G. Locker Identification: Inlaid solid stainless steel disc. H. Base: 3/4" solid phenolic, 4" high., U.N.O. 2.04 Accessibility A. At each locker area provide at least one accessible locker, and a minimum of 5% of each type utilized. 1. Lockers shall be located where they have a clear floor space in front of the accessible locaker(s) at least 30 inches wide by 48" deep. 2. The locker shall be modified to have the bottom of the locker no lower than 9" AFF and with shelves no higher than 48" AFF at shallow lockers and 54" AFF at lockers 12" deep. 3. Provide a tactile accessibility sign. 4. Operation of door shall be by lever type handle [Para. 4.27.4] - with padlock locking capability. 2.6 Locker Benches A. Bench Tops: 1-piece units of Accoya Radiata Pine, acetyated; Grade A2, minimum 9-P inches (240 nuu) wide by 1-1/4 inches (32 nml) thick, with rounded corners and edges: 1. Provide one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces, and one coat of clear lacquer on top and sides. B. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard supports, with predrilled fastener holes for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as follows: it 'I LOCKERS 10 50 00-2 f f i 1. Cast Iron: 1-1/2-inch- (38-rani-) diameter steel tubing threaded on both ends, with standard pipe flange at top and bell -shaped cast-iron base; with baked -enamel or powder -coat finish; anchored with exposed fasteners. a. Color: Match lockers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 Preparation A. Field Measurements 1. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication of special components, when possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. 2. Allow for adjustment and fitting of trim and filler panels wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 3.02 Installation A. Install lockers at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for plumb, level, rigid, and flush installation. B. Space fastenings as recommended by manufacturer, and apply through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid distortion; conceal fasteners insofar as possible. C. Install trim, base, and filler panels where indicated, using concealed fasteners to provide flush, hairline joints against adjacent surfaces. 3.03 Adjust and Clean A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. B. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. C. Touch-up marred finishes, replace units which cannot be restored to factory -finished appearance. D. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION ! LOCKERS 10 50 00-3 1__ z LOCKERS 10 50 00-4 iG f i T SECTION 10 80 00 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Toilet and bath accessories listed herein. 2. Rough -in frames supplies to other sections. 3. Attachment hardware and related blocking. B. Related Sections 1. Section 04 22 00: Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 09 29 00: Gypsum Board System. 3. Section 10 15 50: Toilet Compartments. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A-167 -Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. B. ASTM A-336 - Cold -rolled Carbon Steel Sheets, Commercial Quality. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit manufacturer's product data in accordance with Section 01300. B. Data to illustrate each accessory at large scale and show installation method. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are ready to receive them. B. Pack accessories individually in a manner to protect accessory and its finish. C. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces and work from damage during installation of work of this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS, subject to the requirements stated herein. A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Bradley (' C. American Specialties, Inc. 2.2 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES [Bobrick numbers, U.N.O.] r TA-01: Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser, B262: Typical, where indicated (stainless steel) -- 1. Provide one for every sink if no other towel dispenser is scheduled. 2. Mount with slot 48" AFF. TA-02: Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle, B3944: Typical, where indicated (stainless steel) 1. Mount with slot 48" AFF. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-1 TA-03: Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle, B39003: Typical, where indicated (stainless steel) 1. Mount with slot 48" AFF. TA-05: Toilet Paper Dispenser, B2740. q 1. Provide one for every water closet. 2. Mount top at 28". ^' TA-10: Grab Bar, 24", B5806 x 24 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Mount at 34" to centerline above finished floor, max. 6" from side wall. TA-11: Grab Bar, 36", B5806 x 36 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Mount at 34" to centerline above finished floor, max. 6" from side wall. TA-12: Grab Bar, 42", B5806 x 42 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Mount at 34" to centerline above finished floor, minimum 12" from rear wall. TA-13: Grab Bar, 48", B5806 x 48 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Mount at 34" to centerline above finished floor, minimum 12" from rear wall. TA-14: Grab Bar, 42", GAMCo Model # 150S-75L or R w/ custom, or other custom bar to match project j requirements. 1. Provide where indicated. 2. Mount at 34" to centerline above finished floor, one end mounted to the side wall; the other securely anchored to the floor. TA-20: Framed Mirror, B290, 2060 TA-20X: Framed Mirror, similar to B290, 2060 but using laminated glass TA-23: Not used TA-30: Manual Hand Soap Dispenser, B2111 Provide at all sinks and lavatories. TA-3 1: Not used TA-36: Utility Hook Strip: Datum Series 929 Utility Hook Strip (6 hooks) 3 Provide one at at Jail Control 1. littpJhvkvw.dahunfiling.coni�assets/literature/ Product-Guides/Rigid- Rak/929UtilityHook S trip.pdf TA-42: Not used TA-43: Feminine Napkin Disposal 1. B-254, surface -mounted. Provide where indicated in walls 2. Where not indicated, assume one applicable disposal at each female toilet. i s TA-50: Mop Rack, B223 x 36" 1. Mount adjacent to mop sinks so drippings go into sink. 2.3 Finish TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-2 I f A. Exposed Metal: Stainless steel satin finish, unless otherwise noted in schedule. 2.4 Attachment Components t_ A. Adhesives: Epoxy -type contact cement. B. Fasteners, Screws and Bolts: Hot -dip galvanized. C. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer. 2.5 Fabrication A. Weld and grind smooth all joints. B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. C. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. i D. Form surfaces flat without distortions. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. E. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes. F. Hot dip galvanized ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. G. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 Preparation A. Deliver inserts and rough -in frames to job site at appropriate time for building -in. Provide templates and rough -in measurements as required. B. Before starting work, notify Architect in writing of any conflicts detrimental to installation or operation of units. C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories if not shown on Drawings. D. Coordinate and provide blocking behind accessories as required for heavy duty service/ use. 3.2 Installation A. Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate for long life under hard use. END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 80 00-3 DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 21 10 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM ~` PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. C. All applicable standards including NFPA, FM, UL and Authority Have Jurisdiction (AHJ) shall be applied to all systems specified and included in the construction documents. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide a complete fire protection system for the building as specified, as indicated on the drawings, and as required by all authorities having jurisdiction. The drawings show the general arrangement of plumbing, air conditioning, piping, ductwork, and other apparatus. The Contractor shall coordinate this work with all other construction so that there shall be no conflict as to space required. The mechanical and electrical work shall, in general, take precedence over sprinkler work, except where it is absolutely necessary to maintain required coverage. B. Work Included: 1. Complete fire protection sprinkler system with water service provider approved water meter and vault and all piping, valves, and accessories for a complete system. 2. The requirement that the entire fire protection installation shall be as required by and subject to the approval of all approving authorities, shall govern the installation for this project. The drawings are intended as a guide for the system arrangement; omission of specific indication of any item shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing that item if it is required by the approving authorities. 3. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from the approving authorities, a certificate of approval or other indication of such approval and acceptance by said Authorities. 4. The FM 200 system shall be a to "total Flood" Clean agent Fire Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described within these specifications and indicated on the contract documents shall include all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services necessary, and items required to complete and test the fire suppression system. p 5. The system shall be hydraulically designed, based on a flow data obtained from local $E authorities. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and obtaining this information and incorporating it into his bid and the design a C. Design Responsibility and Certification: The designer of the fire protection systems shall be responsible for all design, coordination and approval of each system in order to assure compliance with drawings, specifications, codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Drawings, 3 calculations and other supporting evidence of this design shall be provided to be proper a reviewing agencies and to the Architect and shall bear appropriate professional certification that the Designer has met the Quality Assurance requirements. Certification shall be indicative that the Designer acknowledges and accepts full design responsibility. Descriptions and limitations set forth in these specifications must be followed unless more stringent requirements are FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 1 1.4 1.5 established by the reviewing agency. FIRE PROTECTION DESIGN CRITERIA A. Sprinkler systems shall be designed for the densities shown on the drawings. Hydraulic calculations shall be based on simultaneous operation of heads in the designated area plus flows in the standpipes in accordance with NFPA 13. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. This shall include, but is not limited, to power for systems control panels, interlock wiring for equipment (HVAC, dampers, etc.) shutdown or relays and shunt trip breakers. C. The Contractor shall be licensed to sell, install and service the types of systems required by these specifications. D. Design system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas. The designer of the fire protection systems shall be certified by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET) for Automatic Sprinkler System Design, Level III. The installer shall have on their staff a full-time Responsible Managing Employee (RME) licensed by the State Fire Marshall, to install and service fire protection systems. The RME shall assure that each fire protection system as installed meets the standards as provided by the applicable publications referenced herein and the requirements of these specifications. All design submittal documents and shop drawings shall bear the responsible engineers signed and dated seal. E. The installing contractor for the FM 200 system shall be trained by the manufacturer to design, install, test, and maintain fire suppression systems, shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience with FM 200 systems and shall maintain or have access to a clean agent recharging station which can recharge the system within 24 hours after a discharge. F. All parts of fire protection piping systems shall conform to all provisions of Underwriters' Laboratories requirements. All equipment shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label of approval. G. The manufacturer of the suppression system hardware and detection components shall be ISO 9000 registered with the name of the manufacturer on all major components. H. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from residual pressure water flow test. I. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. All aspects of design, securing approval of design and construction, shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standards, including but not limited to NFPA - 10, 13, 14, 20, 24, 70, 72, and 2001 and shall conform in all respects to the rules and FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 2 i regulations of the Building Code and Fire Code of the City in which this project is located, all - Factory Mutual requirements and all other approving authorities having jurisdiction. K. All devices shall be new, standard products of the manufacturer's latest design and. L. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Factory Mutual standards. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as required in this section and coordinated with all other trades. B. Fire Protection System; 1. Provide hydraulic calculations for all areas. 2. Provide 1/4" minimum scale piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all accessories. Contractor shall provide 3D drawings for coordination upon request. 3. Provide clearly marked -up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: a. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, and floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections. Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. b. Indicate locations of all agent storage containers, nozzles, pipe runs including pipe sizes and lengths control panels, detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms. A separate layout shall be indicated for each system (i.e. room) and indicate mechanical and electrical work c. Sprinkler heads for all areas and sprinkler cabinet. d. Fire department connection. e. Electrical layout drawings showing locations of all devices, point, to point conduit runs, and a description of the method used for detector mounting. 4. Hydraulic calculations and drawings to be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction and obtain stamp of approval prior to submission to the Architect/Engineer. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds requirements specified, and suggested by listed codes. D. Provide certificate of compliance from authority have jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING A. Underground pipe to the inside of the building shall be cement lined cast iron or PVC Class 150 (SDR 17) with cast iron Class 250 fittings. B. All sprinkler piping within the building shall be per NFPA schedules with approved compatible fittings and valve connections. Piping may be joined by welding, and/or the use of grooved, flanged or threaded joints and connections. C. Piping service entrance shall utilize fittings to minimize floor space for fire riser. 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow preventers (BFP) shall be reduced pressure type, Febco 825, or approved equal. A BFP FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 3 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 shall be installed to isolate all non -potable water requirements from the building domestic water system. (All BFP's shall be installed within the building, unless otherwise dictated by code x authorities.) FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS A. At the points designated on the Contract Drawings, install Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) required for fire protection purposes. From a point on the incoming water supply line, this Contractor shall extend water line for fire protection purposes to Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings). B. Wall type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) shall be equal to Potter Roemer double clapper flush type Siamese connections having threads complying with the requirements of the Fire Department of the City of Lubbock. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of the Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) with substantial chains. The plate fitting against the building shall have raised letters reading "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" or "STANDPIPE". All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. C. Sidewalk type Fire Department Connections (Siamese fittings) shall be equal to Potter Roemer free standing fire department cast brass body and escutcheon. They shall have proper caps with pin type lugs attached to the body of connection with substantial chains. "STANDPIPE" or "AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER" to be cast on head of connection. All external surfaces shall be chromium plated polished surfaces or as directed by Architect. D. Fire department connection shall be Factory Mutual approved. VALVES A. Control valves inside buildings shall be listed 175-pound W.O.G. approved indicating type valve. B. Check valves shall be listed, 175-pound W.O.G. horizontal swing check valves or approved equivalent such as wafer check valves. C. Drain and test valves shall be 175-pound W.O.G., bronze threaded globe valves with renewable composition disc. WATER FLOW SWITCHES A. Vane -type waterflow detectors shall be installed on the sprinkler mains. Detector shall be designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, but shall not be mounted in a fitting or within 12 inches of any fitting that changes the direction of water flow, and shall have a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds 10 gpm. B. Detector switch mechanisms shall incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard element with an adjustable range of 0 to 60 second. Switches shall be suitable for operation on 24-volt D.C., and shall be actuated by a vane extended into the waterway of the piping. Detectors shall be of dust tight construction. Detector switch enclosures shall be secured with a tamper proof bolt that requires the use of a special wrench for removal. Vane -type waterflow detectors shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. The detector shall be furnished and installed under this section and wired completely under Division 16. C. Water flow switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. TAMPER SWITCHES =r FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 4 ( A. Tamper switches shall be installed on each valve inside the building. Switches shall be mounted } so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve control or when the stem has moved t no more than one -fifth (1/5) of the distance from its normal position. The mechanism shall be contained in a weather-proof die cast aluminum housing which shall provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housings shall be furnished in red baked enamel. The switch mechanism shall have a minimum rated capacity of one amp, 125 A.C. - 0.25 amp, 24 volt D.C. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting. Supervisory switches and gate valve switches shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed. Supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed under r this section and wired completely under Division 16. B. Tamper switches shall be Factory Mutual approved. 2.7 SIGNS A. Approved enameled metal signs shall be securely attached at all main drains, auxiliary drains, inspectors' test connections and control valves. 2.8 SPRINKLER SYSTEM A. Automatic Sprinklers: Sprinkler heads of proper temperature rating shall be installed throughout the building as required by approving authorities. Where furred or finished ceilings occur, the piping shall be installed above the ceilings with the sprinkler heads nippled through the ceiling and set in metal escutcheon plates. Where lay -in ceilings occur, center the sprinkler heads on each tile. Sprinkler heads shall be, in general, provided as follows: Area Served Type Head Trim Fully finished areas defined as having gypsum Fully concealed head with painted cover board and/or lay -in ceilings (color by Architect) Non -finished areas cover Pendant heads, with cage cover where head is less than 7' AFF and in janitor closets. At the Owner's option, the above may be revised per specific building requirements. Contractor shall price per the above but must verify all final requirements with Architect prior to placing orders. Sprinkler Cabinet: One cabinet with spare sprinklers and a. head wrench per NFPA. Install as directed by the Architect. B. Provide spare heads equal to one percent (1%) of the total number of heads installed under the Contract, but not less than ten (10). The heads shall be packed in a suitable wall mounted sprinkler cabinet and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating heads installed. In addition to the spare heads, the Contractor shall provide not less than one special sprinkler head wrench for each type of head. The cabinet shall be located where directed by the Architect. C. Sprinkler Risers: Shall be equipped with a variable pressure alarm valve including retarding chamber, drain valve, standard trim, and gauges. D. Water Alarm: A water motor alarm shall be connected to each alarm valve and shall discharge to a brass alarm gong located on the exterior of the building as directed by the Architect. Alarm gong finish to be selected by the Architect. The alarm valves shall be Underwriters' Laboratories approved, wet type, connected to water supply and indicated on the Shop Drawings. Each alarm valve shall be provided with a circuit closer. Valves shall conform to the equipment of NFPA Standard No. 13, complete with retarding chamber and pressure switch. f FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 5 E. Water Flow Alarm Switch: Provide, where indicated on the Drawings, McDonnell UL approved line size flow switches. See Division 16 for electrical signal connection by others to these flow switches. F. Drains: Shall be piped to the outside of buildings as part of this work, except in locations where a drain is provided by the plumbing design, specifically for sprinkler system use. G. Piping System Valves: Shall be approved for fire protection piping systems and shall be installed as required by the NFPA. H. Hangers: Shall be installed as required and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories for use in a sprinkler system. 2.9 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESION SYSTEM (FM 200) A. The system shall provide the FM-20 fire extinguishing minimum concentration as described by UL or FM for the Occupancy Class (A, B, or Q. B. The system shall be complete. It shall include all mechanical and electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, FM-200 agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release, and abort station, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdown, alarm interface, caution/advisory signs, functional checkout, and testing, training, and all other operations necessary for a functional, UL Listed, and/or FM approved FM-200 Clean Agent Fire Suppression System. C. Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made at 6 months intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service. D. The contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected space against agent loss and leakage during the "hold" period, which is a minimum period of 10 minutes or a time period sufficient to allow for response by trained personnel. E. The system shall be actuated by a combination of ionization and photoelectric detectors installed for a maximum coverage of 250 ftZ per detector in both the room, under floor, and above ceiling protected spaces. The airflow is one air change per minute, photoelectric detectors only shall be installed for a maximum area coverage of 125 ftZ per detector. F. Detectors shall be cross -zoned detection requiring 2 detectors to be in alarm before release. G. Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows: Actuation of 1 detector within the system shall: a. Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face. b. Energize an alarm ball and optional visual indicator (located by the Owner). c. Transfer auxiliary contract which shall transmit a signal to the fire alarm system and shutdown the HVAC system for the room in alarm. d. Light a lamp on the remote annunciator. 2. Actuation of a second detector within the system shall: a. Illuminate the "PRE -DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face. b. Energize a pre -discharge horn/strobe indicator (located by the Owner). c. Start time -delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). d. System abort sequence is enabled at this time. e. Light a lamp on the remote annunciator. 3. After completion of the time -delay sequence, the FM-200 Clean Agent system shall FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 6, l t _1 f is discharge and the following shall occur: a. Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face. b. Shutdown of all power to high -voltage equipment c. Energize a visual indicator outside the room in which the discharge occurred. d. Energize a "System Fired" audible device e. Light a lamp on the remote annunciator. 4. The system shall be capable of being actuated by a manual discharge device located at each rooms exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence description above except the that time delay and abort functions shall be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type and shall be supervised at the main control panel. H. FM-200 Agent Storage and Distribution shall be designed so that each room has its own supply of clean agent located with the room to reduce the amount of pipe and fittings for the system. I. The clean agent shall be stored in ANSUL agent storage containers made of high -strength low alloy steel (conform to NFPA 2001) which are super -pressurized with dry nitrogen to an operating pressure of 360 psi at 70°F. The containers shall be actuated by a resettable electric actuator with a mechanical override located at each agent container or connected bank of cylinders. Non-resettable or explosive devices shall not be permitted. The container shall have a pressure gauge and low-pressure switch to provide visual and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low-pressure switch shall be wired to a control panel to provide an audible and visual "trouble" alarms in the event the container pressure drops below 290psi to 294 psi. The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide visual indication of container pressure. Each container shall be a pressure relief provision that automatically operating before the internal pressure exceeds 774.5 psi f 5%. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided within the manufacturer's guidelines to distribute the FM-200 agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution: 1. Nozzles shall be available in 3/8 inch to 2 inch pipe sizes. Each size shall be available in 180' and 360' distribution patterns. 2. Ceiling plates shall be used with nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes though ceiling tiles. K. Distribution piping and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, NFPA 2001, and approved piping standards and guidelines. All distribution piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using accepted practices and quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored at all directional changes and nozzle locations: 1. Before assembly, all piping shall be reamed, blown clear, and swabbed with suitable solvents to remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils . 2. All pipe thread shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to male thread only. L. The control panel shall be a releasing panel supplied by the manufacturer of the system. The control system and its components shall be UL listed and FM approved for use as a local fire alarm system with releasing device service. The control system shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system detection, actuation and auxiliary functions. The control system shall include battery standby power to support 24 hours in standby and 5 minutes in alarm. The control system shall be microprocessor based utilizing a distributed processing concept. A single microprocessor failure shall not impact operation of additional modules on the system. The control system shall be capable of supporting Cross Zoned Detection. The control system shall supply integrated 3 amp power supply circuitry. Each control system shall a minimum of six (6) I FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 7 initiating circuits: 1. Each circuit shall be capable of Class A (Style D) or Class B (Style A) operation. 2. Each circuit shall be capable of operating up to twenty (25) approved detectors. 3. Each circuit shall be capable of monitoring contact devices configured for manual release, manual alarm, system abort, trouble input or auxiliary (non -fire) input. 4. Each control shall contain release circuits for activation of an extinguishing/suppression system(s): a. Each circuit shall be capable of Class B (Style Y) operation. b. Each circuit shall be rated for 1 amp @ 24 VDC. 5. Each control system shall contain two (2) indicating appliance circuits for annunciation. a. Each circuit shall be capable of Class A (Style B) or Class B (Style Y) operation. b. Each circuit shall be rated for 1 amp @ 24 VDC. 6. Each control system shall provide an auxiliary power supply rated for 2 amps @ 24 VDC. 7. Each control system shall provide three (3) Form-C relays: one for common alarm, one for common trouble and one for common supervisory. Additional relays can be added to each control system by adding the panel specific Relay Module. M. The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72. 1. The Ionization detector shall be an AUTOPULSE model, or equal in quality, performance and features. 2. The Photoelectric detector shall be an AUTOPULSE model, or equal in quality, performance and features. N. MANUAL RELEASE (Electric): The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a means of manually discharging the Suppression System when used in conjunction with the control system. The Manual Release switch shall be a AUTOPULSE model, or equal in quality, performance and features. The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions shall cause the system to discharge and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in the same manner as if the system had operated automatically. A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the room. O. ABORT STATION: The Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next to each manual switch and in the communications center as directed by the Owner. The Abort Station shall be an AUTOPULSE model, or equal in quality, performance and features. The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the control panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists."Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted. P. AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS: Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the control panel. The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall be an AUTOPULSE model, or equal in quality, performance and features. The visual alarm unit shall be an AUTOPULSE Strobe device, or equal in quality, performance and features. A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the rooms. Provide an advisory sign at each light location Q. CAUTION AND ADVISORY SIGNS: Signs shall be provided to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the FM-200 equipment supplier. 1. Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space. 2. Manual discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station. 3. Flashing light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected space. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 8 i i IR. All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and must be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. runs of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, and installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions. The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color coded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings),and crosses between conductors. Final terminations between the control panel and the system field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory -trained representative. -, All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725 and Article 760, except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in the latest edition of NFPA 72. Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or country codes. The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. All pipe trenches shall be dug to a line and the bottom cleaned and shaped to provide support of the pipe through its entire length. For all requirements for above grade or underground fire main, comply with NFPA-24 Private Fire Service Mains. B. Where plastic pipe (PVC) is installed underground, manufacturer's instructions shall be strictly followed in regard to cover and backfilling materials and procedures. 3.2 SPRINKLER PIPING A. Install per NFPA-13 and insofar as possible, all sprinkler system mains and branches shall be installed as close as possible below structural concrete slabs. B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient All piping for all systems shall be coordinated with lighting fixtures, air conditioning ducts, piping, air handling units, and all other obstructions to minimize obstructions with other work prior to installation. C. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. D. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. Provide Fire Department test station, piped to drain. E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated. F. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required. G. Apply paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head and cover plates do not receive field paint finish. H. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or adjacent Siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle. 3.3 HANGERS AND SLEEVES - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 211000-9 A. All hangers shall be installed and spaced in accordance with NFPA No. 13. B. Sleeves shall be set for all pipes passing through concrete floors and mason walls. P P P g g masonry C. Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates at all wall penetrations. 3.4 AUXILIARY DRAINS A. Auxiliary drains consisting of plugs or globe valves and plugs where the capacity of a trapped pipe section exceeds 5 gallons, shall be provided to drain all points in the system that cannot be drained back to a main riser. Field conditions may dictate additional drains which could not be determined for bidding purposes which shall be provided as required by NFPA No. 13. 3.5 INSPECTORS' TEST CONNECTIONS A. Furnish and install inspectors' test connections per NFPA NO. 13. 3.6 CONCEALED WORK A. No work shall be concealed unless first inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 3.7 TESTING A. Hydrostatically test entire standpipe system in accordance with NFPA 14 and sprinkler in accordance with NFPA 13. All piping shall be tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and other approving authority and shall be proved tight. Unsatisfactory workmanship shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the above mentioned persons. Defective materials shall be replaced with new materials and the defective materials removed from the premises. B. Provide certificates to the Owner indicating all testing has been appropriately conducted for each fire protection system. 3.8 FM-200 SYSTEM INSPECTION AND CHECKOUT A. After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked out, inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards. 1. All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and installation. Id 2. All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to earth. 3. The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests. a. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures, and test values recorded. b. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function as required { } and designed. ) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 10 1 c. Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble condition into s the system. B. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include control panel operation, manual and (optional) abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures. C. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual. D. Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of system "As -Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent container(s), detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details. E. ACCEPTANCE TESTS At the time "As -Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted, the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used to test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been approved. 2. The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and manual actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices and manual override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified. A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to determine the presence of openings which would affect the agent concentration levels. The test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system, or equivalent, with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001, Appendix C { 4. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in leakage ( and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s). The contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE - SUCCESS OF THE ROOM PRESSURIZATION TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in accordance with these specifications, the contractor shall determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be submitted to the owner for record. Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 11 END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 12 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK € FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 21 10 00 - 13 DIVISION 22 PLUMBING The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 1 . PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: Provide complete plumbing systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete sanitary waste and vent system as shown on the drawings, described herein and required to provide a complete code compliant system. 2. Furnish and install a complete domestic cold and hot water piping to all plumbing fixtures and equipment as shown on the drawings, described herein and required to provide a complete code compliant system. 3. Other items and services required to complete the systems. B. Any Alternate Proposals are summarized in Division 01 of the Specifications. The Contractor is directed to refer to all Sections of the Specifications and Drawings for this project to determine the exact extent and scope of the various Alternate Proposals as each pertains to the work of all trades. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame -Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 1 F 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. j B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code 3. Uniform Mechanical Code 4. Uniform Plumbing Code 5. National Electrical Code 6. Energy Conservation Code 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A117.1 10. All authorities having jurisdiction. 11. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above -specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: i x 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers 4 (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 2 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association EMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1 and 22 submittal requirements. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 22. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be �- -- identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All 1 substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect's decision shall 4 ' be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re - submittal. 5. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 6. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 7. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non -complying equipment at the Contractor's expense. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Piping and Accessories Materials: a. Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: 1. Piping material proposed for each system. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 3 3. 4. 2. Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3. Flexible connectors for piping. 4. Flanges. b. 1/4" scale (minimum) sanitary sewer, storm water, domestic hot and cold water, piping shop drawings showing coordinated piping routing, valve locations and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a. Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom -fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b. Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. C. Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, motor driven equipment, inertia bases, etc. d. Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e. For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. f. For spring -and -pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. Mechanical Identification Materials: a. Clearly marked -up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: 1. Valve tagging. 2. Pipe marking. 3. Equipment marking. Insulation: a. Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b. Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. C. Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre -insulated pipe. d. Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. e. Plumbing Materials: a. Clearly marked -up manufacturer's data specifications on: 1. Fixtures, carriers and all accessories. 2. Plumbing equipment. 3. Water hammer arresters. 4. Backflow preventers. 5. Trap primers 6. Trapguards 7. Tempering valves. 8. Gas Regulators. 6. Heating: showing compliance with the a. Provide clearly marked -up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1. Water Heaters b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 7. Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 8. Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 4 E. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. B. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if: 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub -contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. E. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts F. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. G. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 5 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES g, A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and t ,, paid for by the Contractor. j B. Pay all fees required for the connection of water, and sewer to utility mains, and any meter fees if required. C. Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the plumbing systems to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of plumbing equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect's review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A. The Plumbing Contractor shall rough in for and make all water, sewer, etc. connections to all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing -in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 6 connections, or as detailed. B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall { provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. E. Provide all galvanized sheet metal ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation. Exposed sheet metal shall be paint -grip type. 1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 22 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 22 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 22. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 7 1.13 } final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in j ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. C. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of 3 the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer's standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. l 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: 8'/2" x 11" Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Text: Neatly written or printed Drawings: I in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber -board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet -and -inches, lbs, and cfrrt. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 8 j l.� t Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.14 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of at least one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 22, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland -Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non - plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be r stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. t i COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 9 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCCESS DOORS A. In fire -rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION t£ A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough -in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 22 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 22. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Unless noted otherwise, piping maybe run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 22 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment". Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 10 i J. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite { and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up -ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. Properly cap or plug all open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the system. P. Arrangement: 1. All piping shall be run parallel to building lines and shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment or devices nor to block access to doors, windows, manholes or other access openings. 2. Piping shall be arranged so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. 3. Piping shall be placed and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of the equipment, ducts, etc. 4. All piping shall be installed to ensure noiseless circulation. 5. All valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access. 6. All piping shall be erected and pitched to ensure proper draining. 7. Piping shall be installed so as to avoid liquid or air pockets throughout the piping system. 8. Eccentric reducers with flat side up shall be used wherever changes in pipe size would cause an air trap. 9. Expansion and contraction of piping shall be provided by expansion loops, bends or expansion joints to prevent injury to connections, piping, equipment or the building. Q. Connections for Removal: 1. Install flanged connections, Victaulic couplings, or unions on all bypasses, ahead of all traps and at all connections to equipment, where shown on the drawings and where required to facilitate convenient removal of equipment. Piping connections to equipment shall include valves to allow isolating equipment for easy removal. R. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. Sleeves shall be per Section 22 0548, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment". S. Plates Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes are exposed in finished locations of the building and run through walls, floors or ceilings. Plates shall be chrome plated brass and shall be set tight on the pipe and to the building surface. a." T. Flashing 1. Refer to Architectural Drawings and Specifications for flashing requirements. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 11 U. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 22. 3.4 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING } A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect -approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws ) and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact -type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe m { corrosion condensation from forming. C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or ((( 111 t other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat 9 or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface to an "as -new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. 3. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall ] be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work"( progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this } Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. �.... 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 22. Relocate .t existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of plumbing equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect's written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 12 date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall .. properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 13 3.6 3.7 } 1 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION x A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the t Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied -off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. 1. Cut the bottom of the trench or excavation to uniform grade so that pipe will bear on undisturbed soil. 2. Should rock be encountered, excavate 6" below pipe, fill with pea gravel and tamp well. 3. Carefully lay out alignment of pipe trenches to avoid obstructions. Secure approval of proposed route of pipe before any cutting is begun. D. After pipe lines have been inspected, tested and approved, backfill trenches or excavation with material as recommended by the manufacturer of the type of pipe used. E. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically ' tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation € ` D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 14 't � F. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 15 G. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. H. Compact backfill where trenching or excavation is required in improved areas such as pavements, walks, lawns, and similar areas, to a condition equal to undisturbed earth, and restore surface of the area to the condition existing prior to the trenching or excavating operation. I. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. 3.8 JOBSITE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 22 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.10 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 16 ` A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. D. The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right -of -Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 17 3.11 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Remove all labels, dirt, paint, grease, and stains from all piping and accessories installed under this Contract. Flush and treat piping systems per Section 23 0953, "Testing, Adjusting and ? Balancing for HVAC". B. A temporary flushing connection shall be arranged for each section of piping. Water required for flushing shall be furnished by the Contractor. All temporary cross connections for flushing and drainage connections shall be furnished, installed and subsequently removed by the Contractor. C. In filling the systems, be sure to vent in such a manner that the control valves cannot backfill, thus causing foreign matter to be introduced into the valve body. 3.12 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 22 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 22 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 18 t'= SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Work included: a. Sanitary drain, waste, and vent piping. b. Storm Drain and Subsoil drainage piping. C. Domestic hot and cold water piping. d. Equipment drains and relief valve piping. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer's certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 1 A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, Vic -Press 304TM, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and Permalynx push -to -connect, grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a valve on each branch serving a restroom. 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or group of fixtures and equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide interior shut-off and drain valves on each branch to wall hydrant and hose bibb. 4. Provide valves at the base of domestic water pipe risers. 5. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. 6. Provide valves on hot and cold water lines in cell chases 6'-0" above finished floor at each level. C. Gate Valves: Rated for 200 PSIG WOG: 1. 2-1/2" and below — Nibco T-113 for steel pipe and Nibco S-113, for copper pipe, or approved equal. 2. 3" and above — Victaulic Series 771 (cold water service), Nibco F-619 or engineer approved equal. D. Ball Valves: Rated for 200 psig WOG. 1. 2-1/2" and below — Nibco T-595-Y for steel pipe and NVent PL-200 or Nibco S-595-Y for copper pipe or engineer approved equal. E. Check Valves (Domestic Water System): 1. Swing check valve with bronze or composition disc rated for 200 psig WOG. 2. 2-1/2" and below—Nibco T-413-B, NVent PL-510, or engineer approved equal. 3. 3" and above — Nibco F-918-13, Victaulic Series 716, or engineer approved equal. F. Water Balancing Cocks: 1. Provide cocks with memory stop, Dezurik 100 or approved equal. G. Backflow Preventer: 1. Double check valve assembly consisting of two independently operating, spring loaded check valves, two gate valves, and four test cocks for field testing, Wilkins Model 950 or approved equal. 2. Provide reduced pressure type if required by local codes. H. Water Hammer Arrestors: Provide arrestors sized in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201, permanently sealed, pre -charged to 60 PSIG, suitable for temperatures up to 250 DegF and maximum 350 PSIG working pressure: Model 650 Series as manufactured by Sioux Chief Mfg. Co. or approved equal. a. Provide at each branch run-off to fixtures or as required by manufacturer and PDI Standard WH-201. b. For laundry applications, Series 660-H or approved equal. I. Butterfly Valves: 1. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves on chilled water and hot water heating lines rated to 150 psig: 2" - 12", with stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating, Victaulic Vic-300 MasterSealTM or " Crane 21-BRZ (21-BRB under 150 Deg. F). 14" - 24" Victaulic Series W706 or Crane 22F-BRZ (22F-BRB under 150 Deg. F) or engineer approved equal as manufactured by Jenkins, Centerline or Victaulic. GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 2 s J. Gauge Cocks and Manual Air Vents: 1. Provide brass, lever handle cock, 1/4" FPT, as shown on the drawings or as specified herein. K. Dielectric Union s or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer (` approved equal. L. Trap Primers: 1. Trap primer valve shall be factory assembled, prepiped and shall include a bronze'/4" NPT, WOG rated inlet ball valve, a brass 3/a" electronic solenoid valve and a type "L" copper manifold with brass compression fittings. Unit shall include a single point power connection at 120/1/60, a manual override switch, 2 amp breakers and geared 24 hour timer with relay and 5 second dwell function. A code approved atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be included for backflow protection. Complete unit shall be provided in a 16 gauge steel box with access door suitable for flush mounting or NEMA 1 rated box with cover for surface mounting. Trap primers shall be installed per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. a. "Prime -Rite" PT or PTS as manufactured by Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. or approved equal. b. Trap primers shall be provided on all floor sinks and floor drains, except shower drains. Verify with authority having jurisdiction. M. Trap Guards (If approved by local authority having jurisdiction): 1. Trap guard shall be manufactured from smooth, soft, flexible, elastomeric PVC material molded into shape of duck's bill, open on top with curl closure at bottom. The design shall allow for wastewater to open and adequately discharge floor drain through its interior and then close and returns to original molded shape after wastewater discharge is complete. Trap guard shall be as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. or pre - approved equal. 2. Trap guard shall meet the following standards: a. ASME Al 12.6.3. b. NSF/ANSI14. C. CSA B 79. 3. Prior to ordering trap guard, contractor shall confirm drain manufacturer provided for project to insure proper fit for trap guard. This shall be indicated on the submittal. 2.2 FLANGES A. Flanges shall be 150 pound; A.S.A. forged steel, raised face, weld neck or slip-on. Slip-on flanges shall be welded both inside and outside. B. Flange Adapters: Flat face, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components. Victaulic Style 741 or W45 flange adapter nipple for sizes 14" through 24". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 3 ( 3.2 accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. END OF SECTION GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23 - 4 y� l SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Concrete supports for equipment. 3. Sleeving for plumbing equipment. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. B. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split -ring hanger with adjusters. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 -1 2.2 2.3 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipe 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on domestic hot and cold water pipes on trapeze type hangers. 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 F. Supports for Vertical Riser Piping: 1. Provide Grinnell Fig. 261 double bolt riser clamps at each floor. Bear on structure. 2. At 8 feet o.c., 2-hole rigid clamps. Kindorf channels and C-105 straps. Support from vertical surfaces. 3. Brass or copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. G. Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: 1. Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. INSERTS A. Provide inserts at each hanger as required for concrete support. Avoid interference with concrete reinforcing. B. Inserts to be malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to forms. C. Provide reinforcing as required to support load. D. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. HANGER RODS HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2 { A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. 1... HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 3 B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thm 8" 1/2" 10" & 12" 5/8" 14" & 16" 3/4" 2.4 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link -seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all slab on grade floor penetrations. C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. 2.5 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.6 CONCRETE SUPPORTS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide concrete pad foundations for the support of equipment such as floor -mounted pumps, etc. B. Unless otherwise noted, concrete pads shall be constructed of not less than 3,000 lb. concrete and not less than 4" high and shall extend on all sides a minimum of 8 inches beyond the limits of the mounted equipment. Pads shall be poured in forms built of new -dressed lumber. All corners of the foundations shall be neatly chamfered 3/4" wide by means of sheet metal of triangular wood strips nailed to the form. Reinforce with No. 4 rebar 6" on center. C. Foundation bolts, 3/4" round -hooked, shall be placed in the forms when the concrete is poured, the bolts being correctly located by means of templates. Each bolt shall be set in a sleeve of size to provide 1/2" clearance around bolt. Allow 1" below the equipment bases for alignment and grouting. After grouting, the forms shall be removed and the surface of the foundations shall be hand rubbed with carborundum. D. Foundation pads for equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be provided as indicated. E. Submit shop drawings of concrete pads for review by the Architect. 2.7 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION i HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 4 r ` 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. B. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Poured -in -Place Concrete: Each hanger rod shall be fitted with a nut at its upper end, which nut shall be set into an Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed in the formwork before concrete is poured. 2. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 3. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3.2 SPACING A. Cast iron soil pipe shall be supported on hangers spaced no more than pipe length being installed. B. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes according to MSS SP 69 Tables 3 and 4: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 7. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 5: Maximum span, 16 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 11. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 12. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 13. NPS 10: Maximum span, 22 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 14. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 15. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 16. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 17. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 18. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1 NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2 NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3 NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4 NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 1_ 5 NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 6 NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7 NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8 NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 5 9 NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. D. Spacing and rod sizes for other piping materials shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.3 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. 3.5 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations associated with the work in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for all pad or floor mounted equipment. 3.6 HANGERS, SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES A. All hangers and supports for fire standpipe systems and fire sprinkler systems shall be Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved types. B. Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be provided for all horizontal and vertical piping as per the project specifications. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports. All structural hanging materials shall have a factor of safety of 5. D. Anchor points and pipe guides as shown on drawings or as required shall be located and constructed to permit the piping system to take up its expansion and contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points. E. Guide points for expansion joints shall be located and constructed wherever required or shown on drawings and at each side of an expansion joint or loop, to permit only free axial movement in piping systems but shall not be further than 3 pipe diameters on each side of joint. Guides for pipe with expansion joints shall be of the roller type securely welded to structural steel. F. Maximum spacing between pipe supports for steel, cast iron, plastic or copper pipe shall be per local code to prevent excessive stress: (This does not apply where there are concentrated loads between supports.) G. Double bolt riser clamps shall be F & S, F & M, Grinnell or approved equal. H. For copper tubing, supports shall be especially designed for copper tubing and shall be of exact O.D. diameter of tubing and shall be copper plated. I. Roller type supports shall be used for pipes subject to axial movement. They shall be braced so that movement occurs in roller rather than support rods. J. Provide miscellaneous steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on the structural Drawings. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 6 1 i! K. In general, all piping shall be supported from only structural building members or approved steel inserts embedded in concrete. Where structural members must be increased in strength and/or additional members added to provide for piping support, the mechanical contractor shall include such anticipated costs in his pricing. 3.7 SUPPORT OF VERTICAL RISERS A. Vertical piping shall be installed in such manner that its weight plus the weight of its contents, covering and appurtenances cannot be concentrated at locations on slabs, beams and other structural elements to exceed the carrying capacity of those members as approved by the structural engineer. B. In all cases, the Contractor shall coordinate the riser support design with the Architect. He shall submit drawings showing weights, points of support, and details of support or anchoring for approval. The Architect must approve the proposed method of support before work is started. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility for materials and workmanship described in this section and shall ensure that all hangers and supports are properly installed. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 7 i i SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the plumbing systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. All above ground and below ground domestic hot and cold water piping. b. All horizontal sanitary drains handling cooling coil condensate. C. All plumbing items requiring insulation due to rules and regulations for the handicapped. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 22 0500, "Common Work Results for Plumbing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1... 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 1 b. Manville C. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) b. Thermacor 3. Mastics: a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic ; c. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 1 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote� PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 1 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. 1.4 GENERAL A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. E. Non -compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, and pipe shield or saddle shall be provided under other sections of Division 22. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125°F. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground -Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre -formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame -Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal -Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally equivalent thicknesses, but only for refrigerant suction lines where codes permit. 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75°F. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. PLUMBING INSULATION 22 07 00 - 2 i THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK rill FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 22 13 00 - 4 k, SECTION 22 34 36 - WATER HEATER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of the heating system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. Provide factory trained start-up service for all equipment. B. Work Included: 1. Electric Water Heater C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 1501022 0500, "Common Work Results for Plumbing". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATER A. The tank construction shall be steel shell, with a inner tank liner complying with NSF 61 for barrier materials for potable water. The inner liner shall be extended into the tappings. The vessel shall be ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC), section VIII, fabricated with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig) B. Tapping (openings) shall be Factory fabricated of materials compatible with the tank and in accordance with appropriate ASME standards 131.20.1 for piping connections, pressure and temperature relief valve, pressure gauge, thermometer, drain valve, anode rods and controls as required. Tappings shall comply with the following: 1. (2 inch) and smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. ,i 2. (2 1/2-inch) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless steel flanges, and according to ASME B 16.24. C. Tank insulation shall comply with ASHRAE 90.1. D. For domestic hot water heater sizes greater than 9 KW, the heating element shall be arranged in multiples of three elements. For heaters less than 9 KW, the heater elements shall be arranged in :r double elements. L. WATER HEATER 22 34 36 - 1 E. The domestic hot water heaters shall have screw in or bolt in immersion type, thermostatically adjustable. Set thermostat for maximum water temperature of 55°C (130°F). The electrical characteristics are scheduled on the drawings. { 1l; F. Combination Pressure and Temperature Relief Valves shall be ASME rated and stamped for %1 , combination temperature and pressure relief valves. One or more relief valves with total �....., relieving capacity at least as great as the heat input shall be included. The pressure setting shall be less than the domestic water heater working pressure rating. G. The anode rod shall be replaceable magnesium. H. The drain valve shall be corrosion resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. I. The tank shall have a 3 year warranty with parts having a 1 year warranty from date of occupancy by owner. J. Provide heaters as manufactured by A.O. Smith, Lochinvar, or State. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Start up on the unit shall be performed by factory trained and authorized personnel. A copy of the startup report shall be provided to the owner and submitted in the O&M Manuals. 3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Prior to operation, the factory start-up representative shall, in the presence of the Architect's representative perform all system and equipment checks as prescribed by the manufacturer in his written start-up procedures. B. The factory start-up representative shall place the equipment in operation and record all start-up data. Three copies of all data shall be given to the Architect. END OF SECTION WATER HEATER 22 34 36 - 2 , P� DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION A. The General Requirements for Mechanical Work are intended to be complementary to the General Requirements of the Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete mechanical systems where shown on the drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to the following summary of work: 1. Furnish and install a complete heating and air conditioning system as shown on drawings and described herein. 2. Furnish and install a complete ventilation system as shown on drawings and described herein. 3. Other items and services required to complete the systems. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise specified, materials are to be new and of current U.S. manufacture, free from defects and of the best quality of their respective kinds. B. Equipment and/or materials damaged in shipment or handling, or otherwise damaged before installation, shall be replaced with new equipment and/or materials. Damaged equipment and/or materials shall not be repaired at the jobsite. C. Furnishing of the proper equipment and/or materials and to see that it is installed as recommended by the manufacturer is entirely the responsibility of the Contractor. If required for proper installation, the Contractor shall obtain advice and supervisory assistance from a representative of the specific manufacturer of the equipment being installed. D. Materials and adhesives to conform to Federal Standard Flame -Spread Properties, Inc., with composite fire and smoke hazard ratings, maximum 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed. Adhesives to be waterproof. E. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directions and shall obtain the Architect instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. F. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting screws, keys or other rotating parts which are located so that a person can come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed properly provided with a guard. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS H A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers that are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. L_. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1 1. LY B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the building and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide an integrated satisfactory operating installation. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. C. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. D. Codes: Perform all work in accordance with the latest edition of the following codes: 1. State and city building, fire, plumbing and mechanical codes. 2. International Fire Code 3. Uniform Mechanical Code 4. Uniform Plumbing Code 5. National Electrical Code 6. Energy Conservation Code 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 8. American with Disabilities Act (ADA) 9. ICC/ANSI A 117.1 10. ICC 500 11. All authorities having jurisdiction. 12. Architectural code review drawing. E. The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company requirements. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above -specified authorities. Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the Contractor sh--?1 make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above authorities with no extra compensation. F. Where conflicts occur between drawings, specifications or code requirements, the most stringent requirement shall take precedence. G. Standards: The specifications and standards of the following organizations are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with the g requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 3. American Gas Association (AGA). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 6. American Society of Refrigeration, Heating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). 8. National Bureau of Standards (NBS). 9. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). 10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 11. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA). 12. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 2 H. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. 1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. The requirements and recommendations of the latest edition of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Act are by reference made a part of these specifications. All work shall comply with the requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with all submittal provisions of Division 1. B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 1, and 23 submittal requirements. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C. Product Data: Submit the following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 23. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in the following paragraph. 3. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in a clear and concise format. All substitutions shall be approved in writing by Architect. The Architect's decision shall be final. 4. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for the review of submittals and each re - submittal. 5. Compliance with the Contract documents shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Items on equipment that are were not accepted by the Architect in writing as an approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with the contract documents at the Contractor's expense. 6. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, shall become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work. 7. Sign the submittal as an indication of compliance with the contract documents. Any deviations from the contract documents shall be indicated on the submittal prior to signing. Any deviations not indicated shall be cause for rejection and removal of the non -complying equipment at the Contractor's expense. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this section include the following: 1. Piping and Accessories Materials: a. Clearly marked up manufacturer's data showing compliance with the specifications for: 1) Piping material proposed for each system. 2) Valves, cocks, and specialties. 3) Flexible connectors for piping. 4) Flanges. b. 1/8" scale (minimum) refrigerant piping shop drawings showing valve locations COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 3 t i' and coordinated piping routing and arrangements with all equipment, accessories and system expansion and contraction compensation methods. 2. Vibration Isolation and Sound Control Materials: a. Submit shop drawings showing the structural design and details of inertia bases, steel beam bases, and other custom -fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's submitted data. b. Furnish layouts of templates to be furnished to fabricators of equipment bases, foundations, and other support systems, as needed for coordination of vibration isolation units with other work. C. Submit shop drawings indicating the scope of vibration isolation work, locations of units and flexible connections. Include support isolation points for piping, air handling units, inertia bases, etc. _ d. Include schedule of isolation units, showing size or manufacturer's part number, the weight supported and resulting deflection of each unit. e. For spring isolation units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression height, operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. f. For spring -and -pad type isolation units, show the basis of spring rate selection for the range of loading weights. --- 3. Mechanical Identification Materials: a. Clearly marked -up product literature or samples showing compliance with specified materials for: 1) Valve tagging. 2) Pipe marking. - , 3) Equipment marking. 4. Insulation: a. Manufacturer's certified data on thermal performance. b. Details, when required, of methods to be used in providing for unusual piping expansion and contraction. C. Manufacturer's data on any alternate insulation material of reduced thickness, including pre -insulated pipe. d. Manufacturer's data on all jacketing materials, sealants and fasteners. 5. Refrigeration: a. Provide clearly marked -up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) Condensing Units 2) Indoor Units 3) Refrigeration piping specific to this project b. Provide all electrical characteristics. 6. Ventilation Fans and equipment: a. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements. b. Product Data: Submittal data for approval for all fans of every description furnished. Fans driven by 5 (five) HP and larger motors shall include the following: 1) Fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. The recommended range of operation shall be stable. 2) Fans shall be capable of operating stably at reduced loads imposed by means of variable speed drives. 3) Data on sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. 4) Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 5) All data on fan accessories. 6) Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 4 7. Air Distribution Materials: a. Provide clearly marked -up manufacturer's data showing compliance with scheduled values and specifications for: 1) Air devices. 2) 1/4" scale ductwork shop drawings for all systems showing equipment locations, detailed data such as bottom of duct elevations, airstream sizes, all duct accessories, and duct construction details showing compliance with SMACNA requirements for the specified duct pressure of each system. 3) Fire dampers, fire and smoke dampers. 8. Energy Management System a. Provide detailed shop drawings showing all components, wiring, accessories and their arrangement and their relation to the control system. b. Provide comprehensive sequence of operation description for each system. C. Provide manufacturer's data showing compliance with specified control components and functions specified. d. Provide all electrical power source requirements. 9. Testing and Balancing: a. Brief description of test and balance contractor experience. b. Certificate of Qualification from AABC. C. Biographical information of the Registered Professional Engineer and certified Test and Balance Supervisor proposed to manage the project. d. List of instruments to be used with latest date of calibration test for each. e. Test and balance reports. 10. Record Documents: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. 11. Operation and Maintenance Data: Reference the requirements detailed in this section. E. Resubmission of rejected submittals shall be limited to one (1) in number. Costs for processing subsequent resubmittals in excess of the first resubmittal, resulting from the Contractor's disregard of Architect/Engineer's primary submittal rejection comments, shall be borne by the Contractor. Costs shall be based on Architect/Engineer's hourly rates as published in their current professional fee schedules and shall also include reimbursable costs for delivery, mailing, and photocopies at direct cost plus ten percent (10%). 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with all provisions of Division 1. B. The use of manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by the phrase "or equal" is generally used to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference for construction documents that are drawn to scale. C. Submittals for "equal" items shall, where applicable, include the following data that are not necessarily required for specified items: 1. Performance characteristics. 2. Materials. 3. Finish. 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards. 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. The term "Compliance" is understood to mean that the Contractor certifies that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the contract document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in Paragraph 6 below. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 5 4 i E 6. Identify the difference between the specified item or function and the proposed. Explain with enough detail so that the Architect/ Engineer/Owner can easily determine that the item complies with the functional intent. List any disadvantages or advantages of the proposed item versus the specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Include shop drawings for all piping and ductwork equipment per Paragraph 1.5 Submittals. Organize in a clear and concise format. D. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected if. 1. The material or equipment would necessitate the alteration of any portion of the mechanical, electrical, architectural or structural design. 2. Dimensions vary from the specified material or equipment in such a manner that accessibility or clearances are impaired or the work of other trades is adversely affected. E. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted ten (10) days prior to final (. bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, such substitutions will not be permitted. Proposals for substitutions shall be made only by the prime bidders. Manufacturers, distributors, and sub -contractors shall not make proposals to the Architect for substitutions. F. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation, local factory authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts G. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Architect. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, and within the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, at his own expense, and to the satisfaction of the Architect. H. Contractors submitting bids on substitute materials and equipment must also provide a written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and equipment will produce the specified effects and meet the approval of the Architect. 1.8 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Procure all permits and licenses necessary for completion of this project and pay all lawful fees $ required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. All required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. B. Pay any royalty payments required or fees for the use of patented equipment or systems. Defend all law suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and/or Architect/Engineer harmless from loss as a result of said suits or claims. 1.9 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of all component parts of the mechanical systems -= to assure compatibility of all equipment and performance of the integrated systems in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Should the Contractor consider any part of the specifications or drawings as rendering his acceptance of such responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive, he shall notify the Engineer before submitting his bid, and the bid shall be accompanied by a written statement of any objections or exceptions to the specifications and drawings. B. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the ° dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will fit in the space. Fabrication Drawings shall be prepared when required by the Architect/Engineer or COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 6 P l .1 Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement. Pl C. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves, motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow removal for service without disassembly of another part. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. The drawings show the arrangements of work. Should project conditions necessitate rearrangement, or if the materials or equipment can be installed to a better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit five copies of Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect's review. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. B. Should the Contractor propose to install equipment requiring space conditions other than those shown, or rearrange the equipment, he shall assume responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the Architect review the change before proceeding with the work. The request for such changes shall be accompanied by shop drawings of the space in question. Identify monetary credits proposed or other benefits of the change. Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes or openings in the building structure pertaining to his work and for the correct location of pipe sleeves. No penetrations shall be larger than 2" to meet ICC 500. 1.11 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS A. The Mechanical Contractor shall rough in for and make all gas connections to all equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailed roughing -in Drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, by actual measurements of the equipment connections, or as detailed. B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shall provide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc. C. Provide all air gap fittings required, using materials hereinbefore specified. In each service line connected to an item of equipment or piece of machinery, provide a shutoff valve. On each drain not provided with a trap, provide a suitable trap. D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected to chrome plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match. E. Provide all galvanized sheet metal ductwork, transition pieces, etc., required for a complete installation. Exposed sheet metal shall be paint -grip type. 1.12 LOCATION OF OUTLETS A. Supply and return air outlets in suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the centers of whole tiles. The final determination of the exact location of each outlet and the arrangement to be followed shall be acceptable to the Architect. B. The drawings show the locations of the various outlets and equipment. Exact locations of these outlets and equipment shall be determined by reference to the general construction plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or equipment before installation, without additional cost. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 7 1 C. The Contractor shall install his work complete and in good working order. If any of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossible to perform, or if the installation when made in accordance with such requirements will not perform satisfactorily, he shall report same to the Architect for correction. D. No extra compensation will be allowed for extra work or change caused by failure to comply with the above requirements. 1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide the record documents associated with the work of Division 23 in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. Throughout progress of the Division 23 Work, maintain an accurate record of changes in the Contract Documents that apply to work of Division 23. Changes shall include all addendums issued during bidding. Maintain an accurate record of the location of mechanical service lines and outlets and all outside utilities. C. Delegate the responsibility for maintenance of Record Documents to one person on the Contractor's staff as approved by the Architect. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of drawings and other documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. Match the symbology and format of the base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that a future verification of items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. E. Maintain the job set of Record Documents completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings 1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date all entries. 3. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. 4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 6. Maintain the base drawing format and use the same symbology. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts 1. In some cases on the drawings, arrangements of ductwork and piping and similar items are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical arrangement subject to the Architect's approval. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the drawings. 2. Show on the job set of record drawings, by dimension accurate to within one inch, the centerline of each run of items such as all sleeves and piping, etc., below grade, in walls, or in the concrete slab. A surface mounted device indicates the exact location: a. Clearly identify the item by accurate note such as "Sanitary Sewer" and the COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 8 like. b. Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the item "under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," and the like. C. Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CAD electronic files in .dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer's standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD-R and one full size hard copy of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of a preliminary draft of the proposed manual or manuals to the Architect for review and comments. Allow a minimum often (10) working days for review. B. Submit specified number copies of the approved manual to the Architect prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Prepare in accordance with the following standards: Format: Size: 8'/z" x 11" Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Text: Neatly written or printed Drawings: I V in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiber -board covers with binding mechanism concealed inside the manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; all binding is subject to the Architect's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet -and -inches, lbs, and cfin. Where items may be expected to be 3 measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 9 i! I D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Architect, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Name and Address of Work Name of Contractor General subject of this manual Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date E. Contents: Include at least the following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual of all emergency information regarding the installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of all equipment provided including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of all parts of all equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of all replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor, and all other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of all guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, drawings, and descriptive data, clearly indicating the precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, all manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Such other data as required in other sections of these specifications. 1.15 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warranty all equipment and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair any faulty equipment or installation at no cost to the Owner for such service during this period, all in accordance with requirements of Division 1. B. This warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time. Nor shall it void any rights guaranteed to the Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in a form satisfactory to the Owner, and shall be delivered to the Owner before final payment is made. D. Upon completion of the work of Division 23, thoroughly clean all exposed portions of the mechanical installation, removing all traces of soil, labels, grease, oil and other foreign material and using only the type cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of the item being cleaned. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCESS DOORS A. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland -Ryerson Construction Products Company) manufacturer, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or DW for non - plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 18" x 18" in size. # COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 10 s i k 7 PART 3 - EXECUTION i 3.1 ACCCESS DOORS f'1 A. In fire -rated walls, access door shall be fire rated same as wall. B. In detention areas provide minimum 16 gauge access door with keyed lock approved by Owner 3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from the 7 Architect and governmental agencies having jurisdiction. _...1 B. Make written notice to the Architect adequately in advance of each of the following stages of construction: 1. When all rough -in is complete, but not covered. 2. As specified in all Division 23 sections. 3. At the completion of the work of Division 23. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with the specified requirements, remove the noncomplying items from the job site and replace them with items complying with the specified requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. 3.3 INSTALLATION METHODS A. Unless noted otherwise, piping and ductwork may be run exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets. Piping and ductwork exposed in mechanical rooms and janitor's closets shall be run tight against the structure, as required by the Architect, allowing for expansion. B. Conceal piping and ductwork to be installed as hereinbefore specified. C. Piping suspended from the structure shall be adequately and properly supported on hanger rods or clamps as specified in Section 23 0529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment". Perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. The contractor must support all duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished and installed under this scope from steel joists or structural steel frames. It is prohibited to support duct, pipe, equipment, and all other items furnished under this scope from the metal deck. D. Where space is limited above ceilings, below concrete beams or other concrete projections, piping shall be sleeved through the beam or projection, rather than hung below. Provide sleeves where required and locate where approved by the Architect. E. Cut pipe accurately to measurements established at the building and install into position without springing or forcing. All open ends of pipes shall be capped or otherwise closed until the systems are closed with final connections. F. No pipe joints nearer than 12" to a wall, ceiling or floor penetration will be permitted, unless joint is of the welded type. G. Piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper grades to permit proper flow of the contained material. Piping shall be graded for proper drainage. Ll L-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 11 [1 i H. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, which take into consideration conditions to be met at the site and in the building. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as required after approval from the Architect. I. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as to prevent excessive strain and stress in the piping and in connections to equipment. All piping shall be clean when it is installed; rust and/or dirt shall be removed. K. Screw joints shall be made with taper threads, properly cut. Threads shall be cut using graphite and oil applied to the pipe only. When threads are cut on pipes, the ends shall be carefully reamed to remove any burrs. Pipe shall be up -ended and hammered to remove all shavings and foreign material, before installing. L. Requirements for assembling joints in cast iron and copper lines are set forth elsewhere in these specifications. For any special materials, consult the manufacturers for the recommended procedures in assembling the joints. M. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to all concealed items of the fire suppression system. N. Install roof pipe penetrations through sleeves, and flash with membrane flashing and roofing mastic compatible with roofing system. Roofing Supplier/Contractor shall approve roof penetration and flashing. O. For additional installation requirements, refer to individual sections in Division 23. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching associated with the work in strict accordance with the provisions of Division 1 of these Specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate work to minimize cutting and patching work. Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction. If cutting and patching is required, it shall be performed by trades specializing in that type work. 2. Perform Architect -approved cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of new work and/or repair. a. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact -type equipment will not be used except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. b. Openings in precast concrete slabs or walls for pipes, etc., shall be core drilled to exact size. Oversize the hole to allow for link seals, and to deter pipe corrosion condensation from forming. C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Architect. d. Openings cut through plaster or drywall shall be cut prior to plaster finish coat or texture coat on drywall. Cutting of the finish coat of plaster or texture coat of drywall will not be permitted unless written approval of the Architect is obtained. e. Openings shall be restored and/or repaired as required to replace the cut surface i_. - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 12 f to an "as -new" and/or "as original" condition. Refer to the appropriate section of the specifications for the material involved. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 13 4. 4. Provide all core drilling of holes. Where sleeves and/or blockouts are required, they shall be cut or provided at locations required. On completion of this work or as work progresses, make all repairs and do all patching required as a result of work under this Contract. All patching shall be performed in a manner that will restore the surrounding work to its original condition to the satisfaction of the Architect. 5. Assume responsibility for the proper size of all sleeves and/or blockouts in the building structure pertaining to the work and for providing the correct location of pipe sleeves and/or blockouts. 6. No cutting, boring or excavating which will weaken the structure will be permitted. 3.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Verify the location and capacity of existing utility services pertaining to work of Division 21. Relocate existing utilities unearthed by excavation as directed by the utility service companies affected. 1. Temporary Services for Construction 2. Provide temporary services in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications. B. When any piece of fire suppression equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he properly supervises the operation, and has the Architect's written permission to do so. The warranty period shall, however, not commence until such time as the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of substantial completion, whichever occurs first. C. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and performance certification will be the same date. 3.6 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion, and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated. B. All items which are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair and provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved. C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 14 3.7 3.8 D. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines and wiring not s scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or service is to t .� remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied -off or disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities which must remain in operation during the construction period shall not be interrupted without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified. r ' I EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING A. Perform all excavation and backfilling necessary for the installation of the work. This shall include shoring and pumping in ditches to keep them in dry condition until the work has been installed. All shoring required to protect the excavation and safeguard employees shall be properly performed. B. Perform excavation and backfilling in strict accordance with the provisions of these specifications including trench safety requirements. C. All excavations shall be made to the proper depth, with allowances made for floor slabs, forms, beams, etc. Ground under piping shall be well compacted before piping is installed. D. Backfilling shall be made with selected soil, free from rocks and debris and shall be pneumatically tamped with 6 inch layers to secure a field density ratio of 95 percent as defined by ASTM Designation D698-57T (Proctor Soil Compaction Test). E. Excavated materials not suitable and not used in the backfill shall be removed from the site. F. Field check and verify the locations of all underground utilities. Avoid disturbing these as far as possible. In the event existing utilities are damaged, they shall be repaired at no cost to Owner. G. In a lime stabilized area, the lime stabilization shall be fully restored after the excavation is complete. H. Replace concrete, curbs, paving and other surface improvements cut during excavation to their original condition. JOBSITE CONDITIONS A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Include required work to correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of all Division 21 Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question. C. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building. D. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be cleaned of rust COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 15 1;1 1 a and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications. 3.9 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Contractor shall provide the required protection of equipment and materials from the time of delivery until the completion of the Work. Protect from damage, rust, rain, humidity and dust. B. Do not receive equipment or materials on the jobsite until adequate space has been provided for storage. C. Provide adequate supports for protection from the ground and erect required shelters for items stored in the open. D. Items stored within the building are to be adequately protected and covered with tarpaulins or other protective covering. E. Protect the building at all times during construction from damage by workmen, their tools and/or equipment. Protect floors, steps, wall, ceilings, doors, windows and other finish surfaces. F. Equipment and materials found in a rusty condition at completion of the work will be thoroughly cleaned of rust and refinished as required to its original condition. 3.10 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Perform coordination work in strict accordance with provisions of these specifications and the following: 1. Coordinate as necessary with other trades to assure proper and adequate interface with all work. 2. Where pipes or other fire suppression items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and other equipment, include labor and materials required for extensions, offsets and supports to clear the encroachment. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation of the fire suppression system. 4. Coordinate accepted equipment changes from those scheduled or specified with other trades affected. Additional compensation to other trades for equipment changes is the responsibility of the Contractor making the change. B. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of standards referenced elsewhere in these specifications, and structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work. Work shall be organized and laid out so that it will be concealed in furred chases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specifically noted to be exposed. All exposed work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the lines of the building unless otherwise noted. C. When the mechanical and electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot f , lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 16 D. The general installation precedence of materials shall be as follows. Note that if an interference is encountered, this shall guide the contractor in the determination of which trade shall be given the "Right -of -Way". Building lines Structural Members Soil and Drain Piping Condensate Drains Vent Piping Supply, Return, and Outside Air Ductwork Exhaust Ductwork Fire Protection Piping Gas Piping Domestic Water (Cold and Hot) Electrical Conduit E. Where items such as diffusers, thermostats, switches, and control panels are not specifically located on the Drawings, locate as determined in the field by the Architect. Where such items are installed without such specific direction, relocate as directed by the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Verify all dimensions and distances. No additional compensation will be allowed because of differences between work shown on the Drawings and actual dimensions and distances at the jobsite. 3.11 PAINTING A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the finish be damaged in transit or during the installation, it shall be finished to match appearance of original finish. All work shall be subject to approval by Architect. B. All equipment, piping, conduit, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed areas under Divisions 23 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned, prepared, and painted according to the following specification. In the event of a conflict between the specifications referenced, the provisions of this specification shall prevail only for Division 23 work. C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 17 } SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and poly -phase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide a shaft grounding ring for motors used in direct -driven VFD motor applications. D. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe -duty motors. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3600 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. ' 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. t_ COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2305 13 - 1 2.4 2.5 2.6 i 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. l E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor: Random -wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F (non -inverter duty motors). J. Code Letter Designation: ) 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced -Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium -Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Severe -Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. } C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust[ loading. 1 D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded -pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. MOTOR STARTERS I A. Provide motor starters as manufactured by one of the following: L 1. General Electric Company. 2. Siemens Energy and Automation. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 13 - 2 1 L 3. Square D Schneider Electric. 4. Cutler Hammer. B. General: 1. Starters furnished as integral parts of factory -assembled, pre -wired equipment shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 2. All controllers shall be provided with a heavy-duty type push-button station, rated for 10 amperes continuous load at 600 volt or less. 3. Enclosures shall be general purpose NEMA Type 1, except that pushbutton stations installed outside the building or otherwise exposed to the weather shall be NEMA Type 3R, dust and weather tight. NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be provided for surface mounting, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Pushbutton stations for non -interlocking contactors shall be momentary contact type with start button, stop button, and red indicator light. Where required for delayed "seal -in" or where otherwise noted. C. Manual Motor Starters 1. Provide single-phase, horsepower rated manual motor starters, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanisms; and with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units. Starter to become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide starters with double break, silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of starter, green pilot lights, and switch capable of being padlocked "OFF". 2. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. D. Magnetic Motor Starters 1. Provide fused disconnect switches complete with time delay fuses. 2. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 3. 120 volt holding coil. 4. Provide pilot light in cover, green type. 5. Provide reset button, and Hand -Off -Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to Off/Auto or Start/Stop pushbutton. 6. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 7. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. E. Combinations Motor Starters 1. Provide fused, 3-pole, load break disconnect switches with RK-1 fuses, rotary operating handle, and lock -off facility. 2. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by the use of a defeater screw, unless switch is in the OFF position. 3. Provide contactors with three overload relays. 4. 120 volt holding coil. 5. Provide pilot light in cover, green. 6. Provide reset button, and Hand -Off -Automatic switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to OfFAuto or Start/Stop pushbutton. 7. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. 8. Provide control transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOTOR STARTERS e. A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with Division 16 and equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA standards. B. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2305 13 - 3 C. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided. D. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. E. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. END OF SECTION COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2305 13 - 4 SECTION 23 05 29 - PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Sleeving for mechanical equipment. 3. Roof Mounted equipment restraints. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS B. Automatic Sprinkler Pipe Supports: NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. C. Standpipe System Supports: NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Supports, hangers, anchors, guides and supplementary steel shall be provided for horizontal and vertical piping and shall meet or exceed the ASA Code for Pressure Piping. PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 1 B. Rod sizes noted are minimum sizes. The structural integrity of the supports is the responsibility of the Contractor. C. Hangers Supporting and Contacting Brass or Copper: 1. 3" and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. CT-109, copper plated, split -ring hanger with adjusters. (I 2. 4" and Larger: Grinnell Fig. CT-65, copper plated, clevis hanger with 2 nuts each rod. !J 3. Isolate copper or brass from ferrous metals with an approved dielectric material. D. Hangers Supporting Insulated Lines: 1. Outside Diameter of Insulation 6" or Smaller and all Ferrous Pipes 3" Diameter and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 108, malleable iron, split type with adjustable swivel and locknut. 2. Outside Diameter of Insulation 7" and Larger and all Ferrous Pipe Larger than 3" Diameter: Grinnell Fig. 260, malleable iron, clevis hanger with two nuts on each support. E. Protection Shields for Hangers: 1. Galvanized metal shields shall encircle the lower half of the insulation. 2. Provide shields at hangers on dual and low temperature pipes, and domestic hot and cold water pipes on trapeze type hangers. 3. Provide rigid insulation at all shields and hangers, extending a minimum of 6" each side of hanger. 4. Shield gauges shall be as follows: U.S.S. Gauge Insulation Diameter (Galvanized) Up to 3" 22 3" thru 6" 16 Above 6" 12 l' l Supports for Vertical and Horizontal Piping in Chases and Partitions: l . Provide securely anchored supports for pipes serving plumbing fixtures and equipment near the area the pipe penetrates the wall. 2. Supports shall be steel plate, angles or unistruts mounted vertically or horizontally with unistrut clamps P2426, P2008 or P1109. 3. Attach supports to wall or floor construction with clip angles, brackets or other approved anchoring devices. 4. Brass and copper pipe shall be isolated from support with sheet polyethylene, minimum 1/8" thick. 2.2 HANGER RODS A. Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end or continuous threaded. B. Size hanger rods as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter 4" & Smaller 3/8" 5" thru 8" 1/2" 2.3 SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves where pipes penetrate floors, walls, foundations, fireproofing, etc. B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous movement. Provide a bead of sealant in space between pipe and sleeve. Use link -seal to seal between pipe and sleeve for all floor penetrations. i PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 2 1 7 C. Use Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeves for all floor and foundation penetrations. Sleeves 1 shall extend minimum of 2" above finished floor and flush with vertical wall surface. f 2.4 TRAPEZES A. Trapezes of Kindorf, Elcen or approved equal may be provided where multiple lines run horizontally at the same elevation. 2.5 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT RESTAINTS A. Provide roof mounted equipment restraints for all roof mounted equipment. The restraints shall keep equipment from moving under an 80 pound per square foot upload. B. For curb mounted equipment, restraints shall be #14 metal screws with gasket washers every 12" on curbs between 18" and 36". For curbs greater than 36" secure fasteners every 16" and verify curb is reinforced. C. For equipment mounted on rails, restraints shall be constructed from threaded eye bolts through the roof with stainless steel cable and turnbuckles to secure base rail. Provide restraints every 10' with a minimum of two cable systems per piece of equipment. 2.6 STRAP HANGERS A. Under no circumstances will perforated strap iron or wire be acceptable for hangers on this project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipe supports shall be designed and installed to avoid interferences with other piping, hangers, ducts, electrical conduit, supports, building structure, equipment, etc. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction. The type of hanger, method of support, location of support, etc., shall be governed in part by this specification. Pipe hangers shall be attached to the structure as follows: 1. Steel Bar Joists: Where pipes and loads are supported under bar joists, hanger rods shall be run through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, hanger rods shall be secured to angle irons of adequate size. Each angle shall span across two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and shall be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently affixed thereto. 2. Steel Beams: Pipes and loads supported under steel beams shall be installed using approved beam clamps. 3. Wood Framing: Where pipes and loads are supported from wood framing, hanger rods shall be attached to framing with side beam brackets or angle clips. 3.2 TRAPEZES A. Trapeze members, including suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Install as noted above. 3.3 MISCELLANEOUS A. Install any other special foundations, hangers and supports indicated on the drawings, specified g elsewhere, or required by installation conditions. PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 3 1 END OF SECTION p PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 4 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK IPIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 23 05 29 - 5 SECTION 23 05 48 - MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Related documents which govern the work specified in this section. 1. The Conditions of the Contract. 2. Other applicable sections of the specifications. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of vibration isolation work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by the requirements of this section. B. The types of vibration isolation work specified in this section include the following: 1. Support isolation for motor -driven mechanical equipment. 2. Support isolation of ductwork and air handling housings. 3. Isolation including support isolation for piping and ductwork risers. 4. Support isolation of piping. 5. Flexible connections for piping at equipment. C. Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets, flexible connections for piping, flexible ductwork connections, and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by a specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in the production of units similar to those for the project. 1. Except as otherwise indicated obtain support isolation units from a single manufacturer. 2. Engage the manufacturer to provide technical supervision of the installation of support isolation units produced by him, and of associated inertia bases (if any). B. Manufacturer: Acceptable vibration isolation support unit manufacturers are as follows: 1. Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 3. Amber Booth 4. Peabody Kinetics C. Manufacturer Certification: Where vibration isolation support units are indicated for a minimum static deflection, provide manufacturer's certification that units have been tested and comply with the indicated requirements. D. All items of equipment, whether suspended, floor mounted or otherwise supported, which are capable of producing vibration, shall be installed with vibration isolation. The isolation shall prevent the transmission of objectionable noise or vibration to the building structure. E. Submit for approval data showing disturbing frequency, supported weight, static deflection or natural frequency, and calculations supporting same for each isolator. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Data, Vibration Isolation: 1. For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, detailed MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 1 } drawings, performance characteristics data and installation instructions for each type of unit required. 2. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness, natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment. 3. Where required, include independent test agencies certified report of test results for each i type of unit. 4. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid -compression height, ' operating height, fatigue characteristics and ratio of horizontal to vertical stiffness. 5. For spring -and -pad -type units show basis of spring -rate selection for range of loading weights. f- 6. Include performance certifications where required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3" deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. B. Vibration hangers shall be as described above, but they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be indicated by a scale. C. Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion. Spring diameters and hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to spring through a 30 degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have as minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers shall be provided with an eyebolt on the spring end and provision to attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. D. Where piping passes through equipment walls, floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator shall be a split seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with 3/4" or thicker neoprene sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a minimum of V past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed 240 degrees F., 10# density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge. E. Isolator pads shall be neoprene waffle rated for 60#/sq. in. F. Pipe Riser Isolators: Provide manufacturer's standard pad -type isolator bonded to steel plate, formed for welding to pipe sleeve extension. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A. General: Comply with the minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, including the definitions of critical and non -critical locations, for the selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 2 3.2 3.3 3.4 B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. APPLICATIONS A. General: Apply the types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at the locations shown or scheduled. Selection is Contractor's option where more than one type is indicated. B. Provide Neoprene Pads for all floor mounted equipment C. Provide Vibration Isolation Springs on all hanging equipment that do not have rotating parts D. Provide Spring Isolator on all floor mounted equipment that is not already have spring isolators for rotating parts. E. Provide Isolation Hangers for the following: 1. Piping connected to machinery. 2. Overhead supported fans. Provide Flexible Duct Connectors at the following locations: 1. Each connection to air handling unit. 2. Each connection to fan. INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for the installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. 2. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. 3. Remove spacer blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. B. Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that a minimum of 2" clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed and loaded for operation. E. Locate isolation hangers as near the overhead support structure as possible. F. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and operations. EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe the installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish a written report to the Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 3 1 2. Piping connections including flexible connections. 3. Ductwork connections including provisions for flexible connections. 4. Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors. B. Do not start-up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the vibration isolation Installer and Board approved personnel, preferably E&US. 3.5 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, take measurements and prepare a report showing measured equipment deflections for each item of equipment. END OF SECTION MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL 23 05 48 - 4 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary identification items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Valve tagging 2. Pipe marking 3. Equipment marking 4. Ductwork marking. S. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1_ A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. �.j B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or } exceed minimum requirements as specified. Marking system shall conform to ASME 13.1 latest edition and OSHA 29 CFR 1910.261 requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS i t 2.1 VALVE TAGS A. Provide a tag for each valve in main and branch piping of hot and chilled water, condenser water - natural gas and domestic water piping systems. 1. Tags shall be 1-1/2" diameter of solid brass with blacked filled stamped characters of 1/4" height above and 1/2" height below. 2. Provide 8" long meter seals for use with valve tags. B. Provide a valve chart with a schedule and location plans for all identified equipment, both in a IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 ', d frame with an acrylic cover to be located as directed by the Architect. 2.2 PIPE MARKERS A. Provide pipe markers for pipes that provide 360 deg. visibilities with ANSI approved color coded background, color of legend in relation to background color, legend letter size, and length of color field. Additionally, direction of flow arrows shall be printed on the same markers, and words shall be repeated and reversed for use with flow in either direction. 1. Each marker shall be formed with a clear acrylic covering suitable for use outdoors. 2. Marker shall be formed in order to snap on and completely surround the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, provide radius formed markers of same material. 2.3 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Provide engraved plates for all HVAC and plumbing equipment. 1. Plate shall be black with white letters that appear when the plate is engraved. Plate material shall be specifically suited for conditions surrounding the equipment. Outdoor equipment shall require special plate material for outdoor use. 2. Plate size shall be as required with lettering size appropriate for the information shown but in no case less than 1/8" high. Lettering style shall be Gothic -Normal. 3. Nomenclature for plates shall be based on the equipment designations shown on the equipment schedules and as approved by the Architect. 2.4 CONCEALED DEVICES A. Fire dampers, control dampers, splitter dampers and other operable devices and equipment located above ceilings shall be marked with color coded W. H. Brady "Tack" type markers. 2.5 Provide marking system as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton, Craftmark or pre -approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Place all markers and plates in such locations that they are easily read by a person without assuming awkward or hazardous positions. 3.2 VALVE TAGS A. Secure one valve tag to each valve. 3.3 PIPE MARKERS A. For diameters 3/4" to 6", markers shall snap around the pipe, completely surrounding the pipe. Markers shall not require taping or the use of any adhesive material or fasteners to permanently secure them to the pipe. For diameters 6" and larger, secure with stainless steel spring fasteners. B. Install sufficient quantities of markers that tracing of pipe systems can be readily accomplished. Install within three feet before and/or after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, underground or other non -accessible enclosures; at access doors, manholes or other access points which permit view of concealed piping; and when there is a change in direction of the concealed pipe. Locations in major mechanical rooms shall be labeled at a maximum spacing of every 20 feet. Other piping shall have labels at a maximum spacing of every 30 feet and at least once in every area that the pipe passes over or through. Install additional markers where directed by the Architect. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 -2 I 3.4 EQUIPMENT PLATES A. Secure all plates with two self -tapping metal screws with round heads. Alternately, plates may be P PP g Y� p Y fastened with "pop" rivets provided no cracking or injury occurs to the plate. Plates attached with adhesives shall not be permitted. 1 3.5 DUCTWORK MARKING A. Ductwork shall be labeled to identify the function, source, and flow direction. The ductwork identification markings shall be installed on the ductwork as follows: B. Permanent labels or signage. Label shall consist of black lettering a minimum of 2 1/2" in height on a white background or a tan background when duct is painted tan. C. Label at a maximum of 50 feet intervals or where there is a change in direction of the duct. D. Label at least once in each room or space the duct passes over or through. E. Label round ducts located above or below the normal site line of vision with the lettering placed below or above the horizontal centerline of the duct. Lettering shall be clearly visible from access locations. F. Label rectangular ducts about the centerline on vertical sides. Both sides of the duct shall be labeled when accessible. G. Label within three (3) feet before and after penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or other non -accessible enclosures. 3.6 CONCEALED DEVICES A. For concealed devices located above finished ceilings, provide marker on ceiling under unit. Marker shall be colored, stick -on vinyl, or thumb tack. Color shall be approved by Architect. END OF SECTION IDENTIFICATION FOR 14VAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2305 53 - 4 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING AND BALANCING i PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Testing and Balancing Agency Qualifications 1. The testing, adjusting, and balancing of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems shall be performed by a technical firm or balancing agency NEBB firms are not acceptable. The TAB agency shall also employ a permanent full time Registered Professional Engineer on staff with a minimum of five years specialized experience in testing and balancing. The testing and balancing agency shall possess calibrated instruments, qualified engineers, and skilled technicians to perform required tests in accordance with the National Standards. 2. The testing and balancing agency shall be an independent firm separate and distinct from; not to be associated with, or be subsidiary of a firm performing work under other Sections of Division 22 and 23 and shall be under contract directly to the General Contractor. B. Testing and Balancing Agency Responsibilities 1. Submittals: a. Engineer and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the agency, the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified._w b. Sample Form: Submit sample forms, proposed for use on this project, for approval. 1 C. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and signature of the Certified Agency. 2. Review the construction documents, submittal, and shop drawings for balance ability. Submit a list of suggestions or recommendations to the Architect/Engineer for rS consideration. t_ 3. Perform a job site observation prior to the ceiling installation to verify that ductwork, piping, dampers, valves, and air terminal devices have been installed per the contract documents. Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of any discrepancies noted. 4. Test, adjust and balance the heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in accordance with National Standards for field measurement. 5. Verify the operation, calibration, and set points of all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems controls. 6. Functional performance tests of the DDC system and its components. 7. Submit in writing to the Architect/Engineer a list of deficiencies for correction by the installing contractor. In the event a deficiency remains after being reported as corrected, the balancing agency may submit an itemized request for its lost time for payment by the installing contractor. All deficiencies that prevent proper T&B work from being i_. TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1 l_. completed shall be corrected prior to submittal of the Final T&B Report. TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 2 8. Measure and record space temperature readings after occupancy for a period of two consecutive eight hour periods. Make adjustments if necessary to achieve an even temperature distribution. 9. Submit six copies of a certified, bound, typewritten report for approval by the Owner and Architect/Engineer including all test report data, instrument calibration, and schematic drawings of the HVAC layout. 10. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Architect/Engineer. l 1. Make an inspection in the building during the opposite season from which the initial adjustments were made. At that time, make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the system for all seasons. Submit a report of the findings to the Owner and Engineer. C. Contractor Responsibilities Mechanical ? 1. The Contractor shall provide the T&B firm with copies of all Drawings, Specifications, Shop Drawings, Submittal Data, Up -to -Date Revisions, Change Orders, and other data j required for planning, preparation and execution of the T&B work. 2. Coordinate the HVAC installation and start up schedule with the T&B Agency and General Contractor to allow sufficient time prior to the completion date for testing and t balancing to be conducted and deficiency items corrected and retested. Provide sufficient personnel and utilities to operate the HVAC systems during normal and overtime hours to meet the completion date and testing and balancing schedule. 3. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all systems complete and provide balancing valves, test plugs, thermometer wells, flow measurement orifices, volume dampers, splitter dampers, etc. necessary for T&B work. All equipment shall be operated at the Contractor's expense for a minimum of three consecutive days prior to balancing in order to make certain the equipment is free from mechanical defects, runs smoothly and quietly, and performs satisfactorily to meet the requirements set forth in the contract documents. 4. Provide written notification to the T&B agency and General Contractor the systems are ready for balancing. Should the systems not be ready for balancing, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 5. Correct any deficiency items noted during testing and balancing including controls ? calibration, installation of balancing devices, sheave replacements, and motor replacements at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide written notification to the Testing and Balancing Agency and General Contractor when systems are ready for retesting. Should the systems not be ready for retesting it shall be the Contractors responsibility to compensate the T&B Agency for time lost. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices in a manner that will leave them accessible and readily adjustable. t 7. Perform all tests of plumbing and piping systems and equipment as specified herein and. as required to obtain approvals from all authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Provide all instruments, materials and labor to perform the testing and to obtain and record all measurements. 9. The Contractor is to perform duct leakage testing in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1st Edition, 1985 and maintain a log book on site indicating the area tested, date tested, leakage amount, and personnel performing the test. At the end of the project submit a final type written report with the results. The test and balance agency is to be notified one week prior to duct leakage testing and at their option witness the testing to confirm the testing is being performed in accordance with these specifications. L, 1� TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 3 : PART 2 - PRODUCTS ` 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. The balancing agency shall have a complete set of instruments as required by AABC standards. B. Calibration histories for each instrument used for measurement shall be available for examination. Calibration, accuracy, and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with AABC standards. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM TESTS Testing and Balancing Agency A. General: The Test and Balance firm shall test all HVAC equipment and systems and make final adjustments and corrections necessary to place the systems in proper operating condition. 1. After testing and balancing, patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. Air test drilled openings shall be sealed with plastic plugs to allow future access. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier. 2. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices to show final settings. B. Air Distribution Devices: 1. Proportion each air handling unit, air terminal, damper, register, diffuser and grille so that air distribution will be as scheduled, with tests showing air quantities indicated for each inlet and outlet that do not vary by more than plus or minus 10 percent from those indicated on the drawings. 3.2 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES A. The balancing agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the National Standards. 1. Diffusers and Grilles - Determine air velocity at outlets with a velometer or anemometer and using air device manufacturer's data, calculate the delivery cfin, or determine cubic feet per minute flow with a test hood. 2. Fans - Test supply, return, exhaust fans and adjust fan blower speeds to achieve specified CFM. 3. Current and Voltage - Measure and record motor full load amperage and voltage. Actual amperages higher than nameplate full load amps are not acceptable. Verify heater sizes. 4. Pitot-tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse (minimum of 16 points) on main supply and return ducts to obtain design CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the summation of the outlets or inlets may be used with an explanation why a traverse 1 was not conducted. 5. Outside Air - Test and adjust system minimum outside air by Pitot-tube traverse. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical, the percentage of outside air may be determined by calculations from the return air, outside air, and mixed air temperatures when the temperature differential between the return and outside air is greater than 20°F. 6. Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressures, including entering and leaving static pressures of each fan, coil section, and filter section. 7. Air Temperature - Take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each heating coil. 8. Main Ducts - Adjust main ducts to within design CFM requirements and traverse for total CFM quantities. TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 4 t__. 3.3 3.4 9. Branch Ducts - Adjust branch ducts to within design CFM requirements. Multi -diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one volume damper completely open. 10. Tolerances: a. Test and balance each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements. b. Test and balance each zone and air terminal to within plus 10% and minus 5% of design requirements. C. Test and balance each fan and air -handling unit to within plus 10% and minus 5% of design requirements. Test and balance units having filters with clean filters in place. 11. Minimizing Drafts - Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts in all areas. B. Constant volume air systems shall be balanced to provide the scheduled cfin of air flow at each air device with the supply fan operating at the specified air flow volume. VERIFICATION OF TEMPERATURE CONTROL A. The balancing agency shall be assisted by the contractor in verifying the operation and calibration of all temperature control systems. The controls contractor shall provide technical support (technicians, necessary hardware, software, and field interface devices) to the TAB agency for system verification as specified. The following tests shall be conducted: 1. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, and fire and freeze stats. 2. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. 3. Verify the accuracy of the final settings by taking temperature readings. The readings shall be in a typical conditioned space for each separately controlled zone. 4. Verify all controlling devices are calibrated and set for design operating conditions. 5. Verify all components are installed and functional. 6. Verify the accuracy of each temperature sensor by temperature measurement. 7. Check the sequence of operation for all control modes to ensure that they are in accordance with the contract documents. 8. Verify that default setpoints are correct if different from the normal operating set points. 9. Verify all interlock systems function. 10. Perform all system verifications to assure the safety of the system and its components. 11. Verify changeover from heating to cooling occurs as specified. TEST AND BALANCE REPORT A. The Final TAB Report shall be typewritten on 8.5 x 11 inch white bond paper, in bound form with an index and tabs to segregate the data into logical sections. The summary shall include information on special testing conditions and results. A listing of the TAB Agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer shall be included. B. The report shall present data entered on AABC standard forms (modified as necessary to include additional data specified) or pre -approved acceptable equivalent thereof. C. The report shall contain copies of pump curves, fan curves, field test reports and as -built plans (size 11 x 17 inches) of the HVAC systems. D. Include a certification sheet containing the seal and name, corporate address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 5 E. Include a listing of the instrumentation's used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration. System Identification - Each supply, return, and exhaust opening shall be identified and numbered on reduced plans no larger than 11 x 17 inches to correspond to the numbers used on the report data sheets. F. Air Outlet Test Report Forms - Each grille, diffuser, register, and terminal box shall be identified as to location (room number) and area served. Record the size, type, and manufacturer of each diffuser, grille, and register. G. Air Handling Unit Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number and motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer -rated data including supply, return, and outside airflows, fan rpm, sp, and bhp. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical and accepted by engineer, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Inlet and outlet static pressures at the fan coil and filter sections. 3. Actual outside air and return air total CFM. 4. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 5. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 6. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. 7. Coil EAT and LAT (db/wb), and air and water pressure(if applicable) drops. 8. Outside temperature conditions (db/wb). H. Fan Test Report Forms - Record the manufacturer, model number, motor nameplate data and all design and manufacturer -rated data. Report the following. 1. Total actual CFM by traverse. Include duct traverse form. If not practical and accepted by the enigeer, the sum of the outlets may be used, or a combination of each of these procedures. 2. Suction and discharge static pressure of each fan. 3. Actual operating current, voltage, and brake horsepower of each fan motor. 4. Final RPM of the fan and motor. 5. Fan and motor sheave sizes and center distance. Belt size and quantity. I. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Ductwork: a. The contractor shall perform duct leakage testing on all supply, return and exhaust ductwork in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Seal any ductwork not meeting the following acceptable leakage rates and retest until test is successful. Leakage Rates: Allowable % Static Pressure Low Pressure Supply 4% @ 2" w.g. Low Pres. Return/Exhaust 4% @ 2" w.g. Controls: 1. Contractor shall calibrate and adjust all thermostats and other controlling devices. Replace defective controllers at no cost to the Owner. 3.5 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTS t A. Plumbing: Contractor Responsibilities 1. Defective Work: If inspections or tests reveal defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or repaired as necessary and inspections and tests shall be repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Patching of screwed joints or holes shall not be acceptable. 2. Cleaning, Testing and Adjusting: TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 6 P a. Equipment, piping, valves, fittings and fixtures shall be cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, and foreign matter that may have accumulated from operation of the system during the test. Any stoppage, discoloration or other damage to the finish, furnishings or parts of the building, due to the Contractor's failure to properly protect such items shall be repaired by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. b. When the work is complete, the water systems shall be adjusted for all required flows. Flush valves and automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation. Hot water heaters shall be tested for proper operation of all safety and operating controls as recommended by the manufacturer. Demonstrate that supply and recirculating systems are balanced for specified flows and , temperatures and as shown on the drawings. 3. Sterilization: After pressure tests have been made, the entire domestic water distribution system shall be thoroughly flushed with water until all entrained dirt and mud have been removed, and shall be sterilized by chlorinating material. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine conforming to Federal Specification BB-C-120 or hypochlorite conforming to Federal Specification 0-C-114, Type II, Grade B, or Federal Specification 0-S-602, Grade A or B. The chlorinating material shall provide a dosage - of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced into the system in an approved manner. The treatment water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all non -spore forming bacteria. Except where a shorter period is approved, the retention time shall be at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of residual chlorine at the extreme end of the system at the end of the retention period. -% 4. All valves and faucets in the system being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. Samples of water shall be taken from several points in the system in properly sterilized containers for bacterial examination. The sterilizing shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at least two full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained. END OF SECTION TESTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 7 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION i PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the insulation of the mechanical systems as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Factory insulated equipment is excluded from this section of the specifications except that the insulating material characteristics shall equal or exceed those of specified materials for similar service. C. Work Included: 1. Piping: a. Cooling coil condensate drain lines. b. Refrigerant suction lines. 2. Ductwork: a. Supply air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. b. Return air: 1) Insulate externally with thermal duct wrap. C. Make-up air duct: 1) Insulated externally. d. All round ductwork exposed to view shall be double wall factory internally insulated with V thick glass fiber duct and fittings. D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, "Common Work Results for HVAC". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass Insulation: a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas b. Manville C. Certain Teed 2. Urethane Insulation: a. Armstrong (Armalok) HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 1 b. Thermaoor 3. Mastics a. Benjamin Foster b. Insul-Coustic C. Chicago Mastic d. Childers Products 4. High Temperature Bonding Cements: Ryder Thermocote 5. PVC Fittings: Zeston, Inc. ; 1.4 GENERAL A. All materials shall be applied by workmen skilled in this trade. Mechanical fasteners shall be used whenever possible to assure permanent construction. Unsightly work shall be cause for rejection. B. Materials will be applied only after all surfaces have been tested and cleaned. C. All material, jacket, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives shall not exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed of 50 in accordance with ASTM Method E84, UL Standard 723 and NFPA Bulletins 255 and 90A. D. Insulation shall be vermin resistant. E. Non -compressible insulation material shall be installed at hangers of cold piping to eliminate through metal conductance. F. Sizing, paint, pipe shield or saddle, and internal duct insulation shall be provided under other sections of Division 23. G. Insulation of cold surfaces shall be vapor sealed. H. Minimum thickness of insulation shall be as listed or energy code as adopted by authority having jurisdiction. However, sufficient insulation shall be provided to eliminate condensation on the cold surfaces and to maintain a maximum exterior insulation surface of 125°F. (OSHA Standard) on the hot surfaces. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Pipe Insulation: 1. Above ground -Johns Manville AP-T preformed one-piece fiberglass with reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil jacket. Include vapor barrier where required. a. Use pre -formed PVC fitting covers with fiberglass inserts. Fiberglass shall be same density as pipe insulation. b. Where insulation is exposed to weather, use Manville Flame -Safe ML, or approved equal, Metal -Jacketed Fiberglass pipe insulation. Attachment shall be made by 1/2" 0.020 aluminum bands with approved closure system. 2. Armstrong Armaflex or equal may be used, in thermally equivalent thicknesses, but only for refrigerant suction lines where codes permit. 3. Condensate drain lines shall be insulated from AC unit to indirect waste termination points and first 10'-0" of horizontal drain line at floor drains receiving condensate. Material shall be closed cell type with 3/4" thick molded pipe covering with a density of HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 2 7 lbs. thermal conductivity at 0.28 at 75°F. Do not split the insulation. All joints shall be glued with manufacturer's adhesive. 2.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS A. External insulation for metal ductwork (flexible blanket): Johns Manville Microlite fiberglass duct wrap with FSK reinforced craft paper and aluminum foil facing, conforming to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. B. High velocity ductwork with external insulation shall be insulated with blanket wrap fiberglass insulation, 1-1/2 inches thick, one (1) pound density or minimum thermal resistance of 6.0, complete with scrim kraft jacket. Facing overlapping joints shall be at least two (2) inches and held in place with outward clinching staples on approximately four (4) inch centers. Underside of ducts exceeding 24 inches in diameter shall be spot cemented and finally secured with sheet metal screws and washers. C. High velocity flexible ductwork shall be UL 181, Class I, with rating to meet or exceed NFPA 90A-90B and reinforced with a perforated sheet metal inner jacket. D. High velocity ductwork located in non -conditioned spaces shall be insulated with 2" thick fiberglass board insulation with vapor barrier jacket. E. Other manufacturers are Certainteed, Knauf, and Owens Corning or approved equal. F. Fibrous -Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 9013; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c.Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in.hh x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. All duct liner products shall avoid air erosion up to velocities of 4,000 feet per minute. G. Solvent -Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Water based, polymeric, UL classified lagging adhesive for applying canvas and glass cloth; Foster 30-36 or Childers CP-50. B. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, vapor barrier lap and attachment adhesive; Foster 85- 15 or Childers CP-85. C. Same adhesive, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 85-20 or Childers CP-82. D. A rubber based, UL classified, fast setting contact adhesive for adhering flexible cellular insulation; Foster 82-40 or Armstrong 520. 2.4 INSULATION THICKNESS A. Piping insulation thickness based on a maximum k value of 0.23 Btu in/hr ft2 °F at a mean temperature of 75°F. i4 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 3 Pipe Sizes Runout 1 1/2 " 1 System s To12 and 1/2" Less Up Max. Refrigerant piping 1" 1" 2" Condensate drain piping B. Exterior Duct Insulation: All supply, return and outside air ductwork, shall be insulation 2" thick, with a minimum installed R value of 6.0. 2.5 DUCT SEALANTS A. A fast setting, rubber based, UL classified, high velocity duct sealer; Foster 32-14 or 3M EC-800 B. Same sealer, except non-flammable when wet; Foster 30-02. 2.6 EXPANSION AND BALL JOINT INSULATION COVERS A. Furnish and install removable and reusable insulation covers. B. Insulation and jacketing material shall be as required for service temperatures. C. Covers shall have hook and loop fasteners and draw cords. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The installation of all insulation shall be made by experienced craftsmen in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for service intended, as interpreted by the Architect. B. All adhesives used in conjunction with insulation shall be compatible with the insulation and vapor barrier used and be vermin -proof and mildew resistant. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ductwork: 1. External Duct Insulation: All external duct shall be installed without sagging or loose fitting sections. Outer jacket shall be sealed with mastic to form a continuous vapor barrier. Install as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2. Flexible fiberglass insulation shall be wrapped around ducts and secured with outward clinching staples. Ducts 24" wide and larger shall have the insulation additionally secured with stick clips on 18" centers or with 4" wide bands of adhesive applied on 18" centers. Insulation shall be lapped a minimum of 4" and all seams and penetrations shall be sealed with an approved mastic reinforced with 3" glass mesh reinforcement. Where insulation terminates, all raw glass shall be sealed to duct. HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 4 1 e_ C. Insulation shall be the full specified thickness, continuous through walls, floors, ceilings, etc. Reducing thickness or cutting back of insulation to pass obstructions or through sleeves will not be permitted. D. Valve and fitting insulation shall be built up to the thickness of the adjacent pipe insulation or may be factory prefabricated units at the Contractor's option. E. Any painting of pipe insulation shall be accomplished under the Painting Section. After finish painting, any insulation showing splits or other signs of poor workmanship shall be replaced. F. No part of any system shall be insulated until all required tests have been completed. G. All insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functions of thermometer wells, gage connections and/or cocks, unions, access panels, hand holes, manholes, sight glasses, etc., or obscure serial numbers or other nameplate data. H. Insulation shall be extended to include stiff leg supports as required to prevent sweating. Complete vapor barriers to prevent sweating shall be installed on all cold systems and equipment. If a single tape adhesive system or staples are used for closure of the longitudinal lap, a vapor barrier mastic must be used to ensure a vaporproof closure. All edges and abutments shall be sealed, waterproof and vaporproof. Supplier of jacket materials shall certify that the material proposed is approved for use in return air plenums, where applicable. Where necessary, the application of insulation shall be arranged to accommodate movement of piping due to thermal expansion and/or contraction. K. Exterior Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated when installed exposed to weather, shall be insulated, and wrapped with an 0.016" smooth or corrugated aluminum jacket with proper closure system positioned to shed water to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed prior to approval by the Architect. L. Below Grade Piping: All pipe and fittings specified herein to be insulated, when installed below grade shall be insulated and spirally wrapped with open mesh glass tape embedded in asphaltic mastic and then completely covered with waterproof asphaltic mastic so as to make a waterproof assembly. Fittings shall be insulated with molded insulation fittings or pipe insulation carved and mitered to fit properly. Insulation shall be butted together and adhered in place with contact cement. Where possible tubing shall be slipped on without slitting. Where insulation terminates, it shall be neatly beveled and finished. No portion of this insulation shall be concealed before the Architect has checked and approved same. M. Piping supports shall pass completely around the exterior of the finished insulation. Rigid blocks of insulation material shall be provided at all support points. In addition, sheet metal saddles shall be provided at support points in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size Gauge Metal Saddle Length Up to 2-1/2" 18 6" 3" - 5" 16 10" 6" - 8" 16 14" 10" and Over 16 18" HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 5 N. Saddles shall cover the bottom of the insulation, and saddle edges shall be hemmed or suitably' covered to prevent damage to the insulation material. O. The vapor barrier and finish shall be continuous at all support points. P. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted -edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. C. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2000 fpm or where indicated. 9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Q. Lined exterior ductwork shall be treated with an acid etch bath and two coats of UV resistant paint. Color shall be approved by Architect. R. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire -damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. END OF SECTION HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 6 L_ SECTION 23 09 93 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 23 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. 1.3 SCOPE A. Control sequence is hereby defined to mean the manner in which, and methods by which, the controls function. The requirements for each type of operation are specified in this section. B. The operating equipment, devices, and system components required for the control system are specified by Section 23 8149 and of these specifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. PART 2 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FOR THE MECHANICAL SYSTEM 2.1 GENERAL A. All HVAC systems shall be controlled with Direct Digital Control (DDC) according to sequence of operations listed in this section of the Specifications and shall be by the manufacturer of the HVAC equipment. Additional points or software programming not identified but which are required to meet the following sequence of operation shall be provided. 2.2 VRF INDOOR UNITS A. Each indoor units shall be controlled by a wall controller and as specified and indicated on the plans. B. Smoke detectors, for indoor units greater than 1950 CFM furnished and wired by Division 26 in the supply and return air of the unit shall, upon detection of smoke shall de -energize the supply fan. 2.3 CONDENSING UNITS SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23 09 93 - 1 j A. The HVAC system is designed to provide automatic switchover upon the detection of an alarm in the system of the inability for the HVAC system to maintain temperature utilizing one systems indoor units. B. Each system listed below shall identify the general operation of the system and the automatic or manual sequencing. C. Condensing Unit IA and 1B are intended to be 100% redundant systems but shall be able to operate independently of each other. The system is designed so that either system shall be able to produce 100% of the cooling or heating for the spaces served by the indoor units. Should the set point increase more than 1 °F(adjustable) above the set point, then an alarm shall notify the EMS operator and the backup unit shall be energized to maintain set point. The EMS operator shall be able to schedule the units to allow for equal run time on the systems by switching lead/lag. The EMS operator shall be able to select daily, weekly, or specific days for the lead/lag switch. Coordinate with Owner during submittal to determine schedule for lead/lag switch. D. Condensing unit 2A and 2B are intended to be complementary systems (not 100% redundant) and shall be able to operate independently of each other. The system is designed so that either system shall be able to run to maintain the cooling or heating for the spaces served by the indoor units. Should the set point increase more than 2'F(adjustable) above the set point, then an alarm shall notify the EMS operator and if the space has a backup unit (A or B), the backup unit shall be energized to maintain setpoint. E. Condensing Unit 3A and 3B are intended to be 100% redundant systems but shall be able to operate independently of each other. The system is designed so that either system shall be able to produce 100% of the cooling or heating for the spaces served by the indoor units. Should the set point increase more than 2°F(adjustable) above the set point, then an alarm shall notify the EMS operator and the backup unit shall be energized to maintain set point. The EMS operator shall be able to schedule the units to allow for equal run time on the systems by switching lead/lag. The EMS operator shall be able to select daily, weekly, or specific days for the lead/lag switch. Coordinate with Owner during submittal to determine schedule for lead/lag switch. EXHAUST AND VENTILATION FANS A. The DDC Controller shall start/stop and monitor the exhaust and ventilation fans. The exhaust fan shall be interlocked with the fresh air ventilation fan and both fans shall run continuously. Fan failure an alarm shall be sent to the EMS operator. B. Provide a manual motor switch on the supply fan to allow for manual emergency shut-off of both the supply and exhaust fans. 2.5 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. Provide electrical interlocks as listed herein, in other sections of these specifications and as noted in the equipment schedules. B. Electrical interlocks shall be made by means of auxiliary contacts on motor starters or shall be accomplished with separate relays unless indicated otherwise. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit, unless indicated otherwise. Each separate control power lead serving a starter shall be provided with a disconnecting switch suitably identified and housed, which may be a toggle switch or other suitable disconnecting device, or proper capacity and number of poles. ... END OF SECTION SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS 23 09 93 - 2 SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install items as shown on the drawings or as necessary to provide a complete working system in accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, including all valves as indicated or as necessary to completely control the entire piping system. The piping drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general routing, locations, and connections. The piping may require be offsetting, lowering or rising as needed to avoid interferences or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper installation of piping systems. B. Work Included: 1. Refrigerant piping and accessories. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, "Common Work Results for HVAC". 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements to comply with ANSI, ASTM, ASME, CISPI, IAPMO, PDI, and AWWA and all other applicable standards. D. Copies of each welder's certification documents shall be furnished to the Architect prior to them performing work. E. All pipes, valves, and fittings shall be manufactured in the United States. Mill Test reports and manufacturer's certifications shall be submitted to the Engineer on all such materials used. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Seamless ACR copper tubing, Type L, hard drawn with wrought or bronze solder joint fittings. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 1 2.2 VALVES, COCKS AND SPECIALTIES A. Materials: Bronze, ductile iron, or cast iron per local codes with screwed, grooved, or flanged ends for steel pipe and grooved, or solder ends for copper pipe. B. Valve locations: 1. Provide a valve on inlet and outlet of each piece of equipment. 2. Provide valves to isolate individual or a group of equipment on branch runouts from piping mains. This is in addition to valves at each fixture and equipment. 3. Provide valves as indicated and where required to adequately service parts of systems and equipment. C. Refrigerant Valves: 1. Globe and Angle Valves: Forged brass or bronze alloy with packed stem and seal cap. 2. Check Valves: Spring -loaded, forged brass or bronze alloy body with solder connections. 3. Relief Valves: Forged brass bodies with nonferrous corrosion resistant internal working parts. Valves shall be in accordance with ANSI B9.1. 4. Solenoid Valves: Two -position, direct acting or pilot operated type, UL listed, with manual opening stem and constructed for servicing without removal from lines. Valves shall have coil housing, stainless steel enclosing tube, replaceable seat, and proper inlet and outlet connections for the type of pipe containing the valve. D. Dielectric Unions or Waterway Fittings: 1. Provide dielectric unions or waterway fittings at all piping connections (except to valves) between dissimilar metals, Watts No. 3000 series, Victaulic Style 47, or engineer approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All work shall be performed by workmen skilled in the trade required for the work. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the approved recommendations of the �..j manufacturer and the best practices of the trade in conformance with the contract documents. B. Refer to Section 23 0529, "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for general 1 piping support requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 23 0500, "Common Work Results for HVAC" for general installation requirements. B. Erection of Pipe above Grade: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for flashing, expansion, contraction, slope and anchorage. All piping shall be cut accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all structural elements, finished rooms, windows, doors, and other openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. C. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings, except that bending of pipe will be permitted j providing a hydraulic pipe bender is used. Bent pipe showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformation will not be acceptable. �I REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 2 �- D. Copper tubing shall be joined by the following method: 1. The tubing shall be reamed to remove all burrs from the inside diameter of the pipe. 2. The tubing and fitting shall be sanded or brushed to a uniform bright finish. 3. Apply a paste flux to both tubing and fitting. 4. Fully heat the joined parts and apply solder to the joint. 5. Completely fill the joint with solder, wiping any excess solder outside the joint while still liquid. E. Mitering of pipe to form elbows or notching straight runs to form tees will not be permitted. F. Provide sleeves around all pipes passing through walls, floors, ceiling, partitions, structural members or other building parts. G. Refrigerant Piping: 1. Refrigerant piping shall not be run concealed in walls or partitions nor underground or under the floor except as indicated on the drawings. Where pipe passes through building structure, pipe joints shall not be concealed, but shall be located where they may be readily inspected. 2. Refrigerant piping shall be brazed with silver solder complying with AWS A5.0 or "Sil-Fos". The inside of tubing and fittings shall be free of flux. The parts to be joined shall be cleaned bright with emery cloth and shall be heated to a temperature slightly greater than the solder flow point, and shall be kept hot until the solder has penetrated the full depth of the fitting. Joints shall be cooled in the air after which flame marks and traces of flux shall be removed. During the brazing operation, the tubing shall be protected from forming an oxide film on the inside by slowly flowing dry nitrogen to expel the air. Installation of the piping shall comply with ANSI B31.5. 3. Refrigerant lines shall be installed so that the gas velocity in the evaporator suction line is sufficient to move the oil along with the gas to the compressor. Where equipment location requires a vertical riser, the line size shall be as shown and installed to provide sufficient gas velocity or a double riser shall be installed as shown on the drawings. The larger riser shall have a trap, of minimum volume, formed by the use of 90 degree and 45 degree ells. The small riser shall be located with its inlet just upstream of the trap and shall connect to the top of the horizontal line. Valves shall not be installed in risers except as shown on the drawings. 4. Refrigerant driers, sight glass liquid and moisture indicators, and strainers shall be provided in refrigerant piping for remote installations when not furnished by the manufacturer as part of the equipment. Driers shall be installed in liquid line with service valves and a valved bypass line which are the same size as liquid line in which the drier is installed. Driers of 50 cubic inches and larger shall be installed with the cover and the full cartridge being easily removable. 5. Sight glass liquid and moisture indicators shall be installed in the liquid line downstream of the drier. Connections shall be the same size as the liquid line in which it is installed, up to 7/8"; 1-1/8" and larger shall have a 1/4" indicator installed in the "By-pass" position. 6. Strainers shall be located close to equipment they are to protect. A strainer shall be provided in the refrigerant liquid supply to expansion valves. Strainers shall be installed with screen down and in direction of flow as indicated on the strainer's body. 7. Refrigerant Charging Valve: A valved refrigerant charging connection shall be provided for each field piped refrigeration system when not provided as part of the condensing unit. The valve shall be located on the reducing outlet of a full size tee in the liquid line, upstream from the refrigerant drier and sight glass moisture indicator. Valves shall be of the seal cap type, 1/2" min. port size. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 3 8. Solenoid valves shall be installed in horizontal lines with the stem vertical and with flow f in direction indicated on the valve. If not incorporated as an integral part of the valve, strainers shall be provided upstream of each solenoid valve, with a service valve upstream of the solenoid valve. The solenoid valve shall be disassembled according to the manufacturers' recommendations when brazing the valve into the piping. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 - 4 t : SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all air distribution items as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Diffuser, grilles and registers. 2. Ductwork. 3. Smoke dampers. 4. Access Doors. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials and methods meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Ducts shall be constructed of new -galvanized steel sheets and erected in a first class manner, straight and smooth, with joints neatly finished, anchored securely to the building and free from vibration. All ducts penetrating fire walls shall be minimum 26 gauge galvanized steel. B. All elbows shall be curved elbows. Curved elbows shall have a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct. Air turns consisting of curved metal vanes, arranged to permit the air to follow abrupt turns without appreciable turbulence shall be installed in square elbows. Air turns shall be the manufacturer's standard products, and shall be quiet and free from vibration. METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 _. C. All primary and secondary ductwork of constant volume systems shall be fabricated in accordance with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, Second Edition, 1998". The duct static pressure ' rating for this duct shall be equal to or greater than the external static pressure of the system fan as scheduled plus 0.35" w.c. or 2" w.c. whichever is the greater. The requirements for the seal class corresponding to the above static pressure shall be met. D. Longitudinal joints shall be Pittsburgh lock or Acme grooved seam. Side panels greater than 10 inches in depth shall be cross -broken for added stiffness. E. At each major branch from a primary rectangular or square trunk duct, and where shown on the drawings, install a splitter damper or multiblade adjustable air pickup. Splitter damper shall have end bearings and consist of a blade constructed of 20 gauge -galvanized steel securely riveted or welded to a square operating rod. The length of the splitter blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the split in the main duct, but in no case less than 12". Multi -blade adjustable pickup shall be as manufactured by Titus Model AG45 or approved equal with operator adjustable from the duct exterior. F. Each individual air supply duct tap shall be equipped with a volume control device for the manual adjustment of airflow in each tap. Face bars, blanks, and equalizing grids shall not be used to regulate airflow. G. Volume dampers shall be installed within ducts or plenums where shown on the drawings and where required for balancing. Volume dampers shall have end bearings and be multi -blade type with opposed acting blades linked together and controlled by a single operator. Multi -blade dampers shall be not less than No. 16 gauge galvanized steel mounted to plenum or ductwork per SMACNA requirements. Ti H. Round or oval ductwork shall be fastened together with a minimum of three sheet metal screws equally spaced around the perimeter of the duct and taped with an approved duct sealing tape. Ductwork shall be furnished complete with all factory fabricated starting collars, Y shaped branch takeoffs, adjustable elbows, etc. I. Where ducts are in mechanical rooms or unfinished areas or where m ers lift o ceilings, regulators shall be stamped galvanized steel, lever type with locking screw mounted on face of ductwork. For all other areas, where damper adjustments cannot be accessed through the ceiling, regulators shall be the concealed type with adjustable cover plate as manufactured by Young Regulator 0 Model No. 315 with 2-1/4" diameter cover plate or approved equal. Damper quadrants, volume dampers and other duct flow control quadrants shall be as manufactured by Young Regulator or approved equal. ,- r On the inlet and outlet of each piece of air moving equipment or terminal unit, unless noted otherwise, install a flexible connection made with sufficient slack to render it flexible. K. Where air intakes and/or discharges are indicated on the drawings and no air device is indicated, install 1/4" bird screens over each duct opening set in galvanized steel frames and securely attach to the openings. L. Furnish and install 26 gauge galvanized steel counter flashings for all ducts penetrating roofs and for all roof mounted equipment unless directed otherwise by the Architect. 2.2 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Core material shall be a PVC Coated Fiberglass reinforced fabric supported by helically wound i 4 galvanized steel. The fabric shall be mechanically fastened to the steel helix without the use of adhesive. B. The internal working pressure rating shall be at least as follows with a bursting pressure of at least 2- { METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 2 I! 1/2 times the working pressure. C. The duct shall be rated for a velocity of at least 5500 feet per minute. D. Suitable for operating temperatures of at least 250 degrees F. E. Factory insulate the flexible duct with flexible fiberglass insulation. The R value shall be at least 5.0 at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. (R4.2 not acceptable). F. Cover the insulation with a reinforced aluminum pigmented vapor barrier jacket having a permeance of not greater than 0.05 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, procedure A. G. The ductwork shall be UL 181 listed, Class 1 Air Duct and comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. H. Duct shall be secured with metal bands. I. Duct shall be Flexmaster Type 4M or pre -approved equal 2.3 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide combination fire and smoke dampers where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall meet all requirements of fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft, which, when rotated 90 deg., causes the damper to operate between closed and open. All dampers shall comply with the requirements of UL-555S, 350°F temperature rating and with pressure and velocity levels as required by the installation. Provide breakaway duct connects as required by UL. B. Each damper shall be famished complete with 18 gauge galvanized factory sleeve and damper operator (pneumatic or electric to conform to control system) factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Operators shall be UL listed and labeled as Fire Damper Operators. C. Each damper shall be activated by a duct smoke detector provided by Division 16. D. Dampers shall be as manufactured by Ruskin, Greenheck, Air Balance, Inc., Nailor-Hart or approved equal. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS A. Provide stamped steel access doors at each fire damper, fire and smoke damper, where control devices occur within ductwork, where access is required for cleaning of grease ducts, and as indicated on the drawings. Access doors shall be fully insulated where duct is lined internally. Provide with mounting flange, double thickness door with cam latch, gasket and retaining wire. No tools shall be required to open the access door. B. Provide approved cleanout access doors at all offsets and each 10 lineal feet of straight grease duct. C. The minimum size of each access door shall be sufficient to provide adequate access for the intended purpose of installation. D. Provide access doors equal to Nailor-Hart Ind., Inc. Series 0800. METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 3 __: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION k A. All ductwork shall be installed as recommended by SMACNA and as shown or indicated on the drawings. Coordinate ductwork with all other trades and elements of the building construction. B. All ductwork accessories shall be provided as specified or shown or indicated on the drawings, install as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. C. Ductwork shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner with ducts generally parallel to structure and tops of ducts as high as possible against building construction. Provide offsets as necessary to avoid obstructions, piping, or structural members. D. Flexible ductwork shall be installed and supported as recommended by SMACNA and the manufacturer. E. All kitchen exhaust ductwork shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of all governing code authorities. END OF SECTION METAL DUCTS 2331 13 - 4 SECTION 23 34 00 - FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Ventilation fans C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15010. B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. FANS 23 34 00 - 1 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Section B. Provide two sets of belts for each fan, not including the set installed on the fans. Tag sets to identify fan. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. D. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas. E. Provide accessories as scheduled. F. Fans shall be manufactured by Greenheck, Cook, Penn Barry or pre -approved equal 2.2 CABINET FAN A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of centrifugal, direct driven in -line type. The fan housing shall be of the square design, constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars. fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be sufficient size to permit easy access to all interior components. B. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. C. Motors shall be permanently lubricated and carefully matched to the fan loads. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. D. a NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnects are optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box. E. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. F. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. FANS 23 34 00 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION a` 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while running. D. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance. E. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed. F. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans where indicated. END OF SECTION THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FANS 23 34 00 - 4 SECTION 23 37 00 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 15 B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all necessary air handling items as shown on the drawings and/or specified. B. Work Included: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registerstgrilles. 3. Louvers. C. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 15010, General Requirements for Mechanical Systems. 1. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. 2. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. C. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. D. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. AIR OUTLEST AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR SUPPLIES AND RETURNS A. Grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be as scheduled on the Drawings and shall be provided with sponge rubber or soft felt gaskets. Devices shall be the type, size, capacity, performance, and by the manufacturer scheduled or approved equal. If a manufacturer other than the one scheduled is used, the sizes shown on the Drawings shall be checked for performance, noise level, face velocity, throw, pressure drop, etc., before the submittal is made. Selections shall meet the manufacturer's own published data for the above performance criteria. The throw shall , be such that the velocity at the end of the throw in the five foot occupancy zone will be not more than 50 FPM or less than 25 FPM. Noise levels shall not exceed those published in the ASHRAE Guide for the type of space being served (NC level). B. Locations of outlets on Drawings are approximate and shall be coordinated with other trades to make symmetrical patterns and shall be governed by the established pattern of the lighting fixtures or architectural reflected ceiling plan. Where called for on the schedules, the grilles, registers and ceiling outlets shall be provided with deflecting devices and manual damper. These shall be the standard product of the manufacturer, subject to review by the Architect, and equal to brand scheduled. C. All ceiling mounted devices shall be provided with frames compatible with the ceiling type. Coordinate required frame style with architectural reflected ceiling plans. D. All adjustable pattern lay -in type -ceiling diffusers shall be adjustable without the use of tools. E. Coordinate air device frame type and color with Architect's room finish schedule to match adjacent surface in which the device will be installed F. All ceiling mounted devices shall have insulated backs. b`l G. Acceptable Manufacturers are Titus, MetalAire, or Price. LJ 2.2 LOUVERS f A A. Aluminum fixed blade louvers shall be extruded aluminum, stationary storm proof type, with a drain gutter in each blade, Blades and frames shall be minimum 0.1 inch thick with reinforcing bosses and shall be of 6063-T5 alloy. Head, jamb and sill shall be of one piece structural member of 6063-T5 Alloy with integral calking slot and retaining bead. Supports and blades shall have provision for expansion and contraction. All fastenings shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Louvers shall be free of all scratches, blemishes and defects. Sizes shall be as shown on the Drawings. Louvers shall have a minimum free area of 50% and a maximum pressure drop of 0.02 inches of water at 500 feet per minute air velocity. B. Structural supports shall be provided and designed by the louver manufacturer to carry a windload of not less than thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psi). C. Provide louvers with removable bird screens and insect screens, consisting of aluminum frame with mitered corners and 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) diameter 1/2 inch aluminum wire mesh. Bird screen shall be attached to interior of louver with sheet metal screws or clips. D. Provide backdraft dampers adjacent to each wall louver in all cases with exception of louvers that L} provide the introduction of combustion air. E. Louver finish and color shall be as directed by Architect. i __ AIR OUTLEST AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 2 1� F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck 2. Ruskin 3. Pottorff 4. NCA $ PART 3 - EXECUTION E 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. i D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers. OBD as part of the diffuser or grille will not be accepted. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. t END OF SECTION f , f, .!i AIR OUTLEST AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK AIR OUTLEST AND INLETS 23 37 00 - 4 -x SECTION 23 8149 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating refrigeration and air handling system as indicated on the drawings and as specified. B. Contractor Qualifications: 1. The contractor installing this system shall have installed a minimum of five (5) VRF systems of similar size or larger within the past three (3) years. Installation of one -to- A one mini -splits is not considered equal to the experience of installing multi -zone VRF systems. 2. A list of projects, year project was installed and commissioned, installed tonnage (indoor g units and outdoor unit), and reference contact information shall be provided in the t - submittal. 3. Provide manufacturers training certificate. C. Work included: 1. Variable Refrigerant Flow System D. Submittals: Provide submittals as required in Section 23 0500, "Common Work Results for HVAC". IN ADDITION, and specifically related to the VRF portion of work: 1. Manufacturer software shall be used to produce piping tree and shall be submitted (1) before ordering material, (2) confirmed/revised for actual field dimensions before welding/pressure testing, and (3) submitted after pressure testing to document final pipe sizes and lengths and shall be included as "As-Builts". 2. Equipment and total system capacities shall show the actual Total And Sensible capacities of all equipment after the following design considerations have been taken into account: a. Outdoor Ambient Conditions b. Altitude c. Entering Air Temperature into the FCU d. Refrigerant line diameters and length e. Refrigerant line diameters and length 3. After the final piping connection is made, confirm that all valves within the refrigerant circuit are open, date/time stamped photos of the pressure gauge(s) at both the beginning and ending of a successful pressure test OR documented observation by a 3rd party along with ambient temperatures for the same period shall be submitted. The subcontractor shall be knowledgeable of the Ideal Gas Law to be able to judge a successful pressure test while ambient conditions vary. A pressure test shall be considered "successful" when it has held the manufacturer's stated PSI for the manufacturer's stated minimum 1- duration. Additionally, the refrigerant circuit shall remain under pressure until the refrigerant circuit is prepared for start-up at which point it shall be measured and documented to match that of the original successful pressure test. THE INSTALLER IS CHARGED WITH NOTIFYING THE JOBSITE OF SAFETY REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING WORKING NEAR PIPING UNDER PRESSURE. 4. BEFORE START-UP, the installer shall purge the refrigerant circuit of nitrogen and pull a vacuum on the entire open circuit down to 500 microns and shall hold for 1 hour. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 1 1.3 1.4 It shall be measured and documented by Factory Authorized Commissioning Agent 5. WARRANTY: VRF equipment shall come with a 10 year parts and compressor warranty. This warranty includes all the components that are factory installed within the VRF condensing units, fan coil units, heat recovery boxes and wall mounted controllers. To ensure viability of the warranty it shall be supplied, in writing, by the equipment manufacturer and not the local sale representative. Outside of the first year, warranty is parts only and does not include troubleshooting or labor. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the equipment meets or exceeds minimum requirements as specified. D. All equipment shall have a minimum EER in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 unless specified otherwise. E. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. F. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC). G. The system will be produced in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility, which are standards set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). The system shall be factory tested for safety and function. H. All VRF equipment shall be stored protected from weather, extreme temperature, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer. All VRF equipment shall be moved, lifted, etc. as suggested by the manufacturer. HVAC EQUIPMENT ALTERNATE FOR PRE -APPROVAL (GENERAL INFORMATION) A. The alternate equipment supplier shall provide a complete equipment data package. This package shall include, but is not limited to, equipment capacities and efficiencies at the design condition as well as part load conditions at 10% increments from 10% to 10%, power requirements, indoor units CFM/static pressures, fan curves, installation requirements, and physical dimensions. Nominal performance data is not acceptable. B. The contractor bids an alternate manufacturer with full knowledge that the manufacturer's product may not be acceptable or approved. C. The alternate equipment supplier shall furnish a complete submittal package.. The drawing format shall be .dxf or equivalent, on 301lx42" sheets. The alternate equipment supplier shall prepare the following drawings: • HVAC Floor Plan Alternate • HVAC Refrigerant Piping Plan Alternate VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 2 • HVAC Refrigerant Piping/Controls Details Alternate • HVAC Details Alternate • HVAC Schedules Alternate • Electrical Floor Plan for HVAC Equipment Alternate • Electrical Details Alternate - • Electrical HVAC Controls Details Alternate • Electrical Schedules Alternate D. The alternate equipment supplier shall draft all piping circuits, components, overall building control schematic, detailed control wiring diagrams, system details and schedules for their system. The drawings shall convey all requirements to successfully install the alternate equipment suppliers system. The submitted documents shall be complete system designs and show no less information than the HVAC equipment/controls contract bid documents. E. The equipment supplier shall submit as part of the equipment data package outdoor unit data sheets. Data sheets to include the following: Capacities: Cooling Cooling (Btu/h) Cooling Input Power (kW) Capacities: Heating Heating (Btu/h) Heating Input Power (kW) Oneratini! Temperature RanLye: Cooling Heating Power Supply: Maximum Circuit Amps (MCA) Maximum Fuse Amps (MFA) Maximum Starting Current (MSC) Total Over Current Amps (TOGA) Outdoor Fan Motor Refrigerant: Refrigerant Type/Charge Control Unit Data: Max. Number of Indoor Units Sound Pressure Level at 3ft. (dBA) Weight (lbs) Dimensions F. The equipment supplier shall guarantee the performance of their system and all published data submitted. Performance shall be based on the design criteria below. Room Temperature (Cooling): 72°F VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 3 Room Temperature (Heating): 75°F Ambient Temperature (Summer): 105°F Ambient Temperature (Winter): 15°F PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE CAPACITY, VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME/VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW SERIES A. System Description: The variable capacity, heat recovery air conditioning system shall be a Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Series (simultaneous heat/cool model) split system or equal as approved by Engineer. The system shall consist of multiple evaporators using PID control. The unit shall be a, direct expansion (DX), variable speed driven compressor (minimum of two compressors and two fans per module) multi zone heat pump split system, using R410A refrigerant. The outdoor unit may connect an indoor evaporator capacity up to 100% to that of the outdoor condensing unit capacity. Every indoor unit shall be independently capable of operating in either heating or cooling mode regardless of the mode of other indoor units. The system shall be capable of changing mode of individual indoor units (cooling to heating or heating to cooling) within a maximum time of 5 minutes to ensure indoor temperature can be properly maintained. B. The outdoor unit shall be interconnected to indoor units and shall range in capacity from 12,000 Btu/h to 96,000 Btu/h in accordance with manufacture's engineering data book detailing each available indoor unit. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor utilizing specified piping joints and headers. 2.2 CONDENSING (OUTDOOR) UNIT A. General: The outdoor unit is designed specifically for use with VRF series components. 1. The outdoor unit shall be used with VRF components of the same manufacturer consisting of the outdoor unit, high efficiency heat recovery units, indoor units, factory designed and supplied Y-branches, and controls. --_ 2. System components shall be of the same manufacturer or as recommended by the manufacturer of the VRF equipment. 1, 3. Unit control boards shall perform all functions required to effectively and efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to heat recovery and indoor units via RS485. 4. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Dual and triple frame outdoor units will be field piped with factory designed and supplied Y-branch kits to manifold them together into a single refrigerant circuit. 5. Each outdoor unit shall be run tested at the factory. Al 6. The sum of connected nominal capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 130% of outdoor unit nominal capacity to ensure the VRF system will have sufficient capacity to handle the building space loads at peak design. a 7. Outdoor unit shall have a tested sound rating no higher than 58 dB(A) per outdoor unit frame tested per KSA0701. 8. All refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to the heat recovery unit and from i the heat recovery unit to the indoor units shall be field insulated. 9. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator. 10. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch j 11. The outdoor unit shall have over -current protection. 12. The outdoor unit shall use a brazed plate subcooling heat exchanger. 13. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with an elevation difference of UP to 164 feet above or below the indoor units. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 4 14. The outdoor unit shall allow up to a total equivalent refrigerant piping length of 1804-2625 feet. ° 15. The maximum length from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be up to 541 feet without traps. 16. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in heating mode down to -13°F and up to 61 °F ambient wet bulb without additional low ambient controls. 17. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in cooling only mode down to 23°F. 18. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in simultaneous heating and cooling mode down to 14°F and up to 860F ambient dry bulb. 19. The outdoor unit shall have an oil separator for each compressor and controls to ensure sufficient oil supply is maintained for the compressor. 20. Shall use R410A refrigerant. 21. Polyolester (POE) oil shall be required. Prior to bidding, manufacturers using alternate oil types shall submit material safety data sheets (MSDS) and comparison of hygroscopic properties for alternate oil with list of local suppliers stocking alternate oil for approval at least two weeks prior to bidding. t 22. Each outdoor unit frame shall have a removable inspection panel no greater than 6 inches tall or 12 inches wide to allow access to service tool connection, DIP switches, auto addressing and error codes. 23. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with a basepan heater. Basepan heater shall activate only when compressor is operating in heating mode at an outdoor ambient temperature of 39F or below. If an alternate manufacturer is selected, any additional material, cost, and labor to meet basepan heater condition and performance shall be incurred by the contractor. B. Unit Cabinet: 1. Shall be constructed with galvanized steel, bonderized and be finished with powder coat baked enamel paint. C. Fan: 1. Each outdoor unit module shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. The fan shall be factory set for operation under 0 in. WG external static pressure, but capable of normal operation under a maximum of 0.24 in. WG external static pressure via dipswitch. 2. All fan motors shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. 3. All fan motors shall be mounted for quiet operation. 4. All fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 5. The outdoor unit shall have vertical discharge airflow. D. Condenser Coil: 1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with louvered fins on copper tubing. 2. The coil fins shall have a factory applied corrosion resistant blue -fin finish. 3. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. 4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of an inverter driven compressor. 5. The outdoor coil shall include 4 circuits with two position valves for each circuit, except for the last stage. E. Compressor: 1. Each outdoor unit module shall be equipped with one inverter driven scroll hermetic compressor. Non inverter -driven compressors, which cause inrush current (demand charges) and require larger wire sizing, shall not be allowed. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 5 2. A crankcase heater(s) shall be factory mounted on the compressor(s). 3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have an inverter to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable with a turndown of 19%-5% of rated capacity, depending upon unit size. 4. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. 6. Field -installed oil equalization lines between modules are not allowed. Prior to bidding, manufacturers requiring equalization must submit oil line sizing calculations specific to each system and module placement for this project. F. Electrical: 1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230V, 60 Hz, 3 phase. 2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/- 10% rated voltage. 3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units, heat recovery box and the outdoor unit shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, stranded, and shielded cable for the RS485 daisy chain communication. G. Units shall be as manufactured by Mitsubishi or pre -approved equal. 2.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING: A. Refrigerant piping shall comply with all other project specifications. B. Refrigerant piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly fashion taking care to avoid to unnecessary traps, bends, elbows, kinks, etc. C. Refrigerant piping shall be supported and secured at proper intervals as determined by code and saddled or otherwise installed such that the pipe insulation is protected from compressing by more than 50% of its original dimension. D. The installer is responsible for strictly following the manufacturer's guidelines for piping; including the angle and direction of manufacturer supplied fittings, observing rules pertaining to bends before and after manufacturer supplied fittings, and keeping within line length limitations between all equipment and manufacturer supplied fittings. E. Pipe sizes, lengths, and elbows shall match exactly to the final piping tree produced by the manufacturer's software. F. Piping shall be brazed while maintaining at least 2 psi of flowing nitrogen. G. Flaring shall be performed as stated by the manufacturer and produced with tools recommended by the manufacturer. H. Pipe insulation shall be a thickness as determined by the applicable code, but never less than the manufacturer's stated guideline and shall be installed completely and without air gaps. Insulation shall be installed on ALL refrigerant pipes. Insulation on pipes exposed to weather shall be protected against UV radiation by coating or jacketing. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 6 2.4 BRANCH CIRCUIT (BC) CONTROLLERS FOR R2-SERIES SYSTEMS A. General - The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall include multiple branches to allow simultaneous heating and cooling by allowing either hot gas refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for heating or subcooled liquid refrigerant to flow to indoor unit(s) for cooling. Refrigerant used for cooling must always be subcooled for optimal indoor unit LEV performance; alternate branch devices with no subcooling risk bubbles in liquid supplied to LEV and are not allowed. The BC (Branch Circuit) Controllers shall be specifically used with R410A R2-Series systems. These units shall be equipped with a circuit board that interfaces to the M-NET controls system and shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The unit shall have a galvanized steel finish. The BC Controller shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory. This unit shall be mounted indoors, with access and service clearance provided for each controller. The sum of connected capacity of all indoor air handlers shall range from 50% to 150% of rated capacity. B. BC Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. 2. Each cabinet shall house a liquid -gas separator and multiple refrigeration control valves. 3. The unit shall house two tube -in -tube heat exchangers. C. Refrigerant 1. R410A refrigerant shall be required. D. Refrigerant valves: 1. The unit shall be furnished with multiple branch circuits which can individually accommodate up to 54,000 BTUH and up to three indoor units. Branches may be twinned to allow more than 54,000 BTUH. 2. Each branch shall have multiple two -position valves to control refrigerant flow. 3. Service shut-off valves shall be field-provided/installed for each branch to allow service to any indoor unit without field interruption to overall system operation. 4. Linear electronic expansion valves shall be used to control the variable refrigerant flow. E. Future Use 1. Each VRF system shall include at least one (1) unused branches or branch devices for future use. Branches shall be fully installed & wired in central location with capped service shutoff valve & service port. F. Integral Drain Pan: 1. An Integral drain pan and drain shall be provided G. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, I phase, 60 Hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187- 228 (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 (230/60Hz). 3. The BC Controller shall be controlled by integral microprocessors 4. The control circuit between the indoor units and outdoor units shall be 24VDC completed using a 2-conductor, twisted pair shielded cable to provide total integration of the system. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 7 2.5 4-WAY CEILING CASSETTE INDOOR UNIT A. General: Four-wayceiling cassette indoor units shall recess into the ceiling and mount flush. g g Shall be designed for use with R410a refrigerant. Shall be installed with heat pump or simultaneous heating and cooling heat pump VRF systems of the same manufacturer. The indoor unit shall communicate with the outdoor unit via RS485 daisy chain communication. Shall be rigidly constructed using a decaweb base plate B. Indoor Unit: 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. 2. The indoor unit shall be factory wired and piped with its own electronic expansion device, control circuit board, fan and motor. 3. The indoor unit shall have a. self -diagnostic function b. auto restart function 4. Indoor unit refrigerant circuit shall be filled with a dry nitrogen gas charge from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The four-way ceiling cassette cabinet shall be designed to recess into the ceiling. 2. The cabinet panel shall have provisions for a field installed, pressurized and filtered outside air intake. 3. Branch ducting shall be allowed from cabinet following manufacturer recommendations. D. Return Air Grille: 1. Four-way grille shall be fixed to bottom of the cabinet and allow two, three or four-way air flow. Grille vane angles shall be individually adjustable from the wired remote controller to customize the airflow pattern for the conditioned space. 2. The indoor unit vanes shall have 6 fixed positions 3. The indoor unit vanes shall be capable of automatically swinging the vanes up and down for uniform air distribution. Vanes shall also be capable of being stopped at any position during swing operation. 4. The indoor unit shall have a setting in the heating or cooling mode that shall cycle the vanes up and down to evenly heat or cool the space. 5. Four-way ceiling cassette grille shall have integral sensor to read wireless handheld remote controller as standard from the factory. E. Fan: I. The indoor fan shall be an assembly with one turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings. 4. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings; Super Low, Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto. 5. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings; Super Low, Low, Med, High, and Auto. 6. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set -point and space temperature. 7. The indoor unit shall have DIP switches that can be set to provide optimum airflow based on ceiling height. 8. F. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered with a removable, washable filter. 2. Shall be furnished as standard with a factory installed plasma filter with no additional external power supply required. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 8 � a G. Coil: 1. The indoor unit coil shall be nonferrous with louvered fins on copper tubing for maximum efficiency. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 4. A condensate drain pan shall be factory installed below the coil. 5. All refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be field insulated. H. Condensate Pump: 1. The unit shall include a factory installed condensate pump that will be able to raise drain water a minimum of 20 inches above the ceiling cassette face. I. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hz. 2. The indoor unit shall be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/-10% rated voltage. J. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. 2.6 HIGH STATIC CEILING -CONCEALED DUCTED INDOOR UNIT A. General: High static ceiling concealed duct indoor unit shall mount fully concealed within the ceiling. Shall be designed for use with R410a refrigerant. Shall be installed with heat pump or simultaneous heating and cooling heat pump VRF systems of the same manufacturer. The indoor unit shall communicate with the outdoor unit via RS485 daisy chain communication. Field installed ductwork shall not exceed the external static pressure limitation of the high static ducted indoor unit. B. Indoor Unit: 1. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. 2. The indoor unit shall be factory wired and piped with its own electronic expansion device, control circuit board, fan and motor. 3. The indoor unit shall have i. self -diagnostic function ii. auto restart function 4. Indoor unit refrigerant circuit shall be filled with a dry nitrogen gas charge from the factory. C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be ceiling -concealed and ducted. D. Fan: 1. The indoor unit fan shall be no more than one assembly with two Sirocco fans direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. 3. Motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings. 4. In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings; Low, Med, and High. 5. In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings; Low, Med, and High. E. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered with a factory supplied removable, washable filter. VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 9 2.7 F. Coil: ._ 1. The indoor unit coil shall be nonferrous with louvered fins on copper tubing for maximum efficiency. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 4. A condensate drain pan shall be factory installed below the coil. 5. All refrigerant lines to the indoor units shall be field insulated. G. Condensate Pump: 1. The unit shall include a factory installed condensate pump that will be able to raise drain water a minimum of 20 inches above the ceiling cassette face. H. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 Hz. 2. The indoor unit shall be capable of operation within voltage limits of +/-10% rated voltage. I. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by Manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. Unit shall use controls provided by the manufacturer to perform all functions necessary to operate the system effectively and efficiently and communicate with the outdoor unit over an RS485 daisy chain. CONTROLS A. General 1. The control system shall consist of a low voltage communication network of unitary built-in controllers with on -board communications and a web -based operator interface. A web controller with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface. 2. System controls and control components shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Furnish energy conservation features such as optimal start, night setback, request -based logic, and demand level adjustment of overall system capacity as specified in the sequence. 4. System shall provide direct and reverse -acting on and off algorithms based on an input condition or group conditions to cycle a binary output or multiple binary outputs. 5. Provide capability for future system expansion to include monitoring and use of occupant card access, lighting control and general equipment control. 6. System shall be capable of email generation for remote alarm annunciation. 7. Control system start-up shall be a required service to be completed by the manufacturer or a duly authorized, competent representative that has been factory trained in manufacturer's controls system configuration and operation. The representative shall provide proof of certification for Mitsubishi CMCN Essentials Training and/or CMCN Hands -On Training indicating successful completion of no more than two (2) years prior to system installation. This certification shall be included as part of the equipment and/or controls submittals. This service shall be equipment and system count dependent and shall be a minimum of one (1) eight (8) hour period to be completed during normal working hours VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 10 i B. Wiring 1. Control wiring shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from indoor unit to indoor unit, to the BC controller (main and subs, if applicable) and to the outdoor unit. Control wiring to remote controllers shall be run from the indoor unit terminal block to the controller associated with that unit. 2. Control wiring for the Smart ME remote controller shall be from the remote controller to the first associated indoor unit (TB-5) M-NET connection. The Smart ME remote controller shall be assigned an M-NET address. 3. Control wiring for the Simple MA and Wireless MA remote controllers shall be from the remote controller (receiver) to the first associated indoor unit (TB-15) then to the remaining associated indoor units (TB-15) in a daisy chain configuration. 4. Control wiring for centralized controllers shall be installed in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to outdoor unit, to the system controllers (centralized controllers and/or integrated web based interface), to the power supply. 5. Wiring shall be 2-conductor (16 AWG), twisted, stranded, shielded wire as defined by the manufacturer's program output. 6. Network wiring shall be CAT-5 with RJ-45 connection. C. Controller Server- 1. Niagra based controller server with windows license (Equal to Diamond Controller Server). 2. Controller server shall be able to connect up to three (3) compact embedded controller servers (Equal to DC-600E Diamond Controller). 3. The controller shall support open protocol, web interface, standalone control with multi - protocol integration. 4. The controller shall be expandable and support standard and optional communication boards. 5. Controller shall be by manufacturer of VRF equipment. D. Central Control - Touch Screen Controller (Equal to AE-200A) 1. Can address up to 128 indoor units and 16 outdoor units 2. Available Functions 3. On/Off Control 4. Mode Selection 5. Lock Mode 6. Setpoint Control 7. Adjustable temperature range control 8. Fan Speed Control 9. Custom Scheduling 10. Indoor Unit Operational Status 11. Device setpoint data display status 12. Provide with system battery backup and USB Port for software updates 13. Ability to turn on/off third party devices through the application of a digital expansion kit (accessory) ie. lighting, ventilation units, exhaust fans 14. Emergency Stop 15. 7 inch touchscreen LCD with stylus pen and storage slot 16. Ability to customize names in a zone/group/unit 17. Provide malfunction notification via email 18. Shall have ability to be web -based and can schedule, change setpoints and turn equipment on/off via the web 19. User and Administrator Levels with password protection E. Individual Indoor Unit Controller - Wired Wall Mounted Controller (Thermostat) 1. Each indoor unit will be provided with its own wired wall mounted controller. 2. Provided with 30' of 22 gauge 3 conductor, stranded, shield control wiring with controller (thermostat) VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 11 Available Functions a. On/Off Control b. Temperature Setting C. Fan Speed d. Air Flow Direction e. Child Lock f. Mode Selection g. Ability to allow up to 2 controllers per indoor unit h. Ability to control a group of 16 indoor units with 1 controller i. Auto addressable j. Provide with Display, Fan Speed Selection switch, and Temp Setting Adjust--; PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed as shown or indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) systems use a high pressure refrigerant and have unique installation procedures and requirements. It is imperative that the installation of these systems meet factory specifications in order for the systems to meet the expected performance and efficiency. 1. Factory training for installing technicians. — Prior to installation, the installing mechanical contractor must provide written proof that all installing technicians have received adequate training by the equipment manufacturer or approved alternate. Approved contractors who are awarded this project may contact the manufacturer to arrange training prior to installation for any unqualified technicians. The mechanical contractor's installation price shall be inclusive of the manufacturer's installation requirements including the cost of training, specialty tools, and cost charged by the manufacturer for technical assistance. 2. Job installation support and certification. — In order to assure properly installed system components and approved installation procedures, the specified manufacturer or approved alternate must provide installation technical support for the installing contractor via telephone and the internet, and job site supervision. Upon completion of installation and prior to factory startup, a factory authorized commissioning agent must inspect the installation of each system to verify proper installation. Upon verification of proper installation, the manufacturer is to submit a letter of certification approving the installation of their respective systems. 3. Factory Startup and Warranty Approval — Upon verification and written receipt of proper installation, a factory authorized commissioning agent is to perform a factory approved initial startup of all system components. Such that the requirements to receive the maximum manufacturer's warranty are met and confirmed with the manufacturer. 3.2 PRODUCT SUPPORT A. Maintain a fully staffed service office within 400 miles (1 day drive) of the job site. Fully staffed means a full time secretary, complete service library, at least 2 factory trained service technicians and the factory recommended spare parts inventory. B. Provide a 24 hour/7 day technical support phone number to factory service office. Support shall be for all components including controls, mechanical components, system operation and alarm codes, etc. C. The Manufacturer or local representative shall maintain a complete parts inventory for all systems that will allow for 24 hour receipt of any necessary part. z VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 12 I# �i 3.3 3.4 D. Provide owner/operator and service training both on line and at designated training centers. EQUIPMENT START-UP A. The VRF system must be installed by a factory trained contractor/dealer. B. Equipment start up shall be by factory trained personnel. The startup shall be attended by the controls contractor and Test and Balance contractor. PIPING SCHEMATIC A. The VRF piping system must be installed by a factory trained contractor/dealer. B. Provide full port refrigerant valves at each indoor unit and outdoor unit. C. The VRF manufacturer's rep shall witness and record 15% of the piping pressure tests. This shall include the first system installed. The contractor is responsible for recording all pressure tests and submitting in the O&M manual. D. Equipment start up shall be by factory trained personnel. The startup shall be attended by the controls contractor and Test and Balance contractor. END OF SECTION VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 13 VARIABLE REFIGERANT AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS 23 81 49 - 14 DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 26 05 00 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements for Electrical Work are intended to be complementary to General Requirements of Construction Contract. B. Work Included: Provide complete electrical systems where shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for complete and proper installation including, but not necessarily limited to following summary of Work. 1. Interior lighting and exit signs, relocate exterior lights 2. Fire detection and alarm system 3. Main distribution panel (MDP) 4. Lighting and distribution panelboards 5. Power feeds to communication racks/equipment 6. Under floor power feeds to 911 emergency stations and equipment 7. Power to mechanical, plumbing and fire protection equipment: a.) Provide conduit, wire, disconnect switch, overcurrent and short circuit protection for all equipment, whether shown on the drawings or not, including, motorized dampers, smoke dampers, electric heat trace, power for energy management system, water softening equipment, water treatment systems, air dryers, electric flush valves, electric trap primers, and other miscellaneous equipment. 8. Electrical service entrance 9. Generator set 10. Automatic transfer switch (ATS) 11. Quick connect/disconnect panel 12. Other items and services required to complete the electrical and communication systems 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and L J completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Division. Ensure that there is a minimum of one journeyman electrician, on job site whenever ( , Division 16 Work is being performed. B. Without additional cost, provide labor and materials as required to complete Work of this Division in accordance with requirements of Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Codes: Electrical and fire alarm Work shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the following latest adopted codes: } 1. National Electrical Code 2. International Energy Code 3. International Fire Code 4. International Building Code 5. Local amendments to the above codes- D. Standards: Specifications and Standards of following organizations are by reference made part of these Specifications. Electrical Work, unless otherwise indicated, shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable: 1. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies (AEIC) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM) BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 1 t_ 6. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 8. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA) 9. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) 10. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 11. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13. Radio -Television Manufacturer's Association (RTMA) 14. Reflector Luminaire Manufacturers (RLM) 15. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) L 1.3 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Requirements and recommendations of latest editions of Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA), Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), are by reference made part of these Specifications. Work shall comply with requirements and recommendations wherever applicable. 1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Other Sections of Divisions 01, 22 and 23. B. Other Divisions of Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Terms furnish, install, and provide are used interchangeably and shall mean to furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use. B. Conflicts between Codes and Standards: The code or standard establishing the more stringent requirements shall be followed. C. Conflicts between Codes and Standards and Specifications and/or Drawings: The one establishing the more stringent requirements shall be followed. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01. ._! B. Submit electronic copies of the submittal to the prime consultant (i.e. architect) in order to process and track the submittals properly in accordance with Division 01 and Division 26 submittal requirements. Submittals shall be labeled by their project specification section or CSI specification section if not listed in project specifications. C Submittals required of materials and equipment include following: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under Division 26. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified requirements. Term "Compliance" is understood to mean that Contractor certifies that submitted equipment meets or exceeds Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition should be identified and explained as required in following paragraph. :G 3. Identify difference between specified item and proposed item. Explain with enough detail so that it can easily be determined that item complies with functional intent. List disadvantages or advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Substitutions shall be approved in writing by Engineer. Engineer's decision shall be final. 4. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review of each submittal and re -submittal. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 2 5. Items of equipment that are not accepted in writing as approved equal shall be replaced or revised to comply with Contract Documents at Contractor's expense. 6. The manufacturers recommended installation procedures shall become basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on Work. 7. Shop drawings shall consist of detailed drawings with dimensions, schedules, weights, capacities, installation details and pertinent information needed to describe the material or equipment. D. Submittals required of materials and equipment under this Division include following listed items not supplied by Owner. These submittal requirements are intended to be complimentary to requirements that may be listed in individual sections. In event of conflict, more stringent requirement shall apply. 1. Conductors and Cables: a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit tabular list of wire and wiring systems that will be increased in capacity or size to comply with Section 26 0519 and/or similar requirements shown on Drawings. List shall include size shown on Drawings, proposed increase to comply with Section 26 0519, and proposed installed length. 2. Raceways and Boxes: a. Submit product data for surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged -cover enclosures, and cabinets. b. Submit Shop Drawings including layout drawings showing components and wiring for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 3. Wiring Devices: a. Submit product data for each specified product. b. Submit operation and maintenance data for wiring devices, for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in this Section. 4. Switchboards: a. Submit product data for each product and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings for each switchboard including dimensioned plans and elevations, component and device lists, and single -line diagram showing main and branch bus current ratings and short -time and short-circuit ratings of switchboard. C. Submit schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices. d. Submit manufacturer's schematic wiring diagram. e. Submit point-to-point control wiring diagram, differentiating between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. f. Submit qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that organization complies with requirements specified in Quality Assurance below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information specified. g. Submit maintenance data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual as specified in this Section. 5. Grounding: a. Submit product data for grounding rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings. 6. Engine -Generator Set: a. Submit exhaust emissions. Submit prototype test data. b. Submit wiring diagrams for system, showing power and control connections and distinguishing between factory -installed and field -installed wiring. C. Submit product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance. Include a dimensioned outline plan and elevation BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 3 �a -- drawings of the engine generator set, the weatherproof enclosure, sub -base fuel tank and other system components. t d. Submit maintenance data for system and components for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. J e. Submit detailed operating instructions, covering operation under both normal and emergency conditions and sound test reports. f. Submit certification of torsional vibration compatibility: Conform to NFPA 110. g. Submit factory test reports for units to be shipped for this Project showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. Automatic Transfer Switches: a. Submit Shop Drawings or product data for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and materials lists. b. Submit wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer - installed and field -installed wiring. C. Submit operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this section. Include features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions. d. Submit manufacturer's certificate of compliance to referenced standards and tested short- circuit closing and withstand ratings applicable to protective devices and current ratings. 8. Panelboards: 1 a. Submit product data for each type panelboard, accessory item, and component specified. b. Submit Shop Drawings prepared by the manufacturers including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations. Show tabulations of installed devices, major features, and voltage rating. Include enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1; bus configuration and current ratings; short-circuit current rating of panelboard; and features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual protective devices and auxiliary components. C. Submit typewritten panelboard schedules to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. d. Submit maintenance data for panelboard components, for inclusion in Operating and 1 Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers. 9. Disconnect Switches: a. Submit product Data for disconnect switches and specified accessories. 10. Motor Controllers: a. Submit product data for specified products. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components. b. Submit maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in this Section. 11. Lighting: i a. Submit product describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange . - product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories. b. Submit ballast data including manufacturer, model number, ballast factor and ballast type. C. Submit lamp data including manufacturer, lamp type, lamp wattage, color temperature and color rendering index (CRI) 1 d. Submit outline drawings indicating dimensions and principal features of fixtures. e. Submit electrical ratings and photometric data including certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps. f. Submit battery and charger data for emergency lighting units. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 4 g. Submit Shop Drawings detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions, weights, and methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. h. Submit wiring diagrams detailing wiring for control system showing both factory -installed and field -installed wiring for each specific system which differentiates between factory - installed and field -installed wiring. i. Submit maintenance data for fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manual specified in this Section. 12. Fire Alarm System: Shop drawings for fire alarm systems shall be submitted for review and approval prior to system installation, and shall include, but not be limited to, all of the following: a. A floor plan that indicates the use of all rooms. b. Locations of alarm -initiating devices. C. Locations of alarm notification appliances, including candela ratings for visible alarm notification appliances. d. Location of fire alarm control unit, transponders and notification power supplies. e. Annunciators. f. Power connection. g. Battery calculations. h. Conductor type and sizes. i. Voltage drop calculations. j. Manufacturers' data sheets indicating model numbers and listing information for equipment, devices and materials. k. Details of ceiling height and construction. 1. The interface of fire safety control functions. in. Classification of the supervising station. n. Submit fire alarm design drawings, fully coordinated with architectural finishes and millwork. Submit to Engineer after being reviewed and approved by local authority having jurisdiction. 13. Quick disconnect system: a. Refer to Section 26 3633 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The Contract Documents list manufacturers' names and catalog numbers followed by phrase "or equal" are to establish a standard of quality and utility for the specified items and to provide a dimensional reference to the scaled drawings. B. Submittals for "equal" items shall include the following data, which is not necessarily required for specified items, which list the manufacturer and catalog number: 1. Performance characteristics and warranty - 2. Materials 3. Finish 4. Certification of conformance with specified codes and standards 5. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified { requirements. Term "compliance" is understood to mean that the submitted equipment will meet or exceed the Contract Document requirements. Items that do not clearly meet this definition shall be identified and explained as required in following Paragraph. 6. Identify all differences between the specified item and proposed item. Explain all differences with sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to easily determine that the substituted item complies with the functional intent. List disadvantages and advantages of proposed item versus specified item. Submit technical data sheets and/or pictures and diagrams to support and clarify. Organize in clear and concise format. Engineer shall approve substitutions in writing. Engineer's decision shall be final. r t C. Submittals of "equal" components or systems may be rejected i£ 1. Material or equipment would necessitate alteration of mechanical, electrical, architectural, or structural design i 4� L__� BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 5 �1 4 2. Dimensions vary from specified material or equipment so that accessibility or clearances are impaired or Work of other trades is adversely affected D. Proposed substitutions for materials or equipment must be submitted 10 days prior to final bid date for consideration as approved equals. Otherwise, substitutions will not be permitted. Only the prime i' ` bidders shall be permitted make proposals for substitutions. E. No substitution shall be made unless authorized in writing by Engineer. Should substitution be accepted, and should substitute material prove defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for service intended, and within guarantee period, replace this material or equipment with material or equipment specified, to satisfaction of Engineer and at no cost to Owner. 1.7 ORDINANCES, PERMITS, METERS, UTILITIES AND ROYALTIES A. Purchase all necessary permits and licenses necessary for completion of the Work. Pay all lawful fees required and necessary pursuant in obtaining said permits and licenses. Required certificates of approvals and inspections by local governing and regulating authorities. B. Pay all fees required for connection of utility power and telephone services required for the Work. C. Pay royalty payments or fees required for use of patented equipment or systems. Defend lawsuits or claims for infringement of patent rights and hold Owner and/or Engineer harmless from loss as result of said suits or claims. 1.8 COMPATIBILITY OF EQUIPMENT A. Assume full responsibility for satisfactory operation of component parts of electrical systems. Assure compatibility of equipment and performance of integrated systems in accordance with requirements of the Construction Documents. Notify the Engineer before submitting a bid should Specifications or Drawings make acceptance of responsibility impossible, prohibitive, or restrictive. The bid shall be accompanied by a written statement listing any objections or exceptions to the applicable specification section and/or drawing. 1.10 UTILITIES AND TEMPORARY POWER A. Verify location and capacity of all existing utility services before starting Work. The locations and sizes of electrical lines are shown in accordance with data secured from Owner's survey. The data shown is offered as estimating guide without guarantee of accuracy. B. Pay all utility charges for temporary power. Provide temporary lighting and power required. Install in accordance with OSHA requirements and as described in General Requirements Division 01. 1.11 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES, AND INSERTS A. Furnish and install flashings where conduits pass through outside walls. Flashings shall be properly formed to fit around conduit and shall be caulked, with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation, so as to make watertight seal between conduit and building. B. Unless otherwise specified, install sleeves for each conduit where it may pass through interior walls or floors. Galvanized 22-gage sheet iron sleeves shall be used. Finish flush with each finished wall surface. In pipe chases, the sleeve shall extend 1-1/2 inches above floor slab and shall be watertight. C Raceways that pass through concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves, unless shown otherwise on drawings. Inside diameter of these sleeves shall be at least 1/2 inch greater than outside diameters of service pipes. After pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill annular space between pipes and sleeves with 790 Silicone Building Sealant by Dow Corning Corporation. Completed installation shall be watertight. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 6 D. Roof penetrations shall be provided with counter flashings arranged to provide weatherproof installation. E. Penetrations through walls, floors and ceilings shall be done in manner to maintain integrity of fire rating of respective wall, floor, or ceiling. f , F. Reference Division 7 for additional sealant requirements. Where conflicts occur with the specified requirements, the more stringent shall apply. 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching in strict accordance with provisions of these Specifications and following: 1. Coordinate Work to minimize cutting and patching. 2. Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work. A. Request for Engineer's consent: 1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit a written request to Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. When conditions of Work or schedule require a change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, notify Engineer and secure written permission to proceed with the work. B. Perform cutting and demolition using methods that will prevent damage to other portions of Work. C. Perform fitting and adjusting to provide a finished installation complying with specified tolerances and finishes. 1.13 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Division will be performed. Work required to correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work shall be included as part of Work of this Division. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 1.14 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings show arrangements of Work. Rearrangement of spaces and equipment will be considered when Project conditions make this necessary and/or materials or equipment can be installed to better advantage. Prior to proceeding with Work, coordinate with various trades to prepare and submit five (5) copies of Drawings of proposed arrangement for Engineer's review. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Installation or rearrangement of equipment and space for Contractor's convenience or to accommodate material or equipment substitutions will be considered. Assume responsibility for rearrangement of equipment and space and have Engineer review change before proceeding with Work. Request for changes shall be accompanied by Shop Drawings of affected equipment and space. Identify proposed monetary credits or other benefits. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. C. Properly locate and size all required pipe sleeves and slots, holes, or openings in structure. 1.15 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents as follows: 1. Where lighting fixtures and other electrical items are shown in conflict with locations of structural members and mechanical or other equipment, provide required supports and wiring to clear encroachment. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 7 J 2. Install power and control wiring for installation of equipment famished under Division 15. Furnish disconnect switches and other equipment as required for proper operation of equipment unless ` equipment is specified to be factory mounted. B. Information on the Drawings and in these Specifications is as accurate as could be secured, but absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. The drawings are diagrammatic, and the exact locations, distances, levels, and other conditions shall be governed by actual construction. The drawings and specifications shall be for guidance. C. Where receptacle locations are not dimensioned on either the Architectural or Engineering Drawings, the j- box may be located on the nearest stud. When receptacles are dimensioned on the Drawings, Provide a cross brace and mount the receptacle as dimensioned. D. Field -verify measurements. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between Work shown on Drawings and actual site measurements. E. Branch circuit wiring and arrangement of home runs have been designed for maximum economy consistent with adequate sizing and other considerations. Increase size of wiring and wiring systems to accommodate more stringent requirements listed in these Specifications or on Drawings. Install wiring with circuits arranged as shown on Drawings. Deviations shall be approved in advance by Engineer. 1.16 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide Project record documents associated with Work in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements. B. Throughout progress of the Work, maintain accurate record of all changes in Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). Changes shall include Addendums issued during bidding and location of electrical service lines, receptacles, and outside utilities. C. Delegate responsibility for maintenance of record documents to one person on Contractor's staff. D. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within record documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other documents where required to show change properly. Match symbology and format of base documents. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from approved Project record documents. E. Maintain a job set of record documents protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of Work. Transfer all recorded data to final Project record documents. F. Making Entries on Drawings: 1. Using erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe change by graphic line and note as required. 2. Date entries. 3. Call attention to entry by "cloud" drawn around area or areas affected. 4. In event of overlapping changes, use different colors for overlapping changes. 5. Make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that changes have occurred. 6. Maintain base drawing format and use the same symbols. 7. Convert field mark-ups to finished CADD record drawings when required in this Section. G. Conversion of Schematic Layouts: 1. In some cases on Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. Determine final physical BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 8 arrangement, subject to Engineer's approval. The design of future modifications of facility may i require accurate information as to final physical layout of items that are shown only schematically on Drawings. Show by dimension accurate to within one inch, centerline of each run of sleeves and conduit below grade, in walls, or in concrete slab, etc. Surface mounted device indicates exact location: a. Clearly identify item by accurate note (e.g., "Rigid Conduit"). b. Show, by symbol or note, vertical location of item `under slab," "in ceiling plenum," "exposed," etc. C. Make identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to Specifications. H. Final Project Record Documents: 1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 2. Provide CADD electronic files in dwg Format using AutoCAD Release 2002 software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer's standard fee of $200 for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD Release 2002 electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. Engineer will also provide a list of drawing layers and names that shall be maintained. 3. Provide completed record drawings on CD of each drawing. 4. Refer to Division 01 for additional requirements. 1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit two copies of preliminary draft of proposed manual or manuals to Engineer for review and comments. Allow minimum of 10 working days for review. B. Submit approved manual to Engineer prior to indoctrination of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Where instruction manuals are required for submittal, they shall be prepared in accordance with the following: Format: Size: 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch Paper: White bond, at least 20 pound weight Text: Neatly written or printed Drawings: 11 inches in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within Manual and provide drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with binding mechanism concealed inside manual; 3-ring binders will be acceptable; binding is subject to Engineer's approval. Measurements: Provide measurements in U.S. standard units (e.g., feet, inches, and pounds). Where items may be expected to be measured within 10 years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in "International System of Units" (SI). D. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by Engineer, and clearly = - identified on or through cover with at least following information: ii 'I i__J BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 9 t`; 1. Name and Address of Work. 2. Name of Contractor. 3. General subject of this manual. 4. Space for approval signature of Engineer and approval date[s]. E. Contents: Include at least following: 1. Neatly typewritten index near front of Manual, giving immediate information as to location within manual of emergency information regarding installation. 2. Complete instructions regarding operation and maintenance of equipment involved including lubrication, disassembly, and reassembly. 3. Complete nomenclature of parts of equipment. 4. Complete nomenclature and part number of replaceable parts, name and address of nearest vendor and other data pertinent to procurement procedures. 5. Copy of guarantees and warranties issued. 6. Manufacturer's bulletins, cuts, and descriptive data, where pertinent, clearly indicating precise items included in this installation and deleting, or otherwise clearly indicating, manufacturers' data with which this installation is not concerned. 7. Other data as required in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 1.18 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS A. Provide equipment foundations in accordance with provisions of these Specifications. B. Provide concrete bases for main switchboard, distribution panelboards, floor -mounted transformers and other equipment that is to be pad- or floor -mounted. Bases shall be 4 inches high above finished floors or grades (unless otherwise noted) and shall protrude 2 inches beyond sides of equipment and shall have exposed chamfered edges. Construct bases from ready -mixed hard rock concrete, ASTM C94, reinforced with #3 rebar, ASTM A615, Grade 40. Rebars shall be located at 18 inches on center each way. C. Field -verify exact location of outdoor pad mounted equipment with Engineer. Supply necessary fill and grade site to provide natural drainage away from equipment. 1.19 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Provide personnel and equipment, make required tests, and secure required approvals from Engineer and Governmental Agencies having jurisdiction. Reference Section 16050 for additional requirements. B. Make written notice to Engineer adequately in advance of each of following stages of construction: 1. When rough in is complete, but not covered. 2. At completion of Work of this Division. 3. In underground condition prior to placing backfill, concrete floor slab, and when associated electrical Work is in place. C. When material or workmanship is found to not comply with specified requirements, remove items from job site and replace them with items complying with specified requirements at no additional cost to Owner. This shall be performed within 3 days after receipt of written notice of noncompliance. D. In Engineer's presence, test parts of electrical system and prove that items provided under this Division function electrically in required manner. 1.20 SITE VISITS BY FACTORY PERSONNEL A. Pay for travel expenses, living expenses, and miscellaneous expenses associated with site visits of factory personnel to perform on site testing, inspections, and reviews. _. e - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 10 1.21 WARRANTY A. Warrant equipment and workmanship for period of one year after date of substantial completion and replace or repair faulty equipment or installation at no cost to Owner for service during this period, in accordance with requirements of Division 01. fi l B. Warranty shall not void specific warranties issued by manufacturers for greater periods of time or void rights guaranteed to Owner by law. C. Warranties shall be in writing in form satisfactory to Owner, and shall be delivered to Owner before final payment is made. 1.22 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion of Work of this Division, thoroughly clean exposed portions of electrical installation, removing traces of soil, labels, grease, oil, and other foreign material, and using only type cleaner recommended by manufacturer of item being cleaned. B. Thoroughly indoctrinate Owner's operation and maintenance personnel in contents of operations and maintenance manual required to be submitted as part of this Division of these Specifications. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 - 11 i s THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 05 00 — 12 SECTION 26 05 03 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 —GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY Only tested firestop systems shall be used in specific locations as follows: A. Penetrations for the passage of conduit and other electrical equipment through fire -rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. B. Completion of firestop installations to maintain the rating integrity of the barrier penetrated. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials used to retain integrity of fire -rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, water and hot gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Test Requirements: ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops" (July 1997). B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) of Northbrook, IL runs ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479 and publishes the results in their "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY" that is updated annually. 1. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Through -Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) b. Fire Resistance Ratings (BXUV) C. Through -Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ) d. Fill, Voids, or Cavity Material (XHHW) e. Forming Materials (XHKU) C. Inspection Requirements: ASTM E 2174-01 "Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops". D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments. E. ASTM E-84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. All major building codes: ICBO, SBCCI, BOCA, and IBC. (Note to specifier: Retain or delete building codes listed above as applicable). G. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code H. NFPA 70 — National Electric Code. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 1 �1 A. A manufacturer's direct representative (not distributor or agent) to be on -site during initial installation of firestop systems to train appropriate contractor personnel in proper selection and ' installation procedures. This will be done per manufacturer's written recommendations published in their literature and drawing details. B. Firestop System installation must meet requirements of ASTM E-814 or UL 1479 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. C. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. D. Firestop Systems do not reestablish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly. E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994 as may be amended from time to time). 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL firestop systems to be used and manufacturer's installation instructions to comply with Section 1300. B. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no UL system is available for an application. Engineer judgment must include both project name and contractor's name that will install firestop system as described in drawing. C. Submit material safety data sheets provided with product delivered to job -site. 1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Engage an experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacture's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials undamaged in manufacturer's clearly labeled, unopened containers, identified with brand, type, and UL label where applicable. B. Coordinate delivery of materials with scheduled installation date to allow minimum storage time at job -site. C. Store materials under cover and protect from weather and damage in compliance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 2 1.9 E. Do not use damaged or expired materials. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not use materials that contain flammable solvents. B. Scheduling 1. Schedule installation of CAST IN PLACE firestop devices after completion of floor formwork, metal form deck, or composite deck but before placement of concrete. 2. Schedule installation of other firestopping materials after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. C. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. D. Weather conditions: Do not proceed with installation of firestop materials when temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation printed on product label and product data sheet. E. During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to prevent firestopping materials from contaminating any adjacent surfaces. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire -resistance -rated systems. C. Firestopping materials are either "cast -in -place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post installed". Provide cast -in -place Firestop devices prior to concrete placement. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with through penetration firestop systems (XHEZ) listed in Volume II of the UL Fire Resistance Directory, provide products of the following manufacturers as identified below: 1. Hilti, Inc., Tulsa, Oklahoma (800) 879-8000 2. Tremco Sealants & Coatings, Beechwood, Ohio (216) 292-5000 3. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, Minnesota (612) 736-0203 4. Johns -Manville Firetemp 5. Other manufacturers listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 2.3 MATERIALS A. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire -rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire -rating involved for each separate instance. FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 3 �I B. Cast -in place Frestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non- combustible and combustible plastic conduit penetrating concrete floors, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 680 Cast -In Place Firestop Device 2. Hilti CP 681 Tub Box Kit 3. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 C. Sealants or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 604 Self -leveling Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 5. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 6. Tremco Tremstop Fyre-Sil Sealant 7. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 D. Sealants or caulking materials for use with sheet metal ducts, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant 3. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Hilti CP 604 Self -leveling Firestop Sealant 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 E. Intumescent sealants or caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 3. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 4. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 F. Intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant 2. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 3. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 4. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB 5. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 G. Non curing, re -penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 H. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes, the following products are acceptable: - 1. Hilti CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 1 I. Firestop collar or wrap devices attached to assembly around combustible plastic conduit, the following products are acceptable: r 1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Collar FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 4 2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Collar- 3. 3M Fire Barrier PPD Plastic Pipe Device 4. Hilti CP 645 Wrap Strip 5. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 Materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti CP 637 Firestop Mortar 2. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 3. Hilti CP 620 Fire Foam 4. 3M Firestop Foam 2001 5. 3M Fire Barrier CS-195 Composite Sheet 6. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 K. Non curing, re -penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways, the following products are acceptable: 1. Hilti FS 657 FIRE BLOCK 2. Equivalent products listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory — Volume 2 L. Provide a firestop system with an "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials. 2. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, rust, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion. 3. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials. 4. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping. 5. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast -in -place Firestop Devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete. B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast -in - place firestop devices without interferences. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory. r; B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of through - penetration and construction joint materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. a FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 5 2. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Inspection of through -penetration firestopping shall be performed in accordance with ASTM E 2174, "Standard Practice for On -Site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops" or other recognized standard. D. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. B. Clean all surfaces adjacent to sealed holes and joints to be free of excess firestop materials and soiling as work progresses. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING 26 05 03 - 6 SECTION 26 05 05 - SITE ELECTRICAL PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and reasonably incidental to, the providing of all site electrical work. B. The site electrical work shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing and installation of necessary materials and making arrangements for: 1. The connection of electrical, telephone, data and cable utilities 2. Underground conduit C. Meet with the electric utility company and all other utility provider's representative prior to bidding the project. Review the site plan and the load summary and verify the requirements for providing electric service to the building. Determine what work will be provided by the power company and what work will be performed by the contractor. Obtain copies of appropriate details, standards, and instructions. Utility locations are subject to change during this coordination. All changes must be accounted for in the bid. No additional funds will be provided for failing to coordinate this work. Request the amount of any utili1y charges to be charged to the project. Include these costs in the bid. D. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service as directed by the utility company. E. Work Includes, but is not limited to: 1. Furnish and install underground primary trench, for the direct buried primary service conductors. 2. Furnish and install conduits, wires, transformer pads and meeting equipment to provide an electrical service entrance as shown on the drawing and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 3. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work. 4. Include in the bid, all utility company charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and shop drawings in accordance with Division 1 for products specified under 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 300 B. Service installation standards of the serving utility company(s) PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL SERVICE C-1 SITE ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 - 1 A. Coordination: The location of the electrical service entrance shall be coordinated with the electric utility company and with all other trades. Provide materials and equipment required to connect the electrical service. B. Materials: Provide materials in accordance with other Sections of these Specifications. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Underground installation of more than one conduit shall be in a "ductbank" arrangement. All conduits shall be laid so joints are staggered. B. Pour a red colored concrete envelope minimum 3" thick over electrical, cable television, and telephone service conduit. C. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings, a full concrete enclosed ductbank (or conduit) with reinforcing rods shall be installed. D. Perform excavation, shoring, backfilling and concrete work in connection with electrical work in accordance with other Divisions of the Specifications. E. All underground conduits shall be sloped away from the building to negate water entering the building through the conduit system. F. Provide underground warning tape 6" to 12" below finished surface along entire length of underground conduit or ductbank. Provide a separate length of tape for every 24" in width of ductbank. Interface installation of underground warning tape with backfilling. 3.2 UTILITIES A. The locations, elevations and voltage of electrical lines included within the area of this work are indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications in accordance with information received by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify, to his own satisfaction, the location and elevation of all utilities, and shall adequately inform himself as to their relation to the work. C. The work associated with existing utility lines to be abandoned or removed, shown within the scope of this project, will be arranged by the Owner with the respective utility. D. Existing utility lines not indicated but encountered during construction shall be protected, relocated or capped as directed by the Owner's Representative. All precautions shall be exercised to prevent damage to existing lines not shown, but should work become necessary, it must be authorized prior to execution except in an emergency situation. E. Before beginning excavations of any nature whatsoever, the Contractor shall make an attempt to locate all underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. The Contractor shall then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a resultant loss of service. F. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence or failure to comply with the above directive, he shall be liable for such damage and for all expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities. G. Repair of damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Owner. SITE ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 - 2 END OF SECTION SITE ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 - 3 THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK t. SITE ELECTRICAL 26 05 05 - 4 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 — GENERAL 4 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of conductors as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Wiring connections and terminations, 600 Volt rating and below. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certifications that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Provide conductors made of soft -drawn, annealed copper with conductivity not less than that of 98% pure copper. B. Building Wire: 1. Thermoplastic -insulated building wire: NEMA WC 5 2. Feeders and branch circuits: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 3. Control circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN-2 4. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings 5. Type MC and AC cables shall not be used 6. Use the following color code system: 240/120 Volt Systems 208Y/120 Volt Systems 480Y/277 Volt Systems Phase A Black Black Brown Phase B Orange Red Orange LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 1 Phase C Blue Blue Yellow Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green Switch Purple Purple Purple C. Remote Control and Signal Cable: 1. Control cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed. 2. Plenum cable for Class 2 or Class 3 remote control and signal circuits: Copper conductor, 300-volt insulation, rated 60-degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a nonmetallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. Rome 2. Cable 3. Pirelli 4. Belden 5. Or approved equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS (LESS THAN 600 VOLTS) A. Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. The minimum wire size shall be 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 18 AWG for control wiring. Remote control wiring shall not be less than 14 AWG for installed lengths of 50 feet or less. Remote control conductors shall be increased one size (per NEC Table 310) for each additional 50 feet of length. Increase the raceway system to accommodate the increased wire size. B. Provide an equal number of conductors of equal size for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable. C. Splice only in junction boxes, outlet boxes, pullboxes, or manholes. D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. E. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal. F. Phasing shall be consistent throughout each installation from the service connection to every device connection and outlet. Where interface is made to an existing system, the existing phasing configuration shall be maintained. 3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 2 A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire -pulling lubricant for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. t B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed. C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage. B. Support cables above accessible ceilings. Do not rest on ceiling tiles, light fixtures or air devices. Use spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or drive rings. C. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 3.4 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible boxes or manholes. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps 8 AWG and smaller. C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise. F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. G. Field Testing. Insulation resistance of all feeder conductors served by a protective device rated 200A or higher shall be tested. Each conductor shall have its insulation resistance tested after the installation is completed and all splices, taps and connections are made except connection to or into its source and point (or points) of termination. Insulation resistance of conductors which are to operate at 600 volts or less shall be tested by using a Biddle Megger of not less than 1000 volts d-c. Insulation resistance of conductors rated at 600 volts shall be free of shorts and grounds and have a minimum resistance phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground of at least 10 megohms. Conductors that do not exceed insulation resistance values listed above shall be removed at Contractor's expense and replaced and test repeated. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for tests, shall tabulate readings observed, and shall forward copies of the test readings to the Owner in accordance with Section 26 0593. These test reports shall identify each conductor tested, date and time of test and weather conditions. Each test shall be signed by the party making the test. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under applicable provisions of Division 26. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 3 C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturers recommended values. g D. Perform continuity tests on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing of all connections. 3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. All locations: Building wire in raceways. 3.7 600-VOLT INSULATED CONDUCTORS A. Size: Install conductor sizes as indicated. Provide No. 10 AWG conductor for the entire circuit length for single-phase, 20-ampere circuits for which the distance from panelboard to the last outlet is more than 100 feet for 120-volt circuits or 200 feet for 277-volt circuits. B. Home Runs: Except where specifically indicated, provide branch circuit home runs with not more than two different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 3-wire, single- phase systems, nor more than three different line conductors and a common neutral in a single raceway for 4-wire, 3-phase systems. Use home run circuit numbers as indicated for panelboard connections. C. Where more than one conductor of the same phase or more than one neutral conductor occurs at the same outlet or junction box, these conductors shall be identifiable from each other by use of stripes or distinguishing markings. END OF SECTION LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2605 19 - 4 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical systems grounding as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Power systems grounding 2. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Engineer with the manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide electrical grounding system indicated with assembly of materials, including but not limited to: 1. Wires and cables 2. Connectors 3. Terminals 4. Ground rods 5. Bonding jumper braid 6. Surge arrestors B. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2.2 CHEMICAL GROUND ROD A. Self-contained ground rod(s) using electrolytically enhanced grounding shall be provided for power system grounding where indicated on the drawings. The ground rod shall operate by hygroscopically extracting moisture from the air to activate the electrolytic process improving performance. The ground rod system shall be UL listed and have been manufactured for a GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 r minimum of 10 years. The ground rod system shall be 100% self activating sealed and maintenance free. The system shall not require the addition of chemical or water solutions. B. Electrode unit 1. The copper ground rod shall consist of 2" nominal diameter hollow copper tube with a wall thickness of not less than .083". The tube shall be permanently capped on the top and bottom. Air breather holes shall be provided in the top of the tube and drainage holes shall be provided in the bottom of the tube for electrolyte drainage into the surrounding soil. Shaft configuration: Straight Shaft Model No: K2-1020CS; UL Listing: 467. 2. The ground rod shall be filled from the factory with non -hazardous Calsolyte to enhance grounding performance. 3. Ground rod shall be twenty feet long for straight (vertical) installation. 4. A stranded 4/0 AWG Cu ground wire shall be Cadwelded to the side of rod for electrode conductor connection. A clamping "U-bolt" with pressure plate on the tip end of the tube shall be provided for testing and temporary connections. C. Ground Access Box Provide a precast concrete box with slots for conduit entrances. Minimum size shall be ten -inch diameter by twelve high. Provide a cast iron, flush traffic rated cover with "breather" slots, XIT model #XB-12. D. Backfill Material 1. Natural volcanic, non -corrosive form of bentonite clay grout backfill material free of polymer sealant. XIT model #LNC. 2. Shall absorb approximately 14 gallons of water per 50# bag for optimal 30% solids density. 3. PH value 8-10 with maximum resistively of 3 ohm-m at 30% solids density. E. Manufacturer: Lyncole XIT Grounding, 3547 Voyager St., Torrance, CA 90503, Phone 800-962- 2610; or approved equal. F. Ground Wire Termination: Exothermic connection to 4/0 conductor. U-bolt with pressure plate provided as test point. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. C. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I.", GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform fall -of -potential test or alternative in accordance with IEEE Standard 81-1991 on the main grounding electrode or systems. 2. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points. C. Test Values: 1. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no greater than two ohms. Install additional grounding electrodes, as required, to achieve the specified resistance value. 2. Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm. Correct deficiencies at no additional cost. Retest to prove compliance D. Provide written certification to the Engineer that the grounding system has been tested and complies with the specified requirements. E. Provide a test report. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS I� 26 05 26 - 3 1 S THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK a GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 4 D. E. F. G. H. I. expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. Install freestanding electrical equipment on concrete pads. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support surface and flush -mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. Tighten sleeve seal nuts until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. END OF SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4 is SECTION 26 05 33.13 - CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a complete and operating electrical raceway system, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified. B. Work included: 1. Rigid metal conduit and fittings 2. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings 3. Flexible metal conduit and fittings 4. Non-metallic conduit and fittings 5. Surface -mounted raceway 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS AND FITTINGS A. Provide metal conduits, tubing, fittings, and couplings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B. Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings 1. Rigid steel conduit: ANSI C80.1 2. Fittings and conduit bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded type, material to match conduit. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings 1. EMT: ANSI C80.3 galvanized tubing 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 1 i. 1. Conduit: FS WW-C-566; steel 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 E. Liquid tight Flexible Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1 F. Plastic Conduit and Fittings 1. Conduit: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports: Steel or malleable iron. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT A. Size of conduit shall be as indicated on the drawings or sized for conductor type installed, whichever is larger. Size all conduits in accordance with the NEC. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/4 inch above ground and 1" underground. B. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat appearance. C. Route all exposed conduit, including conduit above accessible ceilings, parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping. D. Maintain minimum 6-inch clearance between conduit and piping. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating appliances. E. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling operations. Fasten conduit using galvanized straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers. F. Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit straps or clamps. G. Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during construction, before conductors are pulled. 3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. B. Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely. C. Use conduit hubs for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for fastening conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp or wet locations. D. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. E. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 2 3.3 3.4 F. Use hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit larger than 2-inches in size. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. I. Provide a pull tape for spare empty conduits. The tape shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester tape with distance marking in feet continuous along its length. Furnish T&B or Greenlee products. J. Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building expansion joints. K. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire rating equal to wall or floor rating. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. L. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise route through roof jack with pitch pocket. M. Maximum size conduit in slabs above grade: 3/4 inch. N. Use PVC -coated rigid steel factory elbows for bends in plastic conduit runs longer than 100 feet or in plastic conduit runs, which have more than two bends regardless of length. O. Make joints in accordance with manufacturers' written instructions. P. Provide plastic warning tape for underground conduit or duct bank installations. Install warning tape directly above conduit one foot below finished grade or as shown on drawings. Q. Sand for intermediate fill around underground conduits shall be washed sand, suitable for concrete or masonry. Reference Section 26 0500 for additional backfill and excavation requirements. CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Underground installations more than two feet from foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit or Schedule 40 plastic conduit. B. Installations in or under concrete slab, or underground within 2 feet of foundation wall: Rigid steel conduit. C. In slab above grade: Rigid steel conduit. D. Exposed outdoor locations: Rigid steel conduit. E. Wet interior locations: Rigid Steel Conduit. F. Concealed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. G. Exposed dry interior locations: Electrical metallic tubing. CONDUIT IN DETNTION AREAS A. Conduits shall be concealed in CMU walls. B. Conduits shall be concealed in concrete walls and ceilings. CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 3 C. conduits may be exposed in electric rooms, mechanical rooms and plumbing chases. END OF SECTION t" CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 26 05 33.13 - 4 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of identification for electrical equipment as shown or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Nameplates and tape labels 2. Wire and cable markers 3. Buried conduit markers 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements in Division 01. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Clothe markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Buried Conduit Marker: Continuous printed plastic tape. D. Outdoor Equipment Cables: Manufacturer's Standards 1. Weather and sun resistant 2. Vandal resistant 2.2 EQUIPMENT AND RACEWAYS OVER 600 VOLTS A. Provide "WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE - KEEP OUT" signs on all equipment. With 2-inch high lettering, mark exposed raceways containing conductors operating in excess of 600 volts every 100 feet with the words "WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE". 1 ; Wit• IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2605 53 - 1 d i 2.3 SPECIAL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION A. Special Systems. Brady Series 55200, 2" wide, pipe banding tape or colored conduit. 1. Fire alarm: red 2. Telephone: blue 3. Data/Communications: blue 4. Low voltage controls: black 5. Sound systems: yellow 6. Clock systems: green 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Lighting and Power Circuit Wire Markers. 1. Sizes #12 through 3/0 AWG. Brady SCN clip -sleeve wire markers. 2. Sizes 4/0 AWG and larger. Brady HSA heat shrink sleeves, custom printed. 3. Legends. Panel and circuit description; for example "EP1-1", "El - 2", "LPA-14". 2.5 EQUIPMENT AND WIRING DEVICE NAMEPLATES A. General: White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout. B. Emergency Equipment Nameplates: White lettering on red background. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel self -tapping screws. Use epoxy adhesive only when NEMA enclosure rating is compromised by screws and for wiring device nameplates. D. Switchboard, Motor Control Center, Panelboard, Dry -type Transformer and Control Panel Main Nameplate: 5/8" high block letters. E. Other Nameplates: 3/8" high block or condensed letters. F. Legends: 1. General. Description as indicated on drawings, i.e., "PANEL EP-I", "XFRM ET-1", "TS- I". 2. Voltage. Description of operating voltage, i.e., "120 Volts", "120/208 Volts", "208 Volts", "277/480 Volts", or "480 Volts", "Single Phase" or "Three Phase". 3. Source: Description of source; i.e., "FED FROM PANEL EP-1, CKT. #1 ". 4. Available fault current and data calculated. G. AIC Rating: Short Circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e., "10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated", 2.6 PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer's standard labels supplied with panelboard. B. AIC Rating: Short circuit current rating, fully rated; i.e. "10,000 Amperes, Fully Rated". 2.7 EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANEL NAMEPLATES A. White core laminated plastic. White lettering on black background, same style throughout, 3/8" high block or condensed letters. B. Legends: 1. Manufacturer's Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). i IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 -2 2.8 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATIONS - A. Brady B-500 vinyl cloth pre-printed self-adhesive terminal markers. Legends: 1 through 96, A' through Z. 2.9 FUSE IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Obtain original label from fuse box or carton or from fuse manufacturer, indicating manufacturer's name, fuse type, voltage and ampere rating. Attach with contact cement. 2.10 GROUND TERMINAL AND BUS IDENTIFICATION A. Type: Green paint or dye, factory applied to terminal and bus. B. Self -Adhesive Label Legend: "Ground", "Ground Bus", "Equipment Ground Bus" or "Isolated Ground Bus." 2.11 EMERGENCY FIXTURE AND OUTLET IDENTIFICATION A. Self-adhesive red vinyl dots, 1/4" diameter. Brady QD-25-RD. 2.12 CONCEALED EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Brady ceiling tacks, 7/8" diameter with 7/16" long point. 1. Electrical equipment: #23255 (orange). 2. Fire alarm equipment: #23252 (red). 2.13 UNDERGROUND DUCT RUNS A. Brady "Identoline" 6" wide over coated polyethylene film 3.5 mils thick, underground warning tapes. 1. Electric line: #91296 (red). 2. Telephone line: #91297 (orange). 3. Customized: Orange a. Fire alarm line - b. Communications line C. Data line d. Data/communications line e. Security line f. CCTV line 2.14 DUCT RUN MARKERS A. General. 1. Construction: Class A concrete. 2. Size: 6 inches square or round, 24 inches long. 45" chamfer on top edges. } 3. Markings: Impressed or cast Letter "D" and two arrows. Locate one arrow below letter, 1 pointing to duct run. Locate second arrow at right of letters, pointing parallel to duct run. 4. Marking sizes: V-shaped 1/4" wide at surface and 1/4" deep. 3" long for letter and arrow j to right. 2" long for arrow below letter. B. Change of Direction Markers: Angle arrow to right of letter to correspond to angular change of duct run direction. 2.15 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WARNING SIGN IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3 _a A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type, plastic or fiber glass, non -corrosive, impervious to weather. B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend, white block letters on red panel on black panel. "High Voltage" lower legend, black condensed block letters on white. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #71565. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. t 2.16 GENERATOR WARNING SIGNS A. Construction: Indoor/outdoor type. Plastic or fiber glass, non -corrosive, impervious to weather. t B. Legend: "Danger" upper legend white block letters on red panel on black panel. "Warning" middle legend, red block letters on white panel, underlined in red. "This machine is automatically controlled" lower middle legend, black condensed block letters on white panel. "It may start at any time" bottom legend, red block letters on white panel. C. Manufacturer: Brady, #47161. D. Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install nameplates, signs and labels, and engraved wall plates parallel to equipment lines. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using stainless steel screws. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Outdoor equipment labels shall be installed by the manufacturer as specified. 3.3 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.4 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates to identify all electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served. Letter Height: 1/4 inch for individual switches and loads served, 1/4 inch for distribution and control equipment identification. 3.5 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 3.6 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. General: Identify panelboards, dry -type transformers and control panels with nameplates showing descriptions or designations on Drawings. Identify disconnect and transfer switches with nameplates describing loads served and panelboard circuit controlling load. Identify conduits, connected to pull and junction boxes, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number of the conductors contained in each conduit. Identify receptacles, where the nominal voltage between contact pairs is greater than 150 volts, with nameplates describing the complete circuit number, voltage, and phases. Identify wall switches, where the equipment served is not in sight of the wall switch, with nameplates describing the equipment served by the wall switches. Locations. 1. Switchboards, Motor Control Centers, Distribution Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center over top wiring gutter. Locate individual nameplates for switches and starters centrally on device doors. Locate individual nameplates adjacent and to the side of circuit breakers. 2. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards. Locate main nameplate in center of cover approxi- mately 2" down from top of panel. 3. Dry -type transformers. In middle of front cover panel. 4. Receptacles and Wall Switches. On wall directly above device plate. 5. Other equipment: In middle near top of equipment. PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER IDENTIFICATIONS A. General. Attach numbered identification to each panelboard circuit breaker in space provided by manufacturer. B. Sequence. Arrange numbering to correspond to panelboard pole positions. For two pole breakers, number according to the upper pole only. For three pole breakers, number according to middle pole only. For multiple breakers occupying poles on both left and right side, number according to left side only. C. Numbering Convention. Number poles from top to bottom. Utilize consecutive odd numbers for left side and consecutive even numbers for right side. D. Separate Sub -feed Breakers. Number with last number of panelboard sequence. E. Circuit Directory. Prepare a neatly typed circuit directory behind clear heat resistant plastic in a metal frame attached to the inside of the door for each panelboard. Identify circuits by equipment served and by room numbers where room numbers exist. Indicate spares and spaces with light, erasable pencil marking. An adhesive mounted directory pocket is not acceptable. BURIED CONDUIT OR DIRECT BURIED CABLE IDENTIFICATION A. Underground -Type Plastic Line Marker: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright -colored, continuous -printed plastic tape, intended for direct -burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. B. Provide tape with printing of "Buried Electrical Conduit" or other similar warning. Install directly above buried conduit or cable one half the distance to conduit below finished grade. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 5 END OF SECTION - , IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 6 t SECTION 26 05 73.16 - COORDINATION STUDY j PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other divisions of Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. The purpose and intent of this study is to: 1. Verify that protective equipment and components are applied within their nameplate ratings. 2. Determine settings for the adjustable protective devices to protect system components and maximize system reliability. 3. Identify changes in the utility company protective devices that may be necessary for proper application and protection. B. The study shall include the electrical distribution system as described as follows: 1. Utility overcurrent devices. 2. The 120/208-volt distribution to include all main protective devices. C. One -Line Diagrams Prepare a one -line diagram of the power system. This diagram shall identify all components considered in the study, and the ratings of all power devices. (This includes, but is not limited to: transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables). Reference numbers shall be used on the diagram related to key items in the report. ANSI device function numbers shall be used to designate protective relays. Provide electronic CADD files for the one -line diagram in *.dwg format using AutoCAD software. Upon written request, completion of a release form, and payment of the Engineer's standard fee of $200 plus applicable sales tax for a set-up charge and $50 per drawing plus applicable sales tax for copies of such files, Engineer will provide AutoCAD electronic files of base Contract Drawings in dwg format on compact discs. D. Short Circuit Study 1. A Short Circuit Study shall be performed which shows the momentary and interrupting fault duties on each bus shown on the single -line diagram. A computer shall be used to perform calculations for three-phase faults. In addition, an impedance listing shall be prepared showing bus -to -bus impedance values reduced to a common MVA base reference to a single line diagram for ease in reviewing data. 2. Study each fault -interrupting device related to the calculated duty, and verify that devices are applied within published ratings. Recommend changes when appropriate. COORDINATION STUDY 26 0573.16-1 =1 IE. Coordination Study 1. Perform a comprehensive, protective device coordination study including all devices identified on the single -line diagram. Using a practical compromise between protection of electrical equipment and coordination of devices "downstream", provide setting for all adjustable protective devices shown on the diagram. 2. Study the application of devices versus system needs and verify the new devices that are needed for adequate protection. 3. Prepare hand drafted and/or computer generated time/current coordination curves to illustrate the protection and coordination achieved with the recommended settings of protective devices. These curves shall reflect the following (where applicable): a.) Appropriate NEC protection points b.) Appropriate ANSI protection points for transformers and other equipment. c.) Magnetizing inrush points of transformers d.) One -line diagram of the system identifying the device plotted e.) Short circuit current levels used for coordination. f.) Motor starting curves g.) Cable damage curves 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The study shall be conducted by a studies organization with three or more years' experience on this type of study. The studies organization shall have three or more engineers experienced in studies work who are available to share opinions related to significant recommendations. The organization shall have proven computer programs for making three-phase fault duty calculations. B. A listing of previous study jobs completed and resumes of three studies engineers shall be available for review. A previous study report shall be available for review to illustrate the type of report that will be supplied. C. The study work shall be conducted under the applicable standards of the American Nation Standards Institute (ANSI) and the National Electric Code (NEC). Specifically the following standards shall apply: ANSI — C37.010 —Latest Revision: Standard Application Guide for AC High -Voltage Circuit Breakers ANSI — C37.5 — Latest Revision: Calculation of Fault Currents for Application of Power Circuit Breakers Rated on a Total Current Basis ANSI-C37.13 — Latest Revision: Low -voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers (600 Volt Insulation Class). IEEE Standard 141 — Latest Revision Also known as the IEEE Red Book. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Provide as required by the General Provisions in Division 01, copies of a draft and final report, which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary that identifies any significant problems and recommendations for any corrections. 2. Technical discussion that details the calculation methodology used to develop the one line diagram and perform the Short Circuit Study and the Coordination Study work. The intent COORDINATION STUDY 26 0573.16-2 will be to provide the reader with an understanding of the techniques used to develop the study results and the basis for key decisions. 3. A tabulation of all protective devices identified on the one -line diagram, which their ratings compared with respective fault duty as calculated in the study. 4. A tabulation of all the settings recommended on all adjustable protective devices with references to the single -line diagram and to coordination curves. 5. Copies of all time/current coordination curves developed in the study. Curves shall be 11 X 17" format, folded to accommodate the 8 '/z X 11 Report format. 6. The analysis that leads to specific recommendations included in the executive summary. 7. The single -line diagram of the system studied, including all ratings, identifications described and AutoCAD drawing files. 8. Copies of all short circuit calculations referenced to the single -line diagram and the impedance listings. The Final and Draft Reports shall be prepared using the following format: Format: Size: 8'/2" x I V Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Text: Typewritten or printed Drawings: I in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with 3-ring binding mechanism concealed inside the manual. All binding is subject to the Owner's Representative's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet -and -inches, lbs., and cfm. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 1. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS STUDY Owner's Name Project Title Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date rl� n 2. Contents: Include at least the following: IJ a.) Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual. °( a COORDINATION STUDY 26 0573.16-3 b.) Such other data as required in pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Submit as required by the General Provisions in Division 1, copies of a Draft Report to the engineer with the equipment shop drawings. Revise the report as required to accommodate the Engineer's comments. D. Submit as required by the General Provisions in Division 1, copies of the Final Report within 30 calendar days after approval of the Draft Report. END OF SECTION COORDINATION STUDY 26 0573.16-4 SECTION 26 05 93 - ELECTRICAL TESTING PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, tools and services necessary for or incidental to the testing and inspecting of each new system and each new item of equipment provided or installed under this Division of the Specifications. B. Tests and inspections for each new system and each new item of equipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Acceptance Tests shall be performed within twenty-four hours of receipt of equipment and shall prove that electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and is acceptable for installation. D. Field tests shall prove that the equipment is installed in accordance with the design drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's instructions. E. Upon completion of tests and inspections specified, attach a label to each service device. Labels shall indicate the test date and test company. F. Work Included: 1. Wire and Cable (600 Volts and below) 2. Motor Starters 3. Switchboards 4. Transformers 5. Automatic Transfer Switch 6. Life Safety Systems 7. Ballasts 8. Emergency Battery Packs 9. Grounding G. Engage the services of a recognized testing laboratory with more than five (5) years of experience 1--i and certified by the National Electrical Testing Association (META) for the purpose of performing the inspections and tests specified. The testing laboratory shall perform tests and inspections designated to be performed by the Testing Laboratory (TL). All other Inspectors and Tests may be performed by the Contractor's qualified personnel. The testing laboratory's responsibility shall include the following: 1. Notification of the Engineer prior to the start of testing. 2. Specifying the power requirements for each test site. 3. Providing sufficient protective barriers and warning signs to conduct tests and inspections safely. 4. Reporting any material or workmanship found to be defective during tests and inspections to the Engineer. 5. Implementation of the final settings and adjustments on the electrical equipment in accordance with the values specified in the coordination study. 6. Maintaining written records of tests. Comply with the submittal requirements specified in this section. E1 ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 1 1.3 1.3 7. Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested components indicating results, person responsible and date. 8. Acceptable Testing Laboratories a. Southwest Energy Systems, LLC b. Shermco Industries C. ABB Service Engineering d. General Electric Service Engineering e. Square D Services H. Engage the services of the manufacturer's service organization to perform the tests and inspections, as specified. DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY — CONTRACTOR A. Perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, and rotation tests for new distribution and utilization equipment as specified prior to, and in addition to, the tests specified to be performed by the testing laboratory. Responsibility shall include the following: 1. Supply a suitable source of power to the testing laboratory or the manufacturer's representative at each site. Notify the testing laboratory or the manufacturer's representative when equipment becomes available for acceptance tests. 2. Coordinate the work to expedite the project scheduling. 3. Provide a complete set of electrical drawings and specifications, and pertinent change orders to the testing laboratory and the manufacturer's representative. 4. Maintain records of all tests and inspections performed and assemble all information required to comply with the submittal requirements specified in this Section. SUBMITTALS A. Provide two (2) bound copies of a draft and final report, which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary which identifies any significant problems encountered and corrective actions. 2. A tabulation of all life safety system test results and certification including field measurements. 3. A tabulation of all cable test data. 4. Copies of all system certifications. B. The Final and Draft Reports shall be prepared using the following format: Size: 8V2' x 11" Paper: White bond, at least 20 lb. weight Text: Typewritten or printed Drawings: I V in height preferable; bind in with text; foldout acceptable; larger drawings acceptable but fold to fit within the Manual and provide a drawing pocket inside rear cover or bind in with text. Flysheets: Separate each section of the Manual with neatly prepared flysheets briefly describing contents of the ensuing section; flysheets may be in color. r ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 2 Binding: Use heavy-duty plastic or fiberboard covers with 3-ring binding mechanism concealed inside the manual. All binding is subject to the Owner's Representative's approval. Measurements: Provide all measurements in U.S. standard units such as feet -and -inches, lbs., and cfin. Where items may be expected to be measured within ten years in accordance with metric formulae, provide additional measurements in the "International System of Units" (SI). 1. Provide front and back covers for each manual, using durable material approved by the Engineer, and clearly identified on or through the cover with at least the following information: a. Electrical Testing Adjusting and Balancing b. Owner's Name C. Project Title d. Space for approval signature of the engineer and approval date 2. Contents: Include at least the following: a. Neatly typewritten index near the front of the Manual, giving immediate information as to location within the manual. b. Such other data as required in pertinent sections of these specifications. C. Submit two (2) copies of a Draft Report to the engineer. Revise the report as required to accommodate the Engineer's comments. D. Submit four (4) copies of the Final Report within 30 calendar days after approval of the Draft Report. 1.4 TEST INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION A. The testing laboratory shall maintain test instruments, which have been calibrated within rated accuracy. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on the test equipment. B. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule: 1. Field instruments — 6 months maximum. 2. Laboratory instruments — 12 months. 3. Leased specialty equipment — 12 months. 1.6 SAFETY PRACTICES A. Safety practices shall include, but are not limited to, the following requirements: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 — OSHA. 2. "Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations," as published by the National Safety Council. 3. Applicable safety operating procedures of the governing authorities. 4. Division 26 specifications. B. Perform tests with apparatus de -energized, except where otherwise specifically required. C. Power circuits shall have conductors shorted to ground by a hot-line grounded device approved for that purpose. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 3 A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in necessary crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of Work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to Owner, provide labor and materials as required to complete the Work of this Section in accordance with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide Architect with manufacturer's certificate that the test equipment meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 — PRODUCTS — (Not Used) PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURES — ACCEPTANCE AND FIELD TESTS A. Perform each test and inspection until acceptable results are obtained in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise specified. B. Perform the following tests and inspections for each system and item of equipment as applicable, unless otherwise specified: 1. Inspect for physical damage and defective materials or installation work. Inspect for proper physical, electrical and mechanical conditions (materials and installation work). 2. Inspect equipment and systems for compliance with requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Compare equipment nameplate information with the latest one -line diagrams. Verify that connections and terminations are in accordance with the one -line diagrams. 3. Check tightness of cable connections and bolted bus joints by calibrated torque wrench method. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels. Place a mark on each tightened bolt to ensure completeness. C. Promptly report any discrepancies or unsatisfactory conditions determined by test or inspection. D. Perform insulation resistance tests for each applicable system and item of equipment. Do not perform this test on solid-state devices. Note: In some cases terminated cables cannot be tested unless disconnected from the end devices. 1. Apply test voltages as follows: Insulation Resistance Test Voltage Voltage Rating Test Voltaize 150 — 600 V 1000 V 601 — 5000 V 2500 V 5001 V & higher 5000 V 2. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturers recommended minimum, or less than a value equal to kV+1 in megohms. E. Overpotential tests shall not proceed until resistance tests are satisfactorily performed. Perform overpotential tests for each system and item of equipment as specified. 3.2 CABLES (600 VOLTS AND LESS) — FIELD TESTING A. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support and termination. B. Check visible cable bends against ICEA and manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius. ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 4 C. Inspect for fireproofing in common cable areas. D. Where cables are terminated through window type cable trays, make an inspection to verify that neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective devices. E. Perform insulation resistance tests on each cable with respect to ground and adjacent cables. Record test results. F. Perform continuity tests to confirm proper cable connections. 3.3 SWITCHBOARDS — FIELD TESTING A. At the completion of the work the switchboard shall be field tested in the presence of the Engineer. Tests shall be conducted by the service organization of the manufacturer. B. Tests shall include the following: C. Operation of each disconnecting means under load. D. Operation of all metering equipment. E. The manufacturer shall observe all cable bracing both incoming and outgoing and certify that same is provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. F. The ground fault system shall be set by the testing laboratory at the level specified by the approved coordination study. Each system shall be tested by checking coordination between ground fault and phase to ground fault of a 1P-20 ampere lighting branch circuit. G. Bus joints shall be re -torqued in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Submit certification. 3.4 SOLID STATE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS — 600 VOLTS AND LESS — FIELD TESTING A. Perform insulation resistance tests from each pole -to -ground, from pole -to -pole, and across open contracts of each phase. Test values shall not be less than 50 meg-ohms. Record final test results. B. Utilize primary current injection method to verify the following settings are in accordance with the coordination study. 1. Minimum pickup current of trip devices, where possible 2. Long time delay, using 300% pickup current 3. Short time pickup and short time delay 4. Instantaneous pickup current 5. Ground fault pickup current and time delay C. Verify trip unit reset characteristics. D. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground fault and under voltage relays, to insure operation of shunt trip devices. E. Where charging motors are used, electrically operate circuit breaker to verify performance of limit switches. 3.5 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (600 VOLTS AND LESS) — FIELD TESTING ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 5 A. The testing lab shall check each circuit breaker for proper mounting, conductor size and feeder designation. B. Operate circuit breaker to insure smooth operation. C. Open unsealed breakers and check internal components for tightness, when applicable. The testing lab shall measure contact resistance in micro -ohms for devices with full load ampere. ratings larger than 400 amperes. Investigate deviations greater than 50%, as compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS (Primary Rated 600 Volts) A. Within five (5) days after delivery to the work site and prior to installation, perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. Compare transformer and accessories nameplate information with the specification and report any discrepancies. 2. Inspect transformer and accessories and report installation or shipping damage, loose material, shipping blocks or contamination. Correct deficiencies. 3. Check operation of access covers. Correct deficiencies. 4. Check air circulation for proper operation. Correct deficiencies. 3.7 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Set the timers and test the start generator function. B. Open the circuit breaker in the main switchboard serving the ATS and verify proper starting and load transfer of the ATS. 3.8 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS — FIELD TESTING A. The Testing Lab shall perform all work. B. Verify proper operation of grounding and shorting devices. C. Electrically confirm transformer polarity. D. Verify connection at secondary current transformer leads by applying low current to leads and check for current contribution at applicable devices. E. Confirm transformer ratio. F. Verify connection of secondary power transformer and control transformer leads by applying low voltage to leads and check for voltage contribution at applicable devices. G. Check power transformer secondary load with secondary voltage and current measurements to insure that load is less than the wattage of power transformer. 3.9 METERS — FIELD TESTING The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Check calibration of meters at five (5) points. Use full-scale instruments having precision not more than 50% of meter being tested. Apply test values, record data and plot curves from 0 to full- scale reading. 1. Zero sequence system is grounded upstream from sensor. gg- ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 6 3.10 2. Ground strap systems are grounded through sensing device. 3. Ground connection is made ahead of neutral disconnect link. B. Verify that control power transformer capacity is adequate for system. C. Manually operate monitor panels to test sequences for: 1. Trip test. 2. No trip test. 3. Non -automatic reset. D. Insure control circuit has switchable fuse device with current limiting fuses. E. Measure system neutral insulation resistance to insure no shunt ground paths exist. Remove neutral -to -ground disconnect link, and measure neutral insulation resistance, and then replace link. System neutral insulation shall be one (1) meg-ohm or greater. Record test results GROUNDING SYSTEMS — FIELD TESTING All work shall be performed by the Testing Laboratory. A. Perform ground continuity tests between main ground system and equipment frames, and between main ground system and system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Make test by passing a minimum 10-amp DC current between the ground reference system and the ground point to be tested. Measure voltage drop and calculate resistance by voltage drop method. B. Submit in a letter indicating the ohmic resistance of the service grounds and a statement that the grounding system is free of all defects, stray currents, shorts, etc. C. Perform fall of potential tests on the main ground electrode system. The main ground electrode system resistance -to -ground shall be no greater than five (5) ohms. D. Record final test results. 3.11 STARTERS 3.12 A. Motor Controllers: 1. Submit with certification in tabular form a complete listing of all motors on the project for which motor controllers have been furnished. Include on this listing the nameplate full load amperes of each motor and the size overload heaters installed in each motor controller. B. Motors: 1. Test all motors under load and verify that motor rotation is correct. C. Chillers: 1. Verify proper functioning of the wye-delta starter. 2. While the chiller is fully loaded, measure and record volts, amps, power factor of all three phases. SURGE ARRESTORS — FIELD TESTING The Testing Laboratory shall perform all work. A. Verify integrity of ground and discharge counter connections. B. Perform a 60-hertz spark -over test. Record test results. ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 7 C. Perform a radio influence voltage test. Record test results. D. Perform an insulation power factor test. Record test results. E. Perform ground continuity test to ground grid system. Record test results. 3.13 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS A. All wiring must be inspected and tested to insure that there are no grounds, opens or shorts. The minimum allowable resistance between any two conductors or between conductors and ground is ten (10) megohms as measured with a 500 volt megger after all conduit, conductors, detector bases, etc., have been installed, but before the detector devices are plugged into the bases or end - of -line devices installed. B. Perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's form. A checkout report is to be prepared by the technician and submitted in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report is to include, but not be limited to: 1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms to these specifications. 3. Tests of individual zones as applicable. 4. Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector. 5. Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization detector as measured in place. 6. Response time of detectors. C. Submit a certified report indicating the following: 1. 4 copies of the FACP. 3.14 BALLASTS A. Submit manufacturer's certification that ballasts and transformers for discharge type lamps comply with the latest C.B.M. specifications which have been issued. 3.15 EMERGENCY BATTERY PACKS A. Each emergency battery pack shall be shown to operate satisfactorily. This shall be accomplished by the use of the unit mounted test switch as one test. The second test shall be the interruption of power to the unit. B. Quartz standby lamps in H.I.D. luminaires shall be tested to show proper operation by testing as listed above. 3.16 CALIBRATION A. Calibrate and adjust all components requiring same as directed, in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations or as required, for the following categories of equipment: 1. Transformer taps. 2. Lighting fixtures (lamp positions, reflector positions, etc., as required). 3. Motor starters. 4. Generator Controls and synchronization. B. Provide overloads in all motor starters, in accordance with motor nameplate data and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.17 RE -TESTING ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 8 A. Correct deficiencies and re -test. Verify by re -tests that specified requirements are met. B. Notify the Architect/Engineer seven (7) days prior to the testing dates. Should the Architect/Engineer elect not to witness a specific test a statement of certification shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for his approval. C. Conduct tests at a time agreeable to the Architect/Engineer. Provide premium labor as necessary. D. Products which are found defective or do not pass such tests shall be removed and replaced. Tests shall be repeated. E. Arrange for and conduct all test and inspections required by the authorities having jurisdiction. Pay all fees for testing and inspection. END OF SECTION ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ELECTRICAL TESTING 26 05 93 - 10 SECTION 26 06 20 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of disconnect switches as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Circuit disconnects 2. Motor disconnects 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Division 01 and Section 26 0500 for detailed requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the Architect with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide disconnect switches manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D Schneider Electric 2. Approved equal 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide surface -mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet -steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated 600 volts, and incorporating quick -make, DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 06 20 - 1 quick -break type switches; construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is pad lockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high -conductivity copper, with silver -tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Provide NEMA Type 3R enclosures at exterior equipment. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Motor and circuit disconnects shall have an Underwriters' Laboratory label. B. Single Phase Disconnect Switches: Two pole toggle switch equal to Square D Type F with thermal overloads in appropriate enclosure. C. Three Phase Motor Disconnect Switches: 3 pole heavy duty 250 or 600 volt as required in NEMA Type 1 or 3 enclosures as indicated and as required. D. Enclosures 1. Normal indoor locations — heavy duty NEMA 1 2. Outdoor or wet locations — heavy duty NEMA 3R PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices. END OF SECTION DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 06 20 - 2 SECTION 26 2116 - LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1.3 1.4 A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical service from the utility company transformer location to the main switchboard as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work included: 1. Furnish and install conduits, wires, and metering equipment to provide an additional electrical service entrance as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Coordinate work with the electric utility company, verify all requirements, and install service entrance equipment in exact compliance with utility company and local governmental agency requirements. 2. Arrange with the electric utility company to inspect the work and include all utility charges and costs related to the installation of the electric service. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Underground service entrance. The facility will be fed by two independent electrical feeds. Coordinate requirements with both providers. B. System Voltage: 208/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 METERING EQUIPMENT A. All metering shall be furnished and/or installed, as directed by the electric utility company. Install equipment and furnish current transformer cabinet as required at no additional cost to the Owner. 2.2 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS A. Provide the excavation and backfill of conduit trench for primary and secondary conduits. Arrange with the electric utility to inspect the conduits before backfilling the trench. Correct all deficiencies LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 21 16 - 1 { , B. Conduit elbows shall be factory manufactured, rigid galvanized steel conduit, 24 inch minimum long radius, sweep bends. Apply corrosion protective tape, half lapped, to elbows. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install service -entrance equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that service -entrance equipment fulfills all requirements. Comply with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NEMA standards. B. Coordinate with other work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface installation of service -entrance equipment work with other work. END OF SECTION LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 2621 16 - 2 SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated, a free-standing, dead -front type low voltage distribution switchboard, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices as specified herein, and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The low voltage distribution switchboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards: 1. NEMA PB-2 - 2. UL Standard 891 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: -, 1. Master drawing index ° 2. Front view elevation 3. Floor plan 4. Top view 5. Single line 6. Schematic diagram 7. Nameplate schedule 8. Component list j 9. Conduit entry/exit locations 10. Assembly ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage C. Continuous current 11. Major component ratings including: a. Voltage b. Continuous current C. Interrupting ratings 12. Cable terminal sizes 13. Product data sheets -' B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Busway connection 2. Connection details between close -coupled assemblies 3. Composite floor plan of close -coupled assemblies 4. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations C. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as -built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 1 1 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details as specified 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS _ A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. Provide Seismic tested equipment as follows: 1. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all --. applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) for zone 4 application. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping ( factor, IBC: a peak of 2.45g's (3.2-I1 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.98g's applied at the base of the equipment. The tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies up to at least 35 Hz. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The low -voltage switchboard shall be UL labeled. _. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. t, 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS - A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D Schneider Electric 2.2 RATINGS A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of (65,000) amperes symmetrical at rated voltage. B. Voltage rating to be as indicated on the drawings. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION SWITCHBOARDS 2624 13 - 2 A. Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt -on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure. B. All sections of the switchboard shall be front and rear aligned with depth as shown on the drawings. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible. C. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means. D. The switchboard shall be equal to Cutler -Hammer type Pow-R-Line C utilizing the components herein specified and as shown on the drawings. E. The switchboard shall be suitable for use as service entrance equipment and be labeled in accordance with UL requirements. 2.4 BUS A. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 °C over a 40 °C ambient (outside the enclosure). B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings. C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1 /4 x 2 inch) shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high -tensile strength and zinc -plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring -type washers. E. Wiring/Terminations F. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. G. Mechanical -type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75 degrees C of the size as indicated on the drawings. H. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. I. All control wire shall be type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. 2.5 FEEDER PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Individually mounted molded case circuit breakers with adjustable electronic trip. SWITCHBOARDS 2624 13 - 3 t r 2.6 TRIP UNITS ( A. Electronic RMS trip with the following features; 1. Adjustable long time pick-up 2. Adjustable short time pick-up 3. Adjustable long delay time 4. Adjustable short delay time 5. Adjustable instantaneous pick-up 6. Adjustable ground fault pick-up ' 7. Adjustable ground fault delay time 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided, as indicated on the drawings, or as required for proper operation of the equipment. Control power transformers shall have adequate capacity to supply power to the transformer cooling fans. B. Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with a space heater thermostatically controlled. Power for the space heaters shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC. 2.8 UTILITY METERING A. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish a barrier to separate the utility metering compartment complete with hinged sealable door. Bus work shall include provisions for mounting utility company current transformers and potential transformers or potential taps as required by the utility company. Provide service entrance label and provide necessary applicable service entrance features per NEC and local code requirements. 2.9 CUSTOMER METERING A. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a separate customer metering compartment with a front facing hinged door and include the following: B. Current transformers for each meter. Current transformers shall be wired to shorting -type terminal blocks. C. Potential transformers including primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means for metering as shown on the drawings. D. Microprocessor -Based Metering System PXM 2270. 2.10 ENCLOSURES A. Outdoor NEMA 3R Enclosure ' 1. Outdoor enclosure shall be non -walk-in and meet applicable NEMA 3R UL requirements 2. Enclosure shall have flat roof 3. Outer sections shall be the same widths as indoor structures, except each end of the outdoor assembly shall have an end trim 4. The enclosure shall be provided with bolt -on rear covers for each section 5. Doors shall have provisions for padlocking 6. Ventilating openings shall be provided complete with replaceable fiber glass air filters. 7. Provide space heaters thermostatically controlled for each structure with adequate wattage to prevent the accumulation of moisture 8. Power for space heaters, lights and receptacles shall be obtained from a control power i transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 volts AC SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 4 2.11 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. Characters shall be 3/16-inch high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number. B. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. C. Finish - All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust -inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray. 2.12 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES A. Provide surge suppression device as specified in Section 26 4300. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one (1) minute between live parts and ground B. The manufacturer shall provide three (3) certified copies of factory test reports. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be provided to the Engineer. 3.3 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) owner's representatives for one normal workday at a job site location determined by the owner. B. A manufacturer's qualified representative shall conduct the training session. The training program shall consist of instruction on operation of the assembly, circuit breakers, and major components within the assembly. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's instructions, contract drawings and National Electrical Code. SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 5 3.5 B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being moved into installation position and bolted directly to Contractor supplied floor sills to be set level in concrete per manufacturer's recommendations or without the use of floor sills provided the floor is level to 1/8 inch per 3-foot distance in any direction]. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. FIELD ADJUSTMENTS A. The Contractor shall perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective device coordination study. B. Necessary field settings of devices, adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by the Contractor at no additional cost to the owner. END OF SECTION SWITCHBOARDS 26 24 13 - 6 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of electrical panelboards as shown or indicated on the Drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included 1. Power distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and branch circuit panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Division 01 and Section 26 0500 for detailed requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboards shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D/Schneider Electric 2. Approved equal 2.2 PANELBOARDS (GENERAL) A. Panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall be so labeled, rated for intended voltage and current characteristics as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated. B. Cabinets for panelboards shall be by NEC gauge sheet steel having steel doors and trim to conform to the cabinet mounting. The trim on cabinets shall be made adjustable with the door. Door shall be mounted with heavy concealed hinges. C. Cabinets shall have wiring space top, bottom and both sides in accordance with the National Electrical Code, but no less than 4-inches wide, with standard knockouts. PANELBOARDS 2624 16 - 1 D. Provide a clear, plastic -covered, typed directory card and cardholder on the inside of each door. Key locks alike, and provide Owner with not less than 5 keys. Finish shall be gray enamel over a v` rust inhibitor, except cans may be galvanized. E. Multisection panels shall be same height and depth. F. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled, and shall consist of rigid frame supporting the rectangular bus, mains, neutral and ground bars. Bussing shall be sized in accordance with UL Standards, braced throughout to conform to industry standards governing short circuit stresses in panelboards, and arranged for sequence phasing throughout. Bussing shall be tinned copper. G. Phase bussing shall be full height without reduction, full size neutral, unless otherwise scheduled, with suitable lug for each outgoing circuit requiring a neutral connection. Provide ground bus with suitable lugs for each branch circuit ground conductor. H. Terminals for feeder conductors, branch circuit devices and neutrals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductors specified. I. Interiors shall be designed such that circuit protective devices may be changed, replaced, or additional circuits added without disturbing adjacent units and without machining, drilling or tapping. In no case shall the width of panelboard enclosure be less than 20-inches. Branch circuit breakers shall be bolt -in type. Enclosures 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA I general purpose 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead -front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti -turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98% conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. B. Provide bolt -in type heavy-duty molded -case branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple -pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare un-insulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. C. On multisection and split -bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.4 LIGHTING AND BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Provide dead -front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and arrangements shown; with anti -burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 1 i B. Equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt -in type heavy-duty, quick -make, r quick -break, single -pole circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Interrupting rating shall be in excess of the available fault current at the panel in accordance with UL listings for sizes involved, but no less than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. Provide common trip on multi -pole circuit breakers. C. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate properly with panelboards. D. On multi -section and split -bus panels, the lugs and bus on each and every section shall be of the same current rating as the main overcurrent device protecting the feeder serving the panel and each section shall have a separate neutral, ground bar and conductors. Panel bus shall have double lugs to effect parallel feed of bus bars (rather than series) where scheduled. Feed-thru lugs are not acceptable. 2.5 INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Individually mounted circuit breakers shall be molded case, capacity as indicated, in a NEMA Type 1 enclosure unless otherwise noted. Breakers shall be quick -make, quick -break thermal magnetic common trip type, ambient compensated with trip -free handle and have interrupting rating in accordance with UL listings for sizes required, but not less than 10,000 amperes rms symmetrical, and conform to requirements of NEMA Standard Publication No. AB1-1969. Each unit shall have insulated neutral and/or ground terminal of proper size, where indicated. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper cables. B. Enclosures 1. Circuit switching/protective devices shall be housed in an enclosure suitable for the environment in which they are located. Provide lifting eyes or brackets 2. Normal indoor locations - NEMA 1 general purpose 3. Outdoor or vault locations - NEMA 3R C. Circuit breakers shall be of same manufacturer as panelboards. 2.6 PANELBOARD ACCESSORIES A. Provide panelboard accessories and devices as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically secure. Provide cross channels at top and bottom in stud walls to support panels. D. Provide properly wired electrical connections within enclosures. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 E. Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating loads controlled by each circuit. F. Install wall -mounted panelboards a maximum of 6 feet 6 inches above finish floor to top of panel. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 4 i SECTION 26 24 22 - MOTOR STARTERS PART I - GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the Work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's Specifications and Drawings for requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of motor starters for all electric motor driven equipment as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Manual motor starters 2. Magnetic motor starters 3. Combination motor starters 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance to the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. When requested, provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SUBMITTAL A. Provide written certification from manufacturer that equipment and materials provided under this Division meet specified compliance requirements. B. Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01 and Sections 26 0500. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Provide motor starters as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Square D/Schneider Electric `- 2. Approved equal MOTOR STARTERS 26 24 22 - 1 l 2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS t A. Provide single-phase, horsepower rated manual motor starters, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick -make, quick -break toggle mechanisms; and with one-piece melting alloy type thermal units. Starter to become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide starters with double break, silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of starter, green pilot lights, and switch capable of being padlocked "OFF". B. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. 2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide fused disconnect switches complete with time delay fuses. B. Provide contactors with three overload relays. C. 120 volt holding coil. D. Provide pilot light in cover, green type. E. Provide reset button, and HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to OFF/AUTO or START/STOP pushbutton. F. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. G. Provide surface mounted starters in NEMA Type 1 or Type 3 enclosure as required. 2.4 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS A. Provide fused, 3-pole, load break disconnect switches with RK-1 fuses, rotary operating handle, and lock -off facility. B. Restrict opening of switch enclosure by the use of a defeater screw, unless switch is in the OFF position. C. Provide contactors with three overload relays. D. 120/277 volt holding coil. E. Provide pilot light in cover, green. F. Provide reset button, and HAND -OFF -AUTOMATIC switch behind lockable cover, field convertible to OFF/AUTO or START/STOP pushbutton. G. Provide two sets of normally open auxiliary contacts in addition to standard auxiliary holding contacts supplied with each contactor. H. Provide control transformer of sufficient capacity to handle operating coil and associated controls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION MOTOR STARTERS 26 24 22 - 2 3.2 A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL, and NEMA standards. B. In finished areas, mount motor protection switches flush and install suitable cover plates. C. Install heaters correlated with full load current of motors provided. D. Set overload devices to suit motors provided. E. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. F. Starters furnished as integral parts of factory -assembled, pre -wired equipment shall conform to the above requirements. PUSHBUTTON AND SWITCH STATIONS A. All controllers shall be provided with a heavy-duty type push-button station, rated for 10 amperes continuous load at 600 volt or less. B. Enclosures shall be general purpose NEMA Type 1, except that pushbutton stations installed outside the building or otherwise exposed to the weather shall be NEMA Type 3R, dust and weather tight. NEMA Type 4 enclosures shall be provided for surface mounting, except as otherwise indicated. C. Pushbutton stations for non -interlocking contactors shall be momentary contact type with start button, stop button, and red indicator light. Where required for delayed "seal -in" or where otherwise noted. END OF SECTION MOTOR STARTERS 26 24 22 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MOTOR STARTERS 26 24 22 - 4 f. Dimmer control slider shall be captured. g. All dimmers shall meet UL 20 and be appropriately marked. 4. Switches a. All dimmer related on/off switches shall be single pole, 3-Way and 4-Way configuration as indicated on the Drawings. b. Switch rating shall be 20A, 277 VAC. 5 5. Wall Plates ! a. Wall plates shall include mounting frame for proper device alignment and faceplate attachment. b. Wall plates shall be constructed of high impact, scratch -resistant ABS plastic. Color shall be ivory unless noted otherwise. C. Wall plates shall snap on to device with no visible means of attachment. d. Heat fins shall not be visible on front of device. e. At locations with multiple devices, one seamless, multi -gang faceplate shall be provided. Coordinate proper switch box size and wall plate type. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Wall plates shall be provided for all switches, receptacles, blanks, telephone and special purpose outlets. The wall plates shall be of suitable configuration for the device for which it is to cover with color matched mounting screws. Color of the wall plates shall match the device, unless noted otherwise. B. Weatherproof: Wiring devices in wet and damp locations shall be installed with a hinged metal outlet cover/enclosure clearly marked "Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use" and "UL Listed". There shall be a gasket between the cover/enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. The cover/enclosure shall employ stainless steel mounting hardware and be constructed of impact resistant polycarbonate. The cover/enclosure shall be specification grade as manufactured by Hubbell Incorporated. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES A. Each wiring device shall be mounted in a metallic outlet box. In general, devices in finished spaces shall be flush mounted and devices in unfinished spaces, i.e. mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be surface mounted. Verify the requirements of all spaces with the Architect. B. Wall Plates 1. Each device shall have a cover plate appropriate for the application 2. Cover plates shall be installed true and plumb with building lines, mortar joints and architectural features 3. Adjacent devices shall be mounted under a common cover plate suitable for the application C. Mount receptacles and special systems outlets above finish floor to the device centerline, unless noted or required otherwise. D. Place conductor under wiring device screw terminals and draw up snugly. E. Mount switches above finish floor to the device centerline and 6" from a door strike, unless noted or required otherwise. F. Grounding continuity shall be maintained between devices and metallic raceway system in addition to the green equipment grounding conductor run with circuit conductors. Care shall be taken when I! WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 installing receptacles having an isolated ground pole so as to not bond the equipment ground conductor to the conduit system. G. Wire each receptacle using correct polarity (i.e., neutral to neutral terminal, etc.). H. Mount receptacles throughout the project with ground pole at the top of the configuration when mounted vertically, on the right when horizontally mounted. I. All exterior wiring devices shall be provided with a weatherproof cover/enclosure. Exterior receptacles shall be GFCI type. J. De -rate dimmer capacity as required by the manufacturer if side sections are removed. K. Run separate neutral wire for each phase of a three phase system when dimmers are installed on multiple phases and for each dimmer when multiple dimmers are installed on the same phase. L. Receptacles located in secure areas shall be GFCI type. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 SECTION 26 32 13 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a completed diesel package engine generator set as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Engine/Generator. Maximum dimensions of genset/enclosure shall not exceed 240" length, 66" width and 132" height. 2. Controls 3. Exhaust equipment 4. Sub base fuel tank 5. Equipment concrete pad 6. Level 2 sound attenuation weather enclosure 7. Remote electric fuel gauge 8. Remote monitoring panel 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the RE necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. Without additional cost to the Engineer, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide emergency standby power system for supply of power in event of failure of normal supply, consisting of an air cooled, diesel engine directly coupled to an AC generator complete with fittings, connections, auxiliaries, control panels, safety devices, and meters necessary a for complete operating system. B. Provide fully automatic operation. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 1 i S I C. System shall be capable of delivering rated kW at sea level and shall be capable of delivering rated i kVA at installed location after consideration of applicable de -rating factors. Refer to Drawings for ratings. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Engine/Generator set shall conform to the National Electrical Code and the applicable inspection authority. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide only materials that are new, of the type and quality specified. Where Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. has established standards for such materials, provide only materials bearing the UL label. B. Provide an emergency generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, production tested, site tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings, and specifications herein. C. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, ¢ along with all applicable local codes and regulations. D. All equipment shall be new, of current production of a national firm that manufactures the generator and controls, and assembles the standby generator sets as a matched unit so that there is one -source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory -trained servicemen. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Kohler Power B. Caterpillar C. Taylor Power D. Approved equal. Maximum dimensions of genset/enclosure shall not exceed 240" length, 66" width and 132" height. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote annunciation panel. 2.4 TESTING A. Testing: To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site tests. B. Design Prototype Tests: Components of the emergency system such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests. Similar design prototypes PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 26 32 13 - 2 a; and preproduction models, which will not be sold, shall have been used for the tests. Prototype test programs shall include the requirements of NFPA 110 and the following: 1. Maximum power (kW) 2. Maximum motor starting (kVA) at 10%, 20% and 35% instantaneous voltage dips 3. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method per NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40 4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions 5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response 6. Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load 7. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor 8. Three-phase short circuit tests 9. Alternator cooling air flow 10. Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses 11. Endurance testing C. Final Production Tests: Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: 1. Single-step load pickup 2. Transient and steady-state governing 3. Safety shutdown device testing 4. Voltage regulation 5. Rated power 6. Maximum power 7. A certified test record will be sent prior to shipment D. Site Tests: An installation check, start-up test, and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: 1. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected 2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery charger, alternator, generator strip heaters, remote annunciator panels, remote fuel gauge, etc. 3. Start up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, cooling airflow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line -to -line voltage, and phase rotation 4. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote -automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. An external load bank shall be connected to the system load where building load is unavailable to load the generator to the nameplate kW rating. The generator shall be operated with the load bank for one (1) hour of continuous operation. The system shall then be tested with building load to include operation of the Smoke Management System 5. Provide a written record of the test, complete with date, time, list of witnesses present, a description of each test and the data taken. The report shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 2.5 WARRANTY & MAINTENANCE A. The emergency generator system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for 1 year or 2,000 hours, whichever occurs first, from the date of the site start-up. Optional 2-year and 5-year warranties shall be available upon request. i PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 26 32 13 - 3 B. Service Contract: The engine -generator distributor shall furnish factory trained personnel and maintain a 24-hour parts and service capability, and show, at time of submittal, that they are regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to semi-annually inspect and test -run the engine to perform manufacturers recommended preventative maintenance service on the equipment furnished. This service contract shall be provided at no additional charge for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion. At the Owner's option, the service contract shall be renewable on a year-to-year basis, thereafter, with costs being paid by the Owner. 2.6 GENERATOR A. Generator Capacity: as scheduled on the Drawings, 60 Hz 120/208Y Volts, 3-phase, 4 wire. B. Rotative Speed: 1,800 rpm. C. Total harmonic distortion — less than 3%. D. Telephone influence factor — (TIF) less than 50. E. Insulation — Class H. F. Exciter: "Brushless" exciter with solid-state revolving SCR Field protected by surge protective devices. Directly coupled with plus or minus 2 percent regulation from no load to full load. G. Terminal Box: Provide terminal box for generator and exciter leads. H. Remove neutral point of generator from frame grounding. Grounding provision shall be available for field connection. There shall be separate terminations for both the generator center connection and the generator ground. 2.7 CONTROLLER A. Set -mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear, shall be vibration isolated on the generator enclosure. The controller shall be capable of being remote -mounted. The microprocessor control board shall be moisture proof and capable of operation from -40°C to 85°C. Relays will only be acceptable in high -current circuits. B. Circuitry shall be of plug-in design for quick replacement. Controller shall be equipped to accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance personnel to test controller performance without operating the engine. The controller shall include: �... 1. Fused DC circuit 2. Complete 2-wire start/stop control, which shall operate on closure of a remote contact 3. Speed sensing system and a second independent starter motor disengagement system shall protect against starter engagement with a moving flywheel. Battery charging alternator voltage will not be acceptable for this purpose -. 4. The starting system shall be designed for restarting in the event of a false engine start, by permitting the engine to completely stop and then re-engage the starter 5. Cranking cycler with 15-second ON and OFF cranking period. 6. Overcrank protection designed to open the cranking circuit after 75 seconds when the engine fails to start 7. Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low coolant level, low oil pressure, or overspeed is received 8. Engine cool down timer factory set at 5 minutes to permit unloaded running of the standby set after transfer of the load to normal 9. 3-position (AUTOMATIC -OFF -TEST) selector switch. In the TEST position, the engine shall start and run regardless of the position of the remote starting contacts. In the PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 4 Automatic position, the engine shall start when contacts in the remote control circuit close and stop 5 minutes after those contacts open. In the OFF position, the engine shall not ' start even though the remote start contacts close. This position shall also provide for immediate shutdown in case of an emergency. Reset of any fault shall also be accomplished by putting the switch to the OFF position. 10. Light emitting diode (LED) indicating lights to signal: a.) Not -in -Auto (flashing Red) b.) Over crank (Red) c.) Emergency Stop (Red) r d.) High Engine Temperature (Red) e.) Over speed (Red) f) Low Oil Pressure (Red) g.) Air Damper (Red) h.) Battery Charger Malfunction (Red) i.) Low Battery Voltage (Red) j.) Low Fuel (Red) s k.) Auxiliary Pre alarm (Yellow) 1.) Auxiliary Fault (Red) m.) System Ready (Green) n.) Pre alarm High Engine Temperature (Yellow) o.) Pre alarm Low Oil Pressure (Yellow) p.) Low Coolant Temperature (Red) 11. Test button for indicating lights ., 12. Alarm horn with silencer switch per NFPA 110 13. Terminals shall be provided for each signal in B-10 above, plus additional terminals for common fault and common pre -alarm 2.8 INSTRUMENT PANEL An instrument panel shall include: A. Dual range voltmeter 3 1/2-inch, +/- 2% accuracy. B. Dual range ammeter 3 1/2-inch, +/- 2% accuracy. C. Voltmeter -ammeter phase -selector switch. D. Lights to indicate high or low meter scale. E. Direct reading pointer -type frequency meter 3 1/2-inch, 0.5% accuracy, 45 to 65 Hz scale. F. Light emitting diode (panel illuminating lights. G. Battery charging voltmeter. H. Coolant temperature gauge. I. Oil pressure gauge. J. Running time meter. K. Voltage adjust rheostat. 2.9 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be installed and wired to a power source: PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 5 ; A. Block heater, (select size as required), 120-Volt AC. Thermostatically controlled and sized to maintain engine coolant at proper temperature to meet requirements of NFPA-110 regulation. B. Generator strip heater, 120-Volt, single-phase. C. Overvoltage protection will shut down the unit after 1 second of 15% or more overvoltage. On- line equipment requiring faster shutdown shall have its own overvoltage protection. D. Weather housings shall be constructed of rugged steel, cleaned, phosphated, and electrocoat painted inside and out with rust inhibiting primer and exterior coat of the manufacturer's standard color. Side panels will be lockable and easily removed for servicing. Top -mounted exhaust silencer with rain shield over the exhaust opening. A battery box heater shall be included. 2.10 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be shipped loose: A. Battery rack, battery cables, 12-volt lead -antimony batteries capable of delivering the manufacturer's recommended minimum cold -cranking Amps required at 0°F, per SAE Standard J- 537, shall be supplied. B. 10-Ampere automatic float and equalize battery charger with +/- 1 % constant voltage regulation from no load to full load over +/-10% AC input line variation, current limited during engine cranking and short circuit conditions, temperature compensated for ambient from -40°C to +60°C, 5% accurate voltmeter and ammeter, fused, reverse polarity and transient protected. Alarm circuit board to meet the requirements of NFPA 110 for low battery voltage, high battery voltage, and battery charger malfunction. C. Gas -proof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust bellows with threaded NPT connection. The engine exhaust silencer shall be coated to be temperature and rust resistance with integral condensate drain, rated for critical application. Exhaust noise shall be suitable for a residential environment. 2.11 ADDITONAL FEATURES A. Provide unit with integral circuit breaker. B. Generator shall be 2/3 pitch. C. Provide a failure relay to shutdown the generator set if the alternator field voltage is lost. D. Provide a resettable exciter field circuit breaker mounted on the AC control panel to protect the alternator from overheating in the event of excessive exciter field current. Provide auxiliary contacts connected in a manner to shutdown the engine in the event that the circuit breaker trips. E. Provide differential current CT's (current transformers) 3-phase, appropriate for the size of the generator set. F. Provide a paralleling VAR/PF controller to regulate exciter field current for constant generator set power factor or reactive power. G. The generator set shall be capable of starting motor loads of 100 kVA inrush, with a maximum voltage dip of 10%. H. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine -generator and heavy-duty steel base, or t PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 6 between the base and the floor. 2.12 ENGINE 2.13 2.14 A. Capacity: 10 percent overload for one hour operating on diesel at an ambient temperature of 90 degrees. B. Governor: Electronic isochronous type governor with a steady-state speed regulation band of less than 1 % under constant loading conditions. Speed regulation three cycles maximum from no load to full load with two second maximum recovery to steady state. Governor shall be a Barber Coleman type governor or equal. C. Immersion Heater: Located in cooling jacket complete with thermostat for 120-volt operation. D. Accessories: Provide replaceable type oil filters, dry type air cleaners, automatic choke, lubricating oils, greases and coolant. E. Electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6 feet, fuel filters electric solenoid fuel shut-off valve, and a fuel distribution system. F. 35-Ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulation. G. Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick, and oil drain. H. Dry -type replaceable air cleaner elements for heavy-duty application. Note: Engines requiring glow plugs will not be acceptable. COOLING EQUIPMENT A. Unit mounted radiator, blower fan, water pump, thermostat, and radiator duct flange shall properly cool the engine in (105'F/125'C) ambient with up to 0.5 inches H2O static pressure on the fan. B. Coolant: Glycol base anti -freeze good to -40 °F (-40 °C). EXHAUST EQUIPMENT A. Residential and Muffler and Piping: Critical type, completely sealed, metal primed finish. Refer to plans for additional requirements. B. Connection: Provide flexible connection from manifold to muffler C. Provide thermal insulation on exposed exhaust piping. 2.15 FUEL TANK A. Provide a double wall sub -base fuel tank with integral leak detectors. B. Provide fuel tank capacity to run the generator set for at least 48 hours at full load. 2.16 FABRICATION A. Mount on common steel rail base. PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 7 1 B. Provide steel spring vibration isolators between rail base and concrete base. C. Provide semi -flexible couplings between generator and engine and protective guards over moving parts. D. Machine enamel finish color shall be ANSI 61. 2.17 SOUND ATTENUATING WEATHER ENCLOSURE A. Generator set housing shall be provided factory -assembled to generator set base and radiator cowling. Housing shall provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in the ambient conditions previously specified. The housing shall have hinged side -access doors and rear control door. All doors shall be lockable. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer's standard color using a two-step electro coating paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. The painting process shall result in a coating which meets the following requirements: 1. Primer thickness, 0.5-2.0 mils. Top coat thickness, 0.8-1.2 mils 2. Gloss, per ASTM D523-89, 80% plus or minus 5%. Gloss retention after one year shall exceed 50% 3. Crosshatch adhesion, per ASTM D3359-93, 413-513 4. Impact resistance, per ASTM D2794-93, 120-160 inch -pounds 5. Salt Spray, per ASTM B117-90, 1000+ hours 6. Humidity, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours 7. Water Soak, per ASTM D2247-92, 1000+ hours 8. Color selected by architect B. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. C. The enclosure shall include hinged doors for access to both sides of the engine and alternator, and the control equipment. Key -locking and pad lockable door latches shall be provided for all doors. Door hinges shall be stainless steel. D. The enclosure shall be provided with an exhaust silencer that is mounted inside of the enclosure, and allows the generator set package to meet specified sound level requirements. Silencer and exhaust shall include a raincap and rainshield. E. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturer's ANSI 61 color. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted. F. Painting of hoses, clamps, wiring harnesses, and other non-metallic service parts shall not be acceptable. Fasteners used shall be corrosion resistant, and designed to minimize marring of the painted surface when removed for normal installation or service work. 2.18 TOOLS A. Provide tools required for normal maintenance of unit in metal box complete with lock and keys. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 8 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 A. Provide a concrete base designed for the complete unit including fuel tank and fuel. Coordinate installation with concrete pad, fuel supply and other equipment to provide an efficient and well - coordinated layout. B. A registered structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas shall design and seal the concrete base shop drawings. INSTALLATION A. Install unit complete and make operational. B. Orientate generator set such that the diesel fill is closer to the yard opening/gate. WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Provide conduit, wiring and connections required and recommended by unit supplier. B. Provide power to control panel, block heaters, and battery charger. C. Verify that the neutral and ground conductors are bonded together at the generator. D. Verify that all accessories shipped loose have been properly installed and wired. E. Verify that the alternator has been connected to the battery. FLUIDS A. Fill the engine crankcase with the type and quantity of oil specified by the manufacturer. B. Fill the cooling system with coolant as directed by the manufacturer. TESTING A. Perform load tests as specified in Part 2 of this Section. GROUNDING A. If a 4 pole transfer switch is utilized with the generator, provide a ground rod at the generator and bond the neutral to the ground. B. If a 3 pole transfer switch is utilized with the generator, provide a ground rod at the generator but DO NOT bond the neutral to the ground. END OF SECTION PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK -, PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SET 2632 13 - 10 SECTION 26 33 53 - UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification describes a three-phase continuous duty, on-line, double conversion, solid-state uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall operate with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning, back-up and distribution for electrical loads in the facility. The UPS shall consist of, as required by the project, the UPS module, battery cabinets, wall -mount maintenance bypass, and other features as described in this specification. 1.2 UPS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. UPS System Components: The UPS system shall consist of the following main components: 1. UPS module containing a rectifier, inverter, battery charger, static bypass, and associated control and monitor panel 2. Battery string(s) in line -and -match battery cabinets 3. Wall mounted maintenance bypass B. UPS Module Modes of Operation: The UPS Module shall operate as an on-line, fully automatic system in the following modes: 1. Normal: Utilizing commercial AC power, the critical load shall be continuously supplied by the Inverter. The Inverter shall power the load while regulating both voltage and frequency. The Rectifier shall derive power from the commercial AC source and shall supply DC power to the Inverter. Simultaneously, the Battery Charger shall charge the battery. 2. Battery: Upon failure of the commercial AC power, the critical load shall continue to be supplied by the Inverter, which shall obtain power from the batteries without any operator intervention. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the commercial AC source. 3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC source, the Charger shall recharge the batteries and simultaneously the Rectifier shall provide power to the Inverter. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load. 4. Bypass: If the UPS module must be taken out of the Normal mode for overload, load fault, or internal failures, the static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the critical load to the commercial AC power. Return from Bypass mode to Normal mode of operation shall be automatic. No -break transfer to and from Bypass mode shall be capable of being initiated manually from the front panel. 1.3 REFERENCES A. UL 1778 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Standard for Uninterruptible Power Supply Equipment. Product safety requirements for the United States. B. CSA C22.2 No 107.1(Canadian Standards Association) — Commercial and Industrial Power Supplies. Product safety requirements for Canada. C. NEMA PE-1 — (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Uninterruptible Power Systems standard. ,3 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 1 t a D. IEC 62040-1-1 (International Electrotechnical Commission) — Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) — Part 1-1: General and safety requirements for UPS used in operator access areas. E. IEC 62040-1-2 (International Electrotechnical Commission) — Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) — Part 1-2: General and safety requirements for UPS used in restricted access locations. F. IEC 62040-3 (International Electrotechnical Commission) — Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) — Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test requirements. G. IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41) Category A & B (International Electrical and Electronics Engineers) — Recommended practices on surge voltages in low voltage power circuits. H. CISPR 22: FCC Rules and Regulations 47, Part 15, Class A (Federal Communications Commission) — Radio Frequency Devices (prior to Feb 16, 2006). MIL-HDBK-217E (Military Handbook) — Reliability prediction of electronics equipment 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The UPS shall be supplied with sufficient documentation, including the following manuals: 1. Installation and Operation Manual: One copy of the installation and operation manual shall be furnished. It shall possess sufficient detail and clarity to enable the owner's technicians or representatives to install and operate the UPS equipment and accessories. The manual shall include the following major items: a. UPS description b. UPS site planning and unpacking C. UPS installation d. Optional accessory installation e. UPS theory of operation f. Operating procedures g. System events h. UPS maintenance i. Performance and technical specifications j. Wiring requirements and recommendations k. Physical features and requirements 1. Cabinet dimensions 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum of forty years experience in the design, manufacture and testing of solid-state UPS systems. A list of installed UPS systems of the same type as the manufacturer proposes to furnish for this application shall be supplied upon request. B. The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for engineering/R&D, manufacturing facilities and service organization. C. The UPS manufacturer shall maintain a staffed 7x24x365 call center for technical and emergency support. (: D. Field Engineering Support: The UPS manufacturer shall directly employ a nationwide field service department staffed by factory -trained field service engineers dedicated to startup, maintenance, and repair of UPS equipment. The organization shall consist of r UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 2 local offices managed from a central location. Field engineers shall be deployed in key population areas to provide on -site emergency response within 24 hours. A map of the United States showing the location of all field service offices must be submitted with the proposal. Third -party maintenance will not be accepted. E. Spare Parts Support: Parts supplies shall be located in the field to provide 80% of all emergency needs. The factory shall serve as the central stocking facility where a dedicated supply of all parts shall be available within 24 hours. F. Product Enhancement Program: The UPS manufacturer shall make available feature upgrade service offerings to all users as they are developed. These upgrades shall be available as optional field -installable kits. G. Maintenance Contracts: A complete range of preventative and corrective maintenance contracts shall be provided and offered with the proposal. Under these contracts, the manufacturer shall maintain the user's equipment to the latest factory revisions. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. The UPS shall withstand any combination of the following external environmental conditions without operational degradation. 1. Operating Temperature: 0° C to + 40' C (32' F to 104' F) without de -rating (excluding batteries). 2. Storage Temperature: - 25° C to + 60' C (-13° F to 140' F). Prolonged storage above + 40' C 0 04' F) will cause rapid battery self -discharge. 3. Relative Humidity (operating and storage): 95% maximum non -condensing. 4. Elevation: a. Operational: 6,600 ft (2,000 m) maximum without de -rating. b. Transportation: Capable of air transport. 1.7 SAFETY A. The UPS shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories in accordance with UL 1778. B. The UPS shall be certified by the Canadian Standards Association in accordance with CSA C22.2 NO. 107. 1 -M9 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The specified equipment is based upon EATON / POWERWARE as supplied by Critical Site Solutions, Irving, Texas. Contact Jacob Patterson 940.206.7412 for pricing and additional information. Approved substitutions are listed below. Any and all additional structural, mechanical, and electrical costs will be the sole responsibility of the installing contractor if a substitution is provided. Listed substitutions shall conform to the specifications in its entirety. Complete documentation including literature, drawings and specification review shall be submitted and included with substitution bid. Substitutions Approved equal UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 3 1 2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY RATINGS AND OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS A. UPS Continuous Ratings. The UPS shall be rated: 1. Output Power Continuous Rating: The continuous output power rating of the UPS shall be 120kVA at a 0.9 lagging power factor. 2. Battery Autonomy: The UPS shall be capable of operating at full load for 111 minutes at 0.9 PF output at a temperature of 25°C on battery power B. Rectifier/charger input: 1. Nominal three phase input voltage: 120/208 VAC: 4-wire plus ground. 2. Operating input voltage range: +10%, -15% of average nominal input voltage without battery discharge. 3. For 60Hz systems, operating input frequency range shall be 55 to 65Hz. 4. Input power factor 0.99 lagging. 5. Normal input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable input current limit settings while operating in normal mode: a. Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100 to 115% of full -load input current. b. Battery input current limit shall be adjustable from 10% to 15% of the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on the UPS. 6. On generator input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable input current limit settings while operating in normal mode on generator: a. Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100% to 115% of full -load input current. b. Battery recharge input current limit shall be adjustable from 10% to 15% of the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on the UPS. 7. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 4.5%. 8. Power walk-in: Ramp -up to full utility load adjustable from 3 seconds to 60 seconds. C. Bypass input: 1. Synchronizing bypass voltage range shall be +/- 10% of average nominal input voltage. 2. Synchronizing bypass frequency range is centered on the nominal frequency. 3. Bypass and rectifier inputs can be supplied from out of phase sources if required. 4. Input surge withstand capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with IEEE 587 (ANSI C62.41), category A & B (6kV). D. Rectifier/charger output: 1. Nominal DC voltage shall be variable between 480VDC for 208V input 2. Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 0.5%. 3. Voltage ripple shall be less that 0.5% (peak -to -peak). 4. Capacity: The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded inverter and recharge the battery to 90% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge when input current limit is set at maximum. 5. Low line operation: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of sharing the DC S load with the battery when the input voltage falls below the specified operation input voltage range, the on battery indicator shall enunciate operation in this mode. 6. DC sensing: Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be incorporated for providing battery over -voltage protection. 7. Battery charger characteristics: The UPS battery charging system shall have the following characteristics: f ' UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 4 The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge modes 5, including: a. A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the battery to rest, reducing positive plate corrosion b. A charging mode floating the battery at a set level, which can be adjusted via software, used for flooded cell applications C. Nominal Float Voltage: 2.25 V per cell. d. Equalizing Voltage: 2.38 V maximum per cell (adjustable). e. Automatic (time based) or manual (user initiated) equalization available f. UPS module will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon loading and battery capacity. 1) The UPS module shall automatically adjust the final discharge voltage between 1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the existing load and the rate and length of discharge. 2) The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.67 V per cell (adjustable). The UPS module will automatically disconnect the battery system in case of full battery discharge followed by prolonged utility AC voltage failure. The time 1 window before battery disconnection occurs shall be programmable for both time and voltage. E. UPS output in normal mode 1. Nominal output voltage 208 VAC, 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground at the output of 9 the Integrated Distribution and Bypass cabinet. Output wiring configuration is based upon input wiring configuration for systems without internal transformers. 2. Steady-state voltage regulation (in inverter) shall be within +/- 1% average from a nominal output voltage. 3. Transient voltage response shall be < +/- 5% from nominal voltage for 100% load step, full load re -transfers and full load drop on battery. 4. Transient voltage recovery shall be 25ms to within +/- 1 % of steady state. 5. Linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than 2% for 100% linear load. 6. Non -linear load harmonic distortion capability: Output voltage THD of less than _. 5% for 100% non -linear load when tested using the non -linear load described in IEC 62040-3 connected line to neutral. 7. Manual output voltage adjustment shall be +/- 3% from nominal. 8. Line synchronization range shall be +/- 3Hz, adjustable to +/- 5Hz. 9. Frequency regulation shall be +/- 0.01Hz free running. 10. Frequency slew rate shall be 1 Hz/second maximum (adjustable). II. Phase angle control: a. Balanced linear load shall be +/- 1 degree from nominal 120 degrees b. Unbalanced linear loads shall less than +/- 5 degrees from average phase voltage for 100% load unbalance. 12. Phase voltage control: a. Balanced linear loads shall be +/- 1 % from average phase voltage b. Unbalanced linear loads shall be less than +/- 5% for 100% load unbalanced - 13. Overload current capability (with nominal line and fully charged battery): The unit shall maintain voltage regulation for up to 110% of resistive/inductive load for 10 minutes, up to 125% for 30 seconds, and up to 150% for 10 seconds. i 14. Fault clearing current capability: 150% phase -to -phase for 10 cycles; 300% phase -to -neutral for up to 10 cycles 5 15. Static transfer time: No break, completed in less than 4ms. 16. Common mode noise attenuation: a. -65dB up to 20kHz, -40dB up to 100kHz r_ UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 5 , b. > 100dB with isolation transformer 17. Acoustical noise: Noise generated by the UPS under normal operation shall not exceed 65dbA at one meter from any operator surface, measured at 25 degrees C (77 degrees F) and full load. 18. EMI Suppression: The UPS shall meet FCC rules and regulation 47, part 15, for _ Class A devices prior to Feb 16, 2006, CISPR . 19. Electrostatic discharge (ESD): The UPS shall meet IEC 801-2 specifications. The UPS shall withstand a 25 kV pulse without damage and with no disturbance or adverse effect to the critical load. 20. Efficiency: The UPS efficiency shall be up to 94%. 2.3 UPS MODULE STANDARD FEATURES The UPS module shall consist of the following standard components: A. Rectifier/Charger: The rectifier/charger shall convert incoming AC power to regulated DC output for supplying the inverter and for charging the battery. The rectifier/charger shall be a high -frequency PWM design, using Insulated Gate Bi-polar Transistors (IGBTs). The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the rectifier/charger module. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to normal mode. The rectifier/charger module shall also provide the following: 1. The rectifier shall be capable of drawing power from the utility with a power factor of 0.99 under nominal conditions 2. The rectifier shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings B. Inverter: The inverter shall feature an IGBT pulse -width -modulation (PWM) design with high speed switching. The inverter shall also have the following features: 1. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified quality output power while operating from any DC source voltage (rectifier or battery) within the specified DC operating range. 2. The modular design of the UPS shall permit safe and fast removal and replacement of the inverter module. Mean time to repair (MTTR) for the module shall be no more than 30 minutes in order to return UPS to normal mode. 3. The inverter shall feature protection circuitry that prevents the IGBTs from sourcing current in excess of their published ratings. C. Static Bypass: The bypass shall serve as an alternative source of power for the critical load when an abnormal condition prevents operation in normal mode. The bypass shall consist of a fully rated, continuous duty, naturally commutated static switch for high- speed transfers. The bypass shall feature the following transfer and operational 4 characteristics. -- 1. Transfers to bypass shall be automatically initiated for the following conditions: a. Output overload period expired b. Critical bus voltage out of limits C. Internal over temperature period expired d. Total battery discharge e. UPS failure 2. Uninterrupted automatic re -transfer shall take place whenever the inverter is �- capable of assuming the critical load. 3. Uninterrupted automatic re -transfers shall be inhibited for the following conditions: a. When transfer to bypass is activated manually or remotely. b. In the event of multiple transfers/re-transfer operations the control circuitry shall limit "cycling" to three (3) operations in any ten-minute UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 6 period. The fourth transfer shall lock the critical load on the bypass source. C. UPS failure. - 4. Uninterrupted manual transfers shall be initiated from the control panel. Uninterrupted manual transfers to bypass and from bypass shall be possible with the inverter logic. During manual transfers to bypass mode, the inverter must verify proper bypass operations before transferring the critical load to the bypass. 5. All transfers to bypass shall be inhibited for the following conditions: a. Bypass voltage out of limits (+/- 10% of nominal) b. Bypass frequency out of limits (+/- 3 Hz, adjustable, factory set) C. Bypass out of synchronization d. Bypass phase rotation / installation error 6. Static transfer time: No break, complete in less than 4ms. 7. The bypass shall be manually energized using the control panel or remotely through a building alarm input. D. Monitoring and control components: The following components shall provide monitor and control capability: 1. Control panel with status indicators 2. Alarm and metering display 3. Building alarm monitoring 4. Communication ports E. Battery management system: The UPS shall contain a battery management system which has the following features: 1. The battery management system shall provide battery time remaining while operating in normal mode and battery mode. Battery time available information shall be displayed real-time, even under changing load conditions. Upon commissioning, battery runtime information shall be available. 2. The battery management system shall automatically test the battery string(s) to ensure that the battery is capable of providing greater that 80% of its rated capacity. Testing the batteries shall not jeopardize the operation of the critical load. Upon detection of the battery string(s) not capable of providing 80%, the UPS system will alarm that the battery needs attention/replacement. The battery test shall be able to detect the following: a. Open battery string b. Shorted battery string C. Battery capacity (runtime) less than 80% of "new" battery capacity 3. The UPS shall communicate battery test and monitoring data to the UPS manufacturer's remote monitoring site. Battery life remaining, capacity, and number of on -battery events shall be provided in a monthly report. 4. F. Wiring Terminals: For 208Vac 4-wire output configurations, the neutral output compression terminal shall be sized for 200% of UPS module rated current to accommodate higher neutral currents associated with non -linear loads. The UPS module shall contain mechanical compression terminals (adequately sized to accommodate 90°C wiring) for securing user wiring to the following locations: 1. Rectifier/charger input connections (3-wire plus ground)-' 2. Bypass input connections (3-wire plus ground for 3-wire plus ground output configuration (480Vac), or 4-wire plus ground for 4-wire plus ground output ;. configuration) 3. DC link connections for battery cabinets (positive and negative) 4. AC output connections (3 or 4 wires plus ground) i 1 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 7 3 i t 2.4 MECHANICAL DESIGN A. Enclosures: The UPS shall be housed in free-standing double front enclosures (safety shields behind doors) equipped with casters and leveling feet. The enclosures shall be designed for computer room applications. Front doors shall have locks to prevent unauthorized entry. B. Ventilation: The UPS shall be designed for forced -air cooling. Air inlets shall be on the front of the unit. Air outlets shall be on the top. Eighteen inches of clearance over the UPS outlets shall be required for proper air circulation. Air filters shall be commonly available sizes. C. No back or side clearance or access shall be required for the system. The back and side enclosure covers shall be capable of being located directly adjacent to a wall. D. Cable entry: Standard cable entry for the UPS cabinet shall be through either the enclosure bottom or top. A dedicated wire way shall be provided within the UPS cabinet for routing user input and output wiring. E. Front access: All serviceable subassemblies shall be modular and capable of being replaced from the front of the UPS (front access only required). Side or rear access for installation, service, repair or maintenance of the UPS system shall not be required. F. Service area requirements: The 208Vac system shall require no more than thirty-six (36) inches of front service access room and shall not require side or rear access for service or installation. The 480Vac system shall require no more than forty-two (42) inches of front service access room and shall not require side or rear access for service or installation. 2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS A. Microprocessor controlled circuitry: The UPS controls shall have the following design and operating characteristics: 1. Fully automatic operation of the UPS shall be provided through the use of microprocessor controlled Digital Signal Processing. DSP shall eliminate variances from component tolerance or drift, and provide consistent operational responses. 2. All operating and protection parameters shall be firmware controlled, thus eliminating a need for manual adjustments. The logic shall include system test capability to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting. Printed circuit board replacement shall be possible without requiring calibration. 3. Start-up and transfers shall be automatic functions. B. Digital Front Panel Display: The UPS control panel shall be a digital front panel display that features an 8x40 (8 lines, each with 40 characters) backlit LCD display. The LCD shall display UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/event queue, active alarms and UPS configurations. The front panel display shall show a system mimic diagram with an outlined power path, current operating mode and event logs. C. Control Panel Indicators: The UPS control panel shall provide the following monitoring functions with indicator LED's: I NORMAL: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or generator source is supplying power to the rectifier and the inverter is supporting the critical load. A text message shall indicate if the bypass line is not within tolerance. 2. BYPASS: This shall indicate that the UPS has transferred the load to the bypass circuit. UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 8 3. BATTERY: This shall indicate that the commercial AC utility or generator source has failed and the battery is supplying power to the inverter, which is supporting the load. A text message shall indicate if the battery charge is low or 1 if the battery is installed but disconnected. 4. ALARM: This shall indicate that the UPS detects an alarm condition, outlined in detail in the operator's manual. D. Control Panel Controls: The UPS control panel shall provide the following functions from front panel push buttons: 1. EVENTS: Displays the list of Active System Events and a historical log of system events. Historical logs shall include a detailed time stamped list of the latest 128 events. 2. METERS: Displays performance meters for the system or critical load. When selected, the front display shall show individual screens of input parameters, output parameters or bypass parameters including; voltage, current and frequency. In addition, the battery display shall show runtime remaining. 3. CONTROLS: Displays a System Controls screen. Allows selection of operating mode, normal, bypass, charger on/off and Power Module on/off. 4. SETUP: Allows display contrast, date and time information serial communication port configuration and display of firmware revision numbers. 5. RETURN: Confirms selection or returns to previous screen. E. Interface panel: The UPS shall be equipped with an interface panel, located behind a protective cover, which provides the following signals and communication features in a Class 2 environment: 1. Alarm contact: A dry contact for annunciating a summary alarm shall be provided for customer use. This contact shall be Form "C" capable of supplying both N/O and N/C contacts. Contact ratings shall be 5A max at a voltage not to exceed 28VDC or 277VAC. 2. RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communications interface: Circuitry shall be provided for one RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) communication port for connection to automated service department diagnostic tools. This port may be used with simple ("dumb") terminals to gain remote access to all unit operation information. 3. Building alarms: Two inputs shall be provided for monitoring the status of external dry contacts. Building alarms shall be set up through the UPS configuration mode function on the RS232 (EIA / TIA-232) port. 4. External EPO contacts: Shall be provided to connect an external remote emergency power off switch to shutdown the UPS and de -energize the critical load. 5. Battery control contacts: Contacts shall be provided to connect the battery UVR and auxiliary signals from a battery breaker or battery disconnect switch. 6. External bypass indicator connection: A connection point shall be provided to acknowledge that an external maintenance bypass has been closed around the UPS, placing the critical load on utility power. 7. The system shall have options to add four (4) additional building alarms, 384 logged events, 4 additional languages as a primary language. 2.6 COMMUNICATIONS A. Communications Bay: The UPS shall be equipped with field configurable communications bays that will accommodate two (2) communication devices. A communication bay upgrade shall be available to increase the quantity of communication devices up to four (4). B. Remote Monitoring: UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 9 I? it 1. The UPS shall be able to be monitored remotely via communications devices. UPS manufacturer shall provide optional communications devices capable of communicating via various industry standard protocols such as RS232 and ModBus. Monitoring of UPS status may also be performed through isolated dry contact Form C relays. 2. Remote monitoring of the UPS shall also be possible through status indicators elsewhere in the same facility through a device that replicates these indicators. C. The UPS communication capability should be able to integrate into any industry standard Building Management System (BMS) and/or Network Management System (NMS). The UPS must also be able to be monitored via any standard Internet browser (i.e. Internet Explorer and Netscape). D. All optional hardware interfaces shall be "Hot-swappable" (UPS maintains power to critical applications while changing interfaces). E. Shutdown: 1. There shall be a mechanism that provides graceful, orderly, unattended, sequential shutdown of one or multiple computers powered by one UPS. This shutdown shall be performed via in -network or out -of -network means. The order of shutdown shall be user -defined, allowing the maximization of runtime on battery for more critical systems. 2. Shutdown of AS/400 computers shall be possible through open -collector relay contacts or isolated, dry contact, Form-C relays. 3. The UPS shall also be capable of interfacing with an operating system's built-in shutdown routine, e.g. Windows NT. This shall be done through a cable connection to the optional serial port on the UPS. F. Notification: 1. There shall be a mechanism to send alerts to key personnel via email or SNMP traps. An alarm notification may also be sent by a network message. 2. Dial -out to a computer for alarm notification may be performed. The user may respond by dialing -in to retrieve alarm history and a summary of current meter status. 3. Management: A remote battery test may be performed via an Ethernet network. The UPS shall be tested through invoking a single command. 2.7 UPS MODULE PROTECTION A. Rectifier/Charger and Bypass protection shall be provided through individual fusing of each phase. B. Battery protection shall be provided by thermal -magnetic molded -case circuit breakers in each battery cabinet (if standard battery pack is provided) or external protective device for an external battery. C. Electronic current limiting circuitry and fuses in the Inverter circuit shall provide output protection. D. To comply with agency safety requirements, the UPS module shall not rely upon any disconnect devices outside of the UPS module to isolate the battery cabinet from the UPS module. 2.8 INCLUDED ACCESSORIES AND SERVICES The UPS system shall include the following accessories and services: 1 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 10 i- ,. A. Power Xpert Communication Card: The communication card shall have two independent RJ45 ports for redundant network configurations and one RJ45 console port for local configurations and optional connection to an environmental monitoring probe. The following communication protocols must be supported: (strict requirement) 1. Web server — Supports data access from Web browsers. 2. Modbus TCP/IP — Supports data access from Modbus TCP clients. 3. SNMP — Supports common network management tools. 4. SMTP — Supports email notification. 5. NTP — Supports time synchronization via an NTP server for card and UPS synchronization. 6. DHCP — Supports automatic IP address assignments, if enabled. B. Battery Cabinet: The battery cabinet shall feature valve regulated, high -rate discharge, batteries which provide energy to the support the critical load during a momentary loss of input power to the rectifier. The batteries shall be flame retardant in accordance with UL 94V2 requirements. The battery cabinet shall have the following features: 1. The battery cabinet shall be the same depth and height as the UPS module. 2. The battery cabinet shall feature a mechanical enclosure of like appearance to the UPS module and shall feature casters. Each battery cabinet shall require front access only for installation, service and maintenance. The battery cabinet shall provide top and bottom cable entry. 3. Power wiring internal to each battery cabinet shall be factory provided. Each battery cabinet shall feature up to 10 battery trays which can be individually disconnected from the battery cabinet power wiring with quick disconnect devices. Each battery tray shall be firmly secured to the battery cabinet frame with fasteners. Each battery tray shall be removable from the front of the battery cabinet. 4. Each battery cabinet shall feature a DC rated circuit breaker. The circuit breaker within the battery cabinet shall only provide protection to the battery string within that battery cabinet. For battery configurations involving multiple battery cabinets, a battery string in one battery cabinet may be isolated from the DC link via its circuit breaker without removing other battery strings from the DC link and the UPS module. 5. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature an A/B auxiliary switch. The UPS module shall be capable of monitoring and alarming an open battery cabinet circuit breaker condition. 6. The circuit breaker in each battery cabinet shall feature a 48VDC under voltage release device. The UV device shall operate to trip the battery breaker(s) for an emergency power off command or battery disable command. 7. Power and Control wiring between the battery cabinet and the UPS shall be factory provided with compression type connectors between cabinets. 8. The batteries shall be configured with a '/4" spade type connector for attaching sense leads to each jar to facilitate the future addition of a battery monitoring system. 9. Expected battery life: 200 complete full load discharge cycles when operated and maintained within specifications. C. eNotify Remote Monitoring Services: 7x24 monitoring by trained Powerware product technicians. Proactive UPS monitoring including monthly summary reports. D. Equipment Start -Up: Off hour start up shall be performed by Factory authorized personnel. Third party start up is not acceptable E. Freight: Dock to dock freight shall be included (off-loading by contractor). UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 11 ii PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 COMMISSIONING A. Factory start-up shall be provided on a 5x8 basis (7 x 24 optional). Start-up service shall be provided at no extra charge and shall include one visit to perform all procedures and tests specified within UPS Installation and Operation manual. UPS manufacturer shall also offer the following optional services: 1. Pre -energize visit to inspect installation and provide guidance to installers as required. 2. Post -start-up visit for alarm notification configuration, operator training, generator testing, etc. B. The following procedures and tests shall be performed by Field Service personnel during the UPS startup: 1. Visual Inspection: a. Visually inspect all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials. b. Observe the type of ventilation, the cleanliness of the room, the use of proper signs, and any other safety related factors. 2. Mechanical Inspection: a. Check all the power connections for tightness. b. Check all the control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or proper seating. 3. Electrical Pre -check: a. Check the DC bus for a possible short circuit. b. Check input and Bypass power for proper voltages and phase rotation. C. Check all lamp test functions. 4. Initial UPS Startup: a. Verify that all the alarms are in a "go" condition. b. Energize the UPS module and verify the proper DC, walkup, and AC phase on. C. Check the DC link holding voltage, AC output voltages, and output waveforms. d. Check the final DC link voltage and Inverter AC output. Adjust if required. e. Check for the proper synchronization. f. Check for the voltage difference between the Inverter output and the Bypass source. 5. Operational Training: Before leaving the site, the field service engineer shall familiarize responsible personnel with the operation of the UPS. The UPS equipment shall be available for demonstration of the modes of operation. 3.3 WARRANTY A. All components of the UPS system shall be covered by a standard one-year limited factory warranty and service protection package. B. One-year limited factory warranty shall include replacement coverage for the UPS parts for a period of 18 months from shipment or 12 months from start-up, whichever occurs sooner. C. One-year service protection package shall include 7x24 on -site repair/replacement labor for UPS parts and batteries; 7x24 technical support coverage; and 7x24 remote monitoring service (with UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 12 monthly reports for UPS and battery performance). Standard response time shall be 8 hours from receipt of call. Manufacturer shall also offer, as an option, 7x24 on -site service support with guaranteed response times of 4, or 2 hours in certain major metropolitan areas. Additional preventive maintenance visits shall be available as an option for both UPS and battery components. D. Manufacturer shall also include Start-up services consisting of. 5x8 Start-up service of UPS and batteries, with option for 7x24 Start-up. On -site user training, Site Audit, installation and commissioning of monitoring service, and validation of one-year limited factory warranty will be performed during the start-up. E. Manufacturer shall also offer an optional service plan to provide 7x24 on -site coverage (preventive and corrective) for UPS and batteries, guaranteed response time, remote monitoring, Web access to service site history, annual Site Audit, UPS and battery preventive maintenance visit, and discounts on upgrade and modification kits. Manufacturer shall also provide an optional battery service plan to provide parts -and -labor coverage for partial and full battery strings, either with preventive maintenance or replacement coverage. END OF SECTION UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 263353 - 13 �t THIS PAGE INTENTIANALLY LEFT BLANK UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353 - 14 i-., [ ) I SECTION 26 36 23 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, supervision and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of complete automatic transfer switches as shown or indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. B. Work Included: 1. Automatic Transfer Switch 2. Equipment concrete pads 3. Conduits to package generator set 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Without additional cost to the Engineer, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. C. Provide the Engineer with manufacturer's certificate that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. General Automatic Transfer Switch: Electrically operated, 3 pole with fourth neutral pole, mechanically held and obtaining control and transfer power from the source to which it is being transferred. Switch shall be front accessible. B. Acceptable manufacturers: Generac HTS or approved equal. C. Refer to project drawings for specifications on the sizes and types of transfer switch equipment, number of poles and ratings. All transfer switch equipment and accessories shall be UL listed and labeled, tested per UL Standard 1008, and CSA approved. D. Provide the following features in addition to automatic transfer function: i 1. Flush mounted display panel with LED indicators to indicate switch position and source j 1 availability 2. 3 position test switch: Fast Test, Auto, and Normal Test 3. Signal before transfer contacts` 4. Standby accept voltage: 85-95% 5. Standby accept frequency: 85-95% yiyl l._.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 23 - 1 6. Nominal voltage: 1 volt increments 7. Allowable deviation of utility: 1400% 8. Engine warm-up time: 1-300 seconds 9. Minimum run time: 5-60 minutes 10. Return to utility timer: 1-30 minutes 11. Engine cool down timer: 1-30 minutes 12. Signal before transfer timer: 1-30 seconds 13. Transfer type: In phase Time Delay neutral 14. Phase Difference for In phase monitor: -7 +0 degrees 15. One additional normally open contact on both normal and emergency relays 16. SPDT auxiliary contacts E. Enclosure: Mounted in separate NEMA I enclosure. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 WARRANTY AND SERVICE A. The transfer switch manufacturer shall maintain a factory -trained, factory direct, field service organization, available on a 24-hour call basis. B. Provide 5-year warranty and warranty documentation to owner. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. All power conductors shall be terminated directly without looping or crossing. B. All conductors shall be marked with permanent wire markers. C. The manufacturer's authorized service representative shall provide the following services prior and subsequent to placing the switches in operation: 1. All clearances and contact pressures shall be verified for proper operation prior to testing 2. Adjust all time delay settings and provide verification by test. Provide record of settings to owner or owner's representative subsequent to start up 3.3 WIRING AND CONNECTIONS A. Provide conduit, wiring and connections required and recommended by unit supplier. 3.4 TESTING A. Perform load tests as specified. END OF SECTION AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 26 36 23 - 2 SECTION 26 36 33 - QUICK DISCONNECT SWITCHES , PART GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low -voltage fused and non -fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 26 specifications. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards: 1. NEMA KS-1 2. UL 98 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Dimensioned outline drawing 2. Conduit entry/exit locations 3. Switch ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage C. Continuous current 4. Fuse ratings and type 5. Cable terminal sizes 6. Product data sheets 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of one (1) year. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The safety switches shall bear a UL label. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 QUICK DISCONNECT SWITCH 26 3633-1 11 r- 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer products B. Approved equal The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre -approved by the Engineer fifteen (15) days prior to bid date. 2.2 HEAVY-DUTY DOUBLE THROW SAFETY SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings: 1. 100 to 1,000 amperes 2. 280 volts ac, 3-phase dc; 600 volts ac 3. 2, 3 or4 poles 4. Upper utility switch shall be fusible 5. Lower generator switch shall be fusible 6. Mechanical lugs suitable for aluminum or copper conductors. B. Construction 1. Switch blades and jaws and bus bars shall be visible and plated copper 2. Switches shall have a red handle that is easily pad -lockable with three 3/8-inch shank locks in the OFF position 3. Switches shall be of double throw design such that both switches may not be closed simultaneously. Handle operation shall have an "off'position position between the two on positions, 4. Switch shall be equipped with a separate interlocked receptacle compartment containing receptacles for quick -connection and disconnection of portable cord - connected equipment. a. Interlock shall prevent the lower generator switch from being closed while cable compartment door is open, and shall prevent the door from being opened while the switch is closed. b. Compartment shall be equipped with a spring -assisted door to allow portable cords to exit the compartment while in use, but shall close when not in use to effectively seal the compartment to prevent insects and small animals from entry. C. Compartment shall be equipped with receptacles for sufficient cable connection for the ampacity of the switch. d. Receptacles for switches 200 amps and greater shall be of the single cable per phase design — utilizing quarter turn cam type connections. e. Receptacles shall be Cam -Lock, 1,000 amp switches shall employ parallel receptacles. 5. Switches shall have deionizing arc chutes 6. Switches shall have factory -installed ground lug kit. 7. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure -- base. 8. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the "ON" and "OFF" position 9. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasable, positive quick-make/quick- break type. Bail type mechanisms are not acceptable 10. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 11. Switches shall have a solid or switched neutral as shown on the drawings. 12. Switches shall have line terminal shields (except for non -fusible double throw switches) 13. Switches shall be suitable for systems capable of 100 kA at 600 V with SAFETY SWITCHES 26 3633-2 14. Embossed or engraved ON -OFF indication shall be provided 15. Double -make, double -break switch blade feature shall be provided 16. Renewal parts data shall be shown on the inside of the door C. Enclosures 1. All enclosures shall be NEMA 3R rainproof 2. Paint color shall be ANSI 61 gray 3. Enclosures shall include a "Z" mounting channel on the back for assistance in mounting. 4. Switches shall be equipped with lifting eyes. D. The following factory modifications are to be included: 1. Plastic nameplates 2. Lock ON provisions 3. Key interlock system 4. Upper viewing window 5. Lower viewing window 6. Factory installed neutral assemblies 7. Factory installed copper lugs 8. Factory installed auxiliary contacts 9. Cover mounted controls selector switches. 10. Factory installed UL listed switching neutral bonding kit for 3 or 4 pole double throw switches requiring a switching neutral PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and all NEC and local code requirements. END OF SECTION QUICK DISCONNECT SWITCH 26 3633-3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK f SAFETY SWITCHES 26 3633-4 SECTION 26 43 00 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to the Work in this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section includes Surge Protective Devices (SPD) for low -voltage power equipment (1000Vac and less). B. Work under this section consists of furnishing all materials necessary for the execution and complete installation of Surge Protective Devices (SPD). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/REFERENCE STANDARDS The SPD surge protection system shall be designed and manufactured, and where appropriate, listed to the following standards: A. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1. UL1449 31 Edition: Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 2. UL1283 51h Edition: Electromagnetic Interference Filters 3. UL796 91h Edition: Printed Wiring Boards 4. UL67 11`h Edition: UL Standard for Safety for Panelboards B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 1. C62.41.1: 2002 IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low -Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits 2. C62.41.2: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low - Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 3. C62.45: 2002 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low -Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 4. C62.62: 2000 IEEE Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 5. C62.72: 2007 IEEE Guide for the Application of Surge Protective Devices for Low Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC) E. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA F. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) G. MIL -STD 220A 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Service Conditions: The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be rated for continuous operation under the following conditions: SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 1 s 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): 115% to 125% of the nominal operating voltage - 2. Operating Temperature: 0°C to 60°C 3. Relative Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing 4. Operating Altitude: 0 feet to 12,000 feet 1.5 LOCATIONS A. See the electrical One Line Diagram for Surge Protective Device (SPD) unit locations. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. The specified equipment is based upon THOR SYSTEMS as supplied by Critical Site Solutions, Irving, Texas. Listed substitutions shall conform with the specifications in its entirety. Complete documentation including literature, drawings and specification review shall be provided. 2.2 GENERAL A. The following are the general requirements of the SPD products: 1. Nomenclatures used herein are intended to indicate product type and configuration of equipment required. 2. UL1449 3`d Edition Listed and must bear the 31 Edition mark. 3. UL1283 5`h Edition Listed. 4. The Surge Protective Device (SPD) shall be a stand alone configuration. Systems that must be integral to the switchgear will not be considered. 5. The surge protection system shall provide effective high-energy Transient Voltage - Suppression and attenuate high frequency electrical noise. 6. All suppression systems must be permanently connected, parallel designs. Series suppression elements are not acceptable. 7. Short Circuit Current Rating of 100kAIC without the need for fuses or breakers external to the SPD. NEC Article 285.6 requires test data confirming the specified short circuit carrying capability (AIC rating) is provided. 8. All SPD units shall be provided with an auxiliary dry contact (Form C) actuated by any single suppression module including N-G failure for connection to a Building Automation System. 9. All SPD units shall be from the same manufacturer. 10. SPD modules shall be configured to isolate individual suppression component failures ' without causing total loss of surge protection in that mode. 11. Surge protection or filtering component failures or fuse openings are not permissible during UL1449 3' Edition Nominal Discharge testing. 12. SPD designs using a single fuse to protect two (2) or more surge paths are not acceptable. 13. Overcurrent protection limiting the 100% rated surge protection is not acceptable. ' 14. Fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable. 15. The SPD shall provide redundant parallel copper bus structure and/or low impedance traces, which are 100% surge rated top and bottom of printed circuit board to reduce suppression path impedance. 16. All printed circuit boards are heavy copper double -sided plated through and meet the requirements of UL796 including those for Direct Support applications, as indicated by a Delta symbol on the circuit board. 17. Hybrid three-tier design utilizing: a. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) featuring: 1. "Fail-safe" design technology with integrated thermal apparatus that monitors the status providing local physical indication of the metal oxide disk has built-in dielectric (arc shield) protection and remote indication by an integral N.O micro -switch SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 2 2. The TpMOV eliminates the requirement of internal or external fuses r (which would limit surge protection capability) for the surge protection components, while providing a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of l 100,000 Amps b. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) supplying the most ideal suppression element I and very fast reaction time; rated 15,000 Watts each and provided L-N and L-G. C. Filter capacitors to suppress EMI/RFI electrical noise. 1. All products shall be provided with high strand count, high frequency/low impedance wire 2. Products which are encapsulated in an epoxy resin compound or any other compound of similar form are not acceptable 2.3 MODULAR DESIGN (with Individual Replaceable "Per Mode" Modules) A. The TSri Modular Series is a full three-tier hybrid design featuring Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs), Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs), and Sinewave Tracking Filter Capacitors. B. The TSri Series has the ability to be upgraded in the field. C. Configured for the voltage configuration as shown on plans. D. A modular hybrid design utilizing the following UL Recognized components: 1. Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistors (TpMOVs) utilizing "fail-safe" technology. (Systems using fuse links or printed circuit board trace fusing are not acceptable.) 2. Silicon Avalanche Diodes (SADs) are provided L-N and L-G mode. 3. EMI/RFI Filter Capacitors which are UL1283 Listed providing electrical noise attenuation E. Each module is voltage keyed by color, by numerical identification, and coordinating pin and sleeve to assure correct assembly field replacement. F. The modular design is available for the complete range of surge ratings (50 through 300), featuring a full complement surge rating on each field replaceable module. G. Modes of Protection: The SPD system shall provide surge protection in all possible modes (L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G). Each replaceable module must provide the uncompromising ability to deliver full surge current rating from 50kA to 300kA per mode. H. The internal SPD/TVSS connection method is an Internal Fused Disconnect or Surge Rated Disconnect or Distribution Block. I. The replaceable module must be an individual module (one [1] module per mode). Each system must provide a spare module. Modular designs with only a single module or surge brick are not acceptable. Each individual module features a green LED indicating the individual module has all surge protection devices active. If any single component is taken off-line, the green LED will turn off and a red LED will illuminate, providing individual module as well as total system status indication. K. Monitoring Options: Select the appropriate monitoring system from the table below: SPD Monitoring Options Modular Products Nlonit4z n T " e Feature Descn` ti6ns SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 3 (_ Type 1 Provides: • Solid State Status Indication Lights • Audible Alarm with Alarm Silence sounds in event of a protection mode failure Form C Contacts for remote monitor Type 2 Provides: • Surge Counter (microprocessor -based with 8 levels of sensitivity providing programmable adjustment of the Counter trigger level) • Audible Alarm with Silence (Ack) button; includes Enable button Form C Contacts for remote monitor L. Provide the SPD in a NEMA 4 enclosure not exceeding 20"H x 16'W x 8"D in size. M. Each replaceable module shall bolt directly to a low impedance solid copper bus structure. Modular systems with plug-in component modules are not acceptable. N. Each SPD system shall be supplied with one (1) field replaceable module. O. The Modular SPD system is supplied with UL1283 Listed EMIWI noise filtering having an electrical noise attenuation of 36 to 44dB in the range of 50kRz to 100MHz as defined by MIL- STD-220A test procedures. P. The TSri Series SPD system offers an Extended Filter, UL1283 Listed, having an electrical noise attenuation of 45 to 50dB in the range of 50kHz to 100MHz as defined by MIL-STD-220A test procedures. Q. The let -through voltage test results used to obtain the UL1449 31 Edition Voltage Performance Ratings "VPR" (6kV, 3000 Amps, 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: 3000A Voltage Let -Through Ratings Modular Products volts a Rain-G„ 208/120 Vac 800 700 600 1200 480/277 Vac 1200 1200 1000 1800 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. R. The let -through voltage test results based on the previous UL1449 2"d Edition (issue date August 1996) Suppression Voltage Rating "SVR' (6kV; 500 Amps; 8/20µs waveform) must not exceed the UL assigned values listed in the following table: 500A Voltage Let -Through Ratings Modular Products 208/120 Vac 400 400 400 700 480/277 Vac 700 800 800 900 Note: Ratings in the above chart were recorded with Fused Disconnects in place. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 4 S. The Modular systems' surge current ratings shall be based on the electrical system ampacity listed in the following table. Note: The "per phase" value derived by adding the L-N mode and the L-G mode. SPD Applications Modular Systems Electrical System Surge Protection (M) Per Mode Per Phase Ain a6ity @ SPD Install Point . 2500 — 6000A 300 600 1200 — 2000A 250 500 600 —1000A 200 400 225 — 400A 150 300 125 — 225A 100 200 T. Approved Manufacturer: The following MODULAR SPD models are acceptable, subject to conformance with indicated requirements: THOR SYSTEMS - TSr Product Series. Example: Model TSri300Fx 3Y4 M202; Replaceable Module; 300kA per Mode (600 per Phase); 480/277Vac, 3 Phase Wye; Fused Disconnect Switch; Type 2 Monitor (LED indication, Audible Alarm, Surge Counter); Form C Contact; Extended EFI/RFI Filter. 2.4 PERFORMANCE A. Provide a Test Report from a recognized independent testing laboratory (META or NRTL) verifying the COMPLETE suppressor (including all necessary fusing, disconnects, monitoring systems, etc.) can survive published current rating on a per mode basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8/20µs waveform. Note that test data on individual module is not acceptable. B. Provide a COMPLETE documentation package per the requirements ofNEMA LS1-1992 C. The SPD shall be capable of surviving the UL 1449 31 Edition Nominal Discharge Test. The repetitive surge current capacity shall be tested utilizing an 8x20µs, 20kA short circuit test waveform (as defined by ANSI/UL 1449 3'1 Edition — 2009, IEEE C62.41.2 — 2002 and IEEE C62.45 — 2002). Surges shall be applied in three (3) groups of five (5) surges. Within one (1) second after the application of each surge, the specified MCOV shall be applied for sixty (60) seconds (±15 seconds). After each group of five (5) surges, the sample shall rest for thirty (30) minutes. After the 151h surge, the MCOV shall be reapplied for at least fifteen (15) minutes. During and following this test there shall be no opening of any supplementary protective devices either internal or external to the device. D. The SPD must provide superior surge protection performance with the ability to deliver 100% rated surge capacity. E. The Surge protection system must be rated and marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 100kAic without the need for external fuses or breakers. The use of Overcurrent protection that limits the specified surge currents is not acceptable. 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 5 B. All surge protective devices, subassemblies, and components are to be 100% tested and certified ((by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. l.. 2.6 WARRANTY A. All Surge Protective Devices (SPD), associated hardware, and supporting components shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and in accordance with the instructions provided, for a period of five (5) years. B. Any component or subassembly contained within the surge protection system that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation during the five (5) year warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. This section covers the execution and commissioning of the Surge Protective Device/Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (SPD) required on this project. B. Technical assistance shall be provided by the manufacturer through the efforts of a factory representative or a local distributor and via a factory staffed, THOR SYSTEMS' toll -free technical hotline (1.877.298.1100) and website (www.ThorSystems.us). C. Verify absence of damage. D. The unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. All local and national codes must be observed. E. The unit shall be installed of the same voltage rating as the intended protected equipment. F. The location of the field -mounted SPD shall allow adequate clearances for maintenance. G. Lead Length: The mounting of the SPD shall ensure the connecting leads are as short (recommend one [ I] meter or less) and straight (no sharp bends) as reasonably possible. H. The SPD shall be marked with a Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) and shall not be installed at a point on the system where the available fault current is in excess of that rating per the National Electric Code, Article 285, Section 6. I. Panel Extension Kits shall be factory mounted on the panelboard and tested at the SPD manufacturer's facility and shipped complete to the jobsite. The engineer may allow field mounting of the SPD extension assembly. THOR SYSTEMS' representatives are committed to assuring proper installation guidelines are followed by the commissioning of each individual SPD and verification of proper grounding, including Ground resistance measurement and the recording of the resistance readings, which will be forwarded to the facilities manager with a completed Commissioning Report. K. System Commissioning. Upon completion of the installation of the Surge Protective Device (SPD) a factory -authorized service representative shall provide product commissioning services. These services shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Before energizing the SPD verify the SPD is correct as specified: manufacturer, product series, and model number. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 6 1� a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line -to -Line), L-G (Line -to -Ground), L-N - (Line -to -Neutral), and N-G (Neutral -to -Ground) shall be measured and verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. Continuity measurements shall be made between the Neutral and Ground connections to verify the Neutral -to -Ground bond. C. Use a calibrated Ground resistance meter to measure the Ground resistance of the Ground wire connected to each individual SPD unit. Record the Ground reading in unit documentation. t, NOTE: The preferred reading is less than S Ohms. A Ground system measuring above 10 ohms needs to be evaluated. 2. Energize the SPD: a. All voltage modes including L-L (Line -to -Line), L-G (Line -to -Ground), L-N (Line -to -Neutral), and N-G (Neutral -to -Ground) shall be measured at the unit terminals and again verified against the unit voltage ratings. b. All indicating LEDs shall be illuminated Green. The factory shall be contacted in the event of any illuminated Red LEDs. C. Monitoring functions shall be checked (if applicable) for correct operation and verification of sensitivity setting. Upon energizing the SPD: 1. The Yellow ACTIVE SURGE LED should turn On, then Off 2. The Green STATUS and Yellow ENABLE LEDs should turn On 3. When the Green and Yellow LEDs turn on, the Counter should display a sensitivity setting of SEN3, which is the factory default setting. The t , display setting should change to 0000 b 4. The Audible Alarm should sound on fault. ACK silences alarm. Note: - The Alarm should be in the Enabled status unless the customer has requested the alarm not sound d. Results of the System Commissioning shall be on a standard Commissioning Report which is submitted upon completion to the facilities manager. END OF SECTION SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 7 i; it THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 43 00 - 8 SECTION 26 50 00 -LIGHTING , PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. All other Sections of Division 26. B. All other Divisions of the Contract Documents. Refer to each Division's specifications and drawings for all requirements. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provided all equipment, materials, labor supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of all lighting fixtures as indicated on the drawings, and as specified. B. Work included: 1. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and all accessories. 2. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as scheduled on the drawings and as specified herein. B. Provide emergency exit signs at locations shown. Mount signs on ceiling for ceiling heights 10' or less. Mount sign on wall 9" above door where ceiling heights exceed 10'. 1.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated. B. Approved equal. 1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS A. General: Submit in accordance with Division 01 Submittals Section and Section 26 0500 for detailed requirements. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cut sheets, data sheets and installation instructions for all light fixtures, lamps and ballasts arranged in order of fixture designation. C. Incomplete submittals will be returned, un-reviewed. Include data on features, accessories, and the following: 1. Dimensions of fixtures. 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. Fluorescent and high -intensity -discharge (HID) ballasts, if applicable. 5. Types of lamps. D. Samples for Verification: For lighting fixtures designated for sample submission in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule or for accepted substitutions as noted. 1. Lamps: Specified units installed. 2. Ballast: 277-V model of specified ballast type. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1 j P C. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. D. Without additional cost to the Owner, provide such other labor and materials as are required to complete the work of this Section in accordance with the requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, regardless of whether such materials and associated labor are called for elsewhere in these Contract Documents. E. Provide the manufacturer's certificates that confirm that materials meet or exceed minimum requirements as specified. F. Standards: Comply with applicable NEMA, IEEE, UL and NFPA Standards. G. NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for exit signs. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Fixture lamps shall be furnished as scheduled and as specified. B. Each fixture shall be complete with its appropriate hardware, finish trim and appurtenances as required for a finished installation. Provide full complement of lamps for each fixture. C. All fluorescent sockets shall be spaced properly to allow for correct fit, and contacts shall be silver plated, edge -wiped type. D. Fixtures shall be free from light leaks, exposed screws and pointed projections, sharp edges, scarred, marred, and scratched finishes. 2.2 LAMPS C. Provide all lamps for all lighting fixtures. Types are specified in the lighting fixture schedule. Use incandescent lamps rated for 130-volt service unless otherwise indicated. Where metal halide lamps are specified in open fixtures, only those lamps designated by ANSI as Type "O" shall be provided. ANSI Type "S" lamps are not acceptable. Where specific lamp product numbers are included in the lighting fixture schedule, equivalent products from other acceptable manufacturers may be used, only if approved by the corresponding fixture manufacturer and the Engineer. Acceptable lamp manufacturers include Osram/Sylvania, Philips, General Electric, Venture, Ushio and Westinghouse D. All lamps shall be free from defects in manufacturer and covered by an implied warranty based on lamp mortality data as such that defective lamps or lamps failing at a higher than normal rate shall be replaced after factory inspection determining cause of failure or defect. E. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, features include the following: 1. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output and lamp life. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 3. Sound Rating: A. 2.3 RECESSED LUMINAIRES A. Recessed Incandescent Luminaires: Prewired type with junction box forming an integral part of the assembly. B. Supply recessed luminaire complete with trim type required for ceiling system installed. Before t_ e LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2 ordering, confirm ceiling construction details and architectural finish for each area. 2.4. LENS A. Lenses for fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic and have a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch, nominal unless otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INDOOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Install a lighting fixture for each and every lighting outlet indicated. Should any designation be omitted, the fixture shall be the same type as used for areas of similar usage. B. Adequately support each fixture; minimum safety factor shall be 2. Use galvanized steel hardware unless other means of support is shown. 3.2 SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 26 0529. B. Support fluorescent luminaires directly from building structure by rod hangers and inserts or metal angle headers supported from framing structure of ceiling suspension system. C. Support luminaires more than 2 ft. long by four hangers per luminaire minimum, independent of ceiling structure or T-Bars. 3.3 RECESSED LUMINAIRES A. Recessed fixtures mounted in suspended ceiling with exposed T-bar grid system shall be supported from the structure above and be clamped to the ceiling T-bar grid structure and secured thereto to prevent unauthorized access to the ceiling space. 3.4 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring methods shall be suitable for an inaccessible ceiling space. Reference NEC Article 370-29. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean all fixtures, inside and out, including plastics and glassware. Adjust all trim to properly fit adjacent surface, replace broken or damaged parts and lamps. Test all fixtures for proper operation. END OF SECTION LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS The requirements set forth in General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to all work specified in the Sections of this division. SECTION 27 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. D. Vertical Transportation (Elevators, Escalators, etc.) Specifications and/or Codes Requirements. E. Rough carpentry is specified in a Division 6 section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Project Expectations: Within two weeks after award of contract, the Contractor shall arrange a "CA kickoff' meeting and/or conference call with the General Contractor, Construction Manager, Architect, Engineer, and Owner (when applicable) to discuss general project expectations. B. The term "provide" used throughout this specification and drawings shall mean "furnish, install, test, and certify". C. Coordinate project schedule, installation schedule, phasing and any other requirements deemed necessary with Construction Manager and/or General Contractor and all necessary trades to ensure successful completion of work. D. Phasing, temporary distribution/equipment, cut -over and implementation shall be coordinated with Owner, Construction Manager and/or General Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. E. Extent of communications infrastructure work is indicated by Division 27 specifications and Technology drawings and schedules and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, the provisions of: 1. Raceway systems including but not limited to conduits, cable trays, sleeves, surface raceways, telecommunication services entrance, manholes, pull -boxes, junction boxes, back -boxes, etc. as required and specified in Division 27 sections and/or select Division 26 sections. The Construction Manager and/or General Contractor shall coordinate this with the Sub - Contractor performing work and determine how scope of work is assigned. The purpose of this specification is to establish design intent and general system scope. 2. All communications infrastructure shall be provided as part of the Base Building Project including but not limited to raceway, cable, cable terminals, and comm room fit -out. 3. Backbone cables between the Main Cross -connect (MC) and each Intermediate Cross - connect (IC) or Remote Hub location. Refer to Technology Drawings (one -lines and floor plans) for specific locations and sizes. 4. Horizontal or station cables between each communication device outlet and the nearest Intermediate Cross -connect (IC) location. 270500-1 r_ 5. Backbone and horizontal cable termination and terminals including but not limited to wiring panels/blocks, patch panels, fiber optic terminals and panels, and outlets/jacks. 6. Patch cords, jumper cables, and cross -connect cables (unless specifically excluded in 271313, 271323, or 271500) to interconnect wiring terminals as well as electronic equipment. 7. Communication room hardware and component fit -out including cabinets, racks, cable tray, backboard, and raceways for terminating cable and installation of electronic equipment. 8. Power distribution within equipment racks and cabinets including power strips (unless } specifically excluded in 271100). 1 _ 9. Grounding and bonding of all metallic hardware components to the nearest telecommunications grounding bus (TGB) bar including but not limited to equipment racks,_., cabinets, cable trays, ladder rack, metallic cable sheaths, wall mounted wiring terminals, i conduits, sleeves, metallic ductwork, and frames. 10. All physical cable management hardware including, but not limited to: "J-hooks" in - accessible ceiling areas, "D-rings" on backboards, vertical and horizontal managers on racks and cabinets, vertical and horizontal ladder -type or wire basket cable tray within communication rooms, etc. 11. Fire stopping as required. Contractor shall provide fire stopping for all low -voltage openings (including empty low voltage raceway) once cable installation is complete. Confirm specific fire stopping scope requirements with General Contractor and/or Construction Manager. 12. Seismic bracing of all equipment cabinets, equipment racks and ladder -type or wire basket cable tray as required by code and by local governing jurisdiction. 13. Testing of all communications cable infrastructure and grounding systems as noted by specification, drawings, and applicable industry standards. 14. Labeling of all communication infrastructure components, hardware, cable, and terminations with mechanically printed labels. 15. Preparation and submission of product data, shop drawings, testing reports, as -built drawings, and cabling documentation as required in this specification. 16. Construction and Installation warranties. 17. Manufacturer components, channel and solutions warranties. 18. Installation and testing of all system and components. 19. Onsite administrative and user training. 20. Manufacturer training of components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General Description and Requirements 1. Refer to Product Data and Shop Drawing Submission Checklist (appendix) at the end of this specification section for additional requirements specific to each Division 27 section. 2. Contractor shall not submit product data for review without submitting corresponding shop drawings as part of the same submittal package. Partial submittals will be returned as "revise and resubmit". 3. Submittal Schedule: a. Within two weeks after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit a proposed schedule for submitting product data and shop drawings. At a minimum, the following items shall be included: 1) Submittal date for Compliance Matrix. 2) Submittal date for Construction Schedule. 3) Submittal date for Product Data and Shop Drawings. 4) Submittal date for Commissioning and/or Test Results. 5) Submittal date for As-Builts. b. Within 45 days after award of contract or as dictated by the construction schedule (whichever period of time is shorter), the Contractor shall submit prefabrication 27 05 00 - 2 a submittals consisting of product data and shop drawings for approval. Partial submittals will not be accepted without prior written approval from the Architect. 4. In addition to the requirements noted herein, refer to Division 1 Specification for additional requirements. As a minimum, Contractor shall ensure all requirements listed here are met. 5. Review of the Prefabrication Submittals by the Architect is for purposes of tracking the work and contract administration and does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the Contract Documents, or from providing equipment and/or services required 1. by the Contract Documents which were omitted from the prefabrication submittals. 6. No portion of the project shall commence nor shall any equipment be procured until the r "' prefabrication submittals (including product data and shop drawings) have been approved in writing by the Architect. All installations shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. A detailed completion schedule shall be submitted with the prefabrication submittals. 8. Prefabrication submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal identifying the name of the project, Contractor's name, date submitted for review, and a list of items transmitted. B. Compliance Matrix: 1. Compliance Matrix: Provide a specification compliance matrix indicating compliance or deviation for each item in the specification. Refer to the SPECIFICATION RESPONSE m section within this specification and Appendix 2 for additional requirements. C. Product Data: 1. Warranty Information: Provide all warranty information as described in this specification section for review and approval. -- 2. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list (i.e. table of contents) at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list and manufacturer cut -sheets shall be compiled to match the order of each Appendix. Component list shall include: a. Component name b. Manufacturer c. Specific product number (to clearly indicate special options, colors, etc.) 3. Cut -Sheets: Submit manufacturer's cut -sheets on all components listed within this specification and corresponding appendix. All components and parts being used shall be highlighted in color on cut -sheets to distinguish specific product/part numbers, options, colors, accessories, etc. 4. Product Substitutions: These specifications are intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in each respective Appendix 1: Equipment Schedules are "benchmark" products. The Contractor may submit (as a proposed alternate solution) substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available. All substitutions shall meet or exceed the minimum functional, physical, and technical specifications. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. Additionally, the requirements of Division 1 Specifications shall apply and may supersede requirements noted herein. D. Prefabrication Shop Drawings: (Refer to Appendix-3 for additional requirements) 1. General: All shop drawings shall be provided on contractor specific title block. Contractor may use Technology Drawing files as a "starting point" for shop drawings but additional information shall be added and/or updated as noted below. 2. Symbol Legend, Abbreviations, and Description: Drawings shall include the following: a. General project information, contractor company name, etc. b. Descriptions of all abbreviations and symbols c. Typical device mounting heights d. General notes and/or scope description, exclusions, etc. 3. One -Line Wiring Diagrams: Provide backbone raceway one -line, backbone and horizontal cabling, copper pair and fiber strand counts, cable quantities, splice enclosures, etc. 270500-3 4. Site Plan: Provide complete site and exterior plans indicating all site and building fagade mounted communication device outlets, equipment, and components proposed to be installed. Additionally, manholes, pull -boxes, and all major raceway routing shall be indicated for conduits 2-inches and larger. Shop drawings shall represent final conduit routing and manhole and/or pull -box placement as coordinated and/or confirmed with Service Provider, Civil Engineer and other trades. 5. Floor Plans: a. Floor plans shall indicate all communication device outlets, equipment, and components.': proposed to be installed. b. Floor plans shall indicate cable routing origin and labeling scheme for each cable and ? termination position. C. Refer to Division 26 "Wiring Devices" specification for additional requirements for floor boxes. d. Raceway routing shall be indicated for all in -slab conduits, cable trays and overhead conduits 2-inches and larger, based on final coordination with all other trades. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate areas with cable tray clearance limitations and/or other cable access limitations for review and approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 6. Enlarged Plans: a. Provide'/a" = V-0" enlarged plans of all communication rooms (as applicable) indicating the position of equipment cabinets and/or racks, wiring terminals, patch panels, grounding equipment, cable tray, fiber and copper terminations, and other low voltage systems equipment layout within the rooms. b. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate final conduit/riser (core drill and/or block -out) locations and sizes as coordinated and/or confirmed with Structural Engineer and any field conditions that impact proposed location. $ C. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate areas where equipment clearances may be limited, for review and approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 7. Details: Document method of attachment of racks to the floor and ladder tray systems, method of attachment of wall mounted distribution frames, grounding details indicating grounding method for cabinets, racks, cable tray, cable management, and power details for rack mounted power distribution. LJ 8. Elevations: a. Rack elevations (produced in Visio, ACAD, or similar) indicating exact placement of patch panels, fiber terminals and enclosures, vertical and horizontal cable managers, rack mounted power strips or distribution units, empty rack -units, etc. b. Wall elevations shall detail any and all known components to be mounted on the walls, whether those items are provided by Contractor producing shop drawings or not. Components shall include, but not be limited to, electrical and/or fire alarm panels, security panels, distributed antenna system (DAS), CATV, communication infrastructure distribution frames with block size, cable routing, cable management, pair counts, method of attachment, etc. 9. Drawin Scale: Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale and completely dimensioned as to clearly show construction detail. 10. Labeling: Provide documentation of all labeling schemes for conduit, back -boxes, cables, outlets, wiring blocks and/or patch panels, device faceplates, etc. 11. Documentation: Provide submittals and documentation as required by the project manual (in addition to electronic copies) for review or as indicated in Division-1 general conditions. E. Record As -Built Drawings: 1. All record as -built drawings shall be provided on contractor specific title block. Contractor may use Technology Drawing files and/or shop drawings as a "starting point' for as -built drawings. As -built drawings shall comply with shop drawing requirements above, but shall be 270500-4 updated to align with actual installation. Additionally, area plan drawings shall indicate all device labeling including, but not limited to, tele/data port labels. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: All materials and installations shall comply with current applicable codes and standards, including but not limited to: 1. TIA-526: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Systems. 2. TIA-568-C.0: Generic Communications Cabling for Customer Premises. 3. TIA-568-C.1: Commercial Building Communications Cabling Standards, Part 1: General Requirements. 4. TIA-568-C.2: Balanced Twisted -Pair Communications Cabling and Components Standard. 5. TIA-568-C.3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. 6. TIA-569-A: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 7. TIA-606-A: Administrative Standard for Commercial Telecommunications. 8. ANSI/J-STD-607-A: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Communications. 9. TIA-758-A: Customer -Owned Outside Plant Communications Cabling Standard. 10. TIA-942: Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers. 11. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials 12. BICSI CO-OSP Design Manual (current edition): Customer -Owned Outside -Plant Design Manual. 13. BICSI Electronic Safety and Security (ESS) Design Reference Manual (current edition). 14. BICSI Network Design Reference Manual (current edition). 15. BICSI TDM Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (current edition). 16. BICSI Wireless Design Reference Manual (current). 17. TIA TSB67: Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted -Pair Cabling. 18. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineers Association 19. IEEE-802.11 a, b, g, n: Wireless Local Area Networks 20. IEEE-802.3: 1OMb/s,100Mb/s, 1Gb/s, and 10Gb/s Ethernet Standards as applicable based on media types (twisted pair copper, fiber optics, etc.) 21. IEEE-802.3ak: 10Gb/s Ethernet (evolving copper standard). 22. IEEE-802.3af: Power -over -Ethernet (PoE). 23. IEEE-1100-1999: Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment. 24. IEEE-241: Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings. 25. ISOJEC 11801: International Standard on Information Technology - Generic Cabling of Customer Premises. 26. NESC: National Electrical Safety Code 27. NEMA Stds Pub No. VE 1, Cable Tray Systems. Additionally, comply with current edition of NEC, as applicable to construction and installation of cable tray systems. 28. NEMA Std 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 29. NFPA-70/NEC: National Electrical Code. 30. NFPA-72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code 31. UL Compliance: Provide products which are UL-listed and labeled. 32. USDA Bulletin 1751F-643: Underground Plant Design. B. Manufacturer and Product Qualifications 1. Provide products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of communications infrastructure components, including but not limited to, raceway, horizontal copper cabling, copper and fiber optic backbone cabling, and connecting hardware. 27 05 00 - 5 responsibilities, provided that the expansion is done by a firm which is an authorized dealer or agent for the equipment of system being expanded. 1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE A. Pricing 1. Instructions to Bidders a. The following is a partial list of instructions. Bidders are responsible to provide a complete proposal inclusive of all information requested in the Contract Documents. b. Do not assume anything. Clarify your position in writing with your bid concerning any areas that may not be clear to you. C. Copies of the bid proposal shall be submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer for review and approval. d. Bidders shall prepare equipment lists showing each item included in the bid. Equipment Lists must include the quantity, model number, manufacturer and price of each item listed under the generic description. e. Provide a detailed description of any and all voluntary alternates and include cost changes in the Voluntary Alternate Bid forms. Bidders should submit voluntary alternates that will either provide for a better system or reduce costs without degrading the system. This includes alternate manufacturer and product substitution. f. In the instance where the Drawings and the Specifications do not directly coincide, or coincide individually, the item of better quality, greater quantity and/or higher cost shall be included in the base bid. 2. Unit Pricing and Labor Rates a. Unit prices and labor rates submitted with the bid proposal shall be used for all additions, deductions, and alterations of the original contract up to the date of submittal review of product data and shop drawings. B. Compliance 1. Bidders shall submit a Statement of Qualifications with their bid proposal that shall include the i following information: a. Company name, address, telephone number and contact person. b. Brief company history. C. Resumes of key personnel. d. Local staffing description (job descriptions and numbers of persons in each position). e. Local service capabilities (hours of operation and parts availability). f. Technician factory certifications. g. Description of local engineering and project management capabilities. h. Line sheet listing major suppliers of security equipment. i. Annual dollar value of sales, installation and service of each product line carried. j. List of references describing three (3) completed projects of similar size and complexity, including names and telephone numbers of the contact persons. k. List of references describing similar projects completed in the area including names and telephone number of the customer's contact person. 1. List of similar projects currently under construction in the area including names and telephone numbers of the customer's contact person. m. Licensing information. 2. Provide a specification COMPLIANCE MATRIX indicating compliance or deviation for each item in the specification. The matrix shall be comprised of a list of all numbered paragraphs that appear in this Specification. This matrix is critical for proposal evaluation. Failure to submit may result in the disqualification of the bid. See example Compliance Matrix template in Appendix 2. r 270500-8 3. Additionally, as described in this Specification, bidders shall submit the following information with their bid proposal: a. Manufacturer's literature sheets for all standard manufactured items included in the equipment list and as proposed in the Voluntary Alternate Bid form, if applicable. j b. Workload and capability statements. The statements shall detail projects that will be active during the completion of this project, and the manpower that would be available for this project. C. Confidentiality and return statements. The statements shall guarantee that the Contract Documents shall not be copied or distributed physically or verbally. The Contractor shall also assure the Owner that the Contract Documents shall be returned in their entirety upon request. The successful Contractor will be provided with as many copies as requested. d. Copy of manufacturer's certification certificate. 4. Certain paragraphs of the Specification require the Bidder to provide information (possibly not listed above) in the proposal to demonstrate compliance with a requirement. If the Bidder fails to provide detailed responses to these items, the proposal will be deemed to be non -compliant to the paragraphs stated. 5. Number all pages of the bid submittal. 1.10 DEFINITIONS A. Acronyms and Definitions 1. Refer to Technology Symbol Legend and Abbreviations shown on drawings. PART 2 SPECIFICATIONS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to each of the specification sections listed below for requirements: 1. 27 05 26: Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding 2. 27 05 33: Telecommunications Raceway and Boxes 3. 27 05 36: Cable Trays 4. 27 11 00: Communications Equipment Room Fit -out 5. 27 13 13: Communications Copper Backbone Cabling 6. 27 13 23: Communications Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling 7. 27 15 00: Communications Horizontal Cabling 8. 27 4100: Audio Video Systems 9. 27 51 16: Public Address System PART EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. The Contractor shall comply with all project expectations and submittal requirements as indicated in Part 1 of this specification. This includes initiating a "CA kickoff' meeting to discuss general project expectations with the project team. 2. Examine areas and conditions under which communications systems and infrastructure are to be installed. Notify Owner, Architect, and Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. i-_ 270500-9 3. The Contractor shall be knowledgeable of work to be performed by other trades and take necessary steps to integrate and coordinate their work with other trades. 1 4. The Contractor is required to coordinate their efforts with the other trades and sub- contractor who may be working within the same vicinity to avoid conflict and lost time. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing all materials indicated on the drawings or as specified herein for a complete communications system. 6. The Contractor shall supply all necessary tools, equipment, accessories, safety equipment, protective clothing, etc., as customary for the craft and necessary for the installation. 7. All communications infrastructure shall be installed in an aesthetically pleasing fashion. All surface raceway in new buildings must be approved by the Owner, Architect, and/or Engineer. J 8. All communications infrastructure shall be installed for optimal performance. 9. All communications infrastructure shall be installed to allow for convenient operation, testing, and easy adds, moves, and other changes in the future. 10. All components noted in Technology drawings and specifications shall be provided and L completely setup and installed. 11. The Contractor shall verify space requirements and locations before starting cable �4 installations and terminations. Inappropriate conditions shall be immediately reported to Construction Manager or General Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. 12. The contractor shall not install any component in a manner or condition that will void manufacturer and/or contractor warranty. Any such conditions that prevent an acceptable install shall be immediately reported to Construction Manager or General Contractor, Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating installation. All mis-installed components will be removed and replaced with new at the Contractors expense. No additional cost will be submitted to Owner. B. Communications Room Fit -out: 1. Construction within communication rooms must be substantially complete before the installation of telecommunications cabling. This includes, but is not limited to, the installation of plywood backboard, cable tray or ladder rack, electrical outlets, light fixtures, sprinklers and ductwork. All walls shall also be painted before the installation of telecommunications cabling. 2. Communications rooms must be free from dust, dirt, and other foreign materials before the installation of any termination hardware or the termination of copper or fiber optic cables. The door to the telecommunication rooms must be installed and closed during termination. 3. Floor to floor distribution shall be provided with concrete floor sleeves or conduits as noted on the drawings, and as required by the architectural design. C. Communications Raceway Infrastructure: 1. Contractor shall provide conduits through walls and across inaccessible ceiling spaces to� ensure unobstructed pathway back to the nearest communications room or cable tray. 2. Provide protective cable bushings on all conduits immediately after installation. 3. Use only electrical 459 or 90Q conduit elbows with long bend radii as follows: a. 6:1 bend radius of the inside conduit diameter for sizes 2-inches or less. b. 10:1 bend radius of the inside conduit diameter for sizes greater than 2-inches. 4. Do not place more than two 909 sweeps or exceed 100 ft. between pull boxes without providing a pull box. 5. Fire -seal all raceway penetrations and openings to maintain fire rating after communications cables are installed. f x 6. Cable fill in riser conduits shall not exceed 40% cable fill. 1 7. Where applicable, the Contractor shall verify existing cable fill in riser conduit before installation of additional cables so as not to exceed 40% cable fill. Contractor will be 27 05 00 -10 responsible for installation of additional riser conduit, where additional cables to be added will exceed the 40% cable fill. D. Communications Cabling Infrastructure: 1. Contractor shall not paint cables and/or spray cables with fire proofing material as it can affect cable performance and will void the cable warranty. 2. All communications cable routed within communications rooms shall be bundled and combed to provide a neat and organized appearance. Cables shall be bundled using only manufacturer and industry approved Velcro wire ties (zip ties shall not be used) with tensions that do not deform and damage cable resulting in loss of transmission or performance. Any bundles and combing methods used shall not exceed manufacturer or industry standards recommendations for that cable type. 3. Contractor shall provide dedicated J-hooks at 48-inches on -center for all communications cabling not run in conduit or cable tray. 4. The contractor shall not install any cable in conduits that do not have the appropriate protect bushings on conduit ends. All mis-installed cable will be removed, bushings installed, and new cable re -installed at the Contractors expense. No additional cost will be submitted to Owner. 5. Cable bends shall not be greater than that recommended by the manufacturer of the cable. 6. Care shall be taken so as not to damage cable during the installation process and that manufacturer's pull tension specification is not exceeded. 7. Provide a minimum 8'-0" and maximum 10'-0" of slack. Loop at the IC -rooms to be contained on the horizontal cable tray or ladder rack. 8. Provide a minimum of 3'-0" of slack for all device cable termination points. Slack shall be contained in accessible ceiling near the final termination point or in the cable tray nearby when continuous conduit is routed back to cable tray. 9. Communications cabling that is bundled within cable trays and supported from j-hooks shall be snugly wrapped using Velcro reusable cable ties as minimum of every 3'-0" for cable organization. Velcro ties shall be tightened so as not to deform cable jackets and thus affect cable performance. Plastic cable tie wraps shall not be used anywhere on the project. 10. Any other Low Voltage scopes including but not limited to BMS, Fire Alarm, AV and Broadcast cabling that are run in common communications infrastructure shall comply with the installation requirements in the division 27 specifications. The Contractor shall ensure that all scopes that use the installed infrastructure comply with these guidelines or provide dedicated pathways for those systems. 3.2 LABELING A. All communications components shall be clearly labeled using labeling devices (i.e. hand written labels are not acceptable) with white label and black text. All labels shall be consistent font type and size (for respective components). B. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. END OF SECTION 27 05 00 -11 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTE: There is no product number appendix for this section. Refer to other Division 27 specification sections for specific product information. APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY C.1 COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.1a COMPLY D.1b COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xx COMPLY xx COMPLY 270500-12 V_, APPENDIX 3 — PRODUCT DATA & SHOP DRAWING SUBMISSION CHECKLIST t NOTE: Contractor shall utilize checklist below to ensure comprehensive product data and shop drawings are submitted for review, including submittals compiled between multiple sub -contractors (as applicable). This checklist is intended help establish submittal expectations specific to each specification section and to serve as a pre -check document for each contractor. Refer to submittal section of these specifications for additional requirements. GENERAL ITEMS: Compliance matrix Proposed Droiect schedule (procurement, installation. final testinebunch. etc.) PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer warranty information Equipment component list Equipment specification sheets Refer to 27 05 00 section 1.3-C for additional requirements. SHOP DRAWINGS 27 05 00: (General requirements, applicable to all specification sections) All shop drawings, product data and compliance matrix to be submitted together Combined legends, plans, details, etc. may be provided to encompass multiple specification sections Refer to 27 05 00 section 1.3-D for additional requirements. 27 05 26: 27 05 26 and 27 1100 to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate all cable types/rating, routing, connection points, labeling, etc. Details: indicate busbar components, connection types/points, etc. 27 05 33: 27 05 33, 27 05 36, and 27 05 43 to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate riser conduits / tray, conduit allocation per system (including spares), etc. Site plan: indicate other utilities, manholes, conduit types, entry points, light pole tie-ins, etc. Floor plans: indicate rated walls/floors, tray/conduit routes, floor boxes, pull -boxes, plenum boxes, etc. Details: indicate conduit support systems, grounding, fire -proofing methods, etc. 27 05 36: (submit cable tray specific shop drawings with RCPs shown) 27 05 33, 27 05 36, and 27 05 43 to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key (including mounting height tags), scope clarification notes, etc. RCPs: indicate ceiling types, rated walls/floors, tray/conduit routes, access/clearances, etc. Details: indicate tray support systems, grounding, fire -proofing methods, etc. 27 05 43 27 05 33, 27 05 36, and 27 05 43 to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. 270500-13 27 05 43 Site plan: indicate other utilities, manholes, conduit types, entry points, light pole tie-ins, etc. Floor plans: indicate conduit stub -up locations within building, conduit type transition points, etc. Details: indicate conduit trench, spacers, grounding, etc. 27 11 00 27 05 26 and 27 1100 to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. Floor plans: indicate rack positions, ladder rack, conduit allocation and stub -up locations, etc. Wall elevations: indicate wall mounted cable tray, conduit stub -ups, wall mounted SCPs, CATV, DAS, etc. Rack elevations: indicate patch panels, cable managers, PDUs, UPS, network equipment, etc. Details: indicate cable tray mounting details, conduit supports, rack -to -floor attachments, etc. 27 13 13 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate all cable types/rating, routing, termination types, labeling, etc. Rack elevations: submit with 27 1100 Details: indicate termination plate details and placement in remote enclosures, AV racks, etc. 27 13 23 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate all cable types/rating, routing, termination types, labeling, etc. Rack elevations: submit with 27 1100 Details: indicate termination plate details and placement in remote enclosures, AV racks, etc. 27 15 00 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. Site plan: indicate OSP cable routes, encoder locations, light poles, pedestals, etc. Floor plans: indicate updated comm room divider lines, device labels, typical conduit paths, etc. Rack elevations: submit with 27 1100 Details: indicate termination plate details and placement in remote enclosures, AV racks, etc. 274100 All Div.27 AV submittal sections to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate detailed connectivity one -lines depicting all components, wiring, connections, etc. Site plan: indicate OSP cable routes, device locations, light and/or speaker poles, etc. Floor plans: indicate component locations and sizes (racks, raceway, active components, etc.), device labels, typical conduit / cable paths, etc. RCPs: indicate current ceiling layer, ceiling device placement, lifts, access hatches, etc. Elevations: indicate AV rack elevations with detailed equipment layouts Details: indicate final connection plate details, equipment mounting details, etc. 27 05 00 -14 9_e 27 51 16 All Div.27 AV submittal sections to be submitted together Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate detailed connectivity one -lines depicting all components, wiring, connections, etc. Floor plans: indicate device locations, device labels, cable types and distances, back -box sizes, etc. Elevations: indicate wall elevations with detailed equipment layouts (amps, splitters, taps, etc.) Details: indicate final connection plate details, equipment mounting details, etc. 28 00 00 All shop drawings, product data and compliance matrix to be submitted together All Div.28 security submittal sections to be submitted together along with 27 5123 (as applicable) Refer to 28 00 00 section 1.3-D for additional requirements. 280001 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. Floor plans: indicate workstation locations including wall monitors, UPS units, badging stations, etc. Enlarged plans: indicate all security monitoring location components, placement / mounting, etc. Rack elevations: indicate security head -end cabinet/rack equipment layouts Details: indicate console, monitor mounting, component connectivity schematics, etc. 281300 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate schematic one -lines depicting all components, wiring, panel connections, etc. Site plan: indicate OSP cable routes, encoder locations, light poles, pedestals, etc. Floor plans: indicate device locations, device labels, typical conduit paths, lock power info, etc. indicate cameras to be associated with access control or duress devices RCPs: indicate current ceiling layer, ceiling device placement, access hatches, etc. Details: indicate door hardware/conduit tie-in, lock power, miscellaneous device details, etc. 28 23 00 Legend: indicate symbol key, labeling scheme, scope clarification notes, etc. One -lines: indicate schematic one -lines depicting encoder connectivity, other unique devices, etc. Site plan: indicate OSP cable routes, encoder locations, light poles, pedestals, etc. Floor plans: indicate device locations, device labels, typical conduit paths, camera power info, etc. indicate cameras to be associated with access control or duress devices RCPs: indicate current ceiling layer, ceiling device placement, access hatches, etc. Details: indicate camera mounting details, power/data tie-in, encoder connection details, etc. 270500-15 I SECTION 27 05 26 Fill, TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. D. Rough carpentry is specified in a Division 6 section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Extent of telecommunications grounding and bonding work is indicated by Technology Drawings (one -line, enlarged plans, and details) and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. C. A dedicated telecommunications ground system shall be provided with insulated bonding backbones (TBB), equalizing conductors (TEC), and pre -drilled tinned copper busses (TMGB and TGB) shall be provided at each communications room to bond metallic equipment and hardware components. D. Applications of telecommunications grounding and bonding work in this section includes, but may not be limited to: raceways such as conduits and cable trays, metallic cable sheaths, equipment enclosures, cabinets and racks, building structure, electrical power and/or grounding systems components, service equipment, etc. E. Refer to other Division 26 and Division 27 sections for wires/cables, telecommunications raceways, boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with telecommunications grounding and bonding work; not work of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General Description and Requirements 1. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Product Data: 1. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 270526-1 ff li C. Prefabrication Shop Drawings: 1. One -Line Wiring Diagrams: Include one -line wiring diagrams for telecommunications grounding and bonding work which indicate layout of ground rods, location of system grounding electrode connections, routing of grounding electrode conductors, equipment 1 grounding connections and busbars. 2. Details: Indicating grounding method for cable tray and cabinets and/or racks. 3. Labeling: Provide documentation of all labeling schemes for grounding busbars and grounding conductors. 4. Documentation: Provide a minimum of (1) hardcopy set of prints (in addition to electronic copies) for review or as indicated in Division-1 general conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. C. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with telecommunications grounding work similar to that required for project. D. Codes and Standards: 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, and the current edition of the NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No.'s 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment", and 869 "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage. 3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. 4. TIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of the current editions of TIA Standards 568, 569, and 607. 5. BICSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of the current editions of BICSI Standards TDM, CO-OSP, Data Network Design Reference Manual, and Wireless. PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Materials and Components: 1. Provide telecommunications grounding and bonding system; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or t 270526-2 l _. components are not indicated provide products which comply with NEC, UL, IEEE, NEMA, ANSI, TIA, and BICSI requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. -, 2.2 BUS BARS A. Materials and Components: 1. Provide telecommunications grounding bus bars with an TIA J-STD-607-A style and BICSI recommended bolt pattern. B. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TMGB, TGB, and/or I-TGB): 1. Refer to Technology Drawings (grounding details) for additional requirements such as bonding conductor connections and dual busbar locations (such as TMGB) as applicable. 2. Provide tinned copper UL listed bus with pre -drilled two -hole bonding lugs. 3. Pre -drilled holes shall be primarily for 4 AWG two -hole bonding lugs. Holes shall be a nominal diameter of 5/16-inch (8mm) with 5/8-inch (16mm) between the holes centerline. 4. Grounding busbar shall also have a minimum of (6) pre -drilled two -hole lug points for #3/0 AWG bonding lugs. Holes shall be a nominal diameter of 7/16-inch (IImm) with 1-inch (25mm) between the holes centerline. 5. Grounding busbar shall have isolated stand-offs to provide a minimum 1-inch clearance off of wall. 6. Physical Size: a. 20-inch x 4-inch x'/a-inch (600mm x 100mm x 6mm) Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB): Provide #3/0 AWG, unless noted otherwise. 2. Telecommunications Grounding Equalizers (GE): Provide #3/0 AWG, unless noted otherwise. 3. Tap Conductors: Provide #3/0 AWG unless noted otherwise. 4. Equipment and Component Bonding Conductors (EBC): Provide No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, insulated stranded conductors based on conductor distances. Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Compression Fittings: All cable splices from bonding backbone to tap conductors shall use irreversible compression fittings to join cable ends. C. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure -type, with at least two bolts. t 27 05 26 - 3 I` 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. D. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by Cadweld (or approved equal) manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. E. Compression Fittings: All cable splices from bonding backbone to tie cables shall use irreversible compression fittings to join cable ends. Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods and Electrodes for use in telecommunications manholes: 1. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter. 2. Chemical -Enhanced Grounding Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, charged with nonhazardous electrolytic chemical salts. a. Termination: Factory -attached No. 4/0 AWG bare conductor at least 48 inches (1200 mm) long. b. Backfill Material: Electrode manufacturer's recommended material. Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. PART EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Stranded conductors shall be used for all telecommunication ground cables, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install, #3/0 AWG insulated copper conductors in conduits. 1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or below frost line (whichever is deeper). 2. Duct -Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct -bank installation. C. Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus (TMGB): 1. Refer to Technology drawings for exact location. 2. Install bus on insulated spacers 1-inch (25 mm) minimum, from wall and 12-inches (300 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 3. The TMGB shall be connected to the main electrical service ground bus with an insulated #3/0 (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor installed in continuous conduits. 4. The TMGB shall be connected to building steel if existing within room with an insulated #3/0 AWG (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor. D. Telecommunications Grounding Bus (TGB): 1. Install in all low voltage or communication rooms. Refer to Technology drawings for exact locations. 2. Install bus on insulated spacers 1-inch (25 mm), minimum, from wall and 12-inches (300 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 270526-4 3. The TGB shall be connected to the TMGB bus via the TBB with an insulated #3/0 AWG (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor installed in continuous conduits. 4. The TGB shall be connected to the nearest AC electrical panel ground bus with an insulated #3/0 AWG (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor installed in continuous conduits. ` 5. The TGB shall be connected to building steel if existing within room with an insulated #3/0 AWG (120mm2) stranded grounding conductor. E. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 3.2 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2, TIA and BICSI grounding requirements B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned - copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure -sensitive insulating tape or heat -shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout. C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed -metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard - drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits. 3.3 EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors to all telecommunications equipment and components. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70, NEMA, ANSI, TIA and BICSI: 1. Armored and metal -clad cable sheaths. 2. Equipment Cabinets and Racks. 3. Cable trays and ladder racks. 4. Conduits sections and conduit sleeves. 5. Equipment and Power Supply Enclosures. 6. Wall mounted cable terminals. 7. Other metallic components as necessary. 3.4 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which telecommunications grounding and bonding L connections are to be made and notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been i 27 05 26 - 5 corrected. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS A. General: Install telecommunications grounding and bonding systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements. B. Labeling: 1. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. 2. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. C. Coordinate with other electrical and telecommunications work as necessary to interface installation of telecommunications grounding and bonding system work with other work. D. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. E. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2-inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. 2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one -rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. F. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of manholes. Manholes are specified in Division 26 and 27 Sections "Underground Services and Manholes," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. G. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment 3. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. H. Install all connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. I. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply 270526-6 with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding. J. Apply corrosion -resistant finish to field -connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action. K. Install all connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. J 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (" A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 5 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 5 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 27 05 26 - 7 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE General Notes: 1. This specification is intended to be performance based, with the expectation that an "end -to -end" solution is provided by one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers (or partnerships) listed below. 2. Products listed below are intended to establish "benchmark" products from one or more of the "pre - approved manufacturers". The listed benchmark products shall be used as a baseline when submitting products from a pre -approved manufacturer that does not have specific products listed. 3. Pre -approved manufacturers (listed in alphabetical order) include: a. Chatsworth -CPI b. General Cable c. Panduit d. Southwire Table' 1- Telecom Grounding Components Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number 1 Telecom Grounding Main Busbar 4"W x 20"L Chatsworth 40153-020 2 Compression Lugs - #6AWG Chatsworth 40162-951 3 C-Type Compression Taps Chatsworth 40163-059 4 3/0 Grounding Conductor (Green) Southwire CU-THHN 5 #6 AWG Bonding Conductor (Green) Southwire Type W Round 270526-8 APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY CA COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.1a COMPLY D.1b COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xx COMPLY xx COMPLY "In 270526-9 SECTION 27 05 33 TELECOMMUNICATIONS RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section. D. Division 26 Raceway and Boxes section for conduit connectors, fittings, and couplings. E. Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for conduit penetrations through rated walls and slabs. F. Vertical Transportation (Elevators, Escalators, etc.) Specifications and/or Codes Requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Drawings are diagrammatic. All bends, boxes, fittings, couplings are not necessarily shown. Supply as necessary to comply with the National Electric Code. B. This Section includes raceways for Audio/Visual, Communications and Security cabling. Types of raceways, boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 3. Rigid metallic conduit (RMC). 4. Rigid non-metallic conduit (RNC) 5. Polyvinyl Chloride conduit (PVC) 6. Surface Raceways 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Junction boxes. 9. Pull boxes. 10. Bushings. 11. Locknuts. 12. Knockout closures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Product Data: This section does not have a "benchmark" product Appendix, thus Contractor shall submit product data for all applicable products as required per Technology Drawings including, but not limited to: 1. Raceways and fittings. 2. Wireways and fittings. 3. Boxes and fittings. 27 05 33-1 C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's written installation instructions for wireway, surface raceway, and nonmetallic raceway products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. In addition to Section 27 05 00 requirements, the following shall apply to this specification section. 1. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/Pub No.'s OS1, OS2 and PUB 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. 3. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W-C 586, "Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies, and Entrance Caps." PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. EMT shall be used for standard device outlet raceway, unless otherwise noted. 2. EMT shall be used for backbone conduit sleeves stubbed through floors. B. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) and Fittings: 1. IMC shall be used for device outlets mounted below 10-ft in high traffic areas such as concourses, loading docks, service tunnels, etc. 2. IMC shall be used for extending service entrance cable from building point of entrance to termination or transition point when the distance exceeds 50 feet. C. Rigid Metallic Conduit (RMC) and Fittings: 1. RMC shall be used for device outlets located in areas exposed to weather/elements. 2. RMC shall be used for device outlets mounted below 10-ft in high traffic areas such as concourses, loading docks, service tunnels, etc. 3. RMC shall be used for extending service entrance cable from building point of entrance to termination or transition point when the distance exceeds 50 feet. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. 1. RNC shall be used for all underground incoming service and/or "campus" backbone conduits to additional buildings. B. Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC) and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material. 1. RNC shall be used for all underground incoming service and/or "campus" backbone conduits to additional buildings. C. Conduit, Tubing and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes and materials complying with manufacturer's published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway. 27 05 33-2 D. Electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT): NEMA TC13 and UL1653. 2.3 CONDUIT BODIES AND FITTINGS A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching covers with gaskets secured with corrosion -resistant screws. B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for threaded raceways. Use conduit bodies conforming to UL51413. C. EMT Conduit Bodies: Use bodies with steel set screw connectors and couplings for interior applications and steel compression gland connectors and couplings for exterior applications. D. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing: Use nonmetallic conduit bodies conforming to UL514B. E. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without O-ring seal. Each connector shall provide a low resistance ground connection between the flexible conduit and the outlet box, conduit or other equipment to which it is connected. F. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of wires without impairing the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC and EMT, larger than 3/a-inch size. G. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or secured to the buildings construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings for rigid steel conduit shall be hot -dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory installed packing and a grounding ring. Expansion fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit shall be of the short type in runs 25-feet (7.6m) or less, and the long type in runs 26 to 80-feet (7.9 to 24.3m). The long type shall be a two piece barrel and piston joint, providing 6-inch (150mm) of the total movement range in 3/a-inch (19-mm)through 6-inch (150mm)" conduit sizes. The short type shall be a one piece, coupling with O-ring, providing 2-inch (50mm) of total movement range in 3/4 to 2-inch (19 to 50mm) conduit sizes. H. Seal Off Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. 2.4 WIREWAYS A. General: Electrical wireways shall be of types, sizes, and number of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, and end caps shall match and mate with wireway as required for complete system. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC, NEMA, ANSI, TIA, and BICSI. B. Wireway covers shall be hinged type. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated on drawings. Two channels shall be used for all locations where power and communications are installed in same surface raceway segment. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway. Provide internal metallic barriers for areas 27 05 33-3 with power and communications sections. �.i B. Surface Metal Raceway: Construct of two piece galvanized steel with snap -on covers, with 9/32- inch mounting screw knockouts in base approximately 8-inches (200mm) on center. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating suitable for painting. Provide raceways of types suitable for each application required. Sizes 13/a-inch H x 43/a-inch W (44mm H x 119mm W). C. Accessories: 1. Couplings for joining raceway sections. 2. Wire clips for conductors. 3. Blank end fittings. 4. Circuit breaker housings for single pole breakers. 5. Device brackets for single or two gang devices. 6. Combination receptacle and communication device outlet covers. 7. Outlet boxes with hubs for conduit connectors. 2.6 FABRICATED MATERIALS - BOXES A. Device Outlet Back -Boxes: Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet -steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes (two -gang, 411/16-inch x 4 11/16-inch 2 1/8-inch deep (120mm x 120mm x 54mm)), including box depths as required, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion - resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. 1 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, ) including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code -compliance option. B. Rain -tight and Weather Proof Outlet Boxes: Weather proof devices shall be provided at all exterior locations and any location susceptible to water and other exterior conditions. Provide corrosion -resistant cast -metal rain -tight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening telecommunications conduit, cast -metal and plastic face plates with spring -hinged watertight covers (polycarbonate) suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion -resistant plugs and fasteners. Watertight cover shall allow for patch cords to be plugged in and sealed while in operation. C. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code -gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. Pull boxes installed in finished spaces must be flush mounted cabinets provided with trim, hinged door and flush latch and lock to match flush mounted panel board trim. Exact size shall meet minimum industry standards based on conduit quantities and stacking arrangement, as indicated in the table below: 27 05 33-4 Conduit Trade Size mm (in) Width mm (in) Length mm (in) Depth mm (in) Width Increase for Additional Conduit mm (in) 27 1 101 4 406 `16 763 51 (2 35 1-1/4 152 G 508 (2Q) 763 76 3 41 1-112 203 8 68627 101 (4) 101 4) 50 2 203 8 914 3G 101 4 127 5 63 (2-1/2) 254 10 1067 42 127 5 152 G 78 3 305 (12) 1220 (48) 127 5 152 `G 91 3-1/2 305 12 1370 54 152 (61 152 G 100 4 381 15 1525 G0 203 ("v) 203 8 D. Exterior junction or pull boxes, flush with grade: 1. Junction or pull box to be mounted flush with grade shall be polymer composite raintight with screw cover lids. Minimum box dimensions shall be 30-inch W x 60-inch L x-24-inch D (750mm x 1500mm x 600mm) or as indicated on the drawings. Exact size shall be provided to meet industry standards based on conduit quantities and stacking arrangement. Covers shall be polymer composite suitable for pedestrian traffic secured to box with stainless steel screws. Box to be furnished with continuous neoprene gasket to seal cover. Conduit entry shall be on side of box with bell ends. E. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion -resistant box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD A. Outdoors: Use the following installation methods: 1. Exposed: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit. 2. Concealed: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit. 3. Underground, Single Run: Rigid non-metallic conduit. PVC coated GRC 90' elbows. 4. Underground, Grouped: Rigid non-metallic conduit. PVC coated GRC 90' elbows. S. Connection to Vibrating Equipment including transformers, pneumatic or electrical solenoid, and motor -operated equipment: Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. B. Indoors: Use the following installation methods: 1. Exposed (below 10 ft. to floor): Intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit. 2. Exposed (above loft. or in electrical room): Electrical metallic tubing. 3. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. 4. Within concrete slabs: electrical non-metallic tubing or rigid non-metallic conduit. Homeruns shall be in conduit. Maximum sizes and locations as approved by the Structural Engineer. 5. Service entrance extension beyond 50-feet: Intermediate metal conduit, rigid metal conduit. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS A. General: Install telecommunications raceways in accordance with manufacturers' written installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, ANSI, TIA, BICSI, and as follows. 27 05 33-5 ( B. Labeling: 1. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. 2. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. C. Clearances: Telecommunications raceway shall be routed to maintain appropriate clearances from potential interfering electrical sources per NEC, NEMA, ANSI, TIA, and BICSI requirements. Provided below are minimum requirements of key components that shall be maintained. For any instances where field conditions do not allow for the minimum clearances, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer so that an acceptable solution can be coordinated. 1. 120V Power Conduits: 6-inches (150mm) 2. 208V and Higher Power: 24-inches (600mm) 3. Lighting System: 12-inches (300mm) 4. Transformers: 48-inches (1200mm) 5. Motors and Fans: 48-inches (1200mm) 6. Other Interfering Sources to be field verified and coordinated by Contractor with Architect and Engineer. D. Unobstructed Cabling Pathways: 1. Raceway installer shall provide conduit sleeves through all walls and continuous segments above inaccessible ceiling spaces to ensure unobstructed cable pathways are provided from each device location back to the appropriate HC. (Refer to Technology Drawings for additional information.) E. Horizontal Distance Limitations: 1. Communications horizontal cabling shall not exceed a total cable length of 295-feet (90m) for the permanent basic link. The channel length shall not exceed 325-feet (100m) when patch cords are installed. 2. Contractor(s) responsible for providing the communications horizontal raceway shall ensure that unobstructed pathway to each device location does not cause cable to exceed 295-feet (90m) length from to the nearest horizontal cross -connect (HQ location. This may require unobstructed pathway to be no more than 250-ft (76m) to accommodate necessary cable slack. Contractor shall bring any distance concerns to the attention of the Architect and Engineer during the bid process and/or at a minimum during the shop drawing process, prior to installation. F. Telecommunications conduits shall maintain large bends and sweeps. Provided below are the ratios for minimum conduit bend radius to conduit size diameter. 1. 2-inches (50mm) and smaller: 6:1 2. Larger than 2-Inches (50mm): 10:1 G. Minimum size of telecommunications conduits is 1-inch (25mm). H. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless indicated otherwise, within finished wall, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6-inches (150mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. I. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 27 05 33-6 J. Complete installation of telecommunications raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways. K. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Electrical and/or Communications specification sections and in accordance with NEC and local authorities' seismic requirements. L. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. M. Protect stub -ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. All elbow penetration through the slab shall be PVC coated rigid metallic conduit Ells. N. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. O. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated. P. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. Q. Raceways embedded in slabs shall only be permitted with the strict written approval of the Structural Engineer and Architect. For bidding purpose, conduit shall not be permitted in slab. R. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. All exposed conduit runs shall be approved by the Architect prior to installing. S. All exposed conduits in public areas shall be painted to match surrounding walls. Verify exact color with the Architect. Painting specified herein shall be provided by others. T. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases, provide yy field bends for parallel raceways. All exposed conduit routing shall be approved by the Architect prior to installing. U. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or ` dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors. Use expansion fittings at building expansion joints. V. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool. W. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside of the box. All conduit connections to junction boxes shall have insulated bushings. 27 05 33-7 r, X. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end M1 bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. -; Y. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc -coated steel or monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave no less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Z. Telecommunications raceways shall have a maximum pulling length of 100 feet and a maximum of two 90' bends or equivalent. A pull -box or junction -boxes shall be provided where necessary to comply with these requirements. AA. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: 1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces, air-conditioned spaces and walk-in coolers. 2. Where required by the NEC. BB. Stub -up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit. Where equipment connections are not made under this contract, install screwdriver -operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor. CC. Flexible connection: Use flexible conduit with a maximum length of 6-feet (3m) for furniture feeds. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate equipment grounding conductor across flexible connections. DD. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit. EE. All underground conduits shall be installed a minimum of 24-inches (600mm) below finish grade or below frost line, whichever is deeper. FF. Telecommunications service entrance cables that extend beyond 50-feet from the building point of entrance shall be in IMC or RMC from the point of entrance to the point of termination without breaks as require by the NEC. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and raceway installation work. C. Provide rain -tight or weather proof covers for all communications device outlets at all interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. 27 05 33-8 r. D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. F. Installing boxes back-to-back in walls shall not be permitted. Provide no less than 12-inches (150mm) of separation. G. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness. H. Do not use round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and unsecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces. I. Fasten telecommunication and electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embedded electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. J. Exterior junction or pull boxes shall be mounted flush with grade, unless noted otherwise or indicated to be above ground on the drawings. Boxes shall be surrounded on all sides with 6 inches minimum of concrete. Top of concrete shall flush with grade. Seal all conduit entries into box with duct seal to prevent entrance of moisture, after conductors are installed. K. Tap and splices, where permitted by these specifications within exterior.junction boxes, shall be performed with an encapsulating watertight splice or tap kit which insulates and moisture seals the connection. Kit shall consist of the appropriate size and type mold, encapsulating resin and end sealing tape. L. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage. M. Outlet back -boxes shall be installed straight on walls to provide a neat appearance of faceplates on finished walls. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Upon completion of installation work, properly ground telecommunications boxes and demonstrate compliance with requirements. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. END OF SECTION 27 05 33-9 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE General Notes: 1. This specification is intended to be performance based, with the expectation that an "end -to -end" solution is provided by one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers (or partnerships) listed below. 2. Products listed below are intended to establish "benchmark" products from one or more of the "pre - approved manufacturers". The listed benchmark products shall be used as a baseline when submitting products from a pre -approved manufacturer that does not have specific products listed. EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - COMMON WORK DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER PART NUMBER SPECIAL RCIMTS HANGER/SUPPORT SYSTEM ARLINGTON As Required FURNITURE FEED MULTI -SERVICE LEGRAND Evolution EFBFF COVER LEGRAND Evolution FPFFTCxx DIVISION LEGRAND Evolution EFBFF-DIV CONCRETE COVER LEGRAND Evolution FP-CTR FLOOR BOX 6-GANG LEGRAND Evolution EFB6 COVER LEGRAND Evolution EFB610xTCxx GANG MODULE LEGRAND Evolution EFB6-MB DIVISION LEGRAND Evolution EFB6-DIV CONDUIT FEED LEGRAND Evolution EFB6-1 1/4 CONDUIT FEED LEGRAND Evolution EFB6S-HUB FLOOR BOX 8-GANG LEGRAND Evolution EFB8 COVER LEGRAND Evolution EFB610xTCxx GANG MODULE LEGRAND Evolution EFB8M DIVISION LEGRAND Evolution EFB8-DIV CONDUIT FEED LEGRAND Evolution EFB10-3/4-1 1/4 CONDUIT FEED LEGRAND Evolution EFB810-2 APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception' following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY 27 05 33-10 A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY CA COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.la COMPLY D.lb COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xc COMPLY xc COMPLY 27 05 33-11 f_ SECTION 27 05 36 CABLE TRAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of cable tray system work is indicated by drawings. Cable trays are defined to include, but not limited to, supports, straight sections, reducers, bends, tees, crosses, elbows, covers, dividers and other applicable accessories. B. Types of cable tray systems required for project include the following: 1. Wire Basket type. 2. Horizontal and Vertical cable runway routed within Communications Rooms is specified in specification section 27 1100. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General Description and Requirements 1. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Product Data: 1. Compliance Matrix: Provide full specification compliance matrix as described in the—§ Specification Response section of this specification section. 2. Warranty Information: Provide all warranty information as described in this specification section for review and approval. 3. Component List: Provide complete submittal component list at the beginning of the submittal package. Component list shall identify each component name, manufacturer, and specific product/part number. All part numbers shall clearly indicate special options, color, accessories, etc. Component list and manufacturer cut -sheets shall be compiled to match the order of each Appendix. 4. Cut -Sheets: Submit manufacturer's cut -sheets on all components listed within this specification and corresponding appendix. All components and parts being used shall be highlighted in color on cut -sheets to distinguish specific product/part numbers, options, colors, accessories, etc. 5. Product Substitutions: These specifications are intended to be performance based, thus all products listed in each respective Appendix 1: Equipment Schedules are "benchmark" products. The Contractor shall include products from one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers as noted in the Appendix. The Contractor may submit (as a proposed alternate s solution) substitute manufacturers and models that may be more cost effective or readily available. All substitutions shall meet or exceed the minimum functional, physical, and technical 27 05 36-1 specifications. Acceptance of such substitutions is at the discretion of the Owner, Architect, and Engineer. Additionally, the requirements of Division 1 Specifications shall apply and may supersede requirements noted herein. C. Shop Drawings and As -Built Drawings shall include: 1. Floor Plans: Provide scaled building floor plan drawings (with current reflected ceiling -plan laver shown) based on architectural background indicating installation of cable tray systems and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies and fittings. Plans shall show accurately scaled components, mounting heights/elevations, and spatial relationships (clearances) to adjacent structure and equipment, including but not limited to, HVAC ductwork, piping, and light fixtures. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate areas with cable tray clearance limitations and/or other cable access limitations for review and approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 2. Details: Submit cable tray support detail drawings indicating installation of cable tray systems and accessories including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice plate connectors, expansion joint assemblies and fittings, and all grounding components. 3. Documentation: Provide submittals and documentation as required by the project manual (in addition to electronic copies) for review or as indicated in Division-1 general conditions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.10 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 27 05 36-2 f : PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 CABLE TRAY SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS d A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide metal cable trays, of types, classes and sizes indicated; with splice plates, bolts, nuts and washers for connecting units; capable of supporting concentrated loads at any given point and maximum deflection of 1-inch (25mm) at full cable load, also indicated below. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces; in compliance with applicable standards; and with the following additional construction features: 1. Wire Basket Type a. Tray Material: ASTM A510 high strength steel wires. b. Cross Rungs: Standard 2-inch (50mm) x 4-inch (100mm) wire mesh pattern. c. Bends and Fittings: 24-inch (600mm) minimum radius. d. Construction: 4-inch (100mm) deep Steel wire side flanges and rounded wire ends. e. Tray Finish: ASTM B 633 Electrozinc (Interior Locations) and ASTM Type 304 L stainless steel passivation per ASTM A380 (Exterior, Wet, and Corrosive Locations). f. Lengths shall not exceed 10'-0" (3.0m). g. Loading Criteria: Cable tray supports shall be provided per manufacturer recommendations to meet the following minimum loads: 1) Point Load Rating: 50-lb (0.23 kN) at any given point. 2) Continuous Load Rating: 50-lb/ft (0.75 kN/m). h. Supports: Cable tray supports shall be provided for each section and/or fitting and shall comply with NEMA VE-2 installation guidelines for maximum distance from support to the end of each section and/or fitting. Aircraft cable shall not be permitted as a means of supporting cable tray. Additionally, cable tray shall not be supported with center mount trapeze supports. Products: See Appendix 1 Equipment Schedule for list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.2 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES A. Provide all necessary cable tray accessories as per manufacturer recommendations including, but not limited to, items described below and or indicated within cable tray details. Products: See Appendix 1 Equipment Schedule for list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. B. Provide all grounding and bonding components including, but not limited to, conductors, jumpers, clamps, etc. as recommended by cable tray manufacturer in order to maintain electrical continuity in the cable tray system. C. Provide dropouts (waterfalls), conduit adapters, hold-down devices and blind ends, as indicated, and as recommended by cable tray manufacturer. Dropouts shall be provided for all cable tray segments that provide a vertical cable transition point (i.e. where cable tray dead -ends into a Communications Room, transitions to vertical cable tray, transitions to horizontal cable tray at a different elevation, etc.). D. Provide pull -strings through any cable tray segment that has limited clearance accessibility, to ensure cables can be installed. Pull -strings shall be provided for each section when cable tray dividers are provided. 27 05 36-3 E. Provide divider strips constructed of metals and finishes which mate and match cable trays as noted. As a minimum, provide two (2) divider strips for all cable tray segments, unless cable tray details indicate more than two. F. Provide "J-hooks"/outboard rungs attached to cable tray for temporary cable routing for all cable tray segments as indicated within the drawings. As a minimum, "J-hooks"/outboard rungs shall be provided for cable segments linking all Service Level Communications Rooms and/or AudioNisual Rooms. Contractor shall ensure that "J-hooks"/outboard rungs can be provided with selected cable tray solution, per manufacturer requirements. G. Provide cable tray covers (where applicable per drawings) constructed of metals and finishes which mate and match cable trays as noted. 2.3 SUPPORTS AND CONNECTORS A. Provide all necessary cable tray support mechanisms as per manufacturer recommendations including, but not limited to, items described below and or indicated within cable tray details. B. Provide cable tray supports and connectors as indicated within cable tray details, including but not limited to, uni-strut, trapeze mount threaded robs, wall mounted cantilever brackets, threaded rod protective sleeves, bonding jumpers, etc. Products: See Appendix 1 Equipment Schedule for list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.4 FIRESTOPPING - UL 1489 A. Provide firestopping pillows and/or bricks as required in all cable tray openings to maintain rating of the wall. Fireproofing shall consist of ready to use, intumescent fibrous material enclosed in a strong polyethylene envelope. Contractor shall assume this is to be included in the cable tray scope of work, unless directed otherwise by the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor. Products: See Appendix 1 Equipment Schedule for list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS A. Install cable trays in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that cable tray equipment complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC 392, and applicable portions of NFPA 70B and NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices. B. All walls where cable tray is installed with wall mounted brackets shall be internally reinforced as necessary at all bracket locations to support cable tray loads. Contractor shall coordinate this with the applicable trades in addition to the Architect and Engineer, prior to installing supports and/or cable tray at these locations. C. Labeling: 1. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. 27 05 36-4 t_: i 2. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. D. Coordinate with other low voltage, electrical, and mechanical work as necessary to properly interface installation of cable tray work with other work. E. Accessibility Clearances: Coordinate and provide cable tray clearances as indicated within the cable tray details and these specifications, to allow for appropriate accessibility for initial and future cable installation. Coordinate location of cable trays with all other trades to ensure clearances are obtained. For any instances where field conditions do not allow for the minimum clearances, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and Engineer so that an acceptable solution can be coordinated. 1. 30-36" W x 6" D Ladder Rung Tray (Minimum Clearances): a. Side Access: 24" clearance on one side b. Top Access: 12-18" clearance above tray for continuous segments. 2. 18-24" W x 6" D Ladder Rung Tray (Minimum Clearances): a. Side Access: 24" clearance on one side b. Top Access: 12" clearance above tray for continuous segments. 3. 12" W x 6" D Ladder Rung Tray (Minimum Clearances): a. Side Access: 18" clearance on one side b. Top Access: 6" clearance above tray for continuous segments. 4. 18-24" W x 4" D Wire Basket Tray (Minimum Clearances): a. Side Access: 24" clearance on one side b. Top Access: 8" clearance above tray for continuous segments. 5. 6-12" W x 4" D Wire Basket Tray (Minimum Clearances): a. Side Access: 18" clearance on one side b. Top Access: 6" clearance above tray for continuous segments. 6. Exceptions: Cable tray segments may have limited clearances at intermittent crossings with structure or MEP systems. The following guidelines shall apply for such cases, provided there is clear access at both sides/ends of the conflict zone: a. For areas where conflict zones span up to an 8'-0" segment of tray, clearances of 6" between the top of the cable tray rail and the structural or MEP system will be permitted b. For areas where conflict zones consist of a beam, duct, conduits, or pipes crossing over a short segment of tray (3'-0" or less), clearances of 2-3" between the top of the cable tray rail and the structural or MEP system will be permitted. C. All other major cable tray conflict zones which may prevent the Contractor from maintaining appropriate cable tray clearances shall be reviewed with the Owner, Architect, and Engineer during the submittal process. F. Electrical Clearances: Telecommunications raceway shall be routed to maintain appropriate clearances from potential interfering electrical sources per NEC, TIA, and BICSI requirements. Provided below are minimum clearance requirements of key components that shall be maintained. 1. 120V Power Conduits: 6-inches (150mm) 2. 208V and Higher Power: 12-inches (300mm) 3. Lighting System: 12-inches (300mm) 4. Transformers: 48-inches (1200mm) 5. Motors and Fans: 48-inches (1200mm) 6. Other Interfering Sources to be field verified and coordinated by Contractor with Architect and Engineer. G. Cable Tray Grounding: 27 05 36-5 1. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 270526. r- 2. Cable trays with powder -coat paint should have coating mask completely removed at factory supplied grounding locations, and be spliced with listed connectors per manufacturer recommendation. 3. Electrically ground cable trays and ensure continuous electrical conductivity of cable tray system in accordance with manufactures instructions. Provide maximum of 1.0 ohms resistance to building ground connection. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a permanent and effective ground. H. Support cable tray per manufacturer recommendations to accommodate the loading criteria as indicated within this specification. I. Complete cable tray installation before starting installation of cables. J. Provide UL listed "Firestopping" for all cable tray penetrations through fire rated walls and slabs according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping". Install E90 certified cable tray for critical circuits, hallways, or in areas of egress as shown in drawings. Refer to Division 7 for additional requirements. K. Wall openings that cable tray passes through that don't require Firestopping per code shall be stopped or sealed to maintain the building envelope. Refer to Architectural specification sections for additional requirements. L. Remove burrs and sharp edges of cable trays, wherever these could possibly be injurious to wiring insulation or jacketing. 3.2 TESTING A. Test cable trays to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections, and to demonstrate compliance with specified maximum grounding resistance. Submit results to Engineer for approval. 3.3 WARNING SIGNS A. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs, either on or in proximity of cable trays, where easily seen by occupants of space, and indicating warning with following wording, "WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY." Provide 1-1/2"-high yellow lettering on black background, of style selected by Architect/Engineer. Temporary signage shall be installed during installation to notify other contractors that the tray shouldn't be used as a walkway. END OF SECTION 27 05 36-6 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE f i General Notes: 1. This specification is intended to be performance based, with the expectation that an "end -to -end" solution is provided by one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers (or partnerships) listed below. 2. Products listed below are intended to establish "benchmark" products from one or more of the "pre - approved manufacturers". The listed benchmark products shall be used as a baseline when submitting products from a pre -approved manufacturer that does not have specific products listed. 3. Pre -approved manufacturers (listed in alphabetical order) include: a. B-Line by Eaton b. Cablofil Legrand c. PW Industries Legrand d. MP Husky Table 1 - Cable Tray (Wire Basket Type) Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number 1 Wire Basket Tray - 4" deep B-Line FT4X--X10 Cablofil Legrand CF105 2 Wire Basket Tray - 6" deep B-Line FT6X--X10 Cablofil Legrand CF150 3 Horizontal / Vertical Bend Fitting Kits B-Line WASHER SPL KIT Cablofil Legrand CE40 4 Cable Tray Drop -Out (Waterfall), Aluminum B-Line DROPOUT Cablofil Legrand DROP OUT KIT 5 Cable Tray Dividers, Aluminum (Straight / Flexible / etc. B-Line 4 IN DIVIDER 6 IN DIVIDER Cablofil Legrand COT 105 Kit COT 150 Kit 6 Cable Tray Grounding Components B-Line GROUND BOLT Cablofil Legrand GNDCL GNDSB 7 Miscellaneous Components (Expansion / Splice plates, etc. as applicable) B-Line WASHER SPL KIT *Others as applicable Cablofil Legrand SWK *Others as applicable 8 Cable Tray Support Components (as applicable) B-Line WB46H, FTBXXCT *Others as applicable Cablofil Legrand FASP, FASU *Others as applicable 27 05 36-7 4 { APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services b the word "Com 1 " followin eachparagraph P P PY P Y g number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY CA COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.1a COMPLY D.1b COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xx COMPLY xx COMPLY 27 05 36-8 SECTION 27 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS, RACEWAYS AND MANHOLES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 3 Concrete D. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section E. Division 27 Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding F. Division 27 Telecommunications Raceways and Boxes G. Division 31 Earthwork 1.2 SUMMARY A. Provide all necessary components including, but not limited to, conduits, manholes and grounding for telecom service entrance from property line to each demarcation/main communications room. B. Drawings are diagrammatic. All bends, fittings, and couplings are not necessarily shown. Supply as necessary to comply with the National Electric Code. C. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all underground service and manholes as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. D. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Product Data: This section does not have a "benchmark" product Appendix, thus Contractor shall submit product data for all applicable products as required per Technology Drawings including, but not limited to: 1. Manholes, Pull Boxes, and Hand holes. 2. Duct bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components. 3. Warning tape and tracer wire. 4. Conduits. 5. Inner -Ducts C. Shop drawings: (__. j 1. Site plan: Provide complete site plan showing all existing and proposed utilities. Manholes, hand holes, and major raceway 2-inches and larger shall be indicated. Shop drawings shall 27 05 43-1 represent final conduit routing and manhole/hand hole placement as coordinated with Service Provider, Civil Engineer, and other applicable trades. 2. Details: a. Duct bank sections: Provide duct bank section drawing for each unique length of trench. b. Manholes, Pullboxes, and Hand holes: Provide details indicating: 1) Conduit size and entry locations 2) Cover design 3) Racking type and locations 4) Grounding details 3. One -Line Drawings: Provide one -line drawings indicating connection to existing site infrastructure. D. Test reports as required for compaction and concrete work in Division 3 and 31. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer qualifications 1. Provide products from manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of communications infrastructure components, including but not limited to, manholes, hand holes, and hardware. 2. Provide products from manufacturers whose products of similar types, capacities, and characteristics have been in satisfactory use in similar type projects for not less than five years. B. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. C. Compaction density test: ASTM D1557. D. Contractor will hire an independent soils laboratory to conduct in place moisture -density tests to insure that all work complies with this specification. 1. Notify Construction Manager or Owner's representative at least 2 weeks prior to anticipated date of testing. 2. Contractor will pay additional cost if work is delayed due to his failure to notify Owner's agent as specified above. E. Comply with all aspects of "Safety Rules & Regulations for Excavation: as promulgated by the state in which excavation will occur. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment and components in factory -fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage. B. Store conduit to avoid warping or deterioration with end caps. C. Store plastic conduit on flat surface protected from direct rays of sun. D. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 27 05 43-2 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. All work shall be reviewed and coordinated with the Construction Manager and/or General Contractor prior to commencing. B. Coordinate installation with Civil, Structural, Electrical, and other trades to eliminate disruption and/or conflict with other systems (paving, curb and gutter, etc.). 1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to submitting a proposal, the Contractor shall inspect the Contract Documents, and shall become fully informed as to laws, ordinances, and regulations affecting the project. The Contractor shall immediately bring to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer's attention, in writing, any existing condition or statute that contradicts, is in conflict with, or negates the Contract Documents. Failure of the Contractor to become fully informed as to all above mentioned items shall in no way relieve the Contractor from any obligations with respect to their proposal. B. The Technology Drawings depict equipment locations and conduit runs in a schematic manner. Field conditions and coordination with related trades may warrant relocations of field devices. No additional compensation will be allowed due to these revisions. fi�:l_i1/�77_�►1111'1 A. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty with a minimum term of 25-years for all structures and components. This warranty shall cover all components including manholes, hand holes, racking, etc. to maintain the specified performance, physical criteria, and applications assurance. Any such components shall be replaced by the Manufacturer at no cost to Owner during this period. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall submit all information and documentation on Warranty. B. A one (1) year warranty on the Work and Compaction shall be provided by the Contractor. If, within one (1) year after the date of final acceptance of the installation or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents or provided by a manufacturer, any of the work or equipment is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly including all parts and labor after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive termination of the contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. Such notice shall be provided by Owner representatives, to be identified, either verbally or in writing. C. Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be construed to establish a shorter period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents or any manufacturer's warranty. The establishment of the time period noted above, after the date of final acceptance or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the work or equipment, and has no relationship to the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to his obligations other than specifically to correct the work or equipment. D. If system operation is not fully restored during the warranty period within two (2) business days, the j Owner reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide on -site manufacturer's service technicians at no additional cost. i' 27 05 43-3 i E. The Owner reserves the right to expand or add to the system during the warranty period using firm(s) _. other than the Contractor for such expansion without affecting the Contractor's responsibilities, provided that the expansion is done by a firm which is an authorized dealer or agent for the equipment of system being expanded. 1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.10 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT SYSTEM A. Duct System: Multiple and single, conduits completely encased in concrete. 1. Separators: Plastic or other non-metallic, non -decaying material. 2. Concrete: 3000 PSI. Conform to Division 3 requirements. 3. Inner -Ducts: Provide (3) inner -ducts in each conduit as indicated on Technology Drawings. B. Pull Wire: No. 9 galvanized iron, or heavy nylon cord, free of kinks and splices. 1. Marked with length every 10'. C. Detectable Warning Tape: 1. Polyethylene plastic warning tape a. Detectible warning tape can be used to provide tracer wire and warning tape only if conduits aren't encased in a concrete duct way. Concrete ductway shall include tracer and non detectible warning tape. b. 6" width and 10mm thick c. Integral wires, foil backing or other means of detection up to 3' deep. d. Tape to be orange in color and read "CAUTION, BURIED COMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW" or as required by local code. D. Non -detectable Warning Tape: 1. Polyethylene plastic warning tape a. 6" width and 10mm thick b. Tape to be orange in color and read "CAUTION, BURIED COMMUNICATIONS LINE BELOW" or as required by local code. E. Tracer Wire: 1. #6 AWG bare copper wire. 2.2 MANHOLES A. Telecommunications Handholes: Sizes as indicated: 1. Concrete: 4500 PSI. Conform to Division 3 requirements. 2. HS-20 rated for traffic rated conditions. 3. Cover and frame: 36" diameter, gray cast iron with machine finished seat for perfect joint between cover and frame. "COMMUNICATIONS" to be stamped on cover. 27 05 43-4 ["I 4. Provide floor drain with grate. 5. Provide accessories per Telecommunication drawings. B. Cable Pulling Irons: Galvanized, mounted on wall. 1. 7/8-inch diameter installed 3" to 9" above the floor and embedded in wall during construction. C. Cable Racks: Galvanized, mounted on wall. 1. Provide minimum (3) cable racks on each long wall with minimum of 8 adjustable hooks; minimum 2 spare hooks on each rack. 2. Insulators: Best quality, high glazed porcelain; provide for each hook. 3. Space racks so each end of splices are supported horizontally. D. Ladder: Galvanized. 1. Each manhole and hand hole to contain its own ladder. E. Sump Pit: 1. Provide 12" diameter by 24" deep sump recess with removable perforated grate. Refer to Division 31 for base course material. F. Grounding: P, 1. Refer to Section 27 05 26 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. V- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES A. Determine exact location of each manhole after careful consideration has been given to location of other utilities, grading, and paving. 1. Do not begin construction until location of each manhole has been reviewed by Architect/Engineer. B. Construct manholes of type indicated in accord with applicable details. 1. Mix, place and cure concrete or set precast unit on non -expansive soil bed in accord with Division 3 and 31 requirements. C. Set frames and cover: 1. Paint exterior with 2 coats asphaltic paint after inspection and before setting. 2. Set top of manhole and/or hand hole minimum 12" below finished grade to allow for soil amendments and planting or roadway surface. Coordinate with Civil Engineer for roadway surface section depth. 3. In paved areas, set top of manhole covers flush with finished surface of paving. 4. In unpaved areas, set top of manhole covers approximately'/z" above finished grade. 5. Where final grades are higher than top of manhole, install sufficient number of courses of grade rings between top of manhole and manhole frame to elevate manhole cover to final grade level. D. Install cable racks, ladder and cable pulling irons. E. Provide ground rods, bonding ribbon, and ground wires per Section 27 05 26. 27 05 43-5 3.2 DUCT BANK A. Form all duct banks in square or rectangular fashion as shown. Install duct spacers per l manufacturer's requirements. B. Pitch conduits a minimum 1:300 down towards manhole and/or handhole and away from building. Slope conduits from a highpoint midway between manholes. C. Provide minimum concrete thickness of 2" between ducts, and 6" on sides, bottom, and top of C _ ` duct bank. D. Install tracer wire in top 2" of concrete encasement. Tracer wire shall be attached to the inside of the manhole near lid with sufficient slack to reach opening. E. Install warning tape 12" above top of duct bank. F. Adjust final slopes on -site to coordinate with utilities and structure. G. Backfill and compaction requirements per Division 31 requirements. H. After installation, clean and swab ducts. I. Install galvanized steel pullwires in spare ducts. Cap empty ducts with screw covers. J. Label conduit at stub -up and manhole penetrations in accordance with Section 27 05 00. END OF SECTION 27 05 43-6 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE NOTE: There is no product number appendix for this section. APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY C.1 COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.1a COMPLY D.1b COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xx COMPLY xx COMPLY 27 05 43-7 SECTION 27 1100 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FIT -OUT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. D. Rough carpentry is specified in a Division 6 section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 271100-1 1.10 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FIT -OUT A. Communications Entrance Cabling Pathways 1. Inner Duct a. Provide (3) 1-1/4-inch (31mm) outside plant rated fiber optic inner ducts in one or more conduits as indicated on the site plan, for incoming Communications service cabling. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers. B. Communications Backboard 1. Plywood Backboard: a. Provide 3/4-inch (19mm) fire retardant, exterior, Marine -grade plywood backboard mounted on communications walls as noted on drawings. b. Plywood shall be painted to match architectural finish (white minimum). C. If plywood is not fire rated then backboard shall be painted with fire resistant paint on all sides to match architectural finish (white minimum). C. Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures 1. General a. Provide Equipment Cabinet and/or Rack types and sizes as shown on Technology Drawings. Refer to specific rack types described below for additional information. b. Cabinets and/or racks shall be completely setup and installed all locations. c. Cabinets and/or racks shall be vertically and horizontally level. d. Cable distribution equipment cabinets and racks shall utilize 19-inch Standard / ETSI wide rack system. Cabinets (if applicable) post depths shall be adjustable. e. Rack Rail Width: 3-inch (75mm). f. Rack Units: 42U (minimum). g. Rack Material: 6061-T6 Aluminum. h. Enclosure and/or Rack Finish: Black Epoxy Powder Coat. i. Rack Mounting Holes: Pre -drilled and Threaded Tap Holes (spacing and diameter) or 3/8-inch (9.5mm) Square Punch with Cage Nuts per TIA standard pattern. j. Vertical Cable Managers: Yes, as described within this specification. ` k. Horizontal Cable Managers: Yes, as described within this specification. 1. Power Strips: Yes, as described within this specification. m. Bonding and Ground. Yes, all cabinets and racks shall be grounded as described within Technology Drawings and specifications. n. Cabinet Enclosure Electric Fan: Include as applicable per specified enclosure. 2. Equipment Racks — 2-post Cable Distribution and Network Type: a. Provide types and sizes as indicated on Technology Drawings. b. Equipment Cabinet and Rack Specifications: 1) Enclosure: None. 2) Rack Type: 2-Post open frame rack, 19-inch TIA Standard. 3) Rack Size: 19" W x 84" H [42U] (483mm x 2100mm). 4) Loading: 1000-lb (450kg). ` J 5) Mounting Type: Bolted to Floor with Neoprene Isolator. 1z 271100-2 Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers. D. Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels 1. All communications cables shall be terminated unless noted otherwise. 2. Cable terminations including wall fields, blocks, and patch panels are specified with in other sections. 3. Refer to 2713 13 — Communications Copper Backbone Cabling, 27 13 23 — Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling, and 27 15 01 — Communications Horizontal Cabling for additional requirements. E. Communications Cable Management 1. General a. Horizontal cable tray shall be mounted around room perimeter and above equipment racks as indicated on drawings. Tray sections shall be offset a minimum of 6-inches (150mm) clear from wall (unless otherwise noted) to allow passage of other systems up wall including risers, backbone, and other distribution. b. Vertical ladder rack shall be placed on wall above riser conduit locations to support tie off of backbone cables. C. Cable Tray sections shall be bonded together for electrical continuity (grounding) and system bonded to telecommunications ground bus (TGB) or electrical ground bus. Ladder rack, hardware, and components shall be UL classified. d. Cable Tray drop -outs shall be provided above all equipment racks and/or cabinets to allow for cable transition to termination panels. 2. Cable Tray — Ladder Type a. Cable racking in Communications Rooms shall be ladder rack with ASTM A513 and A570 structural tubular steel complete with all required mounting hardware and with all fittings and cables needed to form a bonded (grounded). 1) Width: Refer to Technology Drawings. 2) Side rails: 1'h-inch x 3/8-inch (150mm x 9.5mm) 3) Rungs: 9-inches (225mm) on -center 4) Finish: Yellow zinc dichromate. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers. 3. Equipment Rack Vertical Cable Management: a. Provide double -sided, high capacity vertical cable managers on each side and between all equipment racks for horizontal tele/data cables and patch cords. b. Sizes to be provided: 1) 6-inch W by 84-inch H (standard) 2) 10-inch W x 84-inch H (to be used between racks) Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers (, 4. Equipment Rack Horizontal Cable Managers: a. Backbone and Horizontal patch panel cable managers: Provide double -sided horizontal cable managers above, below, and between all patch panels for cables and patch cord management. b. Data Network Switch cable managers: Provide double -sided horizontal cable managers for data network switch patch cord management. The quantity of horizontal cable 271100-3 1- managers provided for data network switches shall equal the quantity provided for horizontal patch panels. Additionally, Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to confirm the exact placement of these cable managers in the equipment racks. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers 5. Wall Field Cable Managers: a. Jumper troughs and cable managers shall be provided along each side and between wall fields or any other wall mounted cable terminals or patch panels. This is to provide adequate support of cables interconnecting wall fields or other wall mounted cable terminals. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers 6. D-Rings: a. D-Rings or equivalent means shall be provided as necessary on backboard to support any horizontal and vertical cables not supported by cable tray or other means. b. Spacing shall not exceed 24-inches (600mm) or cable manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is less. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers F. Communication Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips 1. Vertical Power Strips a. Each equipment cabinet shall be installed with (2) vertical power strips that have multiple power outlets to connect equipment within cabinet. b. Power strips shall have a cord with plug and shall be connected to specific receptacles on dedicated circuits. C. Power strips shall be connected to different power sources or UPS wherever possible. d. Provide mounting brackets per cabinet and/or power strip manufacturer recommendations to properly mount power strips within cabinet. e. There may be various power strip types and configurations used on this project. Refer to Technology Drawings and product list for additional requirements. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers 2. Horizontal Power Strips a. A minimum of (1) horizontal power strip shall be provided for each equipment rack location. b. Power strips shall have a cord with a plug and shall be connected to specific receptacles on dedicated circuits. C. There may be various power strip types and configurations used on this project. Refer to drawings and product list for additional requirements. Products: See Appendix 1: Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturers' part numbers G. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) 1. Each Communications Room shall be installed with a dedicated telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB) and bonded to the telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB). I 271100-4 t t 2. Each Equipment Cabinet, Equipment Rack, Ladder Rack or Wire Basket Tray, Conduit Sleeves, and other metallic components etc. shall be individually bonded and grounded to TGB. Overhead Ladder Rack or Basket Tray may have a single grounding connection to the ground bus bar, but shall have grounding jumpers provided between each segment (as required) for tray that does not have connectors which are UL listed for grounding. 3. Refer to Section 27 05 26 — Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding for additional requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Equipment Cabinet and/or Rack Installation: 1. Cabinets and racks shall be vertically and horizontally level. 2. Provide a junction plate at top of equipment rack and required cable runway to attach rack to cable runway around the perimeter of the Communications room. Junction plate must be fastened to frame without using "J" hooks so that no equipment space is lost. 3. The completed equipment rack will be affixed to the floor using drop -in anchors and 5/8-inch zinc -plated hex bolts, split and flat washers. 4. All equipment and components noted in this section and drawings shall be provided and completely setup and installed. This includes but not limited to Cabinets and Racks, Cable Management and Ladder Rack, Communication Wall Fields and Patch Panels, and Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips. 5. All equipment shall be generally installed per drawings and field coordinated with current conditions and other trades. The final locations shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to installation. No additional cost submitted by contractor shall be incurred by Owner due to Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement. C. Drip Pans: 1. Drip Pans: Where possible to run mechanical piping elsewhere, do not run mechanical piping directly above technology work which is sensitive to moisture. If no other options exist and after confirmation review with Engineer and Owner, provide drip pans under mechanical piping, sufficient to protect technology work from dripping. 2. Locate pan immediately below piping, and extend a minimum of 6" on each side of piping and lengthwise 18" beyond equipment being protected. 3. Fabricate pans 2" deep of reinforced sheet metal with rolled edges and soldered or welded seams; 22 gauge galvanized steel. Provide 3/a" copper drainage piping from pan to nearest floor drain or similar suitable point of discharge, and terminate pipe as an open -sight drainage connection. 4. Coordinate work with MEP Contractor. 5. Insulate bottom of pan and drainage pipe as directed by Engineer. D. Labeling: 1. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. 2. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 271100-5 END OF SECTION �.1 271100-6 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE General Notes: 1. This specification is intended to be performance based, with the expectation that an "end -to -end" solution is provided by one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers (or partnerships) listed below. 2. Products listed below are intended to establish "benchmark" products from one or more of the "pre - approved manufacturers". The listed benchmark products shall be used as a baseline when submitting products from a pre -approved manufacturer that does not have specific products listed. 3. Pre -approved manufacturers (listed in alphabetical order) include: a. APC b. Chatsworth -CPI c. CommScope d. Hoffman e. Middle Atlantic f. Ortronics g. Panduit Table 1- Equipment Cabinets, Racks, and Accessories Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer; Part Number 1 2-post Equipment Rack (6-inch Channel) Chatsworth -CPI 66353-703 CommScope 760 082 495 Ortronics OR-MM6706 2 2U Horizontal Cable Manager, Double Sided (with covers) CommScope Systimax HTK-DS-19-2U Ortronics MM6HM6D2RU Panduit WMP1E 3 6-inch wide Vertical Cable Manager, Double Sided (with doors) CommScope Systimax VCM-DS-84-6 Ortronics OR-DVMS706 Panduit NRV6 and (2) NRD6 4 10-inch wide Vertical Cable Manager, Double Sided (with doors) CommScope Systimax VCM-DS-84-10 Ortronics OR-DVMS710 Panduit NRV10 and (2) NRD10 5 Horizontal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) APC AP9563 Eaton Submit for approval 6 Vertical Power Distribution Unit (PDU) APC AP7563 Eaton Submit for approval 271100-7 Table 2 - Raceway and Accessories Item Part Name/Description Manufacturer Part Number 1 4 x 4 Fireproofing Cable Pathways EZ Path EZD 44 2 XX-inch Ladder Rack Type Cable Tray (Black Powder Coat Finish) Chatsworth -CPI 11252-7xx CommScope 760 085 647 3 Ladder Rack Triangular Support Bracket Aluminum XX-inch Wide Chatsworth -CPI 11312-7xx CommScope 760 084 095 4 Ladder Rack to Equipment Rack Support Chatsworth -CPI 10595-712 Brackets CommScope 760 084 053 5 12-inch Ladder Rack Radius Drop Out Chatsworth -CPI 12100-712 (Cross Member) CommScope 760 083 956 6 12-inch Ladder Rack Radius Drop Out Chatsworth -CPI 12101-702 (Stringer Member) CommScope 760 083 931 7 Ladder Rack Butt -Splice Kit Chatsworth -CPI 11301-701 CommScope 760 083 899 8 Ladder Rack Junction Splice Kit Chatsworth -CPI 11302-701 CommScope 760 084 046 9 Equipment Grounding Components Chatsworth -CPI 40164-001 CommScope 760 109 214 271100-8 SECTION 2713 13 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER BACKBONE CABLING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections. B. Architectural, Electrical, and Technology Drawings. Other systems drawings may apply. C. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. D. Rough carpentry is specified in a Division 6 section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.7 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.9 SPECIFICATION RESPONSE A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. 1.10 DEFINITIONS 271313-1 t A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. PART 2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2.1 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER CABLING SYSTEM A. Topology: 1. The Communications Copper Backbone Cabling will be an industry standard physical star topology with high pair count copper cabling interconnecting each Intermediate Communications (IC) Room to the Copper Main Cross -Connect (MC) location. 2. For conditions where backbone cable is provided to non -communication room locations, all cabling topology shall follow the same requirements and originate from the MC unless noted otherwise. 3. All cable splices shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer. This includes those shown on drawings and/or proposed by Contractor. 4. Cable splices are only acceptable as noted on the drawings and must be approved by Owner, Architect, and Engineer. 5. Cable splices are only intended where differing cable types are joined and/or multiple smaller cables are joined to a larger backbone feeder cables. 6. Splices are not acceptable to extend cables of inadequate length. 7. Refer to drawings for additional requirements. B. General Requirements 1. All cable and terminations shall meet the minimum Performance and Criteria listed in specification below and on drawings, in accordance with TIA-568-C.2. 2. Cable requirements including cable types, quantities and pair / strand counts are specified on the drawings. 3. All cables shall have the appropriate fire spread rating per building codes, industry standard, and Underwriters Laboratory (UL/cUL) including plenum (CMP/OFNP/OFCP), riser (CMR/OFNR/OFCR), etc. The contractor shall verify the appropriate cable is being used for application it is installed. 4. Any cable routed below grade shall utilize specific water block construction. Copper cables generally use gel -filled compound to achieve this rating. The contractor is required to submit a solution wherever this condition exists regardless of whether noted on drawings. 5. Underground rated cable that doesn't carry a suitable indoor building cable rating per building code and UL, shall not be routed more than 50-ft (15m) inside the building. Cable shall be spliced or terminated as appropriate and noted on drawings. 6. All armored and/or metallic cable sheaths shall be bonded to Telecommunications Ground Bus (TGB). C. Performance and Criteria 1. General Copper Backbone Cabling Requirements: (as applicable per drawings) a. Cable Rating: } 1) Outside Plant Underground w/ Water Block 2) Riser Rated 3) Riser/ARMM 4) Plenum Rated b. Cable Construction: 1) Construction: Unshielded Twisted Pair 2) Medium: Solid Annealed Copper i _`} C. Length Limitations: 2600-feet (800m) for telecommunications , 27 13 13 - 2 i d. Physical Specification: 1) Standard Cable Sizes: 25, 50,100, 200, 300, 400 and 600-pairs. 2) Conductor Size: 24 AWG e. Compliances: Refer to respective cables types in section 2.2. f. Electrical Specifications: 1) Characteristic Impedance: 100 Ohms 2) Cat.3 Frequency: 1-16 MHz 3) Cat.5 Frequency: 1-100 MHz g. Temperature: 1) CMP Operating and storage: -4 to +140F (40 to +60C) 2) OSP Operating and storage: -40 to 158F (40 to +70C) h. Pulling Tensions (max): 25-lb (11 kg). i. Transmission Performance (min.) 1) Refer to tables below for each applicable cable type. 2. Category 3 Telecommunications a. Transmission Performance (min.) 1) Permanent Link Frequency Insertion NEXT MHz Loss dB dB 1.0 3.5 40.1 4.0 6.2 30.7 8.0 8.9 25.9 10.0 9.9 24.3 16.0 13.0 21.0 2) Channel 3) Win -In s Frequency Insertion NEXT MHz Loss d6 dB 1.0 4.2 39.1 4.0 7.3 29.3 8.0 10.2 24.3 10.0 11.5 22.7 16.0 14.9 19.3 271313-3 4) Assembled Patch Cord a) Use Category 5E requirements if patch cords are used rather than cross - connect iumpers. y�y-� ►��yy� �Q /�/� jjSO���� Yipp �5yy��� `..� - a.�.; � �, - s,-ram` ----------- Frequency 2 m Cord 5 m Cord 10 m Cord Return MHz NEXT d6 NEXT d6 NEXT d6 Loss dB 1.0 65.0 65.0 65.0 19.8 4.0 62.3 61.5 60.4 21.6 8.0 56.4 55.6 54.7 22.5 10.0 54.5 53.7 52.8 22.8 16.0 50.4 49.8 48.9 23.4 20.0 48.6 47.9 47.1 23.7 25.0 46.7 46.0 45.3 24.0 31.3 44.8 44.2 43.6 23.0 62.5 39.0 38.5 38.1 20.0 100.0 35.1 34.8 34.6 18.0 rAttenuation: per 100 meters (328-feet) @20 C = Horizontal Cable Attentuation + 20% due to Stranded Conducts 2.2 CABLE REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. The cables shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for each respective cable type based on TIA-568-C.2 equivalent cable rating. 2. Refer to Technology Drawings for all cable types, quantities and pair / strand counts. B. Cat. 3 Plenum Rated - Telecommunications Cables 1. Application: Building backbone and riser installation within duct, conduits or cable trays telecommunications backbone cable. 2. Construction: a. Insulation: Flame retardant semi -rigid PVC. b. Shield/Sheath: None. C. Filling Compound: None. d. Jacket: Flame retardant PVC. 3. Color: White. 4. Compliances: TIA-568-C.2, NEC/CEC Type CMP Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 1 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. 2.3 TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Wiring terminals shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for each respective cable type, based on TIA-568-C.2 equivalent cable ratings. 2. Provide all necessary wiring terminals, jumper troughs, protector panel, ground wire and bonding to building ground, and plug in protectors (as applicable). 3. Temperature rating (unless noted otherwise): a. Operating: +14 to +140 °F (-10 to +60°C). b. Storage: -40 to + 158 OF (40 to +70 °C). 2713 13 - 4 B. Protector Panel and Building Entrance Terminal 1. General: a. All copper service entrance pairs serving the building shall be terminated on a Protector Panel and Building Entrance Terminal. b. All copper cable pairs routed to the exterior or routed to locations outside of building footprint shall be terminated on a Protector Panel at each end. 2. Type: 195-Type. 3. Mounting Configuration: Wall Mounted. 4. Protection: Ground Fault and Sneak Current. r' 5. Size: 100-Pair (and as required). 6. Cable Interface: a. Input: 110-Type Wiring Block or RJ21X Connector. b. Output: 110-Type Wiring Block or RJ21X Connector. 7. Protectors: Gas Discharge Tube (or Solid State) 5-Pin Plug In Protector (PIP). 8. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA: Category 3 b. UL and cUL Listed C. FCC Part 68 Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 2 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. C. RJ45-Type Patch Panel 1. General: a. This wiring terminal shall meet the minimum requirements noted in Performance and Criteria Section for Category 5E. b. Provide all necessary wiring terminals, horizontal cable manager, protector panel, ground wire and bonding to building ground, and plug in protectors. C. Provide double -sided horizontal cable manager above and below each patch panels. d. For Cat. 3 cable, terminate 1-pair per RJ45 jack on Pins #4/5. Some applications may require additional pairs. The 251' pair of every cable bundle shall be terminated on Pins #3/6 on patch panel port 24. Exact requirements shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work. e. For Cat. 5 cable, terminate 4-pairs per RJ45 jack per T568B standard termination. Exact requirements shall be coordinated and approved with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to initiating any work. f. Specific communication device and outlet types shall be grouped together on patch panel plus 20% spare jacks be added within grouping. 2. Type: RJ45-Type. 3. Mounting Configuration: 19-inch Rack. 4. Size: 48-port (provide as required to terminate all cable). 5. Cable Interface: a. Input: 110-Type (back). b. Output: RJ45-Type (front). 6. Electrical Specifications: a. TIA-568-C.2: Category 5E b. Insulation Resistance: 500 MegaOhms (minimum). C. Current Rating: 1.5A @68 OF (20 °C). d. Dielectric Withstand Voltage: 1000 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum), contact -to -contact and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60Hz (minimum) to exposed conductive surface. e. UL and cUL Listed f. FCC Part 68 271313-5 7. Plug Requirements: a. Retention Force: 30-lb (133N). b. Insertion Life: 750 minimum. c. Plug/Jack Contact Force: 0.22-1b (100g). Products: See Appendix 1: Approved Equipment Schedule Table 2 for a list of approved manufacturer's part numbers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. B. Labeling: 1. The final labeling scheme shall be coordinated with Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to finalizing and initiating any work. A sample scheme shall be submitted for approval. 2. Each cable, wiring block, patch panel, and termination shall be identified at the Main Cross - connect (MC), at the Intermediate Cross -connect (IC), and at each station termination. 3. Refer to Specification Section 27 05 00 for additional requirements that shall be fulfilled as part of this specification section. C. Telecommunications Testing: 1. All communications copper backbone cabling and pairs shall be tested for electrical continuity and wire map. 2. All cabling will be test/certified for conformance to the TIA-568-C.2 Category 3 and Category 5 specifications (as applicable) using Level 2 test equipment in accordance with TIA-568-C.2. 3. Cable tests will be per industry standard and also include the following: a. Cable Length b. Attenuation C. NEXT d. Characteristic Impedance e. Mutual Capacitance f. Resistance g. Noise h. Wire Map 4. Five (5) Printed test results shall be submitted on disc and printed copies by the Contractor for approval by Owner, Architect, and Engineer. END OF SECTION 271313-6 APPENDIX 1: EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE General Notes: 1. This specification is intended to be performance based, with the expectation that an "end -to -end" solution is provided by one of the "pre -approved" manufacturers (or partnerships) listed below. 2. Products listed below are intended to establish "benchmark" products from one or more of the "pre - approved manufacturers". The listed benchmark products shall be used as a baseline when submitting products from a pre -approved manufacturer that does not have specific products listed. 3. Pre -approved manufacturers (listed in alphabetical order) include: a. Belden b. Berk-Tek / Leviton c. CommScope (Systimax) d. General / Panduit e. Superior Essex / Ortronics 1 25-pair Category 3 Plenum Rated Cable General Cable 2131505 2 Category 5E Modular Patch Panel - 48-port Panduit Submit for approval 271313-7 APPENDIX 2 — SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE MATRIX TEMPLATE Indicate compliance of the proposed equipment and/or services by the word "Comply" following each paragraph number. Indicate an exception to the requirement by the word "Exception" following the applicable paragraph number. Should the proposed equipment and/or services not entirely comply with the requirements specified, but ultimately achieve the intent, the Bidder shall explain fully the extent, or lack thereof, of compliance for the applicable equipment and/or services proposed. Instances where there is no indication of compliance or exception shall be considered non -compliant. Contractor shall submit Compliance Matrix with the Bid Proposal AND at the time of Product Data submittal (as indicated previously in this specification) so that a complete system submittal reviewed can be performed. Contractor shall use the following template to create a full Compliance Matrix for each specification section. COMPLIANCE EXPLANATION PART 1 1.1 A COMPLY B EXCEPTION Note clarifications and/or reason for exception here. C COMPLY 1.2 A.1 COMPLY A.2 COMPLY B COMPLY C.1 COMPLY C.2 COMPLY D.la COMPLY D.lb COMPLY D.2a COMPLY xx COMPLY xx COMPLY 271313-8